1

Ethiopian Electric Utility (EEU)

Request for Bids
Procurement of Design, Supply, and Installation of
MV Distribution Network for Eighteen (18) towns in
Oromia ,Afar, Somali, Sidama ,Southwest Ethiopia
Regions under Power Sector Reform Investment and
Modernization Project (PRIME-1) in Ethiopia.
(Two-envelope with rated criteria)
Phase I package II:- Eighteen (18) towns in Oromia ,Afar, Somali, Sidama
,Southwest Ethiopia Regions(Lot 1, Lot 2)
RFB No : ET-EEU-416586-CW-RFB
Project: Power Sector Reform Investment and Modernization in Ethiopia
(PRIME I)
Employer: Ethiopian Electric Utility (EEU)
Country: Ethiopia
Issued on: February 20, 2025
Vol-2 (Section VII)

PRIME I Distribution Network Upgrading Strengthening and Modernization Project in Eighteen Towns.( Lot 1
- Holeta , Fitche, Legetafo,Weliso, Shambu , Agaro and Batu Towns; Lot 2- melka werer, Melka Sedi, Hartishek
,Kebribeyah ,Shinilee, Togochale Aleta wendo , Yirgalem , Sawula , Bonga, Tepi )
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 2

PART 2 - Employer’s Requirements

PRIME I Distribution Network Upgrading Strengthening and Modernization Project in Eighteen Towns.( Lot 1
- Holeta , Fitche, Legetafo,Weliso, Shambu , Agaro and Batu Towns; Lot 2- melka werer, Melka Sedi, Hartishek
,Kebribeyah ,Shinilee, Togochale Aleta wendo , Yirgalem , Sawula , Bonga, Tepi )
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 3

Section VII - Employer’s Requirements

1. Scope of Supply of Plant and Installation Services by the Contractor 3

1.1. General 3
1.2. Objectives of Rehabilitation 3
1.3. Project Financing 4
1.4. Brief Scope of Bid 4
1.5. Structure of the Scope of Works 6
1.6. Detail design
1.7. Supply of Items 13
1.8. Installation of Items 14
1.9 Power shut down required for construction and installation activities 25
1.10 Removal of existing network 25
1.11 Methodology of handing over scrap material 26
1.12 Equipment Designation 26
1.13 Quantity of works to be executed 28
1.14 Additional Materials 41
2 Error! Bookmark not defined.
2.1 Service Conditions and Environmental Data 44
2.2 System Condition Requirements 45
2.3 Design and Construction Parameters 46
2.4 Packing, Shipping and Storage General Rules 49
2.5 Additional Specific Requirements 51
2.6 Erection tools for the use of the Employer 53
2.7 Bid Submittal Requirements 53
2.8 Quality Management System 56
2.9 Technical Specifications: Materials & Equipment 61
Product 1 – MV Surge Arresters 61
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 4

Product 2 - POLE MOUNTED MV DROP OUT FUSES 69

Product 3 – Distribution UG Aluminium Power Cables 80
Product 4 – Power Cable Joints and Terminations 91
Product 5– Power Cable Accessories 97
Product 6 - Fittings 100
Product 7 – Preformed Ties 103
Product 8 – MV Insulators 106
Product 9 - Covered Conductors 118
Product 10 – LV Aerial Bundled Cable system 124
Product 11 – Concrete Poles 134
Product 12 - Galvanized Steel Cross arms 144
Product 13 - Danger and Identification Plates 147
Product 14 - Earthing Materials 151
Product 15 - Cable Warning Tape 156
Product 16 - Cable Ducts 158
Product 17 - Cable Tiles 160
Product 18– LV distribution Box with MCCB 162
Product 19 – MV Auto-Recloser 174
Product 20 -Three Phase Pole Mounted Distribution Transformers 183
Product 21 - 15KV SMART OVERHEAD LOAD-BREAK SWITCHES 213
2.10 Overhead Distribution System Design 242
2.11 Erection of MV
2.12 Underground Distribution Cable Design and Construction 277
2.13 Cable System Installation Design & Methods 279
3 Route Drawings 294
4 Environmental and Social (ES) requirements 295
5 Contractor’s Representative and Key Personnel 310
6 Forms and Procedures 312
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 5

1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY OF PLANT AND INSTALLATION SERVICES BY

THE CONTRACTOR
General
This contract forms part of the Distribution Network Upgrading Strengthening and
Modernization in Seventy Two Towns;

Lot 1- Holeta , Fitche, Legetafo,Weliso, Shambu , Agaro and Batu Towns; Design , supply,
installation on site, testing and commissioning of MV Overhead line & Under Ground cables,
Installation of new distribution transformers, rehabilitation of exiting Transformers and connecting
with the existing loads, removal of existing (replaced) networks.

Lot 2- Melka Werer, Melka sedi, Hartishek ,Kebribeyah ,Shinilee, Togochale, Aleta wendo ,
Yirgalem , Sawula , Bonga, Tepi Towns; Design , supply, installation on site, testing and
commissioning of MV Overhead line & Under Ground cables, Installation of new distribution
transformers, rehabilitation of exiting Transformers and connecting with the existing loads,
removal of existing (replaced) networks.

Objectives of Rehabilitation
The objectives of rehabilitation are:

• to upgrade and strengthen MV existing distribution networks of eighteen (18) urban towns.

• to address problems with infrastructure state, supply quality, voltage regulation, capacity
and losses of the distribution network
• to increase the capacity of the existing distribution network,
• to improve the reliability of the electricity supply
• to reduce distribution technical losses
• to improve voltage profile of the network,
• to connect electricity for new settlement area, commercial and industrial areas
• to connect more customers including those far away from the existing distribution network

The project will thus result in increased economic activities and enable to sustain economic growth
in the first phase thirty-four towns of the seventy-two total towns. In order to meet these objectives
the following electrical network rehabilitation and enhancement work is taken up under this project.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 6

• The Contractor will reinforce/replace the MV network to enable it to meet the anticipated
demand in the next fifteen years by collecting the necessary data,
• Reconfigure the network if necessary to improve the network capabilities for better control
& operational efficiency.
• Replace /rehabilitate /add new distribution transformers and other network components

Project Financing

This Project is financed by the World Bank under IDA credit No. IDA V5020. The project bidding
document is developed by Ethiopian Electric Utility (EEU). The consultant will also be responsible
for supervising together with the EEU project implementing unit (PIU).

Brief Scope of Bid

The Scope of works for which bidders are invited is Design, Supply, and Installation of MV
Distribution Network contract is Design, Supply, and Installation of MV Distribution Network and test
and commissioning for Network strengthening for improved Reliability of Power Supply in
Holeta , Fitche, Legetafo,Weliso, Shambu , Agaro ,Batu ,Melka Werer, Melka sedi, Hartishek
,Kebribeyah ,Shinilee, Togochale ,Aleta wendo , Yirgalem , Sawula , Bonga, Tepi towns. The
detailed works of the network will be clarified and confirmed during the design and approval
stage.

The Contract shall comprise:

Providing clearance for all working areas (i.e. Overhead line route, underground cables, etc.) as
necessary conducting the check-survey, investigate the soil at sites, design: ensure quality through
quality assurance management, manufacture, supply, delivery to site, unloading, erection, testing
at site, commissioning and providing as built drawings, complete in every respect and suitable for
reliable operation in the respective environmental and climatic conditions, including and/or
adjustment of defective material and workmanship for duration of the Defects Liability period.
The Works to be carried out are described in the Scope of Works, in the Technical Specifications
and Price Schedules (BOQ). All work not expressly called for in the Specification and/or Schedules
but deemed necessary for the completeness and proper supply, erection, operation and maintenance
of the Works shall be performed and furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 7

Employer until operational acceptance of the network is obtained for duration of the Defects
Liability period.

Extent of Works
The Contractor is responsible for the scope of the work detailed below:

• Detailed field survey using appropriate instruments,

• Load flow analysis, relay setting and short circuit analysis for both current and next fifteen
years,
• Engineering drawings (plant and profile drawings, route line drawings and other required
drawings) for the work to be executed,
• Sag and Tension calculation
• Provide the list & profile of materials and the equipment required to execute the works
contemplated in the project,
• Detailed design & manufacture of goods and equipment required for work as per client’s
technical specifications and technical schedules herein,
• Conduct inspection, testing, packing for export, shipment, insurance, unloading, delivery
to site of the required equipment and materials,
• Proper Storage of materials, to ensure safety and free from any damage and Transport of
the materials to the workplaces,
• Execute of the envisaged works in the project including site testing and commissioning as
per works technical specifications,
• Dismantling/demolition work, replacement activity with proper handover of replaced
equipment (such as transformers) and materials (such as cables) to the nearest EEU
warehouse.
• Warranty for a period shall be as mentioned in Section-VIII (Particular Conditions) of the
bid document.
• Prepare project completion report and hand over documentation – as built drawings
including GPS locations in Hard Print copy and Electronic Copy, updated digital network
map ( in GIS format).
• The design result of actual networks shall be submitted to employer/Consultant for any
purpose in hard copy as well as in digital form that can be used for other studies,
• Handing over the works to the employer for taking into commercial service
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 8

Types of Works
The important components of this project are indicated below,

• Walk through survey of the electrical network in the project area from the preliminary maps
provided by the employer along with this bidding document to erect new MV network to
replace the existing lines and add new network as needed,
• Upgrading conductor Size (Sq.mm) of MV lines as per approved design plan
• Installation of MV Underground cables at the identified locations,
• Installation of Auto reclosure and Sectionalizer
• Erection of Load Break Switch in MV network,
• Installation of New Distribution Transformers
• Rehabilitation/Upgrading of existing Transformers as necessary
• Carrying out of all ancillary works necessary for completion of the works.
• Dismantling, demolition and proper handover to the nearest EEU store.
• Remedying of defects during the liability period specified under the contract
• Supplying Operation and maintenance manuals of the project

Structure of the Scope of Works

This scope of works is designed to be read in conjunction with the Schedule of Bill of quantities
and prices (BOQ) and specifications. It explains/clarifies the content of the items in the BOQ. This
scope of works is subdivided into the main sections as follows:

• Detail Design
• Supply of items including spares,
• Installation of Services including load connection, test and commissioning,

Detail design
Design comprises survey activities and engineering design.

Survey Activities
The survey activities are designed to have several components as follows:

• Survey of existing MV networks including distribution transformers, and other equipment,

updating network maps select proposed routes for new MV lines,
• Identify locations for the proposed MV equipment.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 9

• Identify locations of new and upgraded distribution transformers.

The survey works shall start in order to provide feedback of the proposed plan and an initial review
of the methodology. The contractor is expected to prepare its methodology for the survey and
engineering works and submit with its bid.
In more detail the works to be carried out is inclusive but not limited to the following:

Survey of Existing 15kV/33kV network

The existing MV network under the scope will be surveyed to update the existing MV network
with the line parameters to use for digital design and MV maps.
The results of the survey will provide updated MV network map under the scope, as it is existing
on the ground and identify the

• The line to be replaced /Upgraded and

• Transformers to be rehabilitated/Upgraded
• Any other switching equipment like Load Break Switch

In addition, surveying the location of poles will be carried out according to the following
constraints and rules and other applicable standard practices

• Compliance with maximum spans of the different types of poles

• Respect of minimum clearances between conductors and ground taking into account
cultivated areas, and plantations
• Respect of minimum clearances between conductors and traffic ways, roads, railway lines,
etc.
• Respect of minimum clearances between conductors and buildings taking in to account the
maximum inclination of conductors under wind conditions
• Horizontal distance between conductors of the line and of other crossed lines

A methodology will be developed to classify the condition in terms of importance /urgency. This
will identify the work that will be undertaken by the contractor as part of this contract.

Identify locations of New – Switching devices

Survey and design to identify and locating new Auto reclosures and sectionalizer, load break
switches and fault passage indicators that will be installed in the MV network under the scope of
the project. The following considerations shall be taken during the location identification work:
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 10

• Consider identifying the location of autoreclosers to be installed on the outgoing lines from
towns to nearby villages. These autoreclosers are used to protect the downstream network
from unnecessary interruption caused by any fault that happens out of the cities.
• Consider identifying locations for Auto reclosure and line sectionalizers integrated for
switching operation to isolate faults happening within the network. These devices
(autorecloser and line sectionalizers) will be connected in a way to communicate and
coordinate in order to isolate faulty branches of MV lines/networks and automatically
restore services among the healthy part of the network.
• Consider identifying the location of load break switches , fault passage indicators and
section switches design parameters, considerations and preliminary designs.

The contractor shall produce and submit the drawings with the route clearly marked.

Survey of Routes for new MV Lines

New MV routes have been identified following a brief inspection. The proposed MV routes will
be investigated and alternatives may be considered. The surveys could be undertaken together with
suitable EEU staff to assist in the route identification. All the documentation (drawings) for the
applications will be produced for the acquisition of required way leaves. The way leaves
application will be carried out by the contractor and will be assisted by EEU.
The work to be carried out is inclusive but not limited to the identification of the route and position
of poles, line route survey and necessary drawings. The surveyed route should be cleared from the
safeguard side before any design approval as per ESMP. Please refer to the EHS section.
Once the routes have been approved the contractor shall undertake the installation works which
include pegging and marking and it is covered under the installation works for the overhead lines.
The route will include both the Overhead line and the Underground cables.
The route plan will include proper drawings for the identification of MV Line crossings across
road, rivers, canals, Railway lines, other electrical Lines and plan the crossings as per rules of
appropriate authority.
The deliverables will be

• the required drawings for the identification to obtain the way leaves from the authority and
• Once the clearance has been received the required drawings and pegging for the installation
as described in the installation specification.
• Identify locations of new and rehabilitated Distribution Transformers
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 11

The contractor shall identify during the course of the survey the positions of the installation of new
distribution Transformers, pole mounted and ground mounted. The contractor shall also identify
the locations of the transformers to be rehabilitated if these locations need to be at a different place
than the existing Distribution Transformers to be rehabilitated.
The output will provide the required drawings to ensure that the necessary way leaves are obtained
from the local authority and the drawings for the installation records for the distribution
transformers.

Identification of locations for equipment

The contractor shall also identify the optimal location of Sectionalisers, Autoreclosure and Load
Break Switch.
The outputs shall be as per the immediately above item.

GPS Survey Requirements

GPS Survey of MV shall comprise all items mentioned under survey will constitute a single survey
and the contractor will have to advise of this methodology to achieve all survey requirements.
Distribution Network Map showing physical disposition and configuration of network.

GPS Survey
The activities to be performed under sub-task are listed below.

• Perform survey of MV using Differential handy GPS (Global Positioning Technology).

Base station and rovers used for survey shall be survey grade and shall provide minimum
1 meter accuracy after differential correction. The bidder shall provide in the bid response
Make, Type, Model and number of instruments proposed to be used for survey, with
technical literature on instruments.
• Capture the spatial position of every Pole, Distribution Transformer, Sub-station and other
equipment by walking along the MV network with a GPS Rover.
• Collect the attribute data, while surveying. The contractor shall collect and provide
information about the current condition/status and typical attribute data listed below.
o Line: Conductor Type; Conductor length (segment), cross section, Phase ,&
conductor type; Type of support; Configuration, Physical condition/Status &
thermal limit of the conductor
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 12

o Distribution Transformer: Capacity; Percentage of impedance; MV protection; LV

protection; Number of LV feeders; LV feeder protection; Transformer Mounting,
Loading condition (will measure 24 hr. peak load data). Status /condition, Perform
differential correction on spatial data captured.
• Collect the data for substation capacity of the power transformer capacity, breaker rating,
feeders loading data, relay Protection setting, short circuit rating, Capacity and
specifications of the MV switchgears and others related data for detail design ., etc., and
then digitize them.
• Import the survey data into AutoCad/other design software application package and create
a digital map of the network.
• Print Network maps to the appropriate scale and submit a hard copy for approval by the
Engineer.
• Resubmit Map incorporating all comments to be provided by the consultant

Design Documentation
The contractor shall submit for approval electromechanical design of overhead lines comprising
detailed line routing and pole spotting with background map line profiles pole loading and sag
tables by applying different load cases.
Design of cable trenches including duct and pipes for street crossings
Details of location, and foundation design for the soil type ,Auto reclosure, sectionalizer and load
break Switch, ,including cable ducts,
Design of pole mounted transformer single line diagram, block diagrams, wiring diagram.

Other structures /designs required for site specific conditions like double line, LV under MV, fibre
optic cables installation, street lights etc to be installed on the concrete poles.
The contractor shall prepare all documentation in accordance with following:

• The size of all documents and drawings shall conform to the ISO standards,
• A1 594mm*841mm, A2 420mm*594mm
• A3 297mm*420mm, A4 210mm*297mm
• Schematic diagrams shall be of A3 or A4.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 13

Digital Documentation
Whenever the documents have been produced by means of a computer, the documentation shall
also be submitted on digital media, in the form of CD-ROM.
The digital version of documentation shall be submitted at various stages.The first stage when
documents are submitted for foundation and erection.The Second stage when document for
installation and conductor stringing
The last stage shall be as built documentation.
Design documents shall be produced in AutoCad using software version 2021.

As built Documentation
The contractor shall be prepared as built drawing, & documents in GIS (Quantum or Arch) and
MS words respectively. And also the contractor shall be prepared an asset database under scope
of the project.
Asset database is a basic prerequisite for implementation of Network analysis & simulation for
network planning. The Task of building a GIS database consists of the following activities listed
below.

• GPS Survey data

• Asset database
• Porting of GIS map of network
• Updating GIS
•
• Asset Database
• The activities under this sub–task are listed below:-
• The attribute data of Line supports, Line configuration etc shall be collected while GPS
survey to be included in asset database.
• Collect Name plate particulars of the following and incorporate asset databases.
o Distribution Transformers
o All Line equipment
o Asset physical Condition information
o Generate a unique code for each asset and location of Asset.

Porting
This includes the GIS mapping of the Network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 14

The activity under this task is GIS mapping of the network and loaded on Computer hardware.

Updating GIS
Updating the GIS map and database is needed at the end of project completion. The activities under
this sub task are:

• Survey and Collect the whole data as initial survey.

• Capture the changes in network with GPS and Update Network map and database.
• The deliverables are listed below.
o Shape file of the Project Area
o Digital map of network of project area.
o Base map of project area overlaid with network map.
o Asset Attribute database.

Engineering Design of the Networks

Completion of the survey activities shall be followed by the network design using the appropriate
power system software. The contractor is expected to perform load flow analysis & Short Circuit
Analysis for the existing network for the project area. The analysis shall comprise two scenarios;
current load condition and forecasting the loading condition for the next fifteen years. The same
analysis shall be repeated considering the existing network system replaced by the new system as
per the scope of the Project. The out past shall be analysed and compared to in terms of loss
minimization, voltage profile improvement, reliability improvement, energy saving and better
protection coordination etc. The detailed design should cover short circuit analysis, load flow
analysis of the MV network.
From the analysis report, the contractor shall propose the followings for client’s review and
approval:

• Size of Covered conductor to be used for each MV lines

• Over Loaded distribution transformers to be upgraded/rehabilitated or to be inserted
additional new distribution transformers for load sharing
• The location and Size for the switching equipment, like Load Break Switch etc
• The protection coordination and settings
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 15

Supply of Items
This part of the BOQ includes the supply of materials and equipment and delivery to the
contractor’s stores for use in the project. All the materials and equipment will remain under the
control of the contractor. The costs shall include the design, manufacture, testing according to
specifications, insurance and delivery to contractor’s stores and to the site. Costs shall be provided
for each type of equipment such as conductor Size (Sq.mm), pole types, transformer Size and
generally as provided in the BOQs. The supply of materials and equipment will include:

• Insulated AAAC overhead conductors

• Single core MV underground Aluminium cables of various Sizes (Sq.mm),
•
• Concrete Poles of various Size and types,
• Distribution Transformers of various types and Sizes (kVA),
• LV Distribution Box of various types and sizes
• MV Switching Equipment;- Sectionalizer, Autoreclosure, Fault passage indicator, section
switch and Load Break Switch including communication materials for auto reclosers and
line sectionalizers.
• Other materials as stated in the BOQ.

Installation of Items
The scope of works for the project is identified by the following categorization:

MV Underground Cable Installation

The contractor will install MV line feeder connection cable by means of underground cables
3x1x240mm2 between the Substations and the first pole or between the compact substations and
the connection to the MV line following appropriate scheme of connection suitable to the site
condition to connect to the MV gantry of substation.

The item includes an appropriate length of XLPE 3x1x240mm2 including all cable accessories and
sealing ends including laying installation and proper termination at both ends.

MV connections cables without Road Crossings

The following works shall be performed:-
✓ Excavation of the Cable trench
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 16

✓ Preparing the Cable Bed with a protection filling of selected riddled sand or similar
✓ Laying the required cables in the Cable trench
✓ Primary filling with a protection filling of selected riddled sand or similar
✓ Place the yellow plastic Cable Protection sheets over the protection filling
✓ Backfilling of the cable trench
✓ Laying of the Cable marking (warnings tapes)
✓ Restore the surface to its former conditions
✓ GPS measuring of the cables and associated equipments
✓ All joints and terminations shall be well documented
✓ Perform required tests on the equipment and of the filling material
✓ Commissioning
✓ Safety arrangements to avoid accidents while the cable trench is open

MV underground cables at Road Crossings

The following works shall be performed:-
✓ Excavation of the Cable trench
✓ Preparing the Cable Bed with a protection filling of selected riddled sand or similar
✓ Laying the required cables in a plastic protection pipes in the Cable trench
✓ Jointing the plastic protection pipes with special jointing sleeve
✓ Filling the plastic protection pipes with thermal stable material
✓ Seal the ends of the pipes (not empty pipes)
✓ Laying 3 empty spare pipes
✓ Primary filling with a protection filling of selected riddled sand or similar
✓ Place the yellow plastic Cable Protection sheets over the protection filling
✓ Backfilling of the cable trench
✓ Laying of the Cable marking (warnings tapes)
✓ Restore the surface to its former smooth conditions without creating bumps or dents
✓ GPS measuring of the cables and associated equipment.
✓ All joints and terminations shall be well documented
✓ Perform required tests on the equipment and of the filling materiel
✓ Commissioning
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 17

✓ Safety arrangements to avoid accidents while the cable trench is open

✓ Construction of manhole when need
✓ Boring of main road using pipe jacking machine
✓ RCC with HDPE pipe installation for secondary asphalt concrete road cutting
✓ Construction of cable culvert and steel structure support for crossing river, railway
and bridges.
Contractors shall submit underground cable installation design for Employer’s review and
approval.
The contingency of the cable shall be determined during the design stage but the route design shall
not exceed 3 percent of the work scope unless approved by the employer.

Costing of cable installation works

For the purposes of cable installation costs the following will be adopted,

• Cost of Underground cable installation

• Cable trench opening and covering in normal ground that can be opened by hand or
mechanical excavators. This will include the protection tiles, the warning tape and all
materials for trench. The trench length will be measured over the length of the works of the
trench.
• For single circuit per meter of trench length.
• For double circuit per meter of trench length.
• Tiled pavement or tarred/asphalted road (can be quoted separately) cutting and
reinstatement of surface as it was or better.
• For single circuit per meter of trench length for standard trench width.
• For double circuit per meter of trench length for standard trench width.
• Rock excavation in trench per cubic meter of rock as defined in cable installation
specification.
• Construction of cable duct, cable bed and duct covering
• Cable transport and installation
• The circuit length will be calculated for each circuit from the termination point of cables at
the switchgear to Substation gantries or poles.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 18

• The costs will include any insurance for the transport to the site, loss and installation works,
and all labour. It will also include any joints along the route, cable testing and
commissioning.

Cable terminations and Joints

• Cable terminations include UG cable with OH Lines, UG cable with Substations
switchgears, UG cable with Substation gantries

MV OH Line Installation
New built and Rehabilitation overhead MV line erection:

The following works shall be performed and can be performed in the existing or in a new line route

a. Erection of new concrete poles including all associated equipment as cross arms, insulators
fittings, stays wires, earthings etc.
b. Installation and connection of Required XLPE covered AAAC conductors
c. Recording GPS points of the poles and associated equipment
d. Perform the required tests on all equipment before installation
e. Test and Commissioning of installed equipment
The following works shall be performed:

a. Dismantling existing conductor

b. Dismantling of existing poles ,cross arms, insulators fittings and associated equipment
c. Proper handing over of all dismantled/decommissioned network items (such as poles &
accessories, transformers, cables… etc) at EEU warehouse.

Generally, the works to be carried out is inclusive but not limited to design, supply & transport of
purchased materials to work site, erection, testing and commissioning of the following:

• MV OH lines with insulated conductors on spun concrete poles. The conductor Size
(Sq.mm) shall be determined by the Contractor after load flow analysis and selected from
the BOQ schedule and also described in the relevant technical schedules.
• The insulated conductors will be installed according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations, IEC international standards and Equivalent standard. It includes all the
lightning and earthing protection requirements to ensure that the covered cable is fully
protected.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 19

• Connection of new MV line with the newly installed and rehabilitated distribution
transformers
• Construction of new MV line from the substations as per approved drawings
• Contractors shall submit OH Line installation design for Employer’s review and approval
• In case of service outage to customers for longer than 8 hours due to on-going works under
the Contract, the Contractor shall have total backup for emergency supply
• The emergency supply should be solved with the existing network by arranging the
necessary switching operations. In the second range by use of temporary solutions as bypass
cables, lines, switchgear etc. to be arranged by the Contractor in the presence of Client
Representative. (Refer to the workplace safety guidance Section 4)

Costing of the OH Line Installation

Cost that shall be included in the OH Line Installation activity:

• Cost of OH Line installation design

• Cost of transport of conductors from Contractor’s Store to the site, pulling and stringing of
the conductors on the installed poles, connecting OH line to the substations/ /Distribution
Transformers. All supply of miscellaneous materials, pistol grips, conductor cushions for
insulated conductor tensioning, jumpering and any other material required to complete the
stringing of the line as per the approved design. The works shall include the final tensioning.
• Cost of installation of lightning arcing devices and earthing materials according to
manufacturer’s recommendation or the approved line design to protect insulated
conductor,
• Cost of the line characteristics measurement, testing of the completed line Commissioning
and certification.

1.8.3 Installation of Poles

The scope of works includes the supply and installation of concrete poles.
The poles will be installed to perform the following functions.

• Construct & rehabilitate MV network,

• Support for Pole mounted transformers with LV Distribution box,
• Support for pole mounted equipment
• Support for double run express MV line
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 20

The pole installation will be handled in two parts namely a) Pole planting and b) Dressing of Poles.
The contractor should provide distribution construction and design manual based on the
specification in Installation of distribution lines and approved designs that will be approved by the
client before the installation work is started and the poles will be installed accordingly

Poles Planting
Contractors shall submit pole planting design for Employer’s review and approval.
The works shall include planting of poles for construction & rehabilitation of MV networks and
for the support of the networks and equipment as above.
Poles planting shall be according to specifications given and approved design. The pole planting
shall include the digging of the hole (or pit), transport of the pole to the site, erection of the pole,
earthing of the pole, Concreting of pole foundation with or without reinforcement bar, and the
compaction/closing of the pole foundation. And Pole planting cost shall include pole planting
design, and all the materials and activities listed above.

Dressing of poles other than transformer and MV Line Equipment poles

Contractors shall submit Pole dressing design for Employer’s review and approval. Poles may be
dressed before they get planted. The dressing of poles shall include all pole top materials such as
cross arms, insulators, conductor wraps over insulators and conductor cushions for insulators,
earthing of cross arms, nuts and bolts and miscellaneous material to dress the pole ready to accept
a distribution line. In accordance, the cost of pole dressing shall include Pole dressing design, and
activities listed above. The supply cost for pole dressing shall be separately as stated on BOQ
The various types of poles that will be used for the pole dressing will be the following

• MV Terminal/Dead end pole,

• MV Intermediate/Suspension Pole,
• MV Tension Pole
• MV Light Angle Pole,
• MV Heavy Angle Pole,
• MV T-off Pole,
• MV Double T-off Pole
• UG cable Terminal Pole
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 21

If Installation of double MV Lines/Feeders is needed, the cost of pole dressing shall be twice of
the respective single pole dressing type.

Dressing of Transformer poles

Contractors shall submit Transformer’s poles dressing design for Employer’s review and approval.
As a rule two poles shall be used for transformer erection with the provision that all these
installations are designed to carry the largest pole mounted transformer.
The dressing of transformer poles shall include all pole top materials such as cross arms, insulators,
dropout fuses, surge arresters and LV Distribution box, earthings and connections accessories. It
shall also include the conductors connecting with both MV and the LV. It shall include the earthing
of the transformer structure to achieve a maximum of 4 Ohm combined resistance of all earthing
networks when bonded together. It shall include the conductor wraps over insulators and conductor
cushions for insulators, earthing of cross arms, nuts and bolts and miscellaneous material to dress
the pole ready to accept a distribution line.
Cost of dressing of Transformer poles includes Transformer’s poles dressing design, and activities
listed above. Supply of all materials cost shall be quoted separately.

1.8.4 Installation of Distribution Transformers

Distribution transformer installation shall include the installation of a) a new/additional distribution
transformer structures and the installation of distribution transformer with LV distribution box and
b) the rehabilitation of existing distribution transformer with LV distribution box.

General – Common to all installations (New or rehabilitated)

All transformers up to 400 KVA will be installed on double Poles structures.
Transformers on double poles will be accompanied with the installation of an LV distribution box
on the same pole below the transformer.
The transformer to be used shall be both new and those existing Distribution transformers
connected to the rehabilitated MV networks.

Installation of new distribution transformers

The work covers new transformers installation with all the necessary accessories as specified
below.
 Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 22

The Contractors shall submit design of installation of new distribution transformer for Employer’s
review and approval.
It includes supply, installation of double Cross arms Transformer and LV distribution Box base,
installation of distribution transformers and LV distribution box including all required
cabling/wiring, and all balance materials and works listed under dressing of transformer’s poles.
Installation of new Pole mounted Distribution Transformers will include:

• The installation of a new double pole structure, at a selected location during survey. The
double pole structure will be fully dressed as described under transformer pole dressing.
• The transport and installation of new transformer to the site
• Oil testing will be done after transportation of Transformers before installation.
• Installation of an LV distribution box on the pole below the transformer.

o Connection should be done with cu 3*240+1*120mm2, copper cable conductor from LV

Transformer Bushing to distribution box.
o LV cables shall be constructed as in Table below;

Trafo rating Conductor No. Of Shape of the Insulation colour Color of Armour
size mm cores conductor Outer sheath
315 KVA 3x240+1x 4 Stranded Red, Yellow, Grey/Black
and Above 120 Sector shaped Blue & Black

• Oil testing will be done before installation of every transformers after moved to the site

Cost of Installation of new distribution transformers shall include design of distribution transformer
installation, all activities listed above.
The cost of supply Distribution transformers and other accessory materials which shall be quoted
separately under supply part as specified in BOQ
transformers. Rehabilitation of a transformer shall mean the complete replacement of the pole
structure ,installing new LV Distribution Box under the existing transformer and fixing the
necessary fittings (including protection equipment such a
Cost of Transformer’s poles planting shall be included under pole planting cost.

Existing Distribution Transformer rehabilitation

This section defines the works and materials required for the rehabilitation of the existing s Dropout
fuse and Arrestor).
 Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 23

Rehabilitation and upgrading of Pole mounted Distribution Transformers will include:

• The installation of a new double pole structure, at selected location during survey to be
agreed with the client to suit to connect to existing LV network. The double pole structure
will be fully dressed as described under transformer pole dressing.
• The transport and installation of the required transformer that has been removed temporarily
before reusing.
• The contractor shall undertake removal of the existing transformer cleaning up, before
reusing, and stopping superficial leakages if any, but not including transformer opening and
overhaul.
• Installation of a new LV distribution box on the pole below the transformer.

LV cables shall be constructed as in Table below;

Trafo Conductor No. Of Shape of the Insulation colour Color of Armour

rating size mm cores conductor Outer
sheath
315KVA 3x240+1x 4 Stranded Red, Yellow, Grey/Bla
120 Sector shaped Blue & Black ck
400KVA 3x240+1x 4 Stranded Red, Yellow, Grey/Bla
120 Sector shaped Blue & Black ck

• Cost of rehabilitation of existing distribution transformers shall include design of

distribution transformer installation, and activities listed above.
• The cost of materials which shall be quoted separately under supply part as specified in
BOQ as a set
• Cost of Transformer’s poles planting shall be included under pole planting cost
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 24

Before reinstalling the existing to be rehabilitated transformer, the contractor should do the
following test to be approved by Employer.
• Visual inspection to identify leaky gaskets, broken bushings, corrosion, etc.;
• Insulation or resistance tests;
• Oil tests
• Rated voltage and current tests; and
• load-loss tests
Contractor will need mobile transformers or generators equivalent to 315KVA as a temporary
power supply to make own arrangements if it can take 2-3 days for rehabilitation work of the
existing transformer.

1.8.5 Installation of MV OH Line equipment(LBS & Autoreclosure)

Works to be executed
The OH Line equipment including Autoreclosure and Overhead LBS shall be outdoor, pole
mounted, SF6 insulated, spring operated, with motor and local/remote control.
Under this section, several items will be included as follows:
The works include all the necessary materials and works to erect these equipment on the poles and
fully commission them.
All equipment shall be earthed and these works will be covered under this section. This will be in
addition to the standard and nominal pole earthing. The works will include the earthing materials,
works and measurements required to commission these equipment into service.
In general the installation works will include supply of all balance materials that are required to set
the equipment into operation over and above what is included in the supply portion.
The cost includes installation design, all the works and materials mentioned above except the cost
of the supply of the equipment and poles, which shall be quoted separately under the supply part
of BOQ. The cost of supply of any cross arms, conductors, earthing materials associated with the
equipment shall be quoted separately in supply of BOQ.

1.9 Power shutdown required for construction and installation activities

If cutting a power service is required for a construction work; the Employer shall cut the power for
related areas upon a four (4) days advance notice given by the contractor. The contractor shall
connect the ground leads to ensure the construction site is discharged, according to the safety
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 25

requirement of construction and installation from the contractor. After the construction and
installation are completed, the Employer’s Engineer shall disconnect the ground leads and then
charge the line. The Contractor shall not pay any fees for compensations to the employer or any
departments of the employer or any authority due to the power interruption required for
construction and installation.

However, the contractor shall be responsible for the damages to the Employer’s equipment
and personnel caused by the contractor’s mistake when charging and energizing. And if the
contractor take much hours for power restoration beyond the daily schedule then
The contractor shall pay to the Employer for the extra hours of unsold electric power as per the
Employer national Tariff.

1.10 Removal of existing network

The following dismantling/demolition works and handover to EEU of the materials shall be
performed:
a. Dismantling of the existing conductors
b. Dismantling the existing poles including cross arms, insulators, fittings, stay wires and all
associated equipment
c.

d. All existing MV networks replaced by the new one shall be dismantled, transported
and handed over to EEU stores.
No DISMANTLING SHOULD BE DONE WITHOUT SUPERVISION OF EEU. A detailed
mechanism will be established between the contractor and the client for the best way of handling
this handover. Any materials found to be missing from the dismantling survey list will be charged
to the contractor at the scrap value based on weight, and missing transformers will be charged
based on their KVA rating, both at the current price at the time of contract signing.

1.11 Methodology of handing over scrap material

The contractor will have to reconcile the material handed over to EEU stores with the survey
records. A detailed mechanism will be established between the contractor and the client for the best
way of handling this handover. EEU shall designate its closer district warehouse for the same. Any
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 26

materials found to be missing from the dismantling survey list will be charged to the contractor at
the scrap value based on weight, and missing transformers will be charged based on their KVA
rating, both at the current price at the time of contract signing.

1.12 EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION

Designation Labels
Any new or existing equipment erected, rehabilitated, modified or connected to within the project
or parts thereof shall be furnished with appropriate approved designation labels in accordance with
the Employer's equipment designation system.
The purpose of labelling and marking being to make it possible to identify all equipment, and
installations and parts thereof and their relation to the relevant technical documentation in order to
facilitate a rational and simple manner of installation, operation, troubleshooting, maintenance and
repair.
The labels shall have an appropriate size in relation to the equipment to be designated. Designation
labels shall have a yellow background with black letters. The labels shall not be subject to corrosion
but UV radiation prove, water, oil prove as well as resistance against light acids.
All labels shall be in English and shall be subject to Employer/ Engineer approval.
All labels shall be permanently fixed to the switchboard and apparatus with stainless steel screws
or rivets. Glued labels and marking tape will be rejected. Enamelled labels shall have stainless steel
hole reinforcements.
Labels on concrete poles shall be fixed with stainless steel bands around the pole.
For labelling of all equipment within the distribution system, the employer’s designation system
will be available to the Contractor and shall be applied.
The Contractor shall propose a labelling system where different sizes of labels for different
purposes can be created at Site by assembling single letters and digits to a complete label.

Warning labels
Text on warning labels shall be approved by the Engineer.
Warning labels shall have red lightning symbols.
Warning labels shall be mounted on all dangerous parts of the installation:

• On low voltage distribution boards, a general warning label.

• On all cubicles where back voltage can appear after switches are opened, special warning
labels shall be applied.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 27

• Labeling, as is deemed necessary to prevent dangers arising from mal-operation of

equipment.

Terminals
All terminals of apparatus or apparatus units shall be clearly marked. However, this marking may
be omitted when the design and arrangement of the apparatus is such that a marking is obviously
unnecessary.

Control equipment
All instruments, indicating devices and control devices shall have identification markings in plain
text or simple symbols or colours. Control devices shall in addition have marking of control
positions (e.g. MANUAL/AUTOMATIC, OPEN/CLOSE) in plain text, simple symbols or colours.
Control cable terminals and, for small load circuits power terminals, shall be clearly marked for
identification.
The marking system shall be logically built up from letters and/or figures in one system consistently
used within the switchgear or control gear.
Internal wiring within switchgear, control gear or apparatus units shall have all wire ends marked,
the marking to include as a minimum the same marking as has the terminal to which the wire end
is connected. The marking shall be carried out with sleeves or similar markers. Tape is not
permitted.
Current and voltage circuits shall also have phase marking and, where necessary, polarity marking.
Protective earth wires shall be marked with green and yellow.
All electronic printed circuit boards shall have type marking. The electronic cubicles shall have
item marking for each circuit board for identification of the circuit board in the schematic diagram.

1.13 QUANTITY OF WORKS TO BE EXECUTED

The quantities in general, for each type of work, are given in the section of Bill of Quantities and
Prices. This section contains additional details to clarify items in the BOQ which it is felt that
would benefit from additional explanation .Quantities of MV networks included under this contract
are:
Lot 1- Holeta , Fitche, Legetafo,Weliso, Shambu , Agaro ,BatuTowns 15/33 kV lines Design
, supply, installation on site, testing and commissioning of MV Overhead line & Under Ground
cables, Installation of new distribution transformers, MV line Equipment rehabilitation of exiting
Transformers and connecting with the existing loads, removal of existing (replaced) networks.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 28

Lot 2- Melka Werer, Melka Sadi, Hartishek ,Kebribeyah ,Shinilee, Togochale, Aleta wendo ,
Yirgalem , Sawula , Bonga, Tepi Towns; 15/33kV lines Design , supply, installation on site,
testing and commissioning of MV Overhead line & Under Ground cables, Installation of new
distribution transformers, MV line Equipment rehabilitation of exiting Transformers and
connecting with the existing loads, removal of existing (replaced) networks.

For all the towns the distribution network planned based on the actual existing location however,
during final design route path may be changed.

Table 1. Summary of Quantity of Works to be Done

Rehabili
New Load
Final ScopeMV in tated Autorec Section No.of Feeders SW per
Name transfor Beak FPI MV SW
of Towns KM Transfo losure Switch Feeders per lot Lot
mer switch
rmer
Holeta 103.7 33 9 4 4 15 15 4 0
Fitche 58.91 32 8 4 2 12 6 3 1
Legetafo 95.06 46 6 4 3 18 18 3 2
3
Lot 1 Shambu 31.2 10 8 2 1 8 5 2 18 0
Agaro 30.4 15 4 2 1 7 5 2 0
Weliso 43.96 23 10 4 3 9 9 4 0
Batu 76.4 35 3 3 3 9 9 3 0
439.63 194 48 23 17 78 67 21 18 3 3
Melka Werer 23.9 4 8 1 1 11 6 1 0
Melka Sedi 18.3 1 2 1 1 4 2 1 0
Hartishek 30.6 7 4 1 1 2 1 1 0
Kebribeyah 66.62 6 3 1 0 2 1 1 0
Shinilee 14.5 6 1 1 0 3 1 1 0
Lot 2 Togochale 78 4 7 1 0 3 2 1 17 0 1
Aleta wendo 29.9 13 2 1 1 5 5 1 0
Yirgalem 55.55 26 6 3 2 9 8 3 0
Sawula 48.4 27 4 3 1 7 2 3 0
Bonga 47.88 16 9 3 3 13 5 3 1
Tepi 26.5 9 6 1 1 6 4 1 0
440.15 119 52 17 11 65 37 17 17 1 1
Grand Total 879.78 313 100 40 28 143 104 38 35 4 4
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 29

Lot 1 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Holeta Town

Rehabila
New Load
Towns Substatio Voltage MV in tion Description Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor Break FPI
name n , kV km Transfor of Works osure Switch g Station
mer Switch
mer

Holeta
1 26.52 2 8 Feeder 1 1 3 3 0
Holeta L1
Upgrading &
Finfine and
Holeta 15 Transformer
Oromiya zuriya Addis Holeta
2 23.72 7 7 rehabilitatio 1 1 4 4 0
Alem L2
n
4 K03 28.29 0 8 1 1 4 4 0
3 K06 25.17 0 10 1 1 4 4 0
Total 103.7 9 33 4 4 15 15 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipment’s might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 30
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 31

2. Lot 1 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Fiche Town

Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 32

New Rehabila Descripti Load

Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor tionTran on of Break FPI
name n kV km osure Switch g Station
mer sformer Works Switch
Feeder
1 Fitche 10.25 1 7 Upgradin 1 0 2 0 0
g&
Finfine
Fiche Oromiya Fiche 15 Transfor
Zuriya
2 Kumando 37.66 6 23 mer 2 1 10 6 1
rehabilit
Debreliba
3 11 1 2 ation 1 1 0 0 0
nos
Total 58.91 8 32 4 2 12 6 1
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 33
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 34

3 - Lot 1 -Feeders to rehabilitated in Legetafo Town

New Rehabila Load

Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in Descriptio Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor tionTran Break FPI
name n kV km n of Works osure Switch g Station
mer sformer Switch
Feeder
Upgrading
1 Leg 02 55 2 25 & 2 1 7 7 1
Finfine
Legetafo Oromiya A.A 15 Transform
Zuriya
er
2 Leg 10 19.02 2 7 rehabilitati 1 1 7 7 1
3 Leg 12 21.04 2 14 on 1 1 4 4 0
Total 95.06 6 46 4 3 18 18 2
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 35
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 36

4. Table 2.1 - Lot 1 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in shambu Town

New Rehabilatio Descriptio Load

Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor nTransfor n of Break FPI
name n kV km osure Switch g Station
mer mer Works Switch
Feeder
Upgrading
&
1 Shambu 18.95 6 8 1 1 4 4 0
Shambu Oromiya Nekemt Shambu 33 Transform
er
rehabilitati
2 Fincha 12.25 2 2 on 1 0 4 1 0
Total 31.2 8 10 2 1 8 5 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 37
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 38

5. Table 2.1 - Lot 1 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Agaro Town

New Rehabila Descripti Load

Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor tionTran on of Break FPI
name n kV km osure Switch g Station
mer sformer Works Switch
Feeder
Upgradin
g&
1 Agaro 21.26 2 13 Transfor 1 1 6 4 0
Agaro Oromiya Jimma Agaro 15
mer
rehabilit
ation
2 Gembe 9.14 2 2 1 0 1 1 0
Total 30.4 4 15 2 1 7 5 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 39

6. Table 2.1 - Lot 1 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in weliso Town

Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 40

New Rehabila Descripti Load

Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor tionTran on of Break FPI
name n kV km osure Switch g Station
mer sformer Works Switch
Feeder
Upgradin
1 Tulubolo 14.5 2 5 1 1 3 3 0
g&
Weliso Oromiya Amibo Weliso 15 Transfor
2 Amaya 3 1 2 mer 1 0 1 1 0
3 Goro 11.64 2 5 rehabilit 1 1 2 2 0
4 Woliso 14.82 5 11 ation 1 1 3 3 0
Total 43.96 10 23 4 3 9 9 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 41
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 42

7. Lot 1 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Batu Town

Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 43

Rehabilt
New Descripti Load
Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in ation Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor on of Break FPI
name n kV km Transfor osure Switch g Station
mer Works Switch
mer

1 Zewaye 26.699 1 17 1 1 4 4 0
Feeder
Upgradin
g&
2 Batu Oromia Adama Batu Industry 15 35.06 1 13 Transfor 1 1 4 4 0
mer
rehabilit
ation
3 Hostick 14.641 1 5 1 1 1 1 0

Total 0 76.4 3 35 3 3 9 9 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 44
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 45
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 46

8. Lot 2 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Hartishek Town

New Rehabilit Descripti Load
Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor ationTra on of Break FPI
name n kV km osure Switch g Station
mer nsformer Works Switch
Feeder
Upgradin
g&
Hartishe
1 Somali Jijiga Jijiga 1 33 30.6 4 7 Transfor 1 1 2 1 0
k
mer
rehabilit
ation
Total 30.6 4 7 1 1 2 1 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 47

9. Lot 2 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Kebribeya Town

Rehabilit
New Descripti Load
Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in ation Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor on of Break FPI
name n kV km Transfor osure Switch g Station
mer Works Switch
mer
Feeder
Upgradin
g&
Kebribey
1 Somali Jijiga Jijga Feeder 3 33 67 3 6 Transfor 2 0 2 1 0
a
mer
rehabilit
ation
Total 67 3 6 2 0 2 1 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 48

10. Lot 2 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Shinelee Town

Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 49

Rehabilit
New Descripti Load
Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in ation Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor on of Break FPI
name n kV km Transfor osure Switch g Station
mer Works Switch
mer
Feeder
Upgradin
g&
Diredaw
1 Shinele Somali Jijiga Feeder 2 15 14.5 1 6 Transfor 1 0 3 1 0
a
mer
rehabilit
ation
Total 14.5 1 6 1 0 3 1 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.

11. Lot 2 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Togochale Town

Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 50

New Rehabilit Load

Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in Description of Autorecl Section Switching
No. Region District Feeder Transfor ationTra Break FPI
name n kV km Works osure Switch Station
mer nsformer Switch

Feeder
Upgrading &
1 Togochale Somali Jijiga Jijiga Feeder 2 33 78 7 4 2 0 3 2 0
Transformer
rehabilitation

Total 78 7 4 2 0 3 2 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 51

12. Lot 2 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Aleta Wendo Town

New Rehabilit Descripti Load

Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor ated on of Break FPI
name n kV km osure Switch g Station
mer Transfor Works Switch
Feeder
Upgradin
g&
Aleta
1 Sidama Hawassa Hawassa ALT 2 15 29.9 2 13 Transfor 1 1 5 5 0
Wendo
mer
rehabilit
ation
Total 29.9 2 13 1 1 5 5 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 52

13. Lot 2 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Yirgalem Town

Rehabilit
New Descripti Load
Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in ated Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor on of Break FPI
name n kV km Transfor osure Switch g Station
mer Works Switch
mer
Feeder
Upgradin
1 YRG 1 23 2 4 g& 1 1 3 3 0
Yirgalem Sidama Hawassa Yirgalem 15 Transfor
mer
rehabilit
2 YRG 2 23 3 20 1 1 5 4 0
ation
3 YRG 3 9.9 1 2 1 0 1 1 0
Total 56 6 26 3 2 9 8 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 53
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 54

14. Lot 2 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Sawla Town

Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 55

Rehabilit
New Descripti Load
Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in ated Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor on of Break FPI
name n kV km Transfor osure Switch g Station
mer Works Switch
mer
Feeder
Upgradin
1 South SAW 1 10.8 1 0 g& 1 0 1 0 0
Arbamin
Sawla West Sawla 33 Transfor
ch
Ethiopia mer
rehabilit
2 SAW 2 25 2 20 1 1 5 2 0
ation
3 SAW 3 12.6 1 7 1 0 1 0 0
Total 48.4 4 27 3 1 7 2 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 56
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 57

15. Lot 2-Feeders to be rehabilitated in Bonga Town

Rehabilit
New Descripti Load
Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in ated Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor on of Break FPI
name n kV km Transfor osure Switch g Sation
mer Works Switch
mer

Feeder
Bonga 15 36.1 7 16 Upgradin 2 1 9 3 1
1 South g&
Bonga West Bonga Bonga Transfor
Ethiopia Bonga mer
universit 33 3.57 1 0 rehabilit 1 1 3 2 0
2 y ation
3 Miratelo 33 8.26 1 0 1 1 1 0 0
Total 47.9 9 16 4 3 13 5 1
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 58
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 59

16. Lot 2 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Tepi Town

Rehabilit
New Descripti Load
Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in ated Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor on of Break FPI
name n kV km Transfor osure Switch g Sation
mer Works Switch
mer
Feeder
Upgradin
South g&
1 Tepi West Tepi Tepi 15 26.5 6 9 Transfor 1 1 6 4 0
Ethiopia mer
rehabilit
ation
Total 26.5 6 9 1 1 6 4 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 60

17. Lot 2 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Melka Werer Town

Rehabilit
New Descripti Load
Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in ation Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor on of Break FPI
name n kV km Transfor osure Switch g Station
mer Works Switch
mer
Feeder
Upgradin
g&
Melka Summer Melka
1 Afar Feeder 1 15 24 8 4 Transfor 1 1 11 6 0
Werer a werer
mer
rehabilit
ation
Total 24 8 4 1 1 11 6 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 61

18. Lot 2 -Feeders to be rehabilitated in Melka Sedi Town

Rehabilt
New Descripti Load
Towns Substatio Voltage, MV in ation Autorecl Section Switchin
No. Region District Feeder Transfor on of Break FPI
name n kV km Transfor osure Switch g Station
mer Works Switch
mer
Feeder
Upgradin
g&
Melka Summer Melka
1 Afar Feeder 1 15 18 2 1 Transfor 1 1 4 2 0
sedi a Sedi
mer
rehabilit
ation
Total 18 2 1 1 1 4 2 0
Note :-
∙ The Drawings of the feeders are attached in Appendix C
∙ The optimum location of Line equipments might be determined after final (detail) design of the network.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 62

1.14 Additional Materials

The additional materials required are listed in the BOQ.
The Spare parts to be proposed by the contractor shall be inserted in the schedule for the
recommended spare parts.

SPARE PARTS GENERAL

All spare parts shall be interchangeable with and be of the same materials and quality as the original
parts. All spare parts shall be treated and boxed as required to preserve them against deterioration
for a long storage period under the prevailing climatic conditions.
The boxes shall be clearly marked for identification of the parts they contain.
While quoting for spare parts, bidders are requested not to include the price of the basic equipment.
The Employer reserves the right to purchase spare parts as quoted or in quantities which are deemed
appropriate. If the Employer so desires, the Bidder shall furnish the manufacturers' price lists for
the spare parts.
List of Recommended Spare Parts shall be provided (with prices) comprising parts, which are
recommended to store for a period of at least five years for routine maintenance.
If any additional spare parts, which have not been mentioned in the List of Recommended Spare
Parts, are required within 2 years, the Contractor shall supply these spare parts free of charge.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 63

GAS HANDLING EQUIPMENT

Suitable designed mobile gas-handling unit shall be included to enable emptying as well as
complete vacuuming and re-filling of SF6 gas to the supplied for gas insulated switchgear. It shall
comprise wheeled trolley housing, vacuum pump, compressor, gauges, piping, control equipment
as well as all necessary flexible hose pipes, nozzles and connections.
Suitable training must be provided for the use of the above equipment for each town.

TOOLS
To ensure that the system will be enhanced to provide improved security of supplies and improved
reliability, the utility will have to improve the operation and maintenance following the hand over.
To ensure this the contractor will purchase new tools and equipment (for the items stated below),
to use for the installation of the facilities and following the completion of works these items will
be handed over, to EEU free of cost.
The contractor will have to calculate and include the price of these tools and equipment accordingly
in his bid.
The tools that will have to be handed over are stated in the following subsections within.
For the balance of the tools, equipment and materials at the end of the project the client reserves
the right to purchase these items at mutually agreed prices, without any commitment on either
party.
Should these additional items be purchased by the client any taxes and duties shall be payable by
the client.

ERECTION TOOLS FOR HANDOVER

At the end of the Construction period, the Contractor shall hand over to the Employer complete
sets of erection tools and equipment in type and quantities specified in the Scope of Work.
The sets of tools to be handed over by the Contractor shall be imported and delivered to the project
in new condition. The Bidder shall submit with his bid a separate, priced detailed/itemised price
list of tools as “supply only” that he is intending to buy for the implementation of the project.
The final list of each tool set shall be submitted for approval prior to shipping of tools.
The tool sets shall comprise the whole range of tools necessary for doing all works for the erection
stages as necessary for the respective work.
The tools shall include
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 64

• Tools for erection and stringing of medium voltage overhead lines with XLPE covered
AAA conductors including jointing and terminating of conductors.

• All kinds of hydraulic, pneumatic and electric tools and their accessories, tensioning tools
and pulling wires, cutting tools, rollers, tightening tools a torque wrenches, spanners and
other special tools.

• The related tool set shall also include appropriated safety equipment as safety belts,
helmets, and gloves, climbing equipment appropriated for concrete poles.

The tool sets shall not include any motorised equipment, vehicles, cranes, generators, compressors
or other very heavy equipment unless so stated separately.
The tools shall be handed over in reasonable order commensurate to the expected fair wear and
tear following the installation of works.
If the tools are expected to be damaged or not last for the installation then additional new set will
have to be ordered and handed over to the client to ensure that a complete working set is handed
over to the utility to continue with the operation and maintenance of the system.

Equipment
The following must be available for appropriate phases of construction:

The following must be available per lot for appropriate phases of construction:

No. Equipment Type and Minimum Minimum Total

Characteristics Number Number
required Lot 1 required
Lot 2

1 Pole erection machines 1 1 2

2 winch crane 15T capacity 7 11 18

Vertical drilling machine for 1 1 2

3
pole pits

4 Concrete mixer etc. 7 11 18

Tools
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 65

The following must be available for appropriate phases of construction:

No. Equipment Type and Minimum Minimum Total

Characteristics Number Number
required Lot 1 required Lot
2

1. Conductor tension & 21 33 44

stringing Equipment

2. Testing instruments like 7 11 18

Megger(5kv) , etc.

3. Compression jointing Tools 7 11 18

with dies

4. Cable/ conductor drum 7 11 18

stands

5. GPS instruments 7 11 18

6. UG Cable Fault Locator 1 1 2

7. Pole climbing shoes/safety 21 33 54

belts /set

8. Operating rod 15kv,33kv 14 22 36

9. SF6 Gas filler 1 1 2

10. Oil test instruments 1 1 2

The Bidder shall provide further details of proposed items of equipment using the relevant Form in
Section IV.

Note: The total number of equipment shall be equal to the number of sites during construction
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 66

2 REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATION

2.1 SERVICE CONDITIONS AND ENVIRONMENTAL DATA

A towns service conditions and environmental detail data is attached in Appendix C.

In choosing materials and their finishes, due regard shall be given to the humid tropical conditions
under which the distribution lines will operate. In particular the wooden materials shall be dipped
in an anti-termite solution prior to shipment.

Outdoor material and equipment shall be designed and protected for use in exposed, industrially
polluted atmosphere.

Indoor materials and equipment shall be designed and protected for use in buildings, which may
be frequently wet and damp.

2.2 ENVIRONMENTAL DATA

Maximum Altitude (above sea level) 3000m

Maximum outdoor shade temperature 26°C

Minimum outdoor shade temperature 4°C

Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 67

Annual mean temperature 22°C

Maximum relative humidity 95%

Number of days with fog or mist 30

Ground Flash Density 7.2/(km2.year.100km)

Maximum wind velocity 35 m/s

Air density average 0.879kg/m3

(80% humidity, 25°C, 2320m a.s.l.)
Pollution acc. To IEC 60815 Very Heavy

2.3 System Condition Requirements

All material, equipment and plant offered for connection to the system shall have been proven by
satisfactory operating experience for a minimum period of one year in similar environmental
conditions elsewhere. Details of the locations and quantity of equipment installed in a similar
function and operational environment shall be provided by the Contractor. Equipment or systems
not proven in similar environments will not be considered.

All material and equipment to be used shall be in conformance to this Technical Specifications.

Equipment shall be designed for a 40 year life and to facilitate inspection, repairs and maintenance
where continuity of operation is the prime consideration. All apparatus shall also be designed to
ensure satisfactory operation under the atmospheric conditions prevailing at site and under such
sudden variation of load and voltage as may be met with under working conditions on the system,
including those due to fault and short circuit.

The design of the equipment shall also incorporate all reasonable precautions and provisions for
the safety of those concerned in the operation and maintenance of equipment, and of associated
sub-assemblies. Particular attention shall be given to ease of maintenance and fault finding. Test
points and components requiring testing, adjustment or anticipated replacement shall be readily
accessible.

All equipment shall be designed to obviate the risk of accidental short circuit due to animals,
reptiles, birds, insects, mites, rodents or micro-organisms. All equipment shall be designed to
prevent accidental contact with live parts. All equipment shall be designed to operate without
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 68

undue vibration and with the least practicable amount of noise. All equipment shall be designed to
minimize the risk of fire and any damage that may be caused in the event of fire. Where main and
standby equipment is specified, each shall be housed in separate cubicles.

The equipment and system designs shall incorporate all reasonable precautions and provision for
the safety of those concerned in the erection, operation and maintenance of the works and of
associated works supplied under other contracts. The use of polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) is
not permitted in any of the equipment being supplied.

All outdoor apparatus including bushings, insulators and fittings, etc. shall be designed so that
water cannot collect at any point.

All busbars, connections, isolators, fuses, contacts, cable boxes, trunking connections etc. which
form part of the Works shall not exceed the temperature rise values specified in the relevant IEC
publication or equivalent Standard, when operating continuously and at the specified IEC rating or
under short-circuit conditions under the ambient conditions encountered on site.

All rubbing or wearing surfaces shall be machine surfaced. Joints employing a gasket material
shall be so constructed that the packing is maintained under sufficient compression in all parts, so
that an efficient joint can be made without the use of jointing compounds. Gasket material shall be
of the minimum thickness necessary and of proven composition when operating under the
environmental conditions prevailing on site.

Outdoor kiosks, cubicles, etc. shall be adequately ventilated to restrict condensation and provided
with suitable for all weather temperatures. Where ventilation is provided, disposable filters shall
be fitted to prevent dust infiltration. Doors and gaskets shall be waterproof and dust proof.

Design calculations shall be prepared and submitted showing clearly details of all assumptions
made, sources of formulae used and International Specifications and Standards applicable.

2.4 Design and Construction Parameters

Current Capacity Calculations – Overhead Construction

Calculation shall be made in accordance with the recommendations and methodology of IEEE 738
and IEC 60287 with the following parameters. However, the contractor shall be required to design
the system/sub-system/components subject to acceptance and approval by the Engineer/Consultant.

Solar absorption co-efficient - 0.6

Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 69

Intensity of Solar Radiation Watts/cm2 1100

Emissivity of Conductor - 0.4

Stefan's Constant Watts/cm2 5.70.10-12

Ambient Temperature °C 30°C

Wind Velocity cm / sec 60

Current Capacity Calculations – Underground Construction

The conditions stated below shall be used when stating the cable guaranteed data tables related to
current carrying capacity of manufactured cable.
Assumed soil temperature °C 20

Assumed soil thermal resistivity Km/W 1.2

Loading Calculations
The conditions stated below shall be used for mechanical loading calculations.

Everyday temperature °C 25

Minimum temperature °C 4

Maximum wind velocity m/s 35

Nominal wind pressure N/m2 766

Wind pressure, corrected to air density N/m2 539

Wind Drag Coefficients

Wind drag coefficients stated below shall be used for mechanical loading calculations.
Lattice towers consisting of profiles 2.8

Circular cross section poles 0.7

N-gonal cross section poles 1.0

Poles with I or H profile 1.6

Conductors with diameter < 12.5mm 1.2

Conductors with 12.5mm < d < 15.8 mm 1.1

Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 70

Conductors with diameter > 15.8mm 1

Conductors with non-circular cross section 1.3

Safety Factors
Safety factors stated below shall be used for mechanical loading calculations.
Conductor system (maximum load) 2.5

Conductor system (everyday load) 5

Insulators & Hardware 2.2

Concrete & Wooden Poles (maximum load) 2.2

Steel poles & towers (maximum/unbalanced load) 1.5

Steel poles & towers (everyday load) 2.0

Steel cross arms for poles (maximum load) 2.0

Stay wire, fittings and stay block 2.5

Foundations 2.5

System Electrical Data and Insulation Levels

System Frequency 50Hz

Neutral Earthing Arrangement 15kV and 33kV Impedance earthed

66kV and 45kV solidly earthed

Insulation Levels - Nominal/Corrected to Altitude (for Clad or Outdoor Equipment)

Nominal
Maximum Short Circuit LI Withstand PF Withstand
System
System Voltage Level Voltage Voltage
Voltage

kV kV kA kV kV
0.4 0.6 40 - 3/3.63
15 17.5 25 95/115 38/46
33 36 31.5 170/205 70/85
45 52 31.5 250/297 95/115
66 72.5 31.5 325/385 140/170
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 71

System Internal Clearances

Nominal
Highest System
System Voltage Del (m) Dpp (m)
Voltage (V)
(kV)
0.4 600 0.08 0.1
15 17,500 0.16 0.20
33 36,000 0.35 0.40
45 52,000 0.60 0.70
66 72,500 0.70 0.80

Outdoor or air insulated only - corrected to 2500m a.s.l.

0.4 0.09 0.1

15 0.25 0.30
33 Same as above 0.45 0.50
45 0.65 0.75
66 0.85 1.00

2.5 PACKING, SHIPPING AND STORAGE GENERAL RULES

The Contractor is responsible for the DAP (Delivered at Place – Incoterms 2020) delivery of all
goods forming part of the supply from the place of manufacturer to the specified site or storage
location as confirmed by the Employer.
A comprehensive specification covering packing, shipping, storage and marketing that shall be
used by all manufacturers, suppliers and shippers shall be written and submitted to the Employer
for approval. The specification will include, but not be limited to, any methods or procedures
described herein.
The Contractor shall ensure that all materials, plant and items forming part of the supply, are
adequately packed for transport by sea, rail and road, to provide protection against corrosion,
physical damage, contamination and damage from water, dust, noxious gases, tropical and other
climatic conditions or from any other source to which they may be subjected during handling,
transport and storage. Approved precautions shall be taken to protect parts containing electrical
insulation against the ingress of moisture.
Equipment liable to deteriorate due to condensation shall be protected by packs of silica-gel or
other approved desiccant.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 72

Internal surfaces of equipment and accessories shall be sealed off where necessary by means of
gaskets and blanking off plates.
Packing cases and packing materials shall remain the property of Employer.
All crates, boxes, bundles, etc., required for packing shall be carefully handled at all times and shall
not be tipped, dumped, thrown or pushed from, onto or in any form of transport, during storage or
at any other time.
All bright parts, liable to rust, shall receive a coat of rust-resistant composition and shall be suitably
protected.
The Contractor shall take special precautions to protect bearing journals where they rest on wooden
or other supports likely to contain moisture. At such points, wrapping shall be used which are
impregnated with rust-resistant composition and of sufficient strength to resist chafing through,
when subject to the pressure and movement likely to occur in transit.
All arrangements shall be made for all forms of transport used, to ensure that all items are
transported safely and on time to their destination.
Only reputable carriers, which have regular schedules to the required destination, shall be used.
All facilities, reliability and record of carriers, ports and other depots shall be investigated and
arrangements shall be made to supplement any deficiencies in handling equipment and other
facilities. The number of carriers shall be kept to a minimum and double handling at ports and
depots shall be avoided as far as possible.
The Contractor shall ensure that all warehouses used en route, are suitable and that all items can be
stored without any deterioration or damage from water, sunlight, dust or any other cause.
Consignments shall be sent in complete units and sending partial consignments shall be avoided
when possible.
The Contractor shall make all the necessary arrangements for customs clearance in Ethiopia, the
country of origin, and any countries through which goods pass.
The Contractor shall obtain all the necessary export and import permits and any other documents
required for the transportation of goods. Copies of all forms and documents relating to customs,
permits, packing lists, bills of landing and insurance, etc., shall be forwarded to the Employer.
All parts shall be clearly marked to facilitate easy sorting and erection.
All parts shall be boxed in suitable crates or containers to facilitate handling in a safe and secure
manner. Drain holes shall be provided and secure manner. Drain holes shall be provided in crate
bottoms where necessary. Each crate or container shall be marked clearly on the outside of the
crate to show where the weight is bearing and the correct position for the slings. Each crate or
container shall also be marked with the contract number and port of destination.
Material intended for different locations in Ethiopia shall be packed separately and packages shall
be clearly identifying the destination.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 73

It shall be ensured that all labels, marking and colour coding on crates, boxes or containers are
clear, legible, and waterproof, not affected by sunlight and are securely fixed or painted thereon.
Standard markings such “Lift here”, “No hooks”, “Fragile”, etc. shall be applied as necessary. Oil,
Paint and other hazardous or inflammable materials shall be marked accordingly, including “flash
point”, recommended storage temperatures and detailed instructions for use.
Packing Case Labeling
Each packing case shall be indelibly marked with its own:
• individual Serial Number;
• the Employer’s Name;
• the Contract Number;
• the Contractor’s or Contractors’ Name;
• Contractor’s or Contractors’ Agent in Ethiopia and his address;
• gross and net weight in kilograms; case measurements
• descriptions of contents;
• country of origin;
• and all necessary Slinging and Stacking instructions;
Each case shall contain a fully detailed packing list in a sealed waterproof envelope. Three copies
of each packing list shall be sent to the Employer prior to dispatch.
Transport
The Contractor shall inform himself fully as to all available transport facilities, road width, and
axle load limitations, loading gauges and any other requirements and shall ensure that equipment
as packed for transport shall conform to the relevant limitations. Any cost arising from the use of
roads or tracks, including tolls, shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall ensure by his own inquiries that the facilities available for unloading and
bearing capacities of wharf’s at the port of entry is adequate for his proposed plant and equipment.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining from the relevant authorities all permissions
necessary to use docking, off-loading, highway, and bridge facilities required for the transportation
of contract materials and plant.
The Contractor shall be responsible for transport of all goods to the various sites including
importation, offloading, warehouse storage, etc., and all costs and expenses involved in transport
from the manufacturer’s works to the sites.
2.6 ADDITIONAL SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the above specified packing, labeling and transport requirements, the following
additional requirements shall be adhered to for the listed equipment and materials.
Cables and Conductors
All Cables and Conductors referred to in Technical Specifications shall be placed on drums, reels
or delivered in coils as appropriate.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 74

Drums, reels and coils shall be labeled with the following in addition to the labeling requirements
stated above:
• Serial Number;
• cable/conductor type/size/stranding, etc.;
• number of cores;
• exact cable length;
• gross and net weight;
• year of manufacture;
• drum measurements;
• purchaser’s name;
• supplier’s name;
• drum dimensions;
• Contractor’s or Contractor’s agent in Ethiopia and his address;
• Contract number;
• Country of origin;
• And any necessary handling instructions.
This information shall be on fixed metal or plastic plates.
In the case of wooden drum the above information shall additionally be marked on the flange. The
position of the cable or conductor nose and the direction for rolling as indicated by an arrow shall
be marked on the other flange. All markings shall be clearly and indelibly made.
The maximum weight of any loaded drum shall not exceed 3500 kg.
Each length of cable or conductor shall be durably sealed before shipment to prevent ingress of
moisture. The drums, reels and coils shall be lagged or covered with suitable material to provide
physical protection for the cables during transit and during storage and handling operations. The
lagging shall provide suitable protection against all climatic conditions prevailing during transport
and on site.
The drums or reels shall be non-returnable and shall have the following dimensions:
• max diameter 2280 mm;
• max width 1140 mm;
• Spindle hole 76 mm diameter.
The spindle hole shall be reinforced with galvanised steel plates. All accessories shall be carefully
packed so that they are fully protected during transport and handling operations and in storage.

Overhead Line Poles and Hardware

The members shall be securely fastened together in bundles like members, using galvanised wire
as fastening. Special attention must be given to the safe transport of long bent members.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 75

Particular care should be exercised in packing and shipment to prevent damage or distortion of
members during transit. Normally bundles of steel material shall not exceed 1000 kilograms in
weight.
The Employer shall be present at the unloading of individual bundles upon delivery at the
designated delivery points.
The Contractor/Contractor shall advise the Employer at least 2 weeks in advance of delivery.
The bolts, nuts, washers, pack washer, spalnuts, Ubolts, plates, etc., shall be packed in bulk in
strong containers, suitable for lengthy storage without danger of white rust being formed. They
shall be segregated according to size and length.
The method of packing, shipping and marking shall be approved by the Employer.
All equipment/material, including accessories, shall be packed and securely clamped against
movement in robust wooden packing cases to ensure safe transit from the manufacturer's works to
the delivery sites.
Equipment/material liable to deterioration by seawater, moisture, or ingress of foreign matter shall
be totally sealed in strong polythene bags.
Each packing case shall be indelibly marked with its own individual serial number, the Employer's
name, the Contract number, the Contractor's name, Contractor's Agent in Ethiopia and his address,
gross and net weights in kilogram’s, description of contents, case measurements, country of origin,
and all necessary slinging and stacking instructions.
Each case shall contain a fully detailed packing list in a sealed waterproof envelope.
Three copies of each packing list shall be sent to the Employer prior to dispatch.
2.7 Erection tools for the use of the Employer
At the end of the Construction period, the Contractor shall hand over to the Employer complete
sets of erection tools and equipment in type and quantities specified in the Scope of Work.
The sets of tools to be handed over by the Contractor shall be delivered to the project in new
condition. The Bidder shall submit with his bid a separate, priced detailed/itemized price list of
tools as “supply only” that he is intending to buy for the implementation of the project.
The final list of each tool set shall be submitted for approval prior to shipping of tools.
The tool sets shall comprise the whole range of tools necessary for doing all works for the erection
stages as necessary for the respective work.
The tools shall include
▪ Tools for erection and stringing of medium voltage overhead lines with XLPE
covered AAA conductors including jointing and terminating of conductors.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 76

▪ All kinds of hydraulic, pneumatic and electric tools and their accessories,
tensioning tools and pulling wires, cutting tools, rollers, tightening tools a torque wrenches,
spanners and other special tools.
▪ The related tool set shall also include appropriated safety equipment as safety
belts, helmets, and gloves, climbing equipment appropriated for concrete poles.
The tool sets shall not include any motorized equipment, vehicles, cranes, generators, compressors
or other very heavy equipment unless so stated separately.
The tools shall be handed over in reasonable order commensurate to the expected fair wear and tear
following the installation of works.
If the tools are expected to be damaged or not last for the installation then additional new set will
have to be ordered and handed over to the client to ensure that a complete working set is handed
over to the utility to continue with the operation and maintenance of the system.
2.8 Bid Submittal Requirements
Technical Submittals Required with the Bid
Technical Submittals required with the Bid shall include:
• Guaranteed Technical Characteristic Schedules provided
• (Bidders may use additional pages annexed to the Schedule to complete their response. No
alteration shall be made to the Schedule)
• outlined dimension/general arrangement drawings showing layout of components;
• descriptive literature giving full technical details of equipment offered;
• Type Test Certificates;
• detailed reference lists of clients/customers already using equipment offered;
• details of Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance Policy/ Programme;
• deviations from specifications;
• Recommended spares, special tools and test equipment.
Technical submittals required following award of Contract include:
• detailed dimensions/arrangement/layout/schematic/wiring drawings of equipment;(for
simple products)
• general arrangement drawings, including shipping details, outline details, and foundation
loading requirements; (for complex products)
• interface drawings including any special mounting and wiring requirements; (where
appropriate)
• detailed drawings including assembly, nameplate, and wiring and control schematic
drawings; (switchgear and complex products)
• detail installation and commissioning instructions;
• detail Civil Works drawings (where required);
• programme for production and testing;
• Factory Test Reports.
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 77

Standards and Codes

Except where modified, all equipment and materials shall be in full accordance with IEC
(International Electro technical Commission) and ISO (International Standards Organisation)
standards and recommendations. If relevant IEC or ISO standards and recommendations are not
available in any case or cases then relevant British Standards or National Standards shall apply if
available.

When IEC, ISO, BS or National Standards are referred to the edition used shall be that current at
the date of Bid, together with any amendment issued to that date.

Further to that above additional standards order of preference is listed below:

• IEC International Electro technical Commission;

• ISO International Standards Organisation;
• BS British Standards;
• ANSI American National Standards Institute.
• NS National Standards (where available);
Contact details for these and other organisations are as follows:

ANSI American National Standards Institute Inc.

Washington, DC. Headquarters, 1899 L Street, NW, 11th Floor
Washington, DC, 20036
Tel: 202.293.8020
Fax: 202.293.9287
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Inc.
+1 800 701 IEEE (USA and Canada)
+1 732 981 0060 (Worldwide)
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
100 Barr Harbour Drive, West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania, USA
Phone: (610) 832-9500 Fax: (610) 832-9555
BS British Standards Institution
389 Chiswick High Road, London W4 4AL.., England
IEC International Electro Technical Commission
1 Rue de Varembe
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 78

CH- 1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland

ISO IS0 International Organization for Standardization
Central Secretariat, 1, Ch. de la Voie-Creuse CP 56
CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland
ITU International Telecommunication Union
Telecommunication Standardization Bureau
Place des Nations ; CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland

Where the use of a standard other than IEC, ISO or BSI is agreed then this standard shall be used,
where applicable. Where other standards are proposed in place of IEC, ISO or BSI Standards,
confirmation shall be provided that the provisions of the standards are equivalent to or exceed those
of the equivalent IEC, ISO or BSI standards.

Copies of any standards proposed in substitution for IEC, ISO or BSI standards must be submitted
with the Bid accompanied where necessary by English translations of the appropriate sections.

Notwithstanding any descriptions, drawings or illustrations which may have been submitted with
the Bid, all details other than those shown in the ‘Deviation from the Technical Specification
Schedule’ and approved by the Employer shall be deemed to be in accordance with the
Specification and the standard specifications and codes referred to therein.

No departures from the specification except those shown in the ‘Deviation from the Technical
Specification Schedule’ and approved by the Employer are to be made without the written approval
of the Employer.

2.9 Quality Management System

General
The Contractor shall carry out the Supply in accordance with sound quality and environmental
management principles, and in particular shall have management systems which conform to the
requirements of the ISO 9000 family of standards for Quality Management and the ISO 14000
family of standards for Environmental Management.

These quality management requirements shall apply to all activities including design, procurement,
manufacturing, inspection, testing, packing, shipping, storage and commissioning (when
applicable).
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 79

The Contractor and any major sub-suppliers shall also have Quality Systems certified as complying
with the requirements of ISO 9001 applicable to manufacturing and design of supplied materials.
Minor sub-suppliers should preferably have similar quality certification however, if they do not the
Contractor’s Quality System shall apply.

It is preferred the Contractor be certified as complying with ISO 14001 and regardless of any such
certification the management system must provide for all due care and responsible protection of
the environment and the specified environmental protection measures are not to be seen as a
limiting responsibilities in respect of environmental obligations.

Documents submitted by the Contractor, including those provided by sub-suppliers, in the course
execution of the Supply will not be accepted unless they include evidence that they have been
verified by the Contractor.

Quality Documentation and Audit

The Contractor shall submit a copy of its Quality Manual and relevant quality procedures for the
Supply, in the English language, within 2 weeks of the Effective Date of the Contract. Quality
Manuals from sub-suppliers (if any) shall be submitted within 2 weeks of the Contractor making a
commitment to them.

The Contractor shall clearly identify all quality records that will be used for the Contract. The
Employer may undertake an inspection or quality audit of the Contractor’s or sub-suppliers’
facilities at any time. Full quality records of all procurement and manufacture shall be made
available at the start of factory inspection and testing of equipment.

Quality Assurance Plan

The Contractor shall ensure that its quality procedures address all requirements of the Supply.
Similar quality procedures for sub-suppliers and other manufacturers are to be ensured and the
Contractor’s quality procedures are to provide verification of this.

The Contractor shall have an overall documented Quality Assurance Plan capable of providing
assurance all equipment, materials and services meet the Employer requirements.

The Contractor shall have a quality assurance unit or at minimum a designated Quality Plan officer.

Quality Plan shall be subject to the approval of the Employer.

Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 80

The Contractor shall perform periodic documented reviews of his Supply and quality controls to
assure conformance to the program.

Inspection and FAT

The Employer reserves the right to witness the manufacturing process, any type tests specifically
performed on the equipment to be supplied to Employer and any routine tests required in the
manufacture and supply of such equipment. The Contractor shall provide free access to the
Employer to any site where such manufacturing process or tests, either type or routine tests are
taking place. The Contractor shall bear the in plant costs of such inspection. The Contractor shall
provide the Employer of a schedule of manufacture and tests at least two weeks before the events
are to occur.

If the Employer decides to witness the Factory Acceptance Test than the sample of up to 10% of
total produced volume of product shall be taken and subjected to the sample/ acceptance tests as
stated in relevant standards for that product.

In the event of any sample from any batch not passing these tests, an additional second and third
sample shall be taken from the same batch. If one of these also fails under test the batch from which
it has been taken shall be rejected in full.

Inspection and Tests at Supplier’s Premises

All materials and plant used in the Facilities may be inspected by the Employer or Project Manager
at any time.

All plant shall be subjected to all routine tests set out in relevant IEC standards, including any
optional tests which the Project Manager considers to be applicable. One item of each type of plant
shall be subjected to all type tests set out in relevant IEC standards. Type tests may be dispensed
with if the Contractor furnishes evidence to the satisfaction of the Project Manager that the relevant
type tests have already been performed on identical equipment at an independent testing laboratory
or witnessed by an independent testing agency.

Design Performance Tests

The design performance tests shall demonstrate that all equipment supplied satisfies the specified
design performance requirements. The Project Manager may waive the requirement to conduct a
performance test if the Contractor can provide test reports which are certified by an independent
Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 81

testing agency and which confirm that the equipment has design performance equal to or better
than that specified.

Design performance tests shall be conducted on all major components, assemblies and sub-systems
over the full range of specified environmental and electricity supply condition.

Routine Tests
Routine tests shall be carried out on all components, sub-assemblies, assemblies and subsystems.
The Contractor's test plan shall fully describe all such routine tests. The routine tests shall include:

• All components and modules shall be inspected and tested for quality in accordance with
accepted sampling procedures. All sub-assemblies, assemblies, and subsystems shall be
individually inspected, tested and aligned or adjusted;
• All routine tests nominated in relevant international standards or recommended by the
manufacturers of each component or element of the computer subsystem and the man-machine
interface subsystem;
• Interface tests on every data modem and communications channel interface. Interface
characteristics shall be measured in accordance with the procedures and standard test circuits
described in the ITU-T recommendations;
Mandatory factory acceptance tests (FAT) shall be performed for all major electrical plant such as
distribution transformers, insulators, underground cables, and conductors and any other such
equipment that the Employer considers to require FAT. The specifications of individual equipment
that form part of these bid documents provide all equipment requiring FAT. From these
specifications, the Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive list of equipment that shall be subject
to FAT and shall submit for approval an inspection and test plan, and associated procedures and
record sheets, at least one month before the date of any planned factory tests.

The Contractor shall submit for approval an inspection and test plan, with associated procedures
and record sheets, at least one month before the date of any planned factory tests.

Factory test reports shall include current calibration records of all measuring apparatus used in the
tests.

No plant shall be dispatched from the factory to site prior to receiving the Project Manager’s
notification that the factory tests were satisfactory. The Project Manager may request that additional
 Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 82

tests be conducted if he is not satisfied that the factory tests have demonstrated that the plant is
acceptable.

Factory Inspection Proposal

*Planned schedule prior to 56 days before the time first shipment

Item Time/Period Number Description of FAT

of
person
First batch Prior to 56 days before the time 2 Transformers
first shipment /10 Days
Equipment
and materials Prior to 56 days before the time 2 Switchgear equipment like Arrester, drop-
factory first shipment /10 Days out fuse, distribution box
inspection
Prior to 56 days before the time 2 Cables and Conductors
first shipment /10 Days
Prior to 56 days before the time 2 Insulator
first shipment /10 Days
Second batch Prior to 56 days before the time 2 Transformers
first shipment /10 Days
Equipment
and materials
factory
inspection Prior to 56 days before the time 2 Switchgear equipment like Ring Main Unit,
first shipment /10 Days Arrester, drop-out fuse, distribution box
Prior to 56 days before the time 2 cables and Conductors
first shipment /10Days
Prior to 56 days before the time 2 insulator
first shipment /10 Days

Third batch Prior to 56 days before the time 2 Transformers

Equipment first shipment /10 Days
and materials
Prior to 56 days before the time 2 Switchgear equipment like ring main
factory
first shipment /10 Days unit, arrester, drop out fuse,
distribution box
 Part 2- Employer’s Requirements 83

inspections(if Prior to 56 days before the time 2 Cables and conductors

any) first shipment /10Days

2
Prior to 56 days before the time Insulator
first shipment /10 Days

2
Prior to 56 days before the time Insulator
first shipment /10 Days
 Company Name: Document No.
ETHIOPIAN ELECTRIC UTILITY EEU/EQRD/04-230

Title:
Issue No. Page 84 of 433
Technical Specifications for 15KV and 33KV Surge Arrestors. 1

2.10 Technical Specifications: Materials & Equipment

Product 1 – MV Surge Arresters (15kV and 33kV)

scope
This specification covers the design, testing and performance requirements for gapless
metal oxide surge arresters (SA) for outdoor use, in the client’s system nominal voltages
of 15kV and 33 kV.
System Parameters & Service Conditions
Item Parameter
Altitude Any altitude up to 3000m
Annual Rainfall 1250mm
Period of exceptional Rains June to September
Ambient Air Temperatures:
Average +300c
Minimum -50c
Maximum 500c
Relative Air Humidity 70%
Wind Velocity:
Maximum wind( height above
ground level) 0-30m 35m/s
30-50m 45m/s
Isoceraunic Level Up to 100 thunderstorm
days/year
Seismic Level No records of any activity
Reference Standards
The equipment supplied shall conform to the latest edition of the appropriate IEC
standards and/or other recognized international standards. The following IEC publications

Prepared by Sign Checked by Sign Approved by Sign Rev.No. Date Page

Abebaw Belay Elias Azene Chala Aman No.
EQRD0 Mar 20,2020 84
1
 or other national or international standards, which ensure equal or higher quality, shall
be applicable

Standard Title
IEC International Electro-technical Commission
IEC-60071-1 Insulation co-ordination Part 1 Definitions, principles
and rules
IEC-60071-2 Insulation co-ordination Part 2 Application guide
IEC 60099-4 Surge arresters - Part 4 Metal-oxide surge arresters
without gaps for a.c. systems
IEC 60099-5 Surge arresters - Part 5 Selection and application
recommendations
IEC TC 37 Artificial Pollution testing of Surge Arresters
IEEE C62.1 Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits
NEMA LA1 Surge Arresters
BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles
DESIGN
The surge arresters shall be of the zinc oxide (ZnO) type without spark gaps. The surge
arresters shall be delivered complete with NEMA pattern mounting brackets for mounting
on steel cross arm and bearers. The surge arresters shall conform to IEC 60099-4 where
applicable together with draft IEC TC 37 WG4 suitable for given service conditions.
Use
The arresters will used to protect:
▪ Distribution transformers with the LIWV/BIL level of which are as
specified in the technical schedules.
▪ Interface between overhead line and cables
▪ Interface with substation at terminal poles
▪ Intermediate positions on distribution overhead lines

The surge arresters shall meet the following Performance Characteristics requirements:
Any weather-exposed steel parts shall be hot-dip galvanized.
Basic CHARACTERISTICSof Surge Arresters

Sign Checked by Sign Approved by Sign Rev.No. Date Page

Elias Azene Chala Aman No. 85
EQRD0 Mar 20,2020
1
 System Nominal Voltage 15kV 33kV

Rated Voltage (Ur) 18 kV 36kV

Max. cont. operating voltage (Uc) 14.4kV 28.8kV

Nominal Discharge Current In 10kA peak 10kA peak

(based on 8/20 microsecond waveform)

Discharge Current Class 3 3

Rated frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz

Creepage distance of bushing 525 mm 1080 mm

Short-circuit capability 10 kA 10 kA

Max residual voltage at In 59kV 108kV

Max. Standard Impulse spark over 53 97

voltage(based on 8/20 wave microsecond
waveform) (kV Peak)

Cont. resistive current of the Arrestor(mA) <1.5 <1.5

Cont. capacitive current of <1.5 <1.5

theArrestor(mA)

Steep current impulse. Residual Voltagefor 59 kV peak 108kV peak

8/20 wave)

Interfacial Sealing- Proof against Moisture

The contractor shall describe the sealing process used to keep out moisture and shall state
his experience with the design offered. The adhesion between the housing and the metal-
oxide resistors or any other metallic or non-metallic parts inside the housing must be
strong enough, homogeneous, robust and resistant to thermal cycles and environmental
stresses.
The method of factory testing of the seal shall be described.
Terminals

Sign Checked by Sign Approved by Sign Rev.No. Date Page

Elias Azene Chala Aman No. 86
EQRD0 Mar 20,2020
1
 Live conductor terminals of SAs covered by this specification shall accept copper or
aluminium conductors without danger of corrosion. To this end, the arrester terminal
shall be cadmium plated or some other alternatives acceptable to the Purchaser.
Terminals shall be suitable for use with the following ranges of conductor sizes:
Copper conductor 35 to 70 mm2
Aluminium conductor 50 to 200 mm2
The earthing terminal shall be suitable for stranded earth lead conductor
galvanised/stainless-steel or aluminium 25-75 mm2.
Mounting Arrangements
Arresters shall be suitable for horizontal, vertical or at an angle mounting. The arresters
shall be connected between phase and earth.
Distance between the arresters and the protected transformer shall not be more than 2.5
m.
Mounting brackets shall be provided and supplied with each surge arrester packaging to
facilitate mounting of arresters on channel and angle iron cross-arms.
Drop Out Feature
A disconnecting device (ground lead isolator) shall be provided to disconnect the arrester
from the network in case of failure and to indicate visually the faulty arrester in case of
arrester failure.
The method of operation of the drop out shall be described.
Over Pressure Relief
All arresters shall be fitted with a pressure relief device.
Pressure relief class shall be stated (A, B or C per IEC 600991). Additionally, surge arresters
shall fulfil the low current pressure relief key elements of the latest recommendations of
IEC TC 37 (WG4).
Weight
The Bidder shall state the net weight of the arrester(s) offered.
Creepage Distance to Earth.
Minimum values of creepage distance to earth shall be:
• 15kV arresters-525mm
• 33kV arrester- 1080mm
Galvanizing

Sign Checked by Sign Approved by Sign Rev.No. Date Page

Elias Azene Chala Aman No. 87
EQRD0 Mar 20,2020
1
 All exposed ferrous components, unless of stainless steel, shall be hot dip galvanized in
accordance with BS EN ISO 1461.
Pollution Performance
The required creepage for housings is classified as medium pollution level with specific
creepage of 25 mm/kV (Um) at sea level.
Marking
Each arrester shall be provided with a nameplate, according to IEC 60099-4
✓ Country of origin.
✓ manufacturer's name or trade mark
✓ IEC number
✓ Model/ type
✓ Rated Voltage Uc/Ur
✓ rated short-circuit current
✓ year of manufacture
✓ “Property of EEU”
.
PACKING AND DELIVERY
Surge Arrestor units shall be packed in durable crates and each crate shall contain 3 units.
The crates shall be packed on a pallet.
The packing shall afford adequate protection for the surge arrestors during handling,
transportation and storage.
The packaging should be signed the necessary information (delivery address, product
description, delivery condition, etc.) and included the list of contents.

Sign Checked by Sign Approved by Sign Rev.No. Date Page

Elias Azene Chala Aman No. 88
EQRD0 Mar 20,2020
1
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Type Tests
Type tests shall be carried out in accordance with the practices and tolerances of IEC 60099, with
the exception of the High Current Impulse Withstand Test. Before proceeding with the high current
impulse withstand test, the dry power frequency spark over voltage and peak residual voltage at
rated current shall be measured according to the relevant clauses of IEC 60099. After the high
current impulse withstand test, which shall then be carried out in accordance with IEC 60099, these
measurements shall be repeated. The test specimens shall be judged by their physical conditions
and by comparison of the oscillograms taken during the residual voltage tests.
The dry power frequency spark over voltage shall not have changed by more than 10% and the
residual voltage shall not have changed by more than 20%.
The following tests shall be conducted.
• Voltage withstand tests of arrester insulation
• Power-frequency voltage spark over test
• Standard lightning voltage impulse spark over test
• Lightning-voltage impulse spark over voltage test
• Switching-voltage impulse spark over voltage/time curve test
• Residual voltage test
• Current impulse withstand tests
• Operating-duty test
• Pressure-relief tests
• Tests of arrester dis-connectors when fitted
• Galvanizing test on metal parts
• Sealing test
To prove the effectiveness of sealing of the surge arresters, either of the following two tests shall
be carried out:
Bubble Test
A positive pressure shall be created inside the arrester and it shall be immersed in water to check if
there are any bubbles.
Pressure/Vacuum Test
Leakage shall be checked by measuring leak rate either by monitoring drop in pressure or rise in
vacuum level with time or by
Type test reports for the tests shall be obtained from one of KEMA or equivalent certified. Each
page of the test report shall be certified and stamped by the Testing Authority. The client shall
request Original Type Test Reports/Test Certificates before the issue of award letter for perusal if
considered necessary.
Routine Test
 • Nominal Discharge Current
• Max. Standard Impulse Spark-over Voltage
• Cont. resistive current of the Arrestor
• Cont. capacitive current of the Arrestor
• Steep current impulse. Residual Voltage
• Max residual voltage at switching impulse of 0.5kA
• Leakage Current Test i.e. a measurement of the leakage current at voltage corresponding to
100%, 60% and 40% of the rated voltage.
Acceptance Test
The Acceptance test procedures for any delivery of equipment are as follows:
Dry power-frequency voltage spark over test on the complete arrester
Standard lightning - voltage impulse spark over test on the complete arrester
Residual voltage test at the nominal discharge current on the complete arrester or sections
• Cont. resistive current of the Arrestor
• Cont. capacitive current of the Arrestor
• Visual examination of housing
The required number of samples shall be taken as per IEC60099-4-2014.
Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 15KV Surge Arresters
Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters 15 kV, Mounted Guaranteed value
No. Unit
inside switchgear Required Offered
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
IEC 99-1, IEC TC
3 Standard referred 37 WG4,IEC
60099
4 Line discharge class 3
5 Rated voltage of arrestor (kV), Ur kV 17.5
Maximum continuous operating voltage of the
6 kV 14.4
arrester
7 Rated operating voltage of the system, kV kV 15
8 Discharge class I
8.1 Lightning impulse (8/20 wave) max.
8.2 10 kA kV 46
9 20 kA kV 51
10 Nominal discharge current (8/20 s) kA 10
11 Rated frequency, Hz Hz 50
12 Continuous resistive current of the arrester, A A <1.5mA
13 Continuous capacitive current of the arrester, A A <1.5mA
14 Steep current impulse residual voltage max, kV kV 59kV peak
14.1 Maximum residual voltages at switching impulse
 Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters 15 kV, Mounted Guaranteed value
No. Unit
inside switchgear Required Offered
14.2 0.5 kA kV 62
15 1.0 kA kV 64
Rated discharge current residual voltage max,
16 kV 55
kV
Lighting impulse residual voltage (in kV) at
17
8/20 s current impulse at
16.1 0.5 times nominal discharge current kV
16.2 1.0 times nominal discharge current kV
16.2 2.0 times nominal discharge current kV
17 Lightning impulse protection level, kV kV 125
Suitable for Alloy
18 Material of arresters phase terminals of copper and
aluminum
19 Material of arresters ground terminals
20 Conductor size suitable for line terminals, mm2 mm2 25-100
o o
21 Ambient air température range, C C -5 to +50
22 Altitude range, m M 1000-3000
Rated Lighting impulse with stand voltage
23 kV
(peak)
Galvanized,
24 Material of arrestor terminals
stainless steel
25 Equipped with counter, Yes/No No
26 Equipped with leakage current indicator, Yes/No No
27 Method of mounting Pole
28 Cantilever strength allowed
The data of the surge arrestors shall be co-
29 Yes
coordinated with the system neutral point
30 Creep age distance of bushing, mm 525
31 Dimensions of the arresters

33KV Surge Arresters

Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters 33 kV, Mounted Guaranteed value
No. Unit
inside switchgear (polymer type) Required Offered
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
IEC 99-1, IEC TC
3 Standard referred 37 WG4,IEC
60099
4 Line discharge class 3
 Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters 33 kV, Mounted Guaranteed value
No. Unit
inside switchgear (polymer type) Required Offered
5 Rated Voltage of the arrester
5.1 Rated voltage of arrestor (kV), Ur kV 36
Maximum continuous operating voltage of the
5.2 28.8
arrester
6 Rated operating voltage of the system, kV kV 33
7 Discharge class I
8 Lightning impulse (8/20 wave) max.
8.1 10 kA kV 97
8.2 20 kA kV
9 Nominal discharge current (8/20 s) kA 10
10 Rated frequency, Hz Hz 50
11 Continuous resistive current of the arrester, A A <1.5mA
12 Continuous capacitive current of the arrester, A A <1.5mA
13 Steep current impulse residual voltage max, kV kV 108
14 Maximum residual voltages at switching impulse
14.1 0.5 kA kV
14.2 1.0 kA kV
Rated discharge current residual voltage max,
15 kV 100
kV
Lighting impulse residual voltage (in kV) at
16
8/20 s current impulse at
16.1 0.5 times nominal discharge current kV
16.2 1.0 times nominal discharge current kV
16.3 2.0 times nominal discharge current kV
17 Lightning impulse protection level, kV kV 250
Suitable for Alloy
18 Material of arresters phase terminals of copper and
aluminum
19 Material of arresters ground terminals
20 Conductor size suitable for line terminals, mm2 mm2 25-100
21 Ambient air temperature range, oC oC -5 to+50
22 Altitude range, m m 1000-3000
Rated Lighting impulse with stand voltage
23
(peak)
Galvanized,
24 Material of arrestor terminals
stainless steel
25 Equipped with counter, Yes/No No
26 Equipped with leakage current indicator, Yes/No No
27 Method of mounting Pole
28 Cantilever strength allowed
 Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters 33 kV, Mounted Guaranteed value
No. Unit
inside switchgear (polymer type) Required Offered
The data of the surge arrestors shall be co-
29 yes
coordinated with the system neutral point
30 Creep age distance of bushing, mm 1080
31 Dimensions of the arresters

Signed: ___________________

Date: ____________________

Company: _________________

Position in company: _______________

Company Stamp

Product 2 - POLE MOUNTED MV DROP OUT FUSES (15kVand

33kV)

SCOPE
This Specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply, delivery and performance
requirements of 15kV and 33kV Pole mounted Dropout Fuses.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS& Service Conditions

171082592. Item 171082593. Parameter

171082594. Altitude 171082595. Any altitude up to 3000m
171082596. Annual Rainfall 171082597. 1250 mm
171082598. Period of 171082599. June to September
exceptional Rains
171082600. Ambient Air 171082601.
Temperatures:
171082602. Average 171082603. +300c
171082604. Minimum 171082605. -50c
171082606. Maximum 171082607. 500c
171082608. Relative Air 171082609. 70%
Humidity
171082610. Wind Velocity: 171082611.

171082612. Maximum wind ( 171082614.

height above ground level) 171082615. 35m/s
0-30m
171082616. 45m/s
171082613.
30-50m
171082617. Isoceraunic Level 171082618. Up to100 thunderstorm
days/year
171082619. Seismic Zone 171082620. Level 3 & 4

REFERENCE StandardS
The equipment supplied shall conform to the latest edition of the appropriate IEC standards and/or
other recognized international standards. In particular:
Specification/ Title
Standard Number
IEC 60060 High Voltage Test Techniques
IEC 60129 Alternating Current disconnectors and Earth Switches
IEC 602822 High Voltage fuses. parts 2: Expulsion and similar fuses
IEC 60383 Tests on insulators of ceramic material or glass for
overhead lines with nominal voltage greater than 1000V
IEC 60437 Radio Interference test on high voltage insulators
 IEC 60507 Artificial pollution tests on high voltage insulators to be
used on A.C. systems.
IEC 60694 Common specification for high voltage switchgear and
control gear standards.
NEMA SG2 High Voltage fuses.
IEEE C37.41 Design tests for high voltage fuses, distribution enclosed
single pole switches, fuse disconnecting switches and
accessories.
ANSI C37.42 American national Standard Specifications for
Distribution Cutouts and Fuse Links.
dESIGN
General
The dropout shall be designed and manufactured to IEC60282 and the requirements of this
specification. The dropout fuse shall be supplied as a complete unit incorporating the fuse base with
its fuse carrier. All current carrying parts be of electrolytic high conductivity copper with the
contacts hard drawn copper ad siliver-plated. The dropout fuse shall withstand the specified impulse
and power frequency voltages in all applicable mounting positions including angle mounting.
DEFINITION
Dropout Fuse
It is that in which the fuse holder automatically drops into an open position after the fuse has
interrupted the circuit.
Fuse Holder
A fuse holder is an assembly of a fuse tube together with parts necessary to enclose and provide
means of making contact with the conducting element and the fuse contacts. The fuse holder does
not include the fuse link.
Fuse Link
A fuse link is a replaceable part of the assembly, consisting of the conducting element. It is
usually to be replaced on circuit interruption to restore the fuse to the operating conditions.
Fuse link removing Eye
A hole in the fuse holder or fuse unit which is provided for receiving a fuse hook or switch hook
for inserting or removing the fuse into/out of the fuse support.
Terminal (Terminal Connector)
A terminal is a connector for attaching a conductor to electrical apparatus.
Rated Interrupting Current
The rated interrupting current of a fuse is the designated highest available R.M.S short-circuit
current at which the fuse is designed to perform its disconnection function under stated
conditions.
Recovery Voltage
Recovery voltage is the voltage, which occurs across the terminals of a pole of a circuit
interrupting device after an interruption of the current.
Break Distance
The break distance of a fuse or switch is the minimum open-gap distance between the live parts
when the fuse holder is in the open position.
ELECTRICAL PERFORMACE CHARACTERISTICS

System 15Kv 33kV

Nominal
Voltage
Highest 24kV 52kV
Equipment
voltage
Rated current 100A 100A
carrying
capacity
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage values
For the fuse base
To earth and 125kV 250kV
between
poles(peak)
Across the 130kV 260kV
isolating
distance
Rated one minute power frequency withstand voltage (dry & wet)
To earth and 50kV 95kV
between poles
(rms)
Across the 76kV 105kV
isolating
distance(rms)
Radio 250mV 250mV
interference
voltage
Temperature rise limit (In Air) as per IEC 60129
Copper 65°C 65°C
contacts silver
faced
Terminals 50°C 50°C
 Metal parts The temp. shall not reach such a value The temp. shall not reach such
acting as that elasticity a value that
springs of the metal is changed elasticity of the metal is
changed

Rated 12kA 16kA

breaking
capacity 1sec.
CONSTRUCTION
MV Pole-Mounted Drop out Fuse Sets
The MV Pole mounted dropout fuses shall consist of:
• Cross-arm mounting bracket,
• Expendible cap
• Fuse link with fuse element
• Fuse holder/carrier.
• Fuses.
The MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Sets shall be of the outdoor type, and completely assembled
and tested at the manufacturer’s workshop.The equipment in the MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse
Sets shall be installed with necessary clearances, easy access to the fuses for testing, maintenance,
removal and normal operation and to provide safety measures against all possible hazards.The MV
Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Sets of similar ratings shall have the same dimensions having
components and devices interchangseable with those of other units.
These Dropout Fuse Sets shall be designed to ensure that thermal interaction does not unduly affect
the performance of any of the components.Each set of MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Sets shall
include a cross-arm mounting bracket.The MV Dropout Fuse Sets shall be supplied with mounting
bolts, nuts and washers. Bolt threads shall conform to ISO. The nuts shall have a proper fit so that
the nut can be run over the entire length of the threads without an undue force.
The MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Set shall be installed on cross-arms at Pole-Mounted MV/0.4
kV Transformer Substations.
Dropout Fuse Sets shall be hand-operated from ground level using a glass fibre tube stick, which
shall also be designed to facilitate replacement of the fuse links. Dropout Fuse Sets shall be of
single-phase type.
Contacts of the fuse cut-out shall be suitable to terminate the line conductors.
Fixing brackets, bolts, nuts, hooks and washers for mounting of the cut-outs shall be provided.
Fuses shall be co-ordinated with the ratings of the related distribution transformers.
The cut outs shall be of single vent type (downward) having a front connected fuse carrier suitable
for angle mounting.
All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance with the relevant standard .Nuts and bolts
shall conform to IEC.Spring washers shall be electro-galvanised.
FUSE BASE TOP ASSEMBLY
The top current carrying parts shall be made of a highly conductive copper alloy and the contact
portion shall be silver plated for corrosion resistance and efficient current flow. The contact shall
have a socket cavity for latching and holding firmly the fuse carrier until the fault interruption is
completed within the fuse.
The top contact shall be actuated by a strong steel spring which keeps it under sufficient
pressure to maintain a firm contact with the fuse carrier during all operating conditions. The
spring shall also provide flexibility and absorbs most of the stresses when the fuse carrier is
pushed into the closing position.
The current carrying parts of the assembly shall be protected from water and dust formation by a
stainless steel top cover.
The top contact assembly shall have a robust galvanised steel hook to align and guide the fuse
carrier into the socket latch even when the fuse carrier is closed at an off-centre angle.
The top assembly shall have an aluminium alloy terminal connector
The top assembly shall be robust enough to absorb thebulk of the forces during the fuse carrier
closing and opening operations and shall not over-stress the spring contact. It shall also prohibit
accidental opening of the fuse carrier due to vibrations or impact.
FUSE BASE BOTTOM ASSEMBLY
The conducting parts shall be made of high strength highly conductive copper alloy and the
contact portion shall be silver plated for corrosion resistance and shall provide a low resistance
current path from the bottom fuse carrier contacts to the bottom terminal connector.
The bottom assembly shall have hinge contacts made from highly conductive, anti-corrosive
copper alloy and shall accommodate and make a firm contact with the fuse carrier bottom
assembly. The fuse carrier shall be placed easily in or lifted from the hinges without any
manoeuvring. In addition, the bottom assembly shall perform the following functions;
When opened manually or after fault interruption the fuse carrier shall swing through 180 o to the
vertical and its further travel shall be prevented by the fuse base bottom assembly.
The fuse carrier shall be prevented from slipping out of the self locking hinges during all
operating conditions and only when the fuse carrier has reached its fully open position can it be
removed from the hinge support.
The assembly shall have aluminium alloy terminal connectors
FUSE CARRIER TOP ASSEMBLY
The fuse carrier top contact shall have a solid replaceable cap made from highly conductive, anti-
corrosive copper alloy and the contact portion shall be silver plated to provide a low
resistance current path from the fuse base top contact to the fuse link. It shall make a firm
contact with the button head of the fuse link and shall provide a protective enclosure to the fuse
link to check the spreading of the arc during fault interruptions.
The fuse carrier shall be provided with a cast bronze opening eye (pull ring) suitable for operation
with a hook stick from the ground level to pull-out or close-in the fuse carrier by manual
operation.
FUSE CARRIER BOTTOM ASSEMBLY
Thefuse carrier bottom assembly shall be made of bronze castings with silver plating at the
contact points to efficiently transfer current to fuse base. It shall make smooth contact with the
fuse base bottom assembly during closing operation.
The bottom assembly shall have a lifting eye for the hook stick for removing or replacing the fuse
carrier.
Thebottom assembly shall have a suitable ejector which shall perform the following functions.
It shall keep the fuse link in the centre of the fuse tube and keep it tensioned under all
operatingconditions.
It shall be capable of absorbing the shock when the fuse carrier is pushed into the closed position
and shall not allow the fuse link to be damaged. This is especially important when the fuse link is
of low-ampere rating.
The ejector at the instant of interruption shall retain the fuse carrier in the closed position long
enough to ensure that the arc is extinguished within the fuse tube thereby excluding the possibility
of arcing and subsequent damage at the contact surfaces.
The ejector shall help the fuse link separation after fault interruption, allowing the fuse carrier to
drop out and clearing the pigtail of the blown fuse link through the bore of the fuse tube.
FUSE BASE (Polymer)AS PER IEC 60282-4
The fuse base shall be bird-proof, single unit Polymeric Post insulator with a creep age distance
(to earth) not less than 525mm. No joint in core material is allowed. The top & bottom end fitting
of Post insulator shall be a one piece and made of galvanized steel. The top and bottom
assemblies as also the middle clamping hardware shall be either embedded in the Polymeric Post
insulator with sulphur cement or suitably clamped in position. For embedded components, the pull
out strength shall be such as to result in breaking of the Polymeric before pull out occurs in a test.
For Polymeric Post insulators, the beam strength shall not be less than 5KN. (i.e. Mechanical
failing load). For 15 KV and 33kV Polymeric Post INSULATORS: The Bidder shall submit
notarized type test reports of 15 KV and 33kV Polymeric Post INSULATORS as per IEC:61109
(Latest amendment if any) from international recognized Laboratory along with bid to prove that
the Polymeric Post Insulators offered meet the requirements of the specification. These type Tests
should have been carried out within Seven years prior to the date of opening of this tender.
FUSE TUBE
The fuse tube shall be made of moulded fibre glass reinforced polyester coated with
ultraviolet inhibitor on the outer surface and having arc quenching bone fibre liner inside. The
tube shall have high bursting strength to sustain high pressure of the gases during fault
interruption. During switching operation circuit interruption shall be accomplishedentirely within
the interrupter without external arc or flame. As the blade begins to open,the current shall be
transferred to the interrupter by a shunt contact against the interrupter’s external contact before
the current carrying main contacts part,followed by the arc extinction in the interrupter. During
closing, the sequence shall be reversed. The fuse tube cap may be of the expendable type.
The inside diameter of the fuse tube shall be 17.5mm. The solid cap of the fuse
carrier shall clamp the button head of the fuse link, closing the top end of the fuse tube and
allowing only the downward venting during fault interruption.
The assembly shall be designed such that the fuse tube can be closed without using much undue
care even when the closing force is applied from an angle.A lifting eye shall be provided on the
fuse tube and designed foruse with a hook-stick. The fuse tube shall be permanently marked with
the following: Supplier/Manufacturer, model, maximum continuous current rating, rated
maximum voltage phase to phase, rated symmetrical amperes as per IEC requirements.
MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
The cutouts shall be provided with a suitable arrangement for mounting these on suitable
channel cross arm in such a way that the centre line of the fuse base is at an angleof 15 o to 20o
from the vertical and shall provide the necessary clearances from the support. Mounting
arrangement shall be made of high strength galvanised steel flat and shall be robust enough to
sustain the various stresses encountered during all operating conditions of the cutout.
The strength of the component shall be determined by clamping the member with the shorter leg
at the top to a rigid support by M-10 carriage bolts. A downward force shall be applied along the
axis of M-14 carriage bolt parallel to the longer leg and in the direction of the longer leg of the
member under test. A load of 50 Kg. shall be applied and then removed to take up any slack in
the mounting arrangement before the measurement of the position is taken.The permanent set
measured at the axis of the M-14 carriage bolt shall not exceed 1.6mm when a load of 425 Kg. is
applied and removed.
The strength of the M-14 bolt shall in no case be less than1900 Kg. and the strength of M-10 bolts
not less than 3500 Kg.
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
The cutout shall be provided with two aluminium alloy terminal connectors at top and bottom of
fuse base assemblies to receive aluminium conductors of diameters between 6.3mm to
10.05mm. These terminals shall be easily accessible irrespective of the cutout location with
respect to the pole. The terminals shall meet the test requirements of relevant construction
standard..
Earthing
The metal structure shall have a provision for earthing. Earthing terminals shall be suitable for
accepting copper conductors of the diameter of 6 to 11 mm. The terminals shall be made of
copper and shall be tin-plated. All metal parts not meant to carry current shall be connected to a
double earthing system and suitable earthing terminals shall be provided with all the equipment.
Earthing terminals having clamping bolts of at least 12 mm dia. shall be provided on the frame.
Operating Speed and Effort
The Supplier shall state the minimum speed of operation and the time for the complete opening
needed to interrupt the current.Also he shall statethe initial and follow through pull needed to do
this, at any time during the life of the switch, assuming that the recommended maintenance is
regularly carried out.
Finish
All iron and steel parts shall be protected against corrosion by hot dip galvanising to BS EN ISO
1461 or equivalent.
Inspection and Testing
Type Tests
The following type tests as per the relevant standard shall be conducted on the equipment of
identical design to prove that the offered equipment satisfies all the design requirements set out in
this specification.
▪ Dielectric tests (rated impulse withstand and rated one minute power frequency
withstand test voltages),
✓ Temperature rise test.
✓ Breaking test
✓ Tests for time/current characterestics
✓ Mechanical tests (for fuse bases and fuse links)
✓ For Porcelain Fuse Base only.
✓ Artificial pollution tests.
RoutinE TestS
Routine tests shall be carried out on the Equipment in accordance with IEC60129, IEC 60282. All
routine tests will be free of charge to the Employer and any item not meeting the routine test
requirements shall be rejected.
The following tests shall be conducted.
✓ Visual inspection,
✓ Melting Current Tests,
✓ Temperature Rise Tests,
✓ Time/Current Characteristic Tests.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
The following acceptance tests shall be conducted.
✓ Visual inspection,
✓ Inspection of the complete equipment,
✓ Checking of the result of the routine and type test as per IEC,
✓ Carrying out all or part of tests mentioned in the routine test,
✓ Checking of conformity to specification.
QUALITY ASSURANCE

The manufacturer shall submit Manufacturing Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) for approval & the
same shall be followed during manufacture and testing.

The material for final inspection shall be offered by the Supplier only under packed condition. The
owner shall select samples at random from the packed lot for carrying out acceptance tests.
Packing and Marking
The following information shall be legibly and indelibly marked on BOTH sides of the carton:
a) Manufacturer’s name and catalogue number
b) Rated Voltage and Current
c) Purchase Order Number
d) Description of contents and gross mass
e) Handling or lifting instructions where applicable
The following information shall be legibly and indelibly marked on the individual package:
a) Manufacturer’s name and catalogue number
b) Rated Voltage, Current and frequency.
c) Speed Class
d) Batch Number (Carton Only)
e) Precautions in handling (Link Only)

GTP for 15KV Dropout Fuse

No Item Unit Requirement Bid Offer
Nominal System 15kV
Voltage
1 Name of manufacturer

2 Country of
manufacture
3 Type
Pole Mounted
4 Type tested Yes
5 Standards IEC/ VDE
6 Rated operating Line kV 15
Voltage
7 Maximum Equipment kV 24
Voltage
8 Impulse withstand kVp 125
voltage (1.2/50 μs, dry)
phase to earth
9 Power frequency
withstand voltage (1
min., wet)
9.1 phase to earth kV 50
9.2 across isolating distance kV 76
10 Impulse withstand kVp
voltage (1.2/50 μs, dry)
10.1 phase to earth kV 75
10.2 Across isolating distance kV 95
11 Rated frequency Hz 50
12 Rated current A 100
13 Rated interrupt kA 12
capacity
14 Creepage distance Mm 525
phase to ground
15 Fuse type Link- K
current time
characteristics
16 Operation single phase
drop out fuse
is melted

GTP for 33KV Dropout Fuse

No Item Unit Requirement Bid Offer
Nominal System 33kV
Voltage
1 Name of manufacturer

2 Country of
manufacture
3 Type Pole Mounted

4 Type tested Yes

5 Standards IEC/ VDE
6 Rated operating Line kV 33
Voltage
7 Maximum Equipment kV 52
Voltage
8 Impulse withstand kVp 250
voltage (1.2/50 μs, dry)
phase to earth
9 Power frequency
withstand voltage (1
min., wet)
9.1 phase to earth kV 95
9.2 across isolating distance kV 80
10 Impulse withstand kVp
voltage (1.2/50 μs, dry)
10.1 phase to earth kV 170
10.2 Across isolating distance kV 195
11 Rated frequency Hz 50
12 Rated current A 100
13 Rated interrupt kA 16
capacity
14 Creepage distance Mm 1080
phase to ground
15 Fuse type Link- K
current time
characteristics
16 Operation single phase
drop out fuse
is melted
Signed: ___________________

Date: ____________________

Company: _________________

Position in company: _______________Company Stamp

Product 3 – Distribution UG Aluminium Power Cables

Technical Specifications for single core Aluminium U/G Cables on 15kV system.
Scope
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing and delivery of medium voltage of 15kV voltage
level, single core XLPE insulated underground cable having stranded compacted aluminium conductor,
Copper tape screen, armoured with aluminium wire, and extruded PVC over sheath.
The cable for the 15kV system shall be a standard with maximum cable rating voltage of 24kV (at mean sea
level - msl). This will cater for installations at altitudes up to 3000m.
Service Conditions
Item Parameter
Altitude 3000m above msl
Annual Rainfall 1250mm
Period of exceptional Rains June to September
Ambient Air Temperatures:
Average +300c
Minimum -50c
Maximum 500c
Relative Air Humidity 70%
Wind Velocity:
Maximum wind( height above ground level)
0-30m 35m/s
30-50m 45m/s
Isoceraunic Level Upto100 thunderstorm days/year
Seismic Zone Zone 4

The Equipment shall be used in installations at altitudes of 3000m.

 Reference Standards
The cables supplied under this Section of the Contract shall conform to the latest edition of the appropriate
IEC standards or other recognized international standards, in particular:
IEC60060 High voltage test techniques
IEC60071 Insulation co-ordination
BS 7870-4.10 33kV stranded power cables
IEC60228 Conductors of insulated cables and their resistance
IEC60229 Tests on cable over sheaths
IEC60230 Impulse tests on cables and accessories
Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from 1
IEC60502
kV up to 30 kV
Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of electric cables and
IEC60811
optional cables
IEC60885 Electrical test methods for electric cables
IEC Power cable accessories with rated voltages up to 30 kV
ASTM D2303 Inclined plane non-tracking test method.
DIN/VDE0273 Cross linked Polyethylene Insulated Cables.
DIN 46391 Cable Delivery Drums
IEC 60183 Guide to the selection of high voltage cables
IEC 60332-3 Test on electric cables under fire condition, Test on Bunched wires or cables
Design and Construction
Construction Details:
The single core underground cable shall be designed for maximum voltage rating of 24kV. The cable shall
comprises of compacted stranded aluminum conductor, with extruded semi-conducting shielding, cross-
linked polyethylene insulation, semi-conducting shielding , copper tape screened, armoured with aluminum
alloy wire and the cable shall be bedded with extruded PVC, and sheathed overall with black PVC.
Conductors
The conductor shall be a stranded circular compacted conductor of aluminium of cross-section as required
for cable class 2 conductors in accordance with IEC 60228.
Conductor Screen
The conductor screening shall be extruded semi-conducting material (Tapes are not acceptable) to exclude
all air voids. The screen should consist of a layer of at least 1mm thick extruded semi-conductive compound
bonded to the conductor.
Insulation
The insulation shall consist of high quality cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) with suitable thickness for a
voltage rating of Uo/U/Um(12.7/22/24)kV which is used for 15 kV systems at 50 Hz. Uniform thickness of
insulation shall be within the permissible values as per IEC Standards; eccentricity check shall be carried
out to ensure this.
Insulation Screen
The insulation screen consists of an extruded layer of non metallic, semiconducting compound
extruded over the insulation. The extruded semi-conducting layer shall consist of bonded or cold
strippable semi-conducting compound capable of removal for jointing or terminating. The screen
should consist of a layer of at least 1mm thick extruded semi-conductive compound bonded to the insulation.
Metal screen
The metal screen shall be double copper tapes. The minimum thickness of copper tape screen should be
0.1mm. The dimension, physical and electrical requirements of the copper tape shall be as per IEC standard.
Separation sheath/Bedding
The separation sheath comprises a layer of extruded PVC or PE applied under the armour .The
nominal thickness is calculated by 0.02Du + 0.6mm where Du is the fictitious diameter under the
sheath in mm. The nominal separation sheath thickness shall not be less than 1.2mm.
Armour
The armour consists of round aluminium alloy wire armour applied helically over an extruded separation
sheath. The armour diameter should be as per IEC60502-2-2014 Table 9.
Outer sheath
The over sheath shall consist of an extruded layer of black PVC complying with the requirements of
compound ST2 type specified in IEC 60502. The outer sheath shall be spark tested in accordance with IEC
62230. The outer sheath shall be extruded PVC black in colour, containing a termite repellent additive.
The nominal oversheath thickness is calculated by 0.035D+1 where D is the fictitiuous diameter
immediately under the oversheath in mm.

The Outer Sheath shall be embossed with following minimum text:

a) The voltage designation
b) Type of construction or cable code
c) Manufacturer’s Name and Trade-mark
d) Number of cores and nominal cross-sectional area of conductor
e) Progressive (sequential) length of cable at every metre, starting from zero for every drum.
Colour filled in for the progressive marking, shall be with proper contrast in colouring.
f) Name of buyer or purchaser, EEU
g) Month & Year of manufacturing
h) Batch No. or Lot No. (For traceability purpose, in case of any manufacturing defect or otherwise
arising in the cable in future.)
i) Purchase Order Number & date
Pulling-eye Assembly and Sealing-end Cap (for Cables)
a) A cable pulling-eye assembly shall be provided at the loose end (outer end) of the cable on each
drum. Sealing material shall be filled in inside the spaces / gaps between the pulling-eye assembly and cable
outer sheath. Further, a heat-shrinkable sleeve shall be provided over the pulling-eye assembly and outer
sheath of cable.
b) Other end (inner end) of the cable shall be sealed. One PVC cap with Polyurethane compound
shall be provided as primary sealing and heat-shrink end-cap shall form a secondary sealing over the PVC
cap.
Installation Data
Core screen will be earthed at both ends and cables will be directly buried underground. Depth of lying is
1m for 15 kV cables Short lengths will be installed in air, pipes and ducts.
In addition the Bidder shall advise de-rating factors for variations in the above conditions as well for multiple
circuits.
Cable Characteristics
• Voltage Characteristics
The cable shall fulfil at least the following conditions:

Values
No Voltage Characteristics

1 Rated System voltage 15 kV

2 Maximum System voltage 17.5kV
3 Highest voltage rating of the cable 24kV
4 Impulses withstand level. 125 kV
5 Power frequency withstands level 50kV
6 System frequency 50 Hz

• Current Carrying Capacity conditions

The cables may be laid directly in the soil, or run in air or ducts, with air and ground temperatures as
prevailing in Ethiopia.
The current capacity shall be stated by the bidder for the following defined conditions:
1 Nominal ground temperature 30 °C
2 Maximum conductor temperature 90 °C
3 Thermal resistivity of soil 1.2 °C m/W
4 Depth of burial 0.9 m
5 Maximum ambient air temperature 50oC
6 Minimum ambient air temperature -5oC
7 Average ambient air temperature. 30 oC
8 Minimum soil temperature 10 oC
Inspection and Testing
All type test, routine test and acceptance test shall be done as per relevant IEC standard only. The bidder
should submit test certificate for type, size and rating of the cables from international accredited testing
laboratory along with bid. Three sets of compete test certificates (routine & acceptance tests) need to be
submitted along with delivery of the cables.
 • Type Tests
• The following type tests as per the relevant standard shall be conducted on cables of identical design
to prove that one cable of each class satisfies all the design requirements set out in this specification.
• For Cable
• Partial discharge test,
• Bending test, plus partial discharge test,
• Dielectric power factor as function of voltage and capacitance measurement, and as a function of
temperature,
• Heating cycle test plus partial discharge test,
• Impulse withstand test, followed by power frequency voltage test,
• High voltage ac test,
• Non-electrical tests as stated in IEC
• The following additional type tests shall be carried out.
• Extruded Insulation Shielding Test per AEIC CS5.
• Insulation Shield Stripping Test per AEIC CS5.
• Routine and acceptance Tests
During the course of fabrications tests shall be made on samples from each 100 km of conductor to determine
weight, ultimate strength and dc resistance. All factory tests, type tests and sample tests shall be performed
in accordance with IEC 61089/IEC60502/ IEC60228/IEC60885
The tests will be divided into the following categories and conducted as per the relevant standard.
✓ Check for compliance with specifications here in and with the scheduled quantities.
✓ Conductor electrical resistance measurements
✓ Partial discharge test, (MV CABLES ONLY)
✓ High-voltage test
✓ Conductivity of the copper cable shall be minimum 99.9%
Marking, Packing, &Shipment
The following shall be given special attention.
16. Cable Identification
Cable identification shall include embossing of the PVC over sheath with the following details:
a) EEU
b) Manufacturer’s name
c) Cable size
d) Rated Voltage
e) Year of Manufacture
f) Purchase Order Number and date
The letters and figures shall be raised and shall consist of upright block characters. There should be at least
one such marking set at every 2m to suit manufacturing process.
Cable length marking
Each cable over sheath shall be sequentially marked at one (1) metre intervals from zero up to the specified
drum length, so as to indicate the amount of cable remaining on the drum.
Cable drums and Packing
The MV cables shall be packed in non-returnable wooden drums suitable for storage for up to 3 years in
tropical climates and all the wooden drums shall be anti-termite processed.
Alternatively non-returnable painted steel drums will be also accepted. Painting shall conform to IEC or
British standards.
Wooden/ steel drum will be treated at par for evaluation purpose and accordingly the Bidder should quote
the package.
Drums shall be sturdy and of sufficiently large diameter to prevent damage during shipping, storage in
tropical climate, handling during stringing operations.
Cable drums shall conform to DIN 46391 or equivalent standards.
The following shall apply for all drum types.
➢ Drum Drawings and specifications
The bidders should submit their drawings of the conductor drums along with the bid. After placement of
letter of intent the supplier shall submit four copies of fully dimensioned drawing of the drum for purchaser's
approval. After getting approval from the purchaser, supplier shall submit 3 copies of the approved drawings.
➢ Wood type and treatment
All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned new soft wood free from defects that may
materially weaken the component parts of the drums. Preservative treatment for anti-termite/anti fungus shall
be applied to the entire drum with preservatives of a quality which is not harmful to the conductor.
The surface of the cable drum where cable is stored shall be free from sharp objects such as nail ties or
protruding heads, which might damage the conductor.
➢ Construction
Drum flanges shall be 2-layer construction with minimum 60 mm thickness. Each layer shall be nailed and
fixed with grip nails at approximately 90 degrees. Nails shall be driven from the inside face of the flange,
punched and then clenched on the outer face. There shall not be less than 2 nails per board in each circle.
➢ Spindle holes
Reels shall be constructed so that they must be supported either on an axle through the reel flange. A round
spindle hole of minimum diameter 120mm is required at the centre of the wooden drums. Spindle
hole/supports shall be reinforced with a suitable steel flange.
➢ Cable ends
The inner as well as outer end of cable shall be brought out on the drum flange and shall be clamped in such
a manner to make the cable length marking easily visible.
Each end of cable shall be durably sealed at both ends with hot melted paste and provided with shrinkable
end caps to prevent ingress of moisture.
➢ Cable wrapping with plastic
Before cable reeling, thick plastic or card board or double corrugated or thick bituminized waterproof paper
shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside of flanges of the drum by means of a suitable adhesive. All
materials shall be dry before use. Medium grade Kraft paper shall be used in between the layers of the
conductor. After reeling the conductor the exposed surface of the outer layer of conductor shall be wrapped
with thin polythene sheet across the flanges to preserve the conductor from dirt, grit and damage during
transportation and handling and also to prevent ingress of rain water during storage/transport.
➢ Lugging
The cables shall be lagged or covered with suitable material to provide physical protection during transit and
during storage and handling operations.
Preferable mode of lugging shall be by wooden lagging on the circumference with a thickness of at least 40
mm.
Drum Sizes
The drums shall have the following dimensions:

Max. Diameter: 2280mm;

Max. Width: 1140mm;

Specific drum dimensions shall be as stated in the technical schedules.

The Supplier shall state the drum dimensions and mark them on the drum.
Cable Drum Length
The length of cable for drum shall be as specified in the technical schedules.
A variation of + 2% of the cable drum length may be acceptable.
All cable lengths cut and used for various tests shall be to contractor's account and shall not be included in
cable length to be supplied.
Bidder shall also indicate the maximum single length, over and above the standard length, he can
manufacture in the guaranteed technical particulars of offer. This may be required for special stretches like
river crossing etc. The Purchaser reserves the right to place orders for the above lengths on the same terms
and conditions applicable for the standard lengths during the validity of the Contract.
Drum Marking
a) Direction of drum rolling
The direction for rolling as indicated by an arrow together with the words "Roll this way" shall be marked
on each flange.
Each drum shall be marked to indicate weather proofing.
b) Drum Labels/Marking
The drum shall have marking or shall have the data indelibly branded on the cable drum for shipping purpose.
In any case all branding shall be indelibly marked to indicate the following
• Name of Purchaser –EEU
• Contract Number,
• Purchase order number and date
• Manufacturer’s name,
• Trade mark/model if any,
• Conductor type, name and specification
• Conductor size and stranding,
• Voltage rating
• Exact length of conductor (in meters) contained in the drum,
• Gross weight (kgs) of the loaded drum,
• Net weight (kgs) of the conductor,
• Drum Serial Number,
• Month & Year of Manufacturing
Each case/consignment shall contain a fully detailed packing list covering the above details in a sealed
waterproof envelope.
Three copies of each packing list shall be sent to the Employer prior to dispatch.
Drum Warrantees
The bidder/contractor would implicitly guarantee the soundness of the cable drums for three (3) years.
Should the drums fail within this period, due to poor quality of materials and workmanship, the contractor
shall be responsible for re-drumming the cable/conductor to new drums provided free of charge by the
contractor.
Damage due to careless handling and storage by the client shall not be covered under this guarantee.
Damage due to careless handling and storage by the contractor or his agents shall be fully covered under this
guarantee.
Quality Assurance Plan
A Quality Assurance Plan (QA Plan) including customer hold points covering the manufacturing activities
of the material shall be required to be submitted by the Bidder with the tender.
The contractor shall follow the approved Quality Assurance Plan. If desired by the purchaser, he shall give
access to all the documents and materials to satisfy the purchaser that the Quality Assurance Plan is being
properly followed. Packing and Marking

Guaranteed Technical particulars (G.T.P.) for 15kV Single Core Aluminum U/G
Cable (1X240mm2)
GTP for 15kV Under Ground single core Offered
S.No Unit Required Value
Aluminum Cable (1X240mm2) Value
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Type designation U.G.
IEC60502,
4 Standard IEC, BS
IEC60228,BS50182
5 System rated Voltage kV 15
5.1 Maximum System rated Voltage kV 17.5
5.2 Maximum cable rating Voltage kV 24
5.3 Cable voltage kV Uo/U/Um(12/20/24)
 GTP for 15kV Under Ground single core Offered
S.No Unit Required Value
Aluminum Cable (1X240mm2) Value
6 Number of cores Single
6.1 Minimum conductivity of cable
7 Number of wires in each conductor number 30
8 Diameter of conductor after compaction mm 17.6-19.2
9 Shape of conductor Compacted stranded
conductor with the
circular shape as per
IEC60228-2004 Table 2-
class 2
10 Normal cross sectional area of Cable mm² 1Cx240
11 Conductor details
11.1 Material Aluminum
11.2 Design IEC 60228
11.3 overall diameter mm
12 Conductor screen
Extruded XLPE semi
12.1 Material
conductive
12.2 thickness, mm 1mm
Maximum dielectric stress at conductor
13 kV/cm
screen (assumed smooth)
14 Insulation
14.1 Material XLPE
minimum radial thickness of insulation
14.2 between conductor screen & core screen mm 5.5
(R01)
15 Insulation Screen
Extruded XLPE semi
15.1 material
conductive
15.2 Thickness 1mm
16 Metalic screen
16.1 material Copper
16.2 Thickness (R02) mm 0.1
Maximum DC resistance of conductor of
17 cable at 20°C (respectively as per Number 3 of ohm/km 0.125
cable lists)
Maximum AC resistance of conductor/ km of
18 cable at 90°C (respectively as per Number 3
of cable lists) ohm/km
Equivalent star reactance of three phase of
19 circuit of 50 Hz, (respectively as per Number ohm/km N/A
3 of cable lists)
 GTP for 15kV Under Ground single core Offered
S.No Unit Required Value
Aluminum Cable (1X240mm2) Value
Maximum DC resistance of metallic screen of
20 cable at 20°C (respectively as per Number 3 ohm/km N/A
of cable lists)
Maximum electric capacitance per core of
21 cable (respectively as per Number 3 of cable µF N/A
lists)
Maximum charging current per conductor of
22 cable at nominal voltage, (respectively as per mA/km N/A
Number 3 of cable lists)
Current carrying capacity in soil at 20°C
23 A 415
(respectively as per Number 3 of cable lists)
Maximum value of tangent of dielectric loss
24 angle of cable at normal frequency at a N/A
conductor temperature of 20°C
Conductor short circuit current carrying
capacity (for 1 second) with cable loaded with
25 nominal current before short circuit and final kA/s 22.68
conductor temperature of 250°C (respectively
as per Number of cable lists)
Metallic sheath short circuit current carrying
capacity (for 1 second) with cable loaded with
26 kA/s N/A
nominal current before short circuit and final
sheath temperature of 250°C
Nominal overall diameter of complete cable,
27
mm
No smaller than 12
Minimum radius of bending in which cable
28 times of the outer
can be
sheath
28.1 laid direct in ground or in air
28.2 in ducts
with cable placed in position adjacent to joints
28.3 m
and terminations
28.4 laid direct in ground or in air m
28.5 in ducts m
with cable placed in position adjacent to joints
28.6 m
and terminations
29 Separation sheath/Bedding Material
29.1 Material extruded PVC or PE
29.2 minimum thickness mm 1.3
30 Galvanized aluminium alloy armor
 GTP for 15kV Under Ground single core Offered
S.No Unit Required Value
Aluminum Cable (1X240mm2) Value
a. Number of strips/wire
b. Size (thickness x width) mm
c. diameter of aluminum alloy armor mm 2.5
31 Nominal Thickness of PVC Sheath
a. Minimum thickness mm 2.4
b. Colour Black
c. Weather proof paint mm
32 End Cap
33 operating factor for ambient temperature in
a. At 300c
b. At 350c
c. At 400c
d. At 450c
Group factor for following number of cables
34
laid
a. 3 numbers
b. 4 numbers
c. 5 numbers
d. 6 numbers
35 Standard delivery length per drum m 500±2%
36 Weight per drum kg
Maximum Drum length that can be provided
37 m
by the manufacturer
38 Embossing Manufacturer name,
buyer name, type &
voltage rating of
cable, month-year of
Mfg, P.O.No. & date
39 Sequential length at every mater To be provided by
printing only in White
colour
Signed: __________________

Date ___________________

Company: __________________

Position in Company ________________ Company Stamp

Technical Specifications for single core Aluminium U/G Cables on 33kV system.
Scope
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing and delivery of medium voltage of 33kV voltage
level, single core XLPE insulated underground cable having stranded compacted aluminium conductor,
Copper tape screen, armoured with aluminium wire, and extruded PVC over sheath.
The cable for the 33kV system shall be a standard with maximum cable rating voltage of 36kV (at mean sea
level - msl). This will cater for installations at altitudes up to 3000m.
Service Conditions
Item Parameter
Altitude 3000m above msl
Annual Rainfall 1250mm
Period of exceptional Rains June to September
Ambient Air Temperatures:
Average +300c
Minimum -50c
Maximum 500c
Relative Air Humidity 70%
 Wind Velocity:
Maximum wind( height above ground level)
0-30m 35m/s
30-50m 45m/s
Isoceraunic Level Upto100 thunderstorm days/year
Seismic Zone Zone 4

The Equipment shall be used in installations at altitudes of 3000m.

Reference Standards
The cables supplied under this Section of the Contract shall conform to the latest edition of the appropriate
IEC standards or other recognized international standards, in particular:
IEC60060 High voltage test techniques
IEC60071 Insulation co-ordination
BS 7870-4.10 33kV stranded power cables
IEC60228 Conductors of insulated cables and their resistance
IEC60229 Tests on cable over sheaths
IEC60230 Impulse tests on cables and accessories
Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from 1
IEC60502
kV up to 30 kV
Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of electric cables and
IEC60811
optional cables
IEC60885 Electrical test methods for electric cables
IEC Power cable accessories with rated voltages up to 30 kV
ASTM D2303 Inclined plane non-tracking test method.
DIN/VDE0273 Cross linked Polyethylene Insulated Cables.
DIN 46391 Cable Delivery Drums
IEC 60183 Guide to the selection of high voltage cables
IEC 60332-3 Test on electric cables under fire condition, Test on Bunched wires or cables
Design and Construction
Construction Details:
The single core underground cable shall be designed for maximum voltage rating of 36kV. The cable shall
comprises of compacted stranded aluminium conductor, with extruded semi-conducting shielding, cross-
linked polyethylene insulation, semi-conducting shielding , copper tape screened, armoured with aluminium
alloy wire and the cable shall be bedded with extruded PVC, and sheathed overall with blue PVC.
Conductors
The conductor shall be a stranded circular compacted conductor of aluminium of cross-section as required
for cable class 2 conductors in accordance with IEC 60228.
Conductor Screen
The conductor screening shall be extruded semi-conducting material (Tapes are not acceptable) to exclude
all air voids. The screen should consist of a layer of at least 1mm thick extruded semi-conductive compound
bonded to the conductor.
Insulation
The insulation shall consist of high quality cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) with suitable thickness for a
voltage rating of Uo/U/Um(19/33/36)kV which is used for 33 kV systems at 50 Hz. Uniform thickness of
insulation shall be within the permissible values as per IEC Standards; eccentricity check shall be carried
out to ensure this.
Insulation Screen
The insulation screen consists of an extruded layer of non-metallic, semiconducting compound
extruded over the insulation. The extruded semi-conducting layer shall consist of bonded or cold
strippable semi-conducting compound capable of removal for jointing or terminating. The screen
should consist of a layer of at least 1mm thick extruded semi-conductive compound bonded to the insulation.
Metal screen
The metal screen shall be double copper tapes. The minimum thickness of copper tape screen should be
0.1mm. The dimension, physical and electrical requirements of the copper tape shall be as per IEC standard.
Separation sheath/Bedding
The separation sheath comprises a layer of extruded PVC or PE applied under the armour .The
nominal thickness is calculated by 0.02Du + 0.6mm where Du is the fictitious diameter under the
sheath in mm. The nominal separation sheath thickness shall not be less than 1.2mm.
Armour
The armour consists of round aluminium alloy wire armour applied helically over an extruded separation
sheath. The armour diameter should be as per IEC60502-2-2014 Table 9.
Outer sheath
The over sheath shall consist of an extruded layer of blue PVC complying with the requirements of
compound ST2 type specified in IEC 60502. The outer sheath shall be spark tested in accordance with IEC
62230. The outer sheath shall be extruded PVC blue in colour, containing a termite repellent additive.
The nominal oversheath thickness is calculated by 0.035D+1 where D is the fictitiuous diameter
immediately under the oversheath in mm.

The Outer Sheath shall be embossed with following minimum text:

• The voltage designation
• Type of construction or cable code
• Manufacturer’s Name and Trade-mark
• Number of cores and nominal cross-sectional area of conductor
• Progressive (sequential) length of cable at every metre, starting from zero for every drum.
Colour filled in for the progressive marking, shall be with proper contrast in colouring.
• Name of buyer or purchaser, EEU
• Month & Year of manufacturing
• Batch No. or Lot No. (For traceability purpose, in case of any manufacturing defect or
otherwise arising in the cable in future.)
 • Purchase Order Number & date
• Pulling-eye Assembly and Sealing-end Cap (for Cables)
• A cable pulling-eye assembly shall be provided at the loose end (outer end) of the cable
on each drum. Sealing material shall be filled in inside the spaces / gaps between the
pulling-eye assembly and cable outer sheath. Further, a heat-shrinkable sleeve shall be
provided over the pulling-eye assembly and outer sheath of cable.
• Other end (inner end) of the cable shall be sealed. One PVC cap with Polyurethane
compound shall be provided as primary sealing and heat-shrink end-cap shall form a
secondary sealing over the PVC cap.
Installation Data
Core screen will be earthed at both ends and cables will be directly buried underground. Depth of lying is
1m for 33 kV cables Short lengths will be installed in air, pipes and ducts.
In addition the Bidder shall advise de-rating factors for variations in the above conditions as well for multiple
circuits.
Cable Characteristics
• Voltage Characteristics
The cable shall fulfil at least the following conditions:

Values
No Voltage Characteristics

1 Rated System voltage 33 kV

2 Maximum System voltage 36kV
3 Highest voltage rating of the cable 36kV
4 Impulses withstand level. 170 kV
5 Power frequency withstands level 70kV
6 System frequency 50 Hz

• Current Carrying Capacity conditions

The cables may be laid directly in the soil, or run in air or ducts, with air and ground temperatures as
prevailing in Ethiopia.
The current capacity shall be stated by the bidder for the following defined conditions:
1 Nominal ground temperature 30 °C
2 Maximum conductor temperature 90 °C
3 Thermal resistivity of soil 1.2 °C m/W
4 Depth of burial 0.9 m
5 Maximum ambient air temperature 50oC
6 Minimum ambient air temperature -5oC
7 Average ambient air temperature. 30 oC
8 Minimum soil temperature 10 oC
Inspection and Testing
All type test, routine test and acceptance test shall be done as per relevant IEC standard only. The bidder
should submit test certificate for type, size and rating of the cables from international accredited testing
laboratory along with bid. Three sets of compete test certificates (routine & acceptance tests) need to be
submitted along with delivery of the cables.
• Type Tests
The following type tests as per the relevant standard shall be conducted on cables of identical design to prove
that one cable of each class satisfies all the design requirements set out in this specification.
For Cable
• Partial discharge test,
• Bending test, plus partial discharge test,
• Dielectric power factor as function of voltage and capacitance measurement, and as a
function of temperature,
• Heating cycle test plus partial discharge test,
• Impulse withstand test, followed by power frequency voltage test,
• High voltage ac test,
• Non-electrical tests as stated in IEC
The following additional type tests shall be carried out.
a) Extruded Insulation Shielding Test per AEIC CS5.
b) Insulation Shield Stripping Test per AEIC CS5.
• Routine and acceptance Tests
During the course of fabrications tests shall be made on samples from each 100 km of conductor to determine
weight, ultimate strength and dc resistance. All factory tests, type tests and sample tests shall be performed
in accordance with IEC 61089/IEC60502/ IEC60228/IEC60885
The tests will be divided into the following categories and conducted as per the relevant standard.
✓ Check for compliance with specifications here in and with the scheduled quantities.
✓ Conductor electrical resistance measurements
✓ Partial discharge test, (MV CABLES ONLY)
✓ High-voltage test
✓ Conductivity of the copper cable shall be minimum 99.9%
Marking, Packing, &Shipment
The following shall be given special attention.
Cable Identification
Cable identification shall include embossing of the PVC over sheath with the following details:
• EEU
• Manufacturer’s name
• Cable size
• Rated Voltage
• Year of Manufacture
• Purchase Order Number and date
The letters and figures shall be raised and shall consist of upright block characters. There should be at least
one such marking set at every 2m to suit manufacturing process.
Cable length marking
Each cable over sheath shall be sequentially marked at one (1) metre intervals from zero up to the specified
drum length, so as to indicate the amount of cable remaining on the drum.
Cable drums and Packing
The MV cables shall be packed in non-returnable wooden drums suitable for storage for up to 3 years in
tropical climates and all the wooden drums shall be anti-termite processed.
Alternatively non-returnable painted steel drums will be also accepted. Painting shall conform to IEC or
British standards.
Wooden/ steel drum will be treated at par for evaluation purpose and accordingly the Bidder should quote
the package.
Drums shall be sturdy and of sufficiently large diameter to prevent damage during shipping, storage in
tropical climate, handling during stringing operations.
Cable drums shall conform to DIN 46391 or equivalent standards.
The following shall apply for all drum types.
• Drum Drawings and specifications
The bidders should submit their drawings of the conductor drums along with the bid. After placement of
letter of intent the supplier shall submit four copies of fully dimensioned drawing of the drum for purchaser's
approval. After getting approval from the purchaser, supplier shall submit 3 copies of the approved drawings.
• Wood type and treatment
All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned new soft wood free from defects that may
materially weaken the component parts of the drums. Preservative treatment for anti-termite/anti fungus shall
be applied to the entire drum with preservatives of a quality which is not harmful to the conductor.
The surface of the cable drum where cable is stored shall be free from sharp objects such as nail ties or
protruding heads, which might damage the conductor.
• Construction
Drum flanges shall be 2-layer construction with minimum 60 mm thickness. Each layer shall be nailed and
fixed with grip nails at approximately 90 degrees. Nails shall be driven from the inside face of the flange,
punched and then clenched on the outer face. There shall not be less than 2 nails per board in each circle.
• Spindle holes
Reels shall be constructed so that they must be supported either on an axle through the reel flange. A round
spindle hole of minimum diameter 120mm is required at the centre of the wooden drums. Spindle
hole/supports shall be reinforced with a suitable steel flange.
• Cable ends
The inner as well as outer end of cable shall be brought out on the drum flange and shall be clamped in such
a manner to make the cable length marking easily visible.
Each end of cable shall be durably sealed at both ends with hot melted paste and provided with shrinkable
end caps to prevent ingress of moisture.
• Cable wrapping with plastic
Before cable reeling, thick plastic or card board or double corrugated or thick bituminized waterproof paper
shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside of flanges of the drum by means of a suitable adhesive. All
materials shall be dry before use. Medium grade Kraft paper shall be used in between the layers of the
conductor. After reeling the conductor the exposed surface of the outer layer of conductor shall be wrapped
with thin polythene sheet across the flanges to preserve the conductor from dirt, grit and damage during
transportation and handling and also to prevent ingress of rain water during storage/transport.
• Lugging
The cables shall be lagged or covered with suitable material to provide physical protection during transit and
during storage and handling operations.
Preferable mode of lugging shall be by wooden lagging on the circumference with a thickness of at least 40
mm.
Drum Sizes
The drums shall have the following dimensions:

Max. Diameter: 2280mm;

Max. Width: 1140mm;
Specific drum dimensions shall be as stated in the technical schedules.
The Supplier shall state the drum dimensions and mark them on the drum.
Cable Drum Length
The length of cable for drum shall be as specified in the technical schedules.
A variation of + 2% of the cable drum length may be acceptable.
All cable lengths cut and used for various tests shall be to contractor's account and shall not be included in
cable length to be supplied.
Bidder shall also indicate the maximum single length, over and above the standard length, he can
manufacture in the guaranteed technical particulars of offer. This may be required for special stretches like
river crossing etc. The Purchaser reserves the right to place orders for the above lengths on the same terms
and conditions applicable for the standard lengths during the validity of the Contract.
Drum Marking
• Direction of drum rolling
The direction for rolling as indicated by an arrow together with the words "Roll this way" shall be marked
on each flange.
Each drum shall be marked to indicate weather proofing.
• Drum Labels/Marking
The drum shall have marking or shall have the data indelibly branded on the cable drum for shipping purpose.
In any case all branding shall be indelibly marked to indicate the following
• Name of Purchaser –EEU
• Contract Number,
• Purchase order number and date
• Manufacturer’s name,
• Trade mark/model if any,
• Conductor type, name and specification
• Conductor size and stranding,
 • Voltage rating
• Exact length of conductor (in meters) contained in the drum,
• Gross weight (kgs) of the loaded drum,
1. Net weight (kgs) of the conductor,
2. Drum Serial Number,
3. Month & Year of Manufacturing
Each case/consignment shall contain a fully detailed packing list covering the above details in a sealed
waterproof envelope.
Three copies of each packing list shall be sent to the Employer prior to dispatch.
Drum Warrantees
The bidder/contractor would implicitly guarantee the soundness of the cable drums for three (3) years.
Should the drums fail within this period, due to poor quality of materials and workmanship, the contractor
shall be responsible for re-drumming the cable/conductor to new drums provided free of charge by the
contractor.
Damage due to careless handling and storage by the client shall not be covered under this guarantee.
Damage due to careless handling and storage by the contractor or his agents shall be fully covered under this
guarantee.
Quality Assurance Plan
A Quality Assurance Plan (QA Plan) including customer hold points covering the manufacturing activities
of the material shall be required to be submitted by the Bidder with the tender.
The contractor shall follow the approved Quality Assurance Plan. If desired by the purchaser, he shall give
access to all the documents and materials to satisfy the purchaser that the Quality Assurance Plan is being
properly followed. Packing and Marking

Guaranteed Technical particulars (G.T.P.) for 33kV Single Core Aluminium

U/G Cable (1X240mm2)
33kV Under Ground single core Aluminum Offered
S.No Unit Required Value
Cable (1X240mm2) Value
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Type designation U.G.
IEC60502,
4 Standard IEC, BS
IEC60228,BS50182
5 System rated Voltage kV 33
5.1 Maximum System rated Voltage kV 36
5.2 Maximum cable rating Voltage kV
5.3 Cable voltage kV Uo/U/Um(19/33/36)
6 Number of cores Single
6.1 Minimum conductivity of cable
7 Number of wires in each conductor number 34
8 Diameter of conductor after compaction mm 17.6-19.2
 33kV Under Ground single core Aluminum Offered
S.No Unit Required Value
Cable (1X240mm2) Value
9 Shape of conductor Compacted stranded
conductor with the
circular shape as per
IEC60228-2004 Table 2-
class 2
10 Normal cross sectional area of Cable mm² 1Cx240
11 Conductor details
11.1 Material Aluminum
11.2 Design IEC 60228
11.3 overall diameter mm
12 Conductor screen
Extruded XLPE semi
12.1 Material
conductive
12.2 thickness, mm 1mm
Maximum dielectric stress at conductor
13 kV/cm
screen (assumed smooth)
14 Insulation
14.1 Material XLPE
minimum radial thickness of insulation
14.2 between conductor screen & core screen mm 10.5
(R01)
15 Insulation Screen
Extruded XLPE semi
15.1 material
conductive
15.2 Thickness 1mm
16 Metallic screen
16.1 material Copper
16.2 Thickness (R02) mm 0.1
Maximum DC resistance of conductor of
17 cable at 20°C (respectively as per Number 3 of ohm/km 0.125
cable lists)
Maximum AC resistance of conductor/ km of
18 cable at 90°C (respectively as per Number 3
of cable lists) ohm/km
Equivalent star reactance of three phase of
19 circuit of 50 Hz, (respectively as per Number ohm/km N/A
3 of cable lists)
Maximum DC resistance of metallic screen of
20 cable at 20°C (respectively as per Number 3 ohm/km N/A
of cable lists)
Maximum electric capacitance per core of
21 cable (respectively as per Number 3 of cable µF N/A
lists)
 33kV Under Ground single core Aluminum Offered
S.No Unit Required Value
Cable (1X240mm2) Value
Maximum charging current per conductor of
22 cable at nominal voltage, (respectively as per mA/km N/A
Number 3 of cable lists)
23 Current carrying capacity in soil at 20°C
A 415
(respectively as per Number 3 of cable lists)
Maximum value of tangent of dielectric loss
24 angle of cable at normal frequency at a N/A
conductor temperature of 20°C
Conductor short circuit current carrying
capacity (for 1 second) with cable loaded with
25 nominal current before short circuit and final kA/s 22.68
conductor temperature of 250°C (respectively
as per Number of cable lists)
Metallic sheath short circuit current carrying
capacity (for 1 second) with cable loaded with
26 kA/s N/A
nominal current before short circuit and final
sheath temperature of 250°C
Nominal overall diameter of complete cable,
27
mm
No smaller than 12
Minimum radius of bending in which cable
28 times of the outer
can be
sheath
28.1 laid direct in ground or in air
28.2 in ducts
with cable placed in position adjacent to joints
28.3 m
and terminations
28.4 laid direct in ground or in air m
28.5 in ducts m
with cable placed in position adjacent to joints
28.6 m
and terminations
29 Separation sheath/Bedding Material
29.1 Material extruded PVC or PE
29.2 minimum thickness mm 1.3
30 Galvanized aluminium alloy armor
a. Number of strips/wire
b. Size (thickness x width) mm
c. diameter of armor steel wire mm 2.5
31 Nominal Thickness of PVC Sheath
 33kV Under Ground single core Aluminum Offered
S.No Unit Required Value
Cable (1X240mm2) Value
a. Minimum thickness mm 2.5
b. Colour Black
c. Weather proof paint mm
32 End Cap
33 operating factor for ambient temperature in
a. At 300c
b. At 350c
c. At 400c
d. At 450c
e. At 500c
Group factor for following number of cables
34
laid
a. 3 numbers
b. 4 numbers
c. 5 numbers
d. 6 numbers
35 Standard delivery length per drum m 250±2%
36 Weight per drum kg
Maximum Drum length that can be provided
37 m
by the manufacturer
38 Embossing Manufacturer name,
buyer name, type &
voltage rating of
cable, month-year of
Mfg, P.O.No. & date
39 Sequential length at every mater To be provided by
printing only in
Visible colour
Signed: __________________

Date ___________________

Company: __________________

Position in Company ________________ Company Stamp

 Product 4 – Power Cable Joints and Terminations
The joints/terminations offered shall conform to the requirements for the components, indicated in
the following clauses.

The Power Cable Joints and Terminations shall comply with the latest editions of and amendments
to, the standards/specifications listed below:

• IEC 60060 High Voltage test techniques;

• IEC 60228 Conductors of Insulated Cables;
• IEC 60230 Impulse tests on cables and their accessories;
• IEC 60437 Radio Interference tests on High Voltage Insulators;
• IEC 60502 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltage
from 1000 V to 30 kV;
• IEEE 48 Standard Test procedures and Requirements for HVAC Cable Terminations;
• IEEE 404 Standard for Power Cable Joints;
• VDE 0278 Accessories for cables for voltages up to 30 kV;
• SEN 241434 Accessories for cables for 1 kV to 420 kV

General
Joints and terminations shall be supplied in complete kit form with all materials and components
required to complete the installation. A complete set of instructions for the joint/termination shall
also be included in each kit.

Cold shrink, pre-moulded joints/terminations or a suitable alternative shall be offered for XLPE
cables and for transition joints.

Resin (acrylic or polyurethane) joints or suitable alternatives shall be offered for LV joints.

If accepted, supplier shall be requested to conduct one week training program for 20 jointers in
Ethiopia for joints and terminations that have not been specified here but have been established to
have equal performance as the ones specified.

All components shall be capable of being stored without damage or deterioration at temperatures
up to 50oC. The material expiry date shall be marked on all packages, where appropriate.

Details of all equipment, tools and protective clothing required to complete the joint/termination
shall be included with each joint termination.
MV Cable Types and Their Accessories
MV cables are either three or single core cables with round compact stranded aluminium or copper
conductor.

Three core MV cable has semi-conducting conductor shield, XLPE insulation, semi-conducting
insulation shield, copper screening tape or copper wire mesh screen, fillers and binding tape, three
core bedding, galvanized steel wire armor and PVC/HDPE over sheath as detailed in this
Specification.

Single core cable has semi-conducting conductor shield, XLPE insulation, semi-conducting
insulation shield, copper tape and wire screen, armor bedding, non-magnetic wire armor and
PVC/HDPE over sheath as detailed in this Specification.

Terminations, joints and other accessories for 15kV and 33kV cables shall be offered for the
following cable sizes:

Size Al 240mm2 Al 400mm2 Al 500mm2

Construction SC SC SC
The following types of joints, terminations and accessories shall be offered:

• Straight Joint
• Transition (HYBRID) Joint
• Outdoor Termination
• Indoor Termination
Connectors and Terminals
Connectors and terminals shall of such design that they are not over stressed under normal cyclic
loading and fault conditions, and shall not limit the rating of the cables which they join.

The Employer is committed to the use of compression tools approved by Employer. The range of
connectors/terminals offered shall be suitable for compression by a range of dies interchangeable
with standard equipment’s, such as Pfisterer/Burndy/Klauke tools. The number of different dies
should be kept to a minimum.

The ends of connectors/terminals shall be suitably chamfered or coned to facilitate insertion of the
conductors. Connectors shall have a solid central barrier to facilitate the insertion of the Conductor
to the correct depth.
The following items of information shall be clearly stamped on each connector/terminal.

(a) Manufacturers’ name or trade mark and also the letters Employer.

(b) The conductor size (metric) for which the connector/terminal is suitable.

(c) The die no. suitable for compressing the connector/terminal.

(d) The part of the connector/terminal surface to be compressed.

(e) The sequence of die action, i.e. the starting point and finishing point.

Compounds or greases for improving contact between the connector/terminal and the conductor are
permitted. They must, however, be chemically neutral to the connector/terminal and conductor
materials and must be pre-filled into the connectors/terminals, being supplied.

Cable connectors/terminals shall be able to accommodate typical dimensional variations in

conductor diameter or insulation thicknesses that may exist in cables supplied by different
manufacturers.

Connector/terminal materials shall not react chemically with the cable conductors to which they are
connected.

Terminals for pole top terminations of 15kv and 33kV cables shall be of the post type capable of
accepting a tap off connector.

Joints and terminations

Components shall not be adversely affected in any manner by contact with other materials normally
used in the construction of cable joints/terminations and shall not increase the rate of corrosion of
any metals with which they may come into contact.

Components supplied with adhesive coatings shall have means to prevent the coated surfaces from
adhering to each other.

Joints/terminations for armoured or shielded cables shall include all items needed for wire or tapes
clamping. Rings shall be provided for such application.

The recovered thickness of insulation over the connector shall be uniform and equal to or greater
than the cable insulation thickness as given in IEC 60502.

The protection provided by the galvanized steel wire armoring shall be reinstated over the joint.
Electric field stress control shall be provided on the joint/termination.

Joints shall provide waterproofing, mechanical and electrical protection, and be completely sealed
from cable jacket to cable jacket. Joints shall accommodate crossing of the cores.

Terminations shall be designed to provide a complete moisture seal, including the crotch area of
multi-core cables and complete rejacketing of the individual cores, conforming to Class 1
terminations as per IEEE 48. It shall be generally suitable for indoor and outdoor installation, be
resistant to ultra violet radiation and chemical attack.

The minimum creep age distances for outdoor cable terminations shall be:

15 kV (Um = 17.5 kV) …….. 542 mm

33 kV (Um = 36 kV)……….. 1116 mm

Insulation level for outdoor cable kits shall be:

15 kV (Um = 17.5 kV) …….. Power frequency withstand voltage= 46kV

Impulse withstand voltage=115kV

33 kV (Um = 36 kV) …….. Power frequency withstand voltage= 85kV

Impulse withstand voltage=205kV

Adhesives used shall have softening temperatures of not less than 90 °C; be compatible with other
components and after curing shall not flow at temperatures of normal service.

Testing and Inspection

Sample Tests
These are intended to verify the quality of the materials and shall be carried out free of charge to
the Employer. They shall be made on sample joints/terminations taken from the Employer's
consignment. The Employer shall have the right to select the samples from each type of
joint/termination at random and they shall amount in number to 0.4% of the quantity in the
consignment subject to an absolute minimum of three.
In the event of a sample not meeting the test requirements, twice the original number of new samples
shall be tested. If all these samples meet the test requirements, the consignment will be acceptable,
but if any fail to do so, the consignment in total will be deemed unacceptable.

The following checks shall be carried out on the chosen samples:

(a) Dimensions must correspond with those shown on the manufacturer's drawing.

(b) The ends of connectors/terminals shall be suitably chamfered or coned to facilitate insertion
of the conductors.

(c) All identification marks shall be clearly distinguishable.

(d) All components and instructions shall be included in the joint/termination package.

(e) Joints/terminations shall be suitably packaged and sealed.

Sample test certificates shall be provided at suitable intervals during manufacture agreed between
the Contractor and the Employer. The test certificate must indicate that the samples chosen have
undergone the checks listed in (a) – (e) above and have been successful. In addition, it should state
that the samples do not suffer from any other defects which could render them unsatisfactory in use.

At agreed intervals, the Contractor shall notify the Employer at least two weeks in advance of
delivery so that the Employer may, if he wishes, choose the samples to be tested and included on
the test certificates.

Type Tests
The Contractor/Contractor shall provide documentary proof in the form of Certified Test
Certificates that the assembled equipment and its component parts been successfully typetested by
an independent testing authority in accordance with quoted Standards. Test Certificates as evidence
of successful completion of type tests shall be submitted as part of the Bid.

Acceptable independent testing Authorities include the following: KEMA - Holland, CESI - Italy,
EDF - France and IREQ, - Quebec, Canada. Approval of type tests certificates supplied by any
other authority is subject to the written acceptance of Employer.

The extent of type testing required for specific consignments shall be at the discretion of the
Employer. The Contractor shall provide a separate schedule of costs for individual type tests.

These tests shall include the following:

 • Impact test;
• AC Withstand test;
• Load Cycling test;
• Thermal Short Circuit test;
• D.C. Voltage Withstand test;
• Partial Discharge test;
• 50 Hz Wet Withstand test;
• Impulse Voltage Withstand test;
• Radio Interference test.
The characteristics of each cable joint or termination as exhibited by the type tests, shall exceed or
match the minimum characteristics of the cables for which they are required.

Technical Schedules
Joints and Terminations (to be completed for each joint/termination type/size)

Item Description Unit Details

1. Catalogue No. - __________

2. Voltage Designation kV __________

3. Outdoor/Indoor (Termination Only) - __________

4. Class of Termination as per IEEE48 - __________

5. Creepage Path (Outdoor Termination Only) mm __________

6. Is a list of Items per kit supplied with Bid or not? _ __________

7. Size of Packing _ __________

8. Weight of Each Splice/Termination kg __________

9. Name of Manufacturer - __________

10. Country of origin _ __________

11. Are details of proposed type test enclosed? Yes/No __________

12. Are details of proposed sample test enclosed? Yes/No __________

13. Are details of proposed quality assurance

program enclosed? Yes/No __________

Approximate shelf life of kit when stored

at up to 50ºC __________

Signed: __________________ Position in Company: ________________

Company: __________________ Date: ___________________

Company Stamp

Product 5– Power Cable Accessories

The items required for cable jointing purposes are listed and detailed in the following clauses.

The Power Cable Accessories shall comply with the latest editions of and amendments to, the
standards/specifications listed below:

• BS 1858 Bitumen based filling compounds for electrical purposes;

• IEC 60454 Specification for pressure-sensitive adhesive tapes for electrical purposes.

Accessories
Bituminous Filling Compounds
Filling compounds offered shall be suitable for operation at temperatures consistent with the
operation of the cable under normal, cyclic and fault conditions. Compound shall be supplied in
sealed tins of 12.5 kg of equivalent weight.
PVC Tape
A general purpose PVC insulating tape with good weathering, electrical and mechanical properties
shall be offered. This tape shall be in accordance with IEC 60454, shall be 25 mm in width and
shall be supplied in roll lengths of 20 m. The tape shall be suitable for operation at temperatures up
to 90oC.

Tape for MV Cable Joints

MV tape for rebuilding the insulation on 15 kV and 33kV cable joints shall be offered. The tape
offered shall be suitable for use on MV paper cable joints and shall have been fully proven in a
completed joint construction. The standard to which the tape conforms shall be quoted.

Petrolatum Tape
Petrolatum (denso) tape for protection of the electrical contacts and metals. The tape offered shall
not deteriorate in contact harsh chemicals and shall not crack or harden have by time.

Vinyl Tape for LV Cable Joints

LV tape for rebuilding the insulation over exposed connectors shall be offered. The tape offered
shall be of self-fusing, rubber based insulating compound, laminated to a flexible, all-weather grade
vinyl (PVC) backing. The tape shall be designed to insulate and moisture-seal all connections up to
600 volts, and have good resistance to abrasion, moisture, alkalis, acid, copper corrosion and
varying weather conditions including direct burial.

Miscellaneous Accessories
For the existing paper insulated cables the following items shall be supplied, to the appropriate
International Standards:

1. Mineral Oil for oil impregnation of cable joints and terminations.

2. Oil Impregnated Paper Separator (Core Spreaders) for jointing 3core cables.

3. Oil Impregnated Paper Tape.

4. Cloth (cotton) Tape.

Testing and Inspection

Sample Tests
These are intended to verify the quality of the materials and manufacture and shall be carried out
free of charge to the Employer. They shall be made on samples of the accessories taken from the
Employer's consignment. The Employer shall have the right to select the samples from each type
of the accessories at random and they shall amount in number to 0.4% of the quantity in the
consignment subject to an absolute minimum of three. In the event of a sample not meeting the test
requirements, twice the original number of samples shall be tested. If all those samples meet the
test requirements, the consignment will be acceptable, but if any fail to do so, the consignment in
total will be deemed unacceptable.

The following checks shall be carried out on the chosen samples:

a) Dimensions of all accessories must correspond to those given in the manufacturer's

specifications/drawings.

b) Accessories must be packaged as per Employer Packing and Shipment Requirements.

c) All accessories must be clearly labelled and identification marks must be clearly
distinguishable.

Sample test certificates shall be provided at suitable intervals during manufacture agreed between
the Contractor and the Employer.

The test certificate must indicate that the samples chosen have undergone the checks listed above
and have been successful. In addition, it should state that the samples do not appear to suffer from
any other defects which could render them unsatisfactory in use.

At intervals agreed, the Contractor should notify the Employer in advance of delivery so that the
Employer may, if he wishes, choose the samples to be tested and included in the test certificates.

Type Tests
Type tests shall be carried out at the Employer's request and shall be priced separately. The tests
shall be carried out in accordance with the appropriate National or International standard.

Type/Design Tests may (at the Employer's discretion) be dispensed with if the
Contractor/Contractor furnishes evidence to the Employer's satisfaction that the relevant tests have
already been performed on identical equipment. In this case the Contractor/Contractor shall provide
documentary proof in the form of Certified Test Certificates that the assembled equipment and its
component parts been successfully typetested by an independent testing authority in accordance
with the relevant clauses of referenced Standards. Test Certificates as evidence of successful
completion of type tests shall be submitted as part of the Bid.
Acceptable independent testing Authorities include the following: KEMA - Holland, CESI - Italy,
EDF - France and IREQ, - Quebec, Canada. Approval of type tests certificates supplied by any
other authority is subject to the written acceptance of the Employer.

Technical Schedules
Accessories
(To be completed for each product type/size)

Item Description Unit Employer's Contractors

Requirements Offer

1. Standard to which the product

was manufactured _____
2. Voltage for product kV _____
connectors is suitable
3. Material of product -- _____
4. No. of years the product is
exported ______
5. Is detailed information
brochure attached?
Yes/No Yes _____

Signed: __________________

Date: ___________________

Company: __________________

Position in Company: ________________

Company Stamp
Product 6 – Fittings
All equipment shall perform without being unduly stressed under normal, cyclic loading and fault
conditions and shall not limit the rating of the conductor on which they are used.

The ends of the connectors and lugs shall be suitably chamfered or coined to facilitate insertion of
the conductors. Straight connectors shall have a solid central barrier to facilitate the insertion of the
correct depth.

Conductor connectors and lugs shall be able to accommodate typical variations in dimensions of
conductors supplied by different manufacturers and shall be of a material which will not react
chemically with the conductors to which they are attached.

Insulator fittings and tension connectors for use in line terminations or anchor points shall be
capable of withstanding a tension force of 70kN.

All fittings shall comply with the latest editions of and amendments to, the standards/specifications
listed below:

• IEC 61284:1997 Overhead Lines – Requirements and Tests for Fittings;

• BS3288 where applicable;
• All relevant DIN and DIN VDE standards (connectors only).
Conductor Specifications
Minimum Conductor
No. and Overall Conductor
Breaking Load DC
diameter of Diameter weight (dry) -
after Stranding resistance at
wire (mm) (mm) kg/km
(kN) 20oC

ALUMINIUM ALLOY STRANDED CONDUCTORS

95mm2 AAAC 19/2.5 12.5 256 26.05 0.358
120mm2 AAAC 19/2.8 14 322 32.68 0.285
150mm2 AAAC 37/2.25 15.8 405 41.09 0.227

String Fittings
All connecting fittings between the conductor and the tower steelwork such as a clevis to tongue,
shackle to plate or link which are subject to a tensile load in service shall comply with IEC 61284
except that each fixing pin shall be secured by a threaded nut and a split pin. A backing washer is
not required and the unthreaded shank of the fixing pin shall extend 3 mm through the clevis or
shackle. The nut shall, during erection, be tightened to the end of the thread and be backed by a
phosphor bronze or austenitic stainless steel split pin. Adequate bearing area between fittings shall
be provided and point contacts shall be avoided wherever this is possible without adversely affecting
the flexibility of the fitting.

Fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be and hot dip galvanized to 630 g/m2 (320 g/m2 for
connecting material). All bolts and nuts shall comply with the relevant standard requirements for
bolts and nuts and shall, unless otherwise specified, be locked by locknuts. The mechanical strength
of the fittings shall be not less than 100kN. All fittings which could be the subject of direct or
indirect lightning or short circuit current shall withstand at least 31.5 kA for 1 second without
alteration of their electrical or mechanical performance values.

Hinge
Universal fitting for tension or suspension string.
Oval eye ball
Universal fitting for tension or suspension string. Ball shall fit IEC 16A socket. Mechanical strength
for this product is 70KN.
Oval eye socket
Universal fitting for tension or suspension string. Socket shall fit IEC 16A ball. Mechanical strength
for this product is 70KN.
Thimble clevis
Fitting for tension string equipped by preformed dead end clamp.
Tap connectors
Tap connectors shall be made of high purity aluminum.

Contractor shall assure that each connector has the following information stamped on: conductor
size (metric) in a way of 250/150 (i.e. run/tap):
Contractor shall supply the complete manual of suitable dies for each compression type connector.
Manual shall cater for all major manufacturers of compression tools (i.e.Pfisterer, Klauke, Burndy,
Chance etc.).

Other Connectors
All connectors shall be made of high purity aluminum or copper respectively.

Contractor shall assure that each connector has the following information stamped on:

• conductor size (metric);

• letters EEU;
• Points of compression
Contractor shall supply the complete manual of suitable dies for each compression type connector.
Manual shall cater for all major manufacturers of compression tools (i.e.Pfisterer, Klauke, Burndy,
Chance etc.).

All below mentioned connectors shall be supplied filled by conductive protection grease and
removable plastic plug.

• Aluminium non tension joint

• Aluminium lug
Shall be suitable for 10 mm stud and shall be supplied with conical washer.
• Bimetal lug I
Shall be suitable for 10 mm stud and shall be supplied with bimetal conical washer.
Joints and Sleeves
Joints for connecting line conductor shall be made of pure aluminum or Al alloy respectively.
Tension joints shall be of the compression type. The design of the joint shall be such as to make it
impossible to position the steel sleeve incorrectly. The electrical resistance of each joint shall not
exceed 75 per cent of the measured resistance of the equivalent length of reference conductor. Full
tension joints shall not permit slipping of or cause damage to or failure of the complete line
conductor or any part thereof at a load less than 95 per cent of the ultimate strength of the line
conductor jointed.

Contractor shall assure that each joint has the following information stamped on:

• conductor size (metric);

• Points of compression.
Contractor shall supply the complete manual of suitable dies for each compression type connector.
Manual shall cater for all major manufacturers of compression tools (i.e.Pfisterer, Klauke, Burndy,
Chance etc.).

• Aluminium full tension joint (Item A)

Joint shall be supplied filled by conductive protection grease and removable plastic plug.
• Aluminium repair sleeve (Item B)
Testing and Inspection
Acceptance of Material
Each separate consignment of material shall be accepted or rejected by the Employer, depending on
the results of tests carried out on the consignment

Test Certificates

Type/Design Tests may (at the Employer's discretion) be dispensed with if the
Contractor/Contractor furnishes evidence to the Employer's satisfaction that the relevant tests have
already been performed on identical equipment. In this case the Contractor/Contractor shall provide
documentary proof in the form of Certified Test Certificates that the assembled equipment and its
component parts been successfully typetested by an independent testing authority in accordance
with the relevant clauses of referenced Standards. Test Certificates as evidence of successful
completion of type tests shall be submitted as part of the Bid.

Approval of type tests certificates supplied by any authority is subject to the written acceptance of
the Employer.

The Contractor shall submit to the Employer certified triplicate copies of test certificates, giving the
results of the tests as required. No materials shall be despatched until the test certificates have been
received by the Employer and the Contractor has been informed that they are acceptable.

The test certificates must show the actual values obtained from the tests in the units used in this
Specification and not merely confirm that the requirements have been met.

Test Certificates shall also carry further information regarding details of the order and drum lengths.
Product 7 – Preformed Ties
Distribution Top Ties, Side Ties and Dead End ties manufactured of Aluminum clad steel to secure
conductors in the top and side grooves of distribution insulators.

The Preformed Binding Ties shall comply with the latest editions of and amendments to, the
standards/specifications of IEC 61284:1997 Overhead Lines – Requirements and Tests for
Fittings.

Each tie is furnished with neoprene tie tube component; the tie tube is detached and applied over
the conductor.

All Dead Ends shall be supplied with a Thimble Clevis as shown in the attached drawings.

Aluminum cladding shall be a minimum of 10% of the nominal tie wire diameter.

Slip strength of the Top and Side Ties shall be a minimum of 15% UTS of the conductor. Slip
strength of the Distribution Dead Ends shall have a minimum of 95% of conductor UTS.

All Distribution Top and Side Ties shall be designed for an insulator neck diameter of 76 mm.

Each fitting shall be color coded to Identify conductor diameter ranges and shall cover all
conductors as stated below.

Conductors are All Aluminium Alloy Conductors following the DIN 48201/6 sizes.

No. and Overall Minimum Breaking

Conductor Type diameter of wire Diameter Load after
(mm) (mm) Stranding (kN)

95mm2 AAAC 19/2.5 12.5 26.05

150mm2 AAAC 37/2.25 15.8 41.09

Testing and Inspection

Acceptance of Material
Each separate consignment of material shall be accepted or rejected by the Employer, depending on
the results of tests carried out on the consignment

Test Certificates
Type/Design Tests may (at the Employer's discretion) be dispensed with if the
Contractor/Contractor furnishes evidence to the Employer's satisfaction that the relevant tests have
already been performed on identical equipment. In this case the Contractor/Contractor shall provide
documentary proof in the form of Certified Test Certificates that the assembled equipment and its
component parts been successfully typetested by an independent testing authority in accordance
with the relevant clauses of referenced Standards. Test Certificates as evidence of successful
completion of type tests shall be submitted as part of the Bid.

Approval of type tests certificates supplied by any authority is subject to the written acceptance of
the Employer.

The Contractor shall submit to the Employer certified triplicate copies of test certificates, giving the
results of the tests as required. No materials shall be dispatched until the test certificates have been
received by the Employer and the Contractor has been informed that they are acceptable.

The test certificates must show the actual values obtained from the tests in the units used in this
Specification and not merely confirm that the requirements have been met.

Test Certificates shall also carry further information regarding details of the order.

Technical Schedules

Nominal Cross Section (mm2) 95 sq. mm 150 sq. mm

Material
Length (mm) - Distribution Tie
Length (mm) - Side Tie
Length (mm) - Dead End
Slip Strength – Top Tie /Side Tie
Slip Strength – Dead End
Colour Code

Signed __________________

Date ___________________

Company __________________

Position in Company ________________

Company Stamp
Product 8 – MV Insulators

This specification applies to covers Design, Manufacture, Testing and supply of 15KV composite
tension insulators to be used for power lines for outdoor services.
CODES & STANDARDS:
Materials, equipment and methods used in the manufacture of 15kv Composite Tension insulators
shall conform to the latest edition of the following International Standard.

Standard Code Standard Description

Insulator and Conductor fittings for overhead power
BS 3288-2
lines. Part 2: Specifications for a range of fittings
High Voltage testing techniques Part 1: General
IEC 60060
definitions and techniques.
Insulation co-ordination Part-1 :Terms, definitions,
IEC 60071-1
Principles and rules
Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of
IEC 60168 ceramic material or glass for systems with nominal
voltages greater than 1000V.
Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators
IEC 60273 and post insulator units for systems with nominal
voltages greater than 1000V.
Tests on insulators of ceramic material or glass for
IEC 60383 overhead lines with a nominal voltage greater than
1000V.
Insulators for overhead lines with the nominal
voltage above 1000v Part I: Ceramic or Glass
IEC 60383-1
insulator units for a.c systems-Definition, test
methods and acceptance criteria.
IEC 60437 Radio interference test on high voltage insulators.
IEC 60720 Characteristics of line post insulators.
Composite Insulators for a.c overhead lines with a
IEC 61109 nominal voltage greater than 1000V-Definition,test
methods and acceptance criteria.
BS 729 Galvanizing.
Insulators of ceramic material or glass for overhead
BS 137
lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000V.
Wet process porcelain insulators (Apparatus, post
ANSI C 29.9
type).

SERVICE CONDITIONS
 Item Parameter
Altitude Any altitude up to 3000m
Annual Rainfall 1250 mm
Period of exceptional Rains June to September
Ambient Air Temperatures:
Average +300c
Minimum -50c
Maximum 500c
Relative Air Humidity 70%
Wind Velocity:
Maximum wind ( height above
ground level) 0-30m 35m/s
30-50m 45m/s
Isoceraunic Level Up to100 thunderstorm days/year
Seismic Zone Level 3 & 4
MAJOR DESIGN CRITERIA

Description Requirement / Rating BY EEU

4.1.0 Rated System voltage 15KV
Rated Highest system
4.1.1 17.5KV
voltage
4.1.1 Equipment highest voltage 24KV
4.1.2 Frequency 50HZ ± 5%
Design of Insulators and Materials

The Insulators shall be designed and assembled to meet the high quality, safety and reliability and
are capable of withstanding a wide range of environmental conditions. And it ensure that no
moisture, water or external substance reach the core.
Polymeric Insulators shall consist of THREE parts, at least two of which are insulating parts:-
(a) Core- the internal insulating part
(b) Housing- the external insulating part
(c) Metal end fittings.

CORE
It shall be a glass-fiber reinforced epoxy resin rod of high strength (FRP rod). Glass fibers and
resin shall be optimized in the FRP rod. Glass fibers shall be Boron free electrically corrosion
resistant (ECR) glass fiber or Boron free E-Glass and shall exhibit both high electrical integrity
 and high resistance to acid corrosion. The matrix of the FRP rod shall be Hydrolysis resistant. The
FRP rod shall be manufactured through Pultrusion process. The FRP rod shall be void free.

i. HOUSING:

The FRP rod shall be covered by a seamless sheath of a silicone elastomeric/silicone rubber
compound or silicone alloy compound of a minimum thickness of 3mm minimum. It shall be one-
piece housing using Injection Molding Principle to cover the core. The elastomeric housing shall
be designed to provide the necessary creepage distance and protection against environmental
influences. Housing shall conform to the requirements of IEC 61109/92-93 with latest
amendments.

ii.WEATHER SHEDS

The composite polymer weather sheds made of a silicone elastomeric/silicone rubber compound
or silicone alloy compound shall be firmly bonded to the sheath, vulcanized to the sheath or
molded as part of the sheath and shall be free from imperfections It should protect the FRP rod
against environmental influences, external pollution and humidity. The weather sheds should have
silicon content of minimum 30% by weight. The strength of the weather shed to sheath interface
shall be greater than the tearing strength of the polymer. The interface, if any, between sheds and
sheath (housing) shall be free from voids.
Silicon rubber should have the following characteristics:
Mechanical Unit Minimum value high Minimum value liquid
characteristics temperature silicone rubber (LSR)
vulcanized (HTV)
Density g/cm3 1.1 0.9
Hardness Shore A 60 40
Breaking stress N/mm 3.5 4.5
Breaking % 200 350
elongations
 Tear strength N/mm 12 17

iii. METAL END FITTINGS:

End fitting of the insulator should transmit the mechanical load to the core. They shall be made of
Galvanized steel, spheroidal graphite cast iron, malleable cast iron or forged steel. They shall be
connected to the rod by means of a controlled compression technique. Metal end fittings shall be
suitable for ball and socket eye hardware of respective specified mechanical load and shall be
hot dip galvanized after, all fittings have been completed. The material used in fittings shall be
corrosion resistant. As the main duty of the end fittings is the transfer of mechanical loads to the
core the fittings should be properly attached to the core by a coaxial or hexagonal compression
process & should not damage the individual fibers or crack the core. The gap between fitting and
sheath shall be sealed by a flexible silicone elastomeric/silicon rubber compound or silicone alloy
compound sealant. System of attachment of end fitting to the rod shall provide superior sealing
performance between housing, i.e. seamless sheath and metal connection. The sealing must be
moisture proof. The dimensions of end fittings of insulators shall be in accordance with the
standard dimensions stated in IEC.
INSPECTION & TESTING
Insulators offered shall be manufactured with the same configuration & raw materials as used in
the insulators for which design & type test reports are submitted. The manufacturer shall submit a
certificate for the same.
DESIGN TESTS:

For polymeric insulators it is essential to carry out design test as per clause 4.1 of IEC 61109 / 92-
93 with latest amendments. The design tests are intended to verify the suitability of the design,
materials and method of manufacture (technology). When a composite insulator is submitted to the
design tests, the result shall be considered valid for the whole class of insulators, which are
represented by the one tested and having the following characteristics:
• Same materials for the core, and sheds and same manufacturing method
• Same material of the fittings, the same design, the same method of
attachment;
• Same or greater layer thickness of the shed material over the core (including a
sheath where used );
• Same or smaller ratio of the highest system voltage to insulation length;
 • Same or smaller ratio of all mechanical loads to the smallest core diameter
between fittings
• Same or greater diameter of the core.
• Tracking and erosion and low current arc discharge.

The tested composite insulators shall be identified by a drawing giving all the dimensions
with the manufacturing tolerances.
Manufacturer should submit test reports for Design Tests as per IEC - 61109 (clause -5) along with
the bid. Additionally following tests shall be carried out or reports for the tests shall be submitted
after award of contract: UV test: the test shall be carried out in line with clause 7.2 of ANSIC29.

6.1.1. Type Tests:

The type tests are intended to verify the main characteristics of a composite insulator. The type tests
shall be applied to composite insulators, the class of which has passed the design tests. The
Following Type test shall be conducted on a suitable number of individual insulator units,
components, materials or complete strings:

SI. Description of type test Test procedure / standard

No
1 Dry lightning impulse withstand voltage test As per IEC 61109(Clause 6.1)
2 Wet power frequency test As per IEC 61109(Clause 6.2)
3 Mechanical load-time test As per IEC 61109(Clause 6.4)
4 Radio interference test As per IEC 61109(Clause 6.5)
Revised
5 Recovery of Hydrophobicity test This test may be
repeated every 3yrs by the
manufacturer
6 Chemical composition test for silicon content any other test
method acceptable to
the owner
7 Brittle fracture resistance test Required
The contractor shall submit type test reports as per IEC 61109 along with the contract agreement.
Additional type tests required if any shall be carried out by the manufacturer, after award of
contract for which no additional charges shall be payable. In case, the tests have already been
carried out, the manufacturer shall submit reports for the same.

ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

The test samples after having withstood the routine test shall be subject to the following
acceptance tests in order indicated below:

(a) Verification of dimensions : Clause 7.2 IEC: 61109,

(b) Verification of the locking system : Clause 7.3 IEC: 61109,
(if applicable)
(c) Verification of tightness of the interface : Clause 7.4 IEC: 61109
Between end fittings & Insulator housing amendment 1of 1995
(d) Verification of the specified : Clause 7.4 IEC: 61109,
mechanical load amendment 1of 1995
(e) Galvanizing test : BS standard
 Company Name: Document No.
ETHIOPIAN ELECTRIC UTILITY EEU/EQRD/04-230

Title:
Issue No. Page 149 of
Technical Specifications for 15KV and 33KV Surge Arrestors. 1
433

ROUTINE TESTS:

Sr.No. Description Standard

1 Identification of marking As per IEC: 61109 Clause 8.1
2 Visual Inspection As per IEC: 61109 Clause 8.2
3 Mechanical routine test As per IEC: 61109 Clause 8.3
4 Routine Electrical Test As per IEC: 61109
5 Dry and wet power frequency test As per IEC
6 Impulse withstand test As per IEC

Every polymeric insulator shall withstand mechanical routine test at ambient temperature
tensile load at RTL corresponding to at least 50 % of the SML for at least 10 sec.
TESTS DURING MANUFACTURE:

Following tests shall also be carried out on all components as applicable

(a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanizing

(b) Chemical analysis, mechanical, metallographic test and magnetic particle
Inspection for malleable castings.
(c) Chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for
Forgings.

Marking
Each insulator shall bear a marking as per ANSI or IEC Standards, Identifying the
following (English):
a. Manufacturer name.
b. Year of manufacturing.
c. Designation number.
d. Cantilever strength (Combined M&E strength Tension insulator).
e. Country of origin.
f. Purchase order No. & Date
g. Property of EEU
H. Maximum voltage

Prepared by Sign Checked by Sign Approved by Sign Rev.No. Date Page

Abebaw Belay Elias Azene Chala Aman No.
EQRD0 Mar 20,2020 149
1
I. Type of material (post insulator).
J. Weight, Kg.
QUALITY ASSURANCE

The manufacturer shall submit Manufacturing Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) for approval
& the same shall be followed during manufacture and testing. The material for final
inspection shall be offered by the Supplier only under packed condition. The owner shall
select samples at random from the packed lot for carrying out acceptance tests.

PACKING, SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE

9 Packing
9.1.1 Packing protection Against corrosion , dampness, heavy rains, breakage
and vibration
9.1.2 Packing for Robust wooden non returnable packing case with all
accessories and spares the above protection and identification labels.
9.1.3 Packing identification In each packing case, following details are required
label :
i) Individual serial number
ii) Purchaser’s name
iii) Purchase order number (along with SAP
item code , if any) & date
iv) Equipment Tag no. (if any)
v) Destination
vi) Manufacturer / Supplier’s name
vii) Address of manufacturer’s / supplier’s its
agent
viii) Description and quantity
ix) Country of origin
x) Month and year of manufacturing
xi) Case measurement
xii) Minimum failing load in kg
xiii) Gross and net weight in kilograms
xiv) All necessary slinging and stacking
instructions.
 9.2 Handling and Storage Manufacturer instruction shall be followed. Detail
handling & storage instruction sheet / manual need
to be furnished before commencement of supply.

The successful bidder shall get approval from the client for its specifications and
drawings before proceed to the mass production.

SCOPE OF SUPPLY

10.1 . The scope of supply shall include the following:

It covers design, engineering, and manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacture’s works,

packing, transportation and submission of complete documentation of insulators.

Sr. No. Description Scope of Supply

1.0 Fully assembled solid core tension insulators YES
with all major parts
1.2 Fixing Bolts for insulators YES
1.3 Routine testing as per this specification YES
1.4 Type testing as per this specification YES
1.5 Submission of Documentation as detailed YES
below

Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 15kV Composite post insulator

Guaranteed Technical Particular
Sr.
Description
No.
Required by EEU Offered by bidder
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
Composite Pin type
3 Type designation
Insulator
IEC61952-2008/IEC
4 Standard
61109
Material of
5 Silicon rubber
Watershed
6 Material of Core Fiberglass rod
7 Material of end Galvanized steel
fitting
 8 Weather shield Grey
Colour
System Voltage 17.5KV
9
Highest
Highest Voltage of 24KV
the Equipment U-
10 max as per IEC at
3000mt above Sea
level
11 Maximum Design
5KN
Cantilever load

12 Specified tensile 25KN

load (STL)

13 Specified cantilever 12.5KN

load (SCL)
14 Power Frequency
Withstand Voltage
50 KV
15 Lightening Impulse
125 KV
with stand Voltage
Minimum puncture
16
Voltage

Test Voltage to
17
Ground
Minimum specific
18 525mm
Creepage distance
19 Minimum Phase to
280mm
phase clearance
20 Height of insulator 390Mm
21 Mounting Stud 38.1Mm
diameter
22 Stud length – 245Mm
overall/thread
23 Net Weight 2.6-Kg
Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 15kv Composite Tension insulators
Guaranteed Technical Particular
Sr. No. Description
Required by EEU Offered by bidder
 1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Type designation Composite Tension type Insulator
4 Standard IEC61952-2008/IEC 61109
5 Material of Watershed Silicon rubber
6 Material of Core Fiberglass rod
7 Material of end fitting Galvanized steel
8 Weather shield Colour Grey
9 System Voltage Highest 17.5KV
Highest Voltage of the 24 KV
Equipment U max as per
10
IEC at 3000mt above Sea
level
11 Maximum Design
5KN
Cantilever load

12 Specified tensile load 70KN

(STL)

13 Specified cantilever load 70KN

(SCL)
14
Power Frequency
Withstand Voltage
50KV

15 Lightening Impulse with

125 KV
stand Voltage
16 Minimum puncture Voltage

17 Test Voltage to Ground

Minimum specific
18 525mm
Creepage distance
Minimum Phase to phase
19 280mm
clearance
20 Length of insulator 446Mm
21 Mounting Stud diameter 16Mm
22 Stud length – overall/thread 300Mm
23 Net Weight 1.4Kg

Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 33kv post insulators

Guaranteed Technical Particular
Sr. No. Description
Required by EEU Offered by bidder

1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin

3 Type designation Composite Pin type Insulator

4 Standard IEC61952-2008/IEC 61109
5 Material of Watershed Silicon rubber
6 Material of Core Fiberglass rod
7 Material of end fitting Galvanized steel
8 Weather shield Colour Grey
9 System Voltage Highest 36KV
Highest Voltage of the Equipment U 52KV
10 max as per IEC at 3000mt above Sea
level
11
Maximum Design Cantilever load 5KN

12 25KN
Specified tensile load (STL)
13 12.5KN
Specified cantilever load (SCL)
14
Power Frequency Withstand Voltage
95 KV
15 Lightening Impulse with stand Voltage 250 KV
16 Minimum puncture Voltage

Diameter of slot on the grove to place

17 30mm
conductor
18 Minimum specific Creepage distance 1080mm
19 Minimum phase to phase clearance 480mm
20 Height of insulator Mm
21 Mounting Stud diameter Mm
22 Stud length – overall/thread Mm
23 Net Weight Kg

Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 33kv Composite Tension insulators

Guaranteed Technical Particular

Sr. No. Description

Required by EEU Offered by bidder

1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
Composite Tension type
3 Type designation
Insulator
4 Standard IEC61952-2008/IEC 61109
Material of
5 Silicon rubber
Watershed
6 Material of Core Fiberglass rod
7 Material of end Galvanized steel
fitting
8 Weather shield Grey
Colour
System Voltage 36KV
9
Highest
Highest Voltage of 52KV
the Equipment U
10 max as per IEC at
3000mt above Sea
level
11 Maximum Design
5KN
Cantilever load

12 Specified tensile load 70KN

(STL)

13 Specified cantilever 70KN

load (SCL)
14
Power Frequency
Withstand Voltage
95KV

15 Lightening Impulse
250 KV
with stand Voltage
 Minimum puncture
16
Voltage

Test Voltage to
17
Ground
Minimum specific
18 1080mm
Creepage distance
Minimum phase to
19 480mm
phase clearance
20 Length of insulator 643mm
21 Mounting Stud 17.8mm
diameter
22 Stud length – 550mm
overall/thread
23 Net Weight 2Kg

Deviations from the Technical Specification (Information to be provided with Tender)

The bidder shall set out below a tabulated statement showing clearly section by section
compliance and departures from the specification and details of alternative proposals. The
bidder will be deemed to have complied with the specification in all respects and as written
unless qualified in this schedule.

Section Departure from the requirements of the Specification with details

of alternative proposals

Signed __________________

Date ___________________
Company __________________

Position in Company ________________

Company Stamp

Product 9 - Covered Conductors

XLPE insulated overhead line cables for 15kv and 33kv voltage levels
Scope
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing and delivery of medium voltage
of 15kV and 33KV voltage level, Overhead line XLPE insulated cables.
Service Conditions
Item Parameter
Altitude 3000m above M.S.L
Annual Rainfall 1250mm
Period of exceptional Rains June to September
Ambient Air Temperatures:
Average +300c
Minimum -50c
Maximum 500c
Relative Air Humidity 70%
Wind Velocity:
Maximum wind( height above ground
level) 0-30m 35m/s
30-50m 45m/s
Isoceraunic Level Upto100 thunderstorm days/year
Seismic Zone Zone 4

The cable shall be used in installations at altitudes of 3000m.

Reference Standards
The XLPE insulated cables shall comply with the latest editions of and amendments to, the
standards/specifications listed below:

IEC 60502 Insulation for the Conductors for the voltages 6.35/11
kV up to and including 19/33 kV
IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cable
EN-BS 50182 Conductors for Overhead lines
IEC 60060 High voltage test techniques
IEC 60104 Aluminium-magnesium-silicon alloy wire for overhead
line conductors
IEC 60229 Tests on cable over sheaths which have a special
protective function and are applied by extrusion
IEC 60287 Electric Cables -Calculation of the current rating
IEC 60811 Common test methods for insulated and sheathing
materials
IEC 60889 Hard drawn aluminium wire for overhead line
conductors
IEC 61089 Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded
conductors
BS 3242 All Aluminium Alloy Conductor
ASTM D2303 Inclined plane non-tracking test method.
ASTMB399 AAAC conductors
Electrical Data
Short-circuit Currents
The Insulated overhead line cable shall withstand the thermal and mechanical effects of
any short-circuit that can appear on the line as per IEC standard.
Insulation Level
The Insulated overhead line cable shall be designed for the following insulation levels.

System Voltage(kV) Maximum System operating voltage System Frequency

in kv
15 17.5 50 HZ
33 36 50 HZ
Property of the Conductors
The conductor shall be of multi-strand round compacted hard drawn aluminium alloy
conforming to BS EN 50182/ IEC 60189. The Conductor wires shall not have any joints
except for those made on the base wire or rod before final drawing.
The number of strands, wire diameter and the tensile strength of the conductor shall
conform to the Technical Requirements. The space between stranded compacted wires
shall not be filled with the grease.
Physical properties of raw conductor
The Conductor(s) offered shall have the following properties before compaction:
Minimum
No. and Overall Conductor Conductor DC
Breaking Load
diameter of Diameter weight (dry) resistance at
after Stranding o
wire (mm) (mm) - kg/km 20 C
(kN)
95mm2 AAAC 19/2.5 12.5 256 27.51 0.3546
120mm2 AAAC 19/2.8 14 321.2 34.51 0.2827
150mm2 AAAC 37/2.25 15.8 405 43.4 0.2256
185mm2 AAAC 37/2.5 17.5 500.3 53.58 0.1827

The outer diameter of the compacted conductor shall be 95% (± 1% for 7- and 19-wire
constructions, ± 1,5% for 37/61-wire constructions) of the diameter given above.
The compacted conductor minimum breaking load shall be at least 95% of the value given
above and dc resistance of shall not exceed the value given above by more than 5%.
Covering insulation
XLPE Insulation
The covering shall consist of a cross-linked polyethylene compound, which shall comply
with there quirements according to BS EN 50397 -2006 Table 1 or as per IEC60502.
It shall be possible to remove the covering material without damage to conductor.
The XLPE covering insulating material shall be of track resistant and UV stabilized
(weather resistant) as per Standard Specified.
The colour and average thickness of the covering insulation shall be as stipulated below:
Nominal Voltage 15 kV ………colour BLACK …………………………thickness 4.5
±0.1 mm
Nominal Voltage 33 kV………..colour Red……………………………..thickness
8±0.1 mm
The hardness of the covering XLPE shall be such that it should not get damaged by the kite
string and suitable for fixing insulation piercing Arc Protectors.
The covering shall be fully pressure extruded and dry cured so as to provide a uniform
thickness throughout the length of the conductor.
Water blocking
Suitable water blocking material shall be incorporated between the conductor and the
covering during the extrusion process to prevent the migration of water along the
conductor.
The water blocking material shall be of contrasting colour to that of the conductor.
The water blocking material shall not affect the inter-strand conduction and also not affect
the adhesion between the conductor and the XLPE cover.
Water blocking material shall be stable at maximum operating temperature of 900C and full
technical particulars with regard to the above shall be furnished with the offer.
Insulated end cap
The Insulated End Cap shall be suitable for effectively sealing the end terminal of the
covered conductors. The inner diameter of the Cap shall be such that it shall tightly fit to
the covered conductors to prevent entry of moisture.
Testing and Inspection
Acceptance of material
Each separate consignment of material shall be accepted or rejected by the Employer,
depending on the results of tests carried out on the consignment.
Acceptance tests shall be carried out on samples from not less than 10% of the individual
lengths of conductor wire to be included in any one consignment.
Each sample shall be of sufficient length to provide one test specimen for each of the
specified tests.
If any one sample fails to pass any one of the tests nominated for the conductor/wire, then
samples shall be taken from every drum in the consignment and any drum length from
which a sample proves defective shall be rejected. On no account shall any rejected
material be presented again for test unless with the written approval of, and under
conditions determined by the Employer.
Raw conductor tests
Hard Drawn Stranded Aluminium Alloy Conductors will be subject to tests according to:
• IEC 61089 (1991-05).
• DIN 48200-6
• BS_EN 50182:2001

ROUTINE TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS

Each separate consignment of material shall be accepted or rejected by the Purchaser,
depending on the results of tests carried out on the consignment
"Before Stranding" tests shall be carried out on samples of wire, selected from not less than
10% of the individual lengths of wire to be included in any one consignment.
Each sample shall be of sufficient length to provide one test specimen for each of the
specified tests.
"After Stranding" tests shall be carried out on samples selected from every drum in the
consignment. Each sample shall be of sufficient length to provide one test specimen for
each of the appropriate tests.
If anyone sample fails to pass any one of the tests nominated for the conductor/wire, then
samples shall be taken from every drum in the consignment and any drum length from
which a sample proves defective shall be rejected. On no account shall any rejected
material be presented again for test unless with the written approval of, and under
conditions determined by the Purchaser.
Each sample shall be subjected to the tests described hereafter. Test methods, shall be in
accordance with IEC 61089, unless otherwise specified.
Each Aluminium Wire Sample
✓ Diameter Measurement
 ✓ Tensile Strength Measurement -IEC 61089
✓ Resistivity Test IEC 61089
✓ Wrapping Test IEC 61089

Each Complete Conductor Sample

✓ Lay Ratio of Each Layer (to be measured).
✓ Tensile Strength of Complete Conductor
✓ This shall be measured in accordance with IEC 61089. Alternatively, the Tensile
Strength may be calculated from the results of tests on individual wires using the
method of IEC 61089.
✓ Resistivity of Complete Conductor
✓ This shall be measured in accordance with IEC 61089 , as applied to individual
aluminum wires. Alternatively, the resistivity may be calculated from the results of
tests on individual wires, using the method of IEC 61089.
✓ Electrical tests on sheath as per IEC 62230 on insulated conductors only)
Covered conductor tests
Covered conductors shall be subjected to the tests as per requirements of BS EN 50397 -
2006 Part 1, Table 2.
Test certificates
Type/Design Tests may (at the Employer's discretion) be dispensed with if the
Contractor/Contractor furnishes evidence to the Employer's satisfaction that the relevant
tests have already been performed on identical equipment. In this case the
Contractor/Contractor shall provide documentary proof in the form of Certified Test
Certificates that the assembled equipment and its component parts been successfully type-
tested by an independent testing authority in accordance with the relevant clauses of
referenced Standards. Test Certificates as evidence of successful completion of type tests
shall be submitted as part of the Bid.
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer certified triplicate copies of test certificates,
giving the results of the tests as required. No materials shall be despatched until the test
certificates have been received by the Employer and the Contractor has been informed that
they are acceptable.
The test certificates must show the actual values obtained from the tests in the units used
in this Specification and not merely confirm that the requirements have been met
MARKING, PACKING, & SHIPMENT
Conductor drums and Packing
The conductors shall be packed in non-returnable wooden drums suitable for storage for
up to 3 years in tropical climates.
Alternatively non-returnable painted steel drums will be also accepted. Painting shall
conform to IEC or British standards.
Wooden/ steel drum will be treated at par for evaluation purpose and accordingly the
Bidder should quote the package.
Drums shall be sturdy and of sufficiently large diameter to prevent damage during
shipping, storage in tropical climate, handling during stringing operations.
Conductor drums shall conform to DIN 46391 or equivalent standards.
No drum shall contain more than one length of conductor.
The following shall apply for all drum types.
Drum Drawings and specifications
The bidders should submit their drawings of the conductor drums along with the bid. After
placement of letter of intent the supplier shall submit four copies of fully dimensioned
drawing of the drum for purchaser's approval. After getting approval from the purchaser,
supplier shall submit 3 copies of the approved drawings.
Wood type and treatment
All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned New soft wood free from
defects that may materially weaken the component parts of the drums. Preservative
treatment for anti-termite/anti fungus shall be applied to the entire drum with preservatives
of a quality which is not harmful to the conductor.
The surface of the conductor drum where conductor is stored shall be free from sharp
objects such as nail tips or protruding heads, which might damage the conductor.
Construction
Drum flanges shall be 2-layer construction with minimum 60 mm thickness. Each layer
shall be nailed and fixed with grip nails at approximately 90 degrees. Nails shall be driven
from the
inside face of the flange, punched and then clenched on the outer face. There shall not be
less than 2 nails per board in each circle.
Spindle holes
Reels shall be constructed so that they must be supported either on an axle through the reel
flange. A round spindle hole of minimum diameter 120mm is required at the centre of the
wooden drums. Spindle hole/supports shall be reinforced with a suitable steel flange.
Conductor ends
The inner as well as outer end of conductor shall be brought out on the drum flange and
shall be clamped in such a manner to make the conductor length marking easily visible.
Each end of conductor shall be crimped to prevent unwinding and causing danger.
Conductor wrapping with plastic
Before conductor reeling, thick plastic or card board or double corrugated or thick
bituminized waterproof paper shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside of flanges of
the drum by means of a suitable adhesive. All materials shall be dry before use. After
reeling the conductor the exposed surface of the outer layer of conductor shall be wrapped
with thin polythene sheet across the flanges to preserve the conductor from dirt, grit and
damage during transportation and handling and also to prevent ingress of rain water during
storage/transport.
Lugging
The conductors shall be lagged or covered with suitable material to provide physical
protection during transit and during storage and handling operations.
Preferable mode of lugging shall be by wooden lagging on the circumference with a
thickness of at least 40 mm.
Drum Sizes
The drums shall have the following dimensions:

Max. Diameter: 2280mm;

Max. Width: 1140mm;

Specific drum dimensions shall be as stated in the technical schedules.

The Supplier shall state the drum dimensions and mark them on the drum.
Conductor Drum Length
Standard length shall be considered as 500m if not otherwise specified. The length of
conductor for drum shall be as specified in the technical schedules.
A variation of + 5% of the conductor drum length may be acceptable.
All conductor lengths cut and used for various tests shall be to contractor's account and
shall not be included in conductor length to be supplied.
Bidder shall also indicate the maximum single length, over and above the standard length,
he can manufacture in the guaranteed technical particulars of offer. This may be required
for special stretches like river crossing etc. The Purchaser reserves the right to place orders
for the above lengths on the same terms and conditions applied conductor for the standard
lengths during the validity of the Contract.
Drum Marking
Direction of drum rolling
The direction for rolling as indicated by an arrow together with the words "Roll this way"
shall be marked on each flange.
Each drum shall be marked to indicate weather proofing.
Drum Labels/Marking
The drum shall have metallic or plastic plates /labels or shall have the data indelibly
branded on the conductor drum for shipping purpose. In any case all branding shall be
indelibly marked to indicate the following:
 • Name of Purchaser –EEU
• Contract Number,
• Manufacturer’s name,
• Trade mark/model if any,
• Conductor type, name and specification
• Conductor size and stranding,
• Exact length of conductor (in meters) contained in the drum,
• Gross weight (kgs) of the loaded drum,
• Net weight (kgs) of the conductor,
• Drum Serial Number,
Each case/consignment shall contain a fully detailed packing list covering the above details
in a sealed waterproof envelope.
Three copies of each packing list shall be sent to the Employer prior to dispatch.
Drum WARRANTEES
The bidder/contractor would implicitly guarantee the soundness of the conductor drums
for three (3) years.
Should the drums fail within this period, due to poor quality of materials and workmanship,
the contractor shall be responsible for re-drumming the conductor/conductor to new drums
provided free of charge by the contractor.
Damage due to careless handling and storage by the client shall not be covered under this
guarantee.
Damage due to careless handling and storage by the contractor or his agents shall be fully
covered under this guarantee.

Guaranteed technical particulars of XLPE insulated overhead line cable

(to be completed for each Conductor Size)
15KV/XLPE Covered Conductor AAAC 95 mm2 for Overhead line

1. BARE CONDUCTOR BEFORE COMPACTING AS PER

BSEN50182-Table AL3
Requirement Offered

Nominal Cross Section (mm2) 95

No. and diameter of wire (mm) 19/2.5

Overall Diameter (mm) 12.5

Conductor Minimum Breaking Load after Stranding (kN) 27.51

Conductor DC resistance at 20oC 0.3546

Bare Conductor weight - kg/km 256

2. INSULATION AS PER IEC60502

Insulation thickness (mm) >4.5 ±0.1 mm
Insulation material XLPE
Insulation colour Black

3. XLPE INSULATED CABLE

Overall Diameter (mm) <21mm

Cable Minimum Breaking Load (kN)

Conductor DC resistance at 20oC

Modulus of Elasticity (kN/mm2)

Drum Dimensions

Length of Conductor/Drum 500meter

15KV/XLPE Covered Conductor AAAC 150 mm2 for Overhead line

1. BARE CONDUCTOR BEFORE COMPACTING AS PER

BSEN50182-Table AL3
Requirement Offered

Nominal Cross Section (mm2) 150

No. and diameter of wire (mm) 37/2.25

Overall Diameter (mm) 15.8

Conductor Minimum Breaking Load after Stranding (kN) 43.4

Conductor DC resistance at 20oC 0.2256

Bare Conductor weight - kg/km 405

2. INSULATION AS PER IEC60502

Insulation thickness (mm) >2.3 ±0.1 mm
Insulation material XLPE
Insulation colour Black

3. XLPE INSULATED CABLE

Overall Diameter (mm) <20.6mm

Cable Minimum Breaking Load (kN)

Conductor DC resistance at 20oC

Modulus of Elasticity (kN/mm2)

Drum Dimensions

Length of Conductor/Drum 500meter

33KV/XLPE Covered Conductor AAAC 95 mm2 for Overhead line

1. BARE CONDUCTOR BEFORE COMPACTING AS PER
BSEN50182-Table AL3
Requirement Offered

Nominal Cross Section (mm2) 95

No. and diameter of wire (mm) 19/2.5

Overall Diameter (mm) 12.5

Conductor Minimum Breaking Load after Stranding (kN) 27.51

Conductor DC resistance at 20oC 0.3546

Bare Conductor weight - kg/km 256

2. Conductor screen
Minimum thickness of conductor screen 0.5mm
3. INSULATION AS PER BS EN 50397 -2006
Table 1
Insulation thickness (mm) >4.5 ±0.1 mm
Insulation material XLPE
Insulation colour Red

4. XLPE INSULATED CABLE

Overall Diameter (mm) <25.5mm

Cable Minimum Breaking Load (kN)

Conductor DC resistance at 20oC

Modulus of Elasticity (kN/mm2)

Drum Dimensions

Length of Conductor/Drum 500meter

33KV/XLPE Covered Conductor AAAC 150 mm2 for Overhead line

1. BARE CONDUCTOR BEFORE COMPACTING AS PER
BSEN50182-Table AL3
Requirement Offered

Nominal Cross Section (mm2) 150

No. and diameter of wire (mm) 37/2.25

Overall Diameter (mm) 15.8

Conductor Minimum Breaking Load after Stranding (kN) 43.4

Conductor DC resistance at 20oC 0.2256

Bare Conductor weight - kg/km 405

2. Conductor screen
Minimum thickness of conductor screen 0.5mm
3. INSULATION AS PER BS EN 50397 -2006
Table 1
Insulation thickness (mm) >4.5 ±0.1 mm
Insulation material XLPE
Insulation colour Red

4. XLPE INSULATED CABLE

Overall Diameter after insulation (mm) <28.5mm

Cable Minimum Breaking Load (kN)

Conductor DC resistance at 20oC

Modulus of Elasticity (kN/mm2)

Drum Dimensions

Length of Conductor/Drum 500meter

Signed: __________________

Date ___________________

Company: __________________

Product 11 – Concrete Poles

This specification covers the technical aspects of materials, design, manufacturing,
inspection, testing, and delivery of pre-stressed concrete pole.
The most recent editions of the following codes and standards shall be followed in the
design, manufacture, and inspection, testing and delivery of concrete poles.
• BS EN 12843 Precast concrete products — Masts and poles;
• BS EN 206-1:2000 Concrete. Specification, performance, production and
conformity;
• BS EN ISO 15630 Steel for the reinforcement and pre-stressing of concrete.
• Reinforced concrete materials, quality control and design shall be carried out in
accordance with BS 8110 (and all appropriate British Standards as well as Canadian
Standards Association: CAN/CSA-A23.1, CAN/CSA-A23.2, CAN/CSA-A23.3, latest
edition, or others International approved standards).
• Ethiopia Building code of standard 1995 edition as well.
• ACI 318-02 and ACI 318 R-02, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
concrete.
• American Welding Society, AWS D1.1, Recommended Procedures for Welding,
Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts, and Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction

• American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):

ASTM A82 Steel Wire Plain, For Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A496 Steel Wire, Deformed For Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A615/A615M, Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars For

Reinforcement

ASTM A617/A617M, Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars For

Reinforcement
ASTM A641M Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire (Metr
ASTM A706A/A706M, Low Alloy Steel Deformed Bars For Concrete Rein
ASTM C31 and 39, Specifications for Sampling Concrete and Testing
Cylinders
ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C150 Portland Cement
ASTM C172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C289 Testing Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggreg
ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures For Concrete
- Industrial Fasteners ASTM C881 Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete
Institute (IFI): Fastener ASTM C1089 Standard Specification For Spun Cast Pre-stressed
Standards Poles
- Contractor may also
propose other National; Standards for the Engineer’s approval.
General standardization
Poles shall be designed for standardized range in the following load classes:

Class 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Fmax (kN)*) 20.0 16.5 13.4 10.7 8.5 6.7 5.3

*)
Fmax………………………….maximum working load at 600mm from top of pole

Poles shall be designed for standardized lengths in following range:

8 m, 9 m,10 m, 11 m, 12 m, 13 m and 14 m

Design Requirements
The poles shall present the most pleasing appearance possible consistent with the strength
and serviceability requirements. The poles shall be round-conical. Poles may be designed
as pre-stressed spun concrete poles (hollow) or pre-stressed concrete poles.

The pole shall be capable of withstanding all specified loadings. The pole shall withstand
the loads without failure and without exceeding any specified deflection limitations.

Deflection limitation at service load shall be 4% of the height above ground.

Top diameter limitation to be applied during the design is:

• Minimum 200 mm;

• Maximum 240 mm.

Safety factor used for calculation shall be:

2.2 For transversal loads;

1.5 for vertical loads.

Holes shall be provided for mounting of earth conductor supports, cross arms and all other
pole mounted equipment for construction and service conditions. “Basic” holes
arrangement is shown on attached sketch and shall be provided on all pole top sections, but
the Supplier shall seek further clarification from the Purchaser during the design period.

Poles shall withstand the loading conditions, including specified overload factors. The pole
design shall include allowances for loads from handling, transportation, and erection
without failure, permanent deformation, or damage to the pole when handled according to
the Supplier’s instructions.

Poles shall be designed so that the ultimate strength of the pole exceeds the required
strength calculated from the factored loads applied to the pole multiplied by required factor
of safety. The point of fixity on the pole shall be considered at ground line which is not
less than 1/6 of actual pole length measured from the butt of the pole.

Poles shall be designed so that the cracking strength of the pole exceeds the required
strength calculated from the service loads applied to the pole.

Poles shall be designed in combination with the appropriate column load applied along the
pole axis as a result of the stays, braces, etc.

Poles shall be designed to withstand a one-point (tilting) pickup during erection. The
Supplier shall include the weight of the pole with all insulators and hardware attached The
poles shall be designed for two-point pickup for horizontal handling and double line
network in case of narrow corridor.In addition may carry LV or other fiber optic lines along
the route. All pickup points shall be clearly shown on the fabrication drawings. All poles
shall be designed for the loads generated from handling and erecting without exceeding the
cracking moment capacity of the poles.

The design of each pole shall be performed using the applicable codes and standards.

Pole design and design calculations shall be the responsibility of the Supplier. However,
all the design shall be submitted to the Purchaser for approval.

Pole shall be designed to resist stress due to transportation and handling.

The design shall be such as to keep the number of different parts as small as possible and
to facilitate transport, erection and inspection. Pockets and depressions likely to hold water
shall be avoided and, if not avoidable, shall be properly drained.
Every pole shall be equipped by earthing terminal made of bronze, brass or stainless steel,
embedded (or otherwise permanently fixed) into concrete surface of pole located 2.6 to 2.8
meters from pole butt. The bolt/nut size on terminal shall not be less than size M12.

Approval of Designs
The Supplier shall submit for approval loading diagrams for each type of structure before
proceeding with detail design.

After the agreement to the structure design, the Supplier shall prepare and submit General
Arrangement and Erection drawings.

For each scenario and load case, design calculations including the maximum reactions
(moments, shears, and axial loads, including safety factors) in poles at the ground line or
point of fixity, stay wire loads, deflections, and analyzed stress reactions.

After the Supplier's proposal has been accepted, the Supplier shall submit to the Purchaser
four copies of each fabrication drawing. One set of these drawings will be returned to the
Supplier with indication of review corrections. Where a correction is required, four revised
copies shall be resubmitted to the Purchaser. These revised copies shall be marked
“Revised” and dated.

Final fabrication drawings for each different framing pattern and pole calculations for each
load case shall be submitted to and approved by the Purchaser before release of order for
manufacture.

All design and detail drawings shall be reviewed and approved by the Purchaser before
pole manufacture.

All final drawings shall become the property of the Purchaser, who shall have full rights to
reproduce and use them.

Information to be provided on drawings:

The Supplier shall be responsible for the correctness of dimensions and details on the
drawings. The review of such drawings by the Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of
this responsibility.
Drawing titles shall clearly indicate the Purchaser name and pole-type identification. Each
detail drawing shall include the following minimum information:

a. Complete dimensional information.

b. Description and location of all steel reinforcements, per stressing steel and, if drop
out system is used, the location of each steel cable dropout.
c. Twenty-eight day strength of concrete and strength of concrete.
d. Size, description, quantity, and location of all holes and hardware that is a part of
the pole.
e. Weight and location of the centre of gravity of the pole.
f. Location of climbing devices and grounding inserts.
g. Location of ground line.
h. The ultimate moment and cracking moment capacities at the ground line or point
of fixity.
i. Any other special information deemed necessary by the Supplier and Purchaser.
Materials
The chemical properties of materials used in the manufacture of the poles shall meet the
requirements of the applicable BS specification and Ethiopia Building Code of Standard as
well.

The cement used in manufacture of the pole shall be of Portland cement) conforming to
relevant BS. Use of Portland-blast furnace, high alumina or sulphate-resisting cement
requires Purchaser’s approval.

Coarse aggregates shall be clean, tough, crushed stone conforming to relevant BS. The
nominal size of aggregates shall not exceed 14 mm.

Aggregate shall be tested in accordance with relevant BS or equivalent to determine an

alkali-aggregate reaction. Crushed rock or partially crushed rock shall be the source of the
aggregate.

Water shall be clean, free from undesirable amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic
materials, or other deleterious substances.

Admixtures shall conform to relevant BS and can be used if approved by the Purchaser.
Water-cement Ratio and Total Aggregate-cement Ratio
A simple and convenient system of accurately varying the water supply to the concrete
mixers shall be installed with gauges marked so that the amount fed into the mixer may
easily be ascertained.

The water/cement ratio for the various classes of concrete shall be determined by trial
mixes. In no case, shall the water/cement ratios used in the Works, be allowed to exceed
by more than 5 percent, those proposed in the concrete mix design and confirmed as
acceptable by the trial mixes.

Efficient means shall be provided for determining the moisture content of the sand and
coarse aggregate at all times.

The Supplier shall be required to have an accurate knowledge of the moisture content of
all sand and coarse aggregates as they reach the mixer and he shall make such adjustments
to the mix as are necessitated by change in the moisture content of the aggregates.

For ordinary Portland cement concrete, including the Portland-blast furnace cement
concrete, rapid hardening Portland cement concrete or sulphate resistant Portland cement
concrete the proportion of cement to total aggregate shall not be less than 1:5.

Strength of Concrete
The strength and other data for concrete are defined on the basis of standard tests. The
compressive strength of concrete to be determined from test on the 150 mm cubes at the
age of 28 days in accordance to Ethiopian code of standard cylindrical or cubical specimens
of other sizes may be used with conversion factors determined from a comprehensive series
of tests. The tensile strength shall be determined by test, in accordance with relevant
standards. The modulus of elasticity to be used in design should be determined by test.

Since, it is not only depending on the concrete strength but also on the material use such as
aggregates used.

• Use Poisson’s ration of 0.2;

• Thermal expansion of 10x10-6 per o c.
Grade of Concrete
The concrete graded in terms of its characteristic compressive cube strength. Classification
of the concrete work is class I this means machine intensive. The minimum grade of
concrete to be used for the pole casting is C-40.

Reinforcement and Pre-stressing Steel

The pre-stressing steel shall be plain hard-drawn steel wire or multi-wire strand complying
with the requirements of the relevant BS. Wires (or bars) shall be free from grease or other
material likely to impair the bond.

The un-tensioned steel reinforcement shall be free from loose rust, scale, oil or grease and
shall comply with the requirements of relevant BS.

For bond and anchorage the surface of ribbed bars or pre-stressing steel shall be such that
adequate bond is obtained the concrete, permitting the full force that is assume in design,
to be developed in the reinforcement.

All drawings, calculations and details shall be available before commencement of any type
tests.

Pole Cap (Spun Concrete only)

All poles shall be equipped by cap made preferably from HDPE. This cap will fit to pole
top and will serve as waterproofing measure. The cap will be fixed to pole top after erection
and shall be of a ribbed type hold by the friction of the ribs on internal pole wall.

Pole Marking
All poles shall be equipped by weather proof marking at the distance of 3 meters from pole
butt. The mark shall consist of:

• Year of manufacture;
• Totals length of pole;
• Pole Strength ( kN);
• Standard used for manufacturing;
• Depth mark “▼ 3 m”.
• “Property of EEU”

Inspection
The Supplier shall make adequate tests and inspections to determine that each of the poles
furnished is in strict accordance with this specification. At the request of the Purchaser,
the Supplier shall submit a quality assurance report to the Purchaser prior to the
transportation of each pole and shall include the following minimum information:

• Minimum and maximum tip wall thicknesses and steel coverage (to inside and
outside) measurements shall be made at 76 mm from the tip;
• Minimum and maximum butt wall thicknesses and steel coverage (to inside and
outside) measurements shall be made at 76 mm from butt;
• Condition of pole interior and evidence of exposed rings or reinforcement steel;
• Proper hole and insert locations and sizes;
• Evidence of cracking during or after two-point handling;
• Actual manufactured pole weight;
• Report of any repairs made to the pole;
• Date of manufacture and inspection(s); and
• Inspector’s seal.
All material and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination, and test for
conformance to the requirements of this specification by the Purchaser. The inspection,
examination, or testing could be done at any time during material procurement,
manufacturing, storage periods, transit, or at the pole destination.

The shall have free entry, at all times, while work is being carried on, to all parts of the
Supplier's plant where manufacture of the project's poles is being performed. The Supplier
shall afford the Purchaser reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy the Purchaser that
the poles are being manufactured in strict accordance with this specification.

The Supplier shall furnish certified test reports to the Purchaser, upon request, showing the
results of all of the tests required by this specification and applicable reference
specifications.

Tests shall be in accordance with all applicable standard specifications and codes.

Failure of the Supplier to comply with these specifications will be sufficient reason for
rejection of any or all poles which do not comply with these specifications.
Details of all test procedures contained herein and methods of measuring and recording test
loads and deflections shall be specified by the Supplier and approved by the Purchaser prior
to manufacture. The tests will be done on site.

Material procurement for test poles shall be identical to material procurement procedures
for regular production run poles.

The design load testing of any specific pole shall be on a full-scale basis. Costs for such
testing shall be the responsibility of the Supplier included in the poles price, shall be.

The number, location, direction, holding time, sequence, and increments of the test loads
along with the number, location, and direction of deflection readings for an individual pole
test shall be approved by the Purchaser prior to pole testing.

The method of attaching the test loads to the pole, applying the test loads, measuring and
recording the test loads, and measuring and recording the deflections shall be approved by
the Purchaser prior to pole testing.

A full report listing results shall be submitted to the Purchaser after completion of all tests.
Copies of mill test reports shall be included in the load test report. The report shall also
include a complete description of the load tests with diagrams and photographs. If required,
the Supplier shall provide the Purchaser with Method of full scale testing: upright or
horizontal and descriptions, tools, and drawings describing the above test.

Use of any factory tested poles to meet order requirements shall be determined by the
Purchaser.

Approvals and Acceptance

Final designs must be approved by the Purchaser before material ordering. Material
ordering and fabrication prior to approval of the Purchaser will be at the Supplier's risk.
Award of the contract to the Supplier does not constitute acceptance of design calculations
submitted with the bid. If corrections are required in the final pole designs due to Supplier's
errors, omissions, or misinterpretations of the specifications, the quoted price shall not
change. Approval of the drawings and calculations by the Purchaser does not relieve the
Supplier of responsibility for the adequacy of the design, correctness of dimensions, details
on the drawings, or the proper fit of parts.
Poles failing to meet strength requirements, poles with circumferential or longitudinal
cracks, poles failing to meet manufacturing tolerances or cover requirements, poles with
exposed steel, poles with cavities that absorb water, and spliced poles that do not fit
together properly or are distorted after mating shall be rejected by the Purchaser and
replaced by the Supplier at no additional cost.
Technical Data Schedule – Guaranteed Characteristic
(TO BE COMPLETED FOR EACH POLE CLASS AND LENGTH)

Item Description Units Required Offered

1 Design Standard - BS EN 12843
2 Class of pole -
3 Length of pole m
5 Top diameter mm 200-240
6 Butt diameter mm
7 Rated working load at 600 mm from top kN
8 Deflection at everyday load/length % 4
9 Ultimate working load at 600 mm from kN
top
10 Deflection at maximum load/length %
11 Safety factor used for transversal loads - 2.2
12 Safety factor used for vertical loads - 1.5
13 Number of tensioned rebar’s -
14 Number of untensionedrebar’s -
15 Steel quantity kg
16 Volume of concrete m3
17 Weight kg
18 Section - round
19 Cement type -
20 Bending moment at 1/6 of length from kNm
butt

Signed __________________ Date ___________________

Company __________________

Position in Company ________________

Company Stamp
Product 12 - Galvanized Steel Cross arms
Scope
This Technical Specification covers the design, fabrication, tests, inspection, packing and
delivery of hardware accessories used in overhead electrical distribution systems. The
reference to specifications or organizations together with any drawings or loading diagrams
shall be considered part of the specification.

List of Items:-

⮚ 15kV Suspension Crossarm for Single Line (150mmx75mmx1500mm(6.4/9) U-

shaped

⮚ 15kV Standoff Crossarm for Single Line (150mmx75mmx700mm(6.4/9) U-shaped

⮚ 15kV T-off Crossarm for Single Line (150mmx75mmx2000mm(6.4/9) U-shaped

⮚ 15kV T-off Crossarm for Double Line (150mmx75mmx2500mm(6.4/9) U-shaped

⮚ Crossarm for Transformer Base (200mmx75mmx3000mmx9mm)) U-shaped

⮚ Crossarm for Arrester and Drop out Fuse (150mmx75mmx3000mmx6.4/9mm) U-

shaped

⮚ Cross arm for LV Pole mounted distribution box

(150mmx75mmx3000mmx6.4/9mm) U-shaped

⮚ Supporting straps (50mmx5mmx850mm)

⮚ Single head bolt M20x50mm

⮚ Single head bolt M20x275mm

⮚ Single head bolt M20x600mm

⮚ Single head bolt M20x360mm

⮚ Single head bolt M20x100mm

⮚ Hoop 60mmx5mmx400mm

⮚ Flat galvanized steel (100mmx10mmx595mm)

⮚ Flat galvanized steel (100mmx10mmx815mm)

System Parameters & Service Conditions

Item Parameter
Altitude Altitude up to 3000m
Annual Rainfall 1250mm
Period of exceptional June to September
Rains
Ambient Air Temperatures:
Average +300c
Minimum -50c
Maximum +500c
Relative Air Humidity 70%
Wind Velocity:
Maximum wind( height
above ground level) 35m/s
0-30m 45m/s
30-50m
Isoceraunic Level Up to 100 thunderstorm days/year
Seismic Level No records of any activity

Reference Standards
Reference to standards and/or specifications herein shall be interpreted to mean the latest
revision unless noted.

Design, materials and fabrication shall be in accordance with latest edition of international
Codes and Standards listed hereafter:

EN 10025 Hot-rolled products made of non-alloy structural steels Technical delivery

conditions;
ISO 898 Mechanical properties of fasteners;
ASTM A123 Standard Specification for zinc (hot galvanized) Coating on Products
Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips;
ASCE N°. 72 Design of Steel Transmission Pole Structures (for reference only);
ASCE (SE) 48-05 Design of Steel Transmission Pole Structures (for reference only);
AWS American welding society for welding and related processes.
Design
The hardware accessories shall be designed in accordance with attached drawings.

The hardware accessories shall present the most pleasing appearance possible consistent
with the strength and serviceability requirements.

Longitudinal welding should be kept to a minimum depending on the fabrication process.

Material
All material shall be in accordance with relevant standards referred to within this
specification.

Angle cross arms to be used shall be of grade S275 according to EN 10025.

Bolts and other connecting materials shall be grade 6.8 according to EN ISO 1461.

Manufacture
All parts forming the structure shall be fabricated in accordance with drawings approved
by the Purchaser.

Drilling or punching of holes shall be done before galvanizing.

1.1. Tolerances
The permitted variation (tolerance) from a stated for cross arm shall be as follows

a) length shall be as ± 5 mm

b) Holes diameter ± 1%

1.2. Welding
All welding shall, as much as is practicable, follow the AWS Standard.

All structural welds will have one hundred (100%) per cent penetration minimum.

Other welds shall be fillet welds for all thickness.

All welding shall be done using automatic equipment or ASME/ EN BS qualified welders.

1.3. Galvanizing
After the fabrication has been entirely completed, steel cross arms shall be hot dip
galvanized to minimum of 630 g/m2.
All hollow members shall be galvanized both inside and outside surfaces. No double dip
galvanizing process is allowed.

Bolts, washers & nuts shall be galvanized to full length to minimum 320 g/m2.

Nuts may be re-tapped after galvanizing and then shall be suitably protected from rust by
grease.

Galvanizing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM standard A 123.

Marking
All parts of shall be appropriately marked. All marking shall be indelible and clearly visible
after galvanizing. Pieces which are part of a structure shall be marked with structure type
number, followed by the proper assembly item and other identification marks such as
“Property of EEU”.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4. GENERAL
The Supplier shall adopt suitable quality assurance program and procedures to ensure that
all activities are being controlled as necessary. The Supplier shall indicate following in the
quality assurance plan -Hold Point "A stage in the material procurement or workmanship
process beyond which work shall not proceed without the documented approval of
designated individuals or organizations."

The Purchaser's written approval is required to authorize work to progress beyond the Hold
Points indicated in approved quality plans. Notification Point Steel "A stage in material
procurement or workmanship process for which advance notice of the activity is required
to facilitate witness." If the Purchaser does not attend after receiving documented
notification in accordance with the agreed procedures and with the correct period of notice
then work may proceed.
1.5. QUALITY PLANS
The Supplier shall draw up for each section of the work quality plans which shall be
submitted to the Purchaser for approval at least two weeks prior to the commencement of
work on the particular section. Each quality plan shall set out the activities in a logical
sequence and, unless advised otherwise, shall include the following:

▪ An outline of the proposed work and programme sequence

▪ The structure of the Supplier's organization for the contract
▪ The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of work for the
contract
▪ Hold and notification points
▪ Submission of engineering documents required by the specification
▪ The inspection of materials and components on receipt
▪ Reference to the Supplier's work procedures appropriate to each activity
▪ Inspection during fabrication/construction
▪ Final inspection and test
1.6. SUB-SUPPLIERS
The Supplier shall ensure that the quality assurance requirements of this specification are
followed by any sub-suppliers appointed by him under the Contract. The Supplier shall
assess the sub-supplier's quality assurance arrangements prior to his appointment to ensure
compliance with the specification. Auditing of the sub-supplier's quality assurance
arrangements shall be carried out by the Supplier and recorded in such a manner that
demonstrates to the Purchaser the extent of the audits and their effectiveness.
1.7. GUARANTEE
The Supplier shall guarantee the following:

▪ Quality and strength of raw materials used. All materials used shall be of reputed
make only.
▪ Performance figures as supplied by the Bidder in the schedule of guaranteed
particulars.
▪ Satisfactory operation during the guarantee period of one year from the date of
commissioning, or 18 months from the date of acceptance of the equipment by the
Purchaser following delivery, whichever is the earlier.
▪ The offered surface treatment shall protect the treated metal from corrosion for a
period of not less than five years from the date of delivery.
▪ Physical and Chemical composition test certificate of raw material shall be
submitted by vendor.
The successful bidder shall get approval from the client for its specifications and drawings
before proceed to the mass production.
INSPECTION AND TESTING
1.8. INSPECTION
All the tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture unless otherwise
especially agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser at the time of purchase. The
manufacturers shall afford the inspector representing the purchaser and all reasonable
facilities without charge, to satisfy him that material is being furnished in accordance with
the Specification. The purchaser has the right to have tests carried out at his own cost by an
independent agency whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of supply.
 1.9. TEST
▪ Acceptance and routine tests: All routine tests shall be carried out and the supplier
shall furnish the complete Guaranteed Technical Particular as per BS4360, BS EN
10025-3 in the presence of EEU representative in the appendix A.
▪ Tensile Test and Bend test: The test shall be carried out as per BS4360; BS EN
10025-3 and test certificate shall be furnished at the time of inspection.

Guaranteed Technical Particulars

15kV Suspension Cross arm for single line supporting pole
(150mmx75mmx1500mm(6.4/9) U-shaped)

Item Guaranteed value

Description Unit
No. Required Offered
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per month
4 Steel section utilized
5 Grade of steel 43A
BS4360 ,EN10025-3
6 Steel Standard applied
or equivalent
7 Tensile strength N/mm2 430 to 580
▪ Yield strength of Angle-cross N/mm2
275
arm
Complete dimension of Angle-cross
8
arm for suspension
a. Length mm 1500
b. Width mm 150
c. depth mm 75
d. Thickness mm (6.4/9)
Details of Galvanization method
9 utilized standard/specification Hot dip galvanized
conforming to
10 Thickness of galvanization(Min) µm 85
11 Net weight per piece kg
 As per the drawing
12 Size and no. of predrilled holes
attached

13 Maximum Chemical composition

13.1 C (%) % 0.25

13.2 Si (%) % 0.5

13.3 Mn (%) % 1.6

13.4 P (%) % 0.05

13.5 S (%) % 0.05

13.6 N (%) % -

13.7 Cu (%) % -

For each reduction of

13.8 Other elements % 0.01% C, an increase
of 0.06% Mn max.
 15kV Standoff Cross arm for single line supporting pole
(150mmx75mmx700mm(6.4/9) U-shaped)

Item Guaranteed value

Description Unit
No. Required Offered
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per month
4 Steel section utilized
5 Grade of steel 43A
BS4360 ,EN10025-3
6 Steel Standard applied
or equivalent
7 Tensile strength N/mm2 430 to 580
▪ Yield strength of Angle-cross N/mm2
275
arm
Complete dimension of Angle-cross
8
arm for suspension
a. Length mm 700
b. Width mm 150
c. depth mm 75
d. Thickness mm (6.4/9)
Details of Galvanization method
9 utilized standard/specification Hot dip galvanized
conforming to
10 Thickness of galvanization(Min) µm 85
11 Net weight per piece kg
As per the drawing
12 Size and no. of predrilled holes
attached

13 Maximum Chemical composition

13.1 C (%) % 0.25

13.2 Si (%) % 0.5

13.3 Mn (%) % 1.6

13.4 P (%) % 0.05

13.5 S (%) % 0.05

13.6 N (%) % -

13.7 Cu (%) % -

For each reduction of

13.8 Other elements % 0.01% C, an increase
of 0.06% Mn max.

15kV T-off Cross arm for single line supporting pole (150mmx75mmx2000mm(6.4/9)
U-shaped)

Item Guaranteed value

Description Unit
No. Required Offered
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per month
4 Steel section utilized
5 Grade of steel 43A
BS4360 ,EN10025-3
6 Steel Standard applied
or equivalent
7 Tensile strength N/mm2 430 to 580
▪ Yield strength of Angle-cross N/mm2
275
arm
Complete dimension of Angle-cross
8
arm for suspension
a. Length mm 2000
b. Width mm 150
c. depth mm 75
d. Thickness mm (6.4/9)
Details of Galvanization method
9 utilized standard/specification Hot dip galvanized
conforming to
10 Thickness of galvanization(Min) µm 85
11 Net weight per piece kg
As per the drawing
12 Size and no. of predrilled holes
attached
13 Maximum Chemical composition

13.1 C (%) % 0.25

13.2 Si (%) % 0.5

13.3 Mn (%) % 1.6

13.4 P (%) % 0.05

13.5 S (%) % 0.05

13.6 N (%) % -

13.7 Cu (%) % -

For each reduction of

13.8 Other elements % 0.01% C, an increase
of 0.06% Mn max.

15kV T-off Cross arm for double line supporting pole

(150mmx75mmx2500mm(6.4/9) U-shaped)

Item Guaranteed value

Description Unit
No. Required Offered
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per month
4 Steel section utilized
5 Grade of steel 43A
BS4360 ,EN10025-3
6 Steel Standard applied
or equivalent
7 Tensile strength N/mm2 430 to 580
▪ Yield strength of Angle-cross N/mm2
275
arm
Complete dimension of Angle-cross
8
arm for suspension
a. Length mm 2500
b. Width mm 150
 c. depth mm 75
d. Thickness mm (6.4/9)
Details of Galvanization method
9 utilized standard/specification Hot dip galvanized
conforming to
10 Thickness of galvanization(Min) µm 85
11 Net weight per piece kg
As per the drawing
12 Size and no. of predrilled holes
attached

13 Maximum Chemical composition

13.1 C (%) % 0.25

13.2 Si (%) % 0.5

13.3 Mn (%) % 1.6

13.4 P (%) % 0.05

13.5 S (%) % 0.05

13.6 N (%) % -

13.7 Cu (%) % -

For each reduction of

13.8 Other elements % 0.01% C, an increase
of 0.06% Mn max.

Cross arm for Transformer Base (200mmx75mmx3000mmx9mm) U-shaped

Item Guaranteed value

Description Unit
No. Required Offered
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per month
4 Steel section utilized
5 Grade of steel 43A
BS4360 ,EN10025-3
6 Steel Standard applied
or equivalent
7 Tensile strength N/mm2 430 to 580
▪ Yield strength of Angle-cross N/mm2
275
arm
Complete dimension of Angle-cross
8
arm for suspension
a. Length mm 3000
b. Width mm 200
c. depth mm 75
d. Thickness mm 9
Details of Galvanization method
9 utilized standard/specification Hot dip galvanized
conforming to
10 Thickness of galvanization(Min) µm 85
11 Net weight per piece kg
As per the drawing
12 Size and no. of predrilled holes
attached

13 Maximum Chemical composition

13.1 C (%) % 0.25

13.2 Si (%) % 0.5

13.3 Mn (%) % 1.6

13.4 P (%) % 0.05

13.5 S (%) % 0.05

13.6 N (%) % -

13.7 Cu (%) % -

For each reduction of

13.8 Other elements % 0.01% C, an increase
of 0.06% Mn max.

15kV Cross arm for arrester and drop out fuse (150mmx75mmx3000mmx6.4/9mm)
U-shaped
Item Guaranteed value
Description Unit
No. Required Offered
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per month
4 Steel section utilized
5 Grade of steel 43A
BS4360 ,EN10025-3
6 Steel Standard applied
or equivalent
7 Tensile strength N/mm2 430 to 580
▪ Yield strength of Angle-cross N/mm2
275
arm
Complete dimension of Angle-cross
8
arm for suspension
a. Length mm 3000
b. Width mm 200
c. depth mm 75
d. Thickness mm 9
Details of Galvanization method
9 utilized standard/specification Hot dip galvanized
conforming to
10 Thickness of galvanization(Min) µm 85
11 Net weight per piece kg
As per the drawing
12 Size and no. of predrilled holes
attached

13 Maximum Chemical composition

13.1 C (%) % 0.25

13.2 Si (%) % 0.5

13.3 Mn (%) % 1.6

13.4 P (%) % 0.05

13.5 S (%) % 0.05

13.6 N (%) % -
13.7 Cu (%) % -

For each reduction of

13.8 Other elements % 0.01% C, an increase
of 0.06% Mn max.

Cross arm for LV mounted distribution box with MCCB

(150mmx75mmx3000mmx6.4/9mm) U-shaped

Item Guaranteed value

Description Unit
No. Required Offered
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per month
4 Steel section utilized
5 Grade of steel 43A
BS4360 ,EN10025-3
6 Steel Standard applied
or equivalent
7 Tensile strength N/mm2 430 to 580
▪ Yield strength of Angle-cross N/mm2
275
arm
Complete dimension of Angle-cross
8
arm for suspension
a. Length mm 3000
b. Width mm 200
c. depth mm 75
d. Thickness mm 9
Details of Galvanization method
9 utilized standard/specification Hot dip galvanized
conforming to
10 Thickness of galvanization(Min) µm 85
11 Net weight per piece kg
As per the drawing
12 Size and no. of predrilled holes
attached

13 Maximum Chemical composition

13.1 C (%) % 0.25

13.2 Si (%) % 0.5

13.3 Mn (%) % 1.6

13.4 P (%) % 0.05

13.5 S (%) % 0.05

13.6 N (%) % -

13.7 Cu (%) % -

For each reduction of

13.8 Other elements % 0.01% C, an increase
of 0.06% Mn max.

Supporting Strap (50mmx5mmx850mm)

Item Guaranteed value

Description Unit
No. Required Offered
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per month
4 Steel section utilized
5 Grade of steel 43A
BS4360 ,EN10025-3
6 Steel Standard applied
or equivalent
7 Tensile strength N/mm2 430 to 580
▪ Yield strength of supporting N/mm2
275
strap
Complete dimension of Supporting-
8
Strap
a. Length mm 850
b. Width mm 50
c. Thickness mm 5
 Details of Galvanization method
9 utilized standard/specification Hot dip galvanized
conforming to
10 Thickness of galvanization(Min) µm 85
11 Net weight per piece kg
As per the drawing
12 Size and no. of predrilled holes
attached

13 Maximum Chemical composition

13.1 C (%) % 0.25

13.2 Si (%) % 0.5

13.3 Mn (%) % 1.6

13.4 P (%) % 0.05

13.5 S (%) % 0.05

13.6 N (%) % -

13.7 Cu (%) % -

For each reduction of

13.8 Other elements % 0.01% C, an increase
of 0.06% Mn max.

1.10. Single head bolt M20x50mm

Description of Single head bolt Guaranteed value

Item
with nut and washer Unit
No. Required Offered
M20,50mm
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per
month
4 BS4190/BS729 or
Standard applied
Equivalent
5 Grade of steel 6.8
6 Yield strength (N/mm2) 480
7 Complete dimension
 a. Length mm 50
b. Bolt Nominal diameter mm 20
c. Thread Minor diameter mm
d. Width of bolt head across mm
AS per BS standard
flat
e. thickness of nut head (m) mm AS per BS standard
f. thickness of bolt head (k) mm AS per BS standard
g. Washer outside diameter mm AS per BS standard
h. Washer inside diameter mm AS per BS standard
I. Washer thickness mm AS per BS standard
8 Galvanization Hot dip galvanized
9 Thickness of galvanization µm 45
10 Net weight per piece kg
11 Standard packing size, sacks per
piece

Single head bolt M20x275mm

Description of Single head bolt Guaranteed value

Item
with nut and washer Unit
No. Required Offered
M20,275mm
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per
month
4 BS4190/BS729 or
Standard applied
Equivalent
5 Grade of steel 6.8
6 Yield strength (N/mm2) 480
7 Complete dimension
a. Length mm 275
b. Bolt Nominal diameter mm 20
c. Thread Minor diameter mm
d. Width of bolt head across mm
AS per BS standard
flat
e. thickness of nut head (m) mm AS per BS standard
f. thickness of bolt head (k) mm AS per BS standard
g. Washer outside diameter mm AS per BS standard
h. Washer inside diameter mm AS per BS standard
I. Washer thickness mm AS per BS standard
8 Galvanization Hot dip galvanized
9 Thickness of galvanization µm 45
10 Net weight per piece kg
11 Standard packing size, sacks per
piece

Single head bolt M20x600mm

Description of Single head bolt Guaranteed value

Item
with nut and washer Unit
No. Required Offered
M20,600mm
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per
month
4 BS4190/BS729 or
Standard applied
Equivalent
5 Grade of steel 6.8
6 Yield strength (N/mm2) 480
7 Complete dimension
a. Length mm 600
b. Bolt Nominal diameter mm 20
c. Thread Minor diameter mm
d. Width of bolt head across mm
AS per BS standard
flat
e. thickness of nut head (m) mm AS per BS standard
f. thickness of bolt head (k) mm AS per BS standard
g. Washer outside diameter mm AS per BS standard
h. Washer inside diameter mm AS per BS standard
I. Washer thickness mm AS per BS standard
8 Galvanization Hot dip galvanized
9 Thickness of galvanization µm 45
10 Net weight per piece kg
11 Standard packing size, sacks per
piece

Single head bolt M20x360mm

Description of Single head bolt Guaranteed value

Item
with nut and washer Unit
No. Required Offered
M20,360mm
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per
month
4 BS4190/BS729 or
Standard applied
Equivalent
5 Grade of steel 6.8
6 Yield strength (N/mm2) 480
7 Complete dimension
a. Length mm 360
b. Bolt Nominal diameter mm 20
c. Thread Minor diameter mm
d. Width of bolt head across mm
AS per BS standard
flat
e. thickness of nut head (m) mm AS per BS standard
f. thickness of bolt head (k) mm AS per BS standard
g. Washer outside diameter mm AS per BS standard
h. Washer inside diameter mm AS per BS standard
I. Washer thickness mm AS per BS standard
8 Galvanization Hot dip galvanized
9 Thickness of galvanization µm 45
10 Net weight per piece kg
11 Standard packing size, sacks per
piece

Single head bolt M20x100mm

Description of Single head bolt Guaranteed value

Item
with nut and washer Unit
No. Required Offered
M20,100mm
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per
month
4 BS4190/BS729 or
Standard applied
Equivalent
5 Grade of steel 6.8
6 Yield strength (N/mm2) 480
7 Complete dimension
 a. Length mm 100
b. Bolt Nominal diameter mm 20
c. Thread Minor diameter mm
d. Width of bolt head across mm
AS per BS standard
flat
e. thickness of nut head (m) mm AS per BS standard
f. thickness of bolt head (k) mm AS per BS standard
g. Washer outside diameter mm AS per BS standard
h. Washer inside diameter mm AS per BS standard
I. Washer thickness mm AS per BS standard
8 Galvanization Hot dip galvanized
9 Thickness of galvanization µm 45
10 Net weight per piece kg
11 Standard packing size, sacks per
piece

Hoop 60mmx5mmx400mm

Description of Hoop Guaranteed value

Item
60mmx5mmx400mm Unit
No. Required Offered
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per
month
4 BS4190/BS729 or
Standard applied
Equivalent
5 Grade of steel 6.8
6 Yield strength (N/mm2) 480
7 Complete dimension
a. Length mm 400
b. Thickness mm 5
c. Width mm 60
d. Diameter of hoop mm 240
8 Galvanization Hot dip galvanized
9 Thickness of galvanization µm 45
10 Net weight per piece kg
11 Standard packing size, sacks per
piece
 Flat galvanized steel (100mmx10mmx595mm)

Item Guaranteed value

Description Unit
No. Required Offered
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per month
4 Steel section utilized
5 Grade of steel 43A
BS4360 ,EN10025-3
6 Steel Standard applied
or equivalent
7 Tensile strength N/mm2 430 to 580
▪ Yield strength N/mm2 275

8 Complete dimension

a. Length mm 595
b. Width mm 100
c. Thickness mm 10
Details of Galvanization method
9 utilized standard/specification Hot dip galvanized
conforming to
10 Thickness of galvanization(Min) µm 85
11 Net weight per piece kg
As per the drawing
12 Size and no. of predrilled holes
attached

13 Maximum Chemical composition

13.1 C (%) % 0.25

13.2 Si (%) % 0.5

13.3 Mn (%) % 1.6

13.4 P (%) % 0.05

13.5 S (%) % 0.05

13.6 N (%) % -
13.7 Cu (%) % -

For each reduction of

13.8 Other elements % 0.01% C, an increase
of 0.06% Mn max.

Flat galvanized steel (100mmx10mmx815mm)

Item Guaranteed value

Description Unit
No. Required Offered
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Manufacturing capacity per month
4 Steel section utilized
5 Grade of steel 43A
BS4360 ,EN10025-3
6 Steel Standard applied
or equivalent
7 Tensile strength N/mm2 430 to 580
▪ Yield strength N/mm2 275

8 Complete dimension

a. Length mm 815
b. Width mm 100
c. Thickness mm 10
Details of Galvanization method
9 utilized standard/specification Hot dip galvanized
conforming to
10 Thickness of galvanization(Min) µm 85
11 Net weight per piece kg
As per the drawing
12 Size and no. of predrilled holes
attached

13 Maximum Chemical composition

13.1 C (%) % 0.25

13.2 Si (%) % 0.5

13.3 Mn (%) % 1.6

13.4 P (%) % 0.05

13.5 S (%) % 0.05

13.6 N (%) % -

13.7 Cu (%) % -

For each reduction of

13.8 Other elements % 0.01% C, an increase
of 0.06% Mn max.

Deviations from the Technical Specification

(Information to be provided with Tender)

The Tenderer shall set out below a tabulated statement showing clearly section by section

Compliance and departures from the Specification and details of alternative proposals. The
tenderer will be deemed to have complied with the Specification in all respects and as
written unless qualified in this Schedule.

Section Departure from the requirements of the Specification with details

of alternative proposals
Signed __________________
Date ___________________
Company __________________
Position in Company _______________
Company Stamp

Product 13 - Danger and Identification Plates

The Danger and identification plates shall comply with the latest editions of and
amendments to, the standards/specifications listed below:

• BS 6722 Recommendations for Metric Plate and Sheet. Thickness and width
– length combinations for metallic materials
• BS EN 485 (1-4) Aluminium and Aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip and plate
• BS EN 573 (1-4) Aluminium and Aluminium alloys. Chemical composition
and form of wrought product
• BS EN 515 Aluminium and Aluminium alloys. Wrought products, temper
designations
• BS 5499-5 Graphical symbols and signs
• BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanised coating on iron and steel articles
General Design
Danger, number plates, phase identification and name plates shall be manufactured from
flat sheet aluminium 1 mm thick to BS EN 485 and shall be capable of being bent into an
arc of a radius 100 mm without damage.

A baked enamel or equivalent finish is required. This shall include a transparent lacquer
capable of blocking the ultraviolet rays of the sun and preventing their discolouring
influence. The corners of the plates shall be rounded up to. The edges of the plate shall be
smooth to prevent any injury to a bare hand. The finish of the plates shall be done in such
a way that the plate shall not rust, or lose its colour on exposure to the weather, and the
surface of the plate shall not chip or form any cracks or blisters. Letters are to be plain, not
embossed, except on the name plates where the letter may be raised.

Colours shall be as shown in a Chapter 5 of this specification. No colour means WHITE.

Inscription height to width ratio shall be 2:1.

Danger Plates
Pole Type
The pole danger plates shall be as shown on the pole drawing

The lettering shall be 25 mm height and colors shall be as approved by the Employer

Purchaser will state it’s preference for voltage number in each order.

Plate will have 4 slots (in each corner) for 10mm wide stainless steel band.

Pole Name Plate

The pole name plates shall be as shown on the pole drawing.

Plate will have 2 slots (in each corner) for 10mm wide stainless steel band.

Pole Number Plate

The pole number plates shall be as shown on the pole drawing.

The inscription shall be 20 mm height and colors shall be approved by the Employer
Plate will have 2 slots (in each corner) for 10mm wide stainless steel band.

Phase (Identification) Plates

The phase identification plates shall be shown.

They shall be manufactured from 1mm thick aluminium round (100 mm diameter).

The writing shall be white / black on the red/yellow/blue background.

One bolt hole 6mm diameter shall be made in the centre of the plate.

A4 stainless steel bolts set in a plastic bag shall be supplied together with every set of 3
plates (RYB) of this type.

Bolt set shall consist of:

3 pcs M4x20mm bolt, with slotted head

3 pcs plain washers

3 pcs split lock washers

6pcs nylon washers

3pcs nylon inserts lock nuts

Testing and Inspection

Type Tests
Type Tests shall be carried out at an independent testing laboratory or shall be witnessed
by a representative of an independent testing laboratory or other representative acceptable
to the Purchaser.

Type/Design Tests may (at the Purchaser's discretion) be dispensed with if the Supplier
furnishes evidence to the Purchaser's satisfaction that the relevant tests have already been
performed on identical plates and labels. In this case a certified Test Certificates shall be
submitted with the Bid for evaluation.

Among the tests included in the Type Tests shall be:

Tensile strength to BS 485 (90 Nmm-2 required).

Flexibility it shall be possible to bend all plates into an arc of radius 100 mm without
damage to the Finished surface of the plate.

Routine Tests
All plates shall be visually inspected at production stage to verify design, smoothness of
finish and rounding of edges. One percent of the plates shall be measured to ensure they
conform to the dimensions set out in this specification.

The dimension shall be subject to the following tolerances:

Width and Height 2 mm

Thickness 0.1 mm

Drilling Positions 0.4 mm

Technical Data Schedule – Guaranteed Characteristic

Item Description Unit Required Offered

1. Plate material Aluminium

2. Background colour White

3. Colour of lettering Black

4. Colour of signs Black

5. Type of Finish Baked Enamel or

equivalent

6. Are bolt holes/ slots provided? Yes

7. Are bolt sets supplied as stated? Yes

8. Bolt set materials as specified? Yes

9. Dimensions As shown in Ch.5

Signed __________________ Date ___________________

Company __________________ Position in Company ________________

Company Stamp

Product 14 - Earthing Materials

EARTHING ROD

Scope
This specification covers the design, manufacture, supply, and delivery and performance
requirements of earthing materials.

service conditions
Item Parameter
Altitude Any altitude up to 3000m
Annual Rainfall 1250mm
Period of exceptional Rains June to September
Ambient Air Temperatures:
Average +250c
Minimum -50c
Maximum 450c
Relative Air Humidity 70%
Wind Velocity:
Maximum wind( height above
ground level) 0-30m 35m/s
30-50m 45m/s
Isoceraunic Level Upto100 thunderstorm days/year
Seismic Level No records of any activity
Reference standards

Standard Title
Number
IEC-60364 Electrical installation of buildings (Earthing
arrangements and protective conductors.
IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables
The ANSI C114.1 Recommended practice for earthing of industrial and
commercial power systems
BS 7884 Copper and copper cadmium conductors for overhead
Electric traction and power transmission systems
BS6485 PVC covered conductors for overhead power lines
BS EN 10137 Weldable steels
materials supplied shall conform to the latest edition of the appropriate IEC standards and/
or other recognised international standards. In particular,

Design
Earth Rods
Solid copper clad steel earthing rods for earthing of low voltage lines and high voltage
equipment. The rods shall be extensible and suitable for driving into the ground by a hand
held hammer.
The copper exterior shall be electrolitycally applied to the steel core to form a metallurgical
bond between the steel core and the copper. The copper thickness shall not be less than
0.33mm. Earthing rods of the steel bar (low carbon steel) type with an external copper tube
are not acceptable. Earth rods shall be 3000mm in length and not less than 15mm in
diameter. The rods shall have a 60-degree conical driving point, for electrode entry into the
ground. At each installation the rods shall be driven so that than 500mm below the finished
ground level. A minimum of four rods shall be provided for each transformer.
Earthing Accessories
Earthing accessories shall include but not limited to,
Earth Rod Couplings
Removable electrode connectors for earth rods for attaching 70mm² stranded galvanised
steel. The clamp shall have a high copper content alloy body suitable for direct burial and
include stainless steel U-bolts, isometric nuts and spring washers. The clamp shall be
suitable for connection of two conductor tails in the right angle direction. The clamp shall
be suitable for both parallel and right angle alignment of the conductor to the earth rod
axis.
Split bolt connectors designed for the connection of hard drawn copper conductors up to
35mm² cross sectional area. The connectors shall have metric dimensioned flats on the
head to permit holding the fitting with an adjustable jaw wrench. All the threads shall be
isometric. Thread length shall be sufficient to clamp two conductors of 35mm². The nut
shall be of isometric hexagonal form and dimensions. The slot width shall be 8.3mm
minimum and the slot depth shall readily accommodate two 7.65mm diameter
uncompressed conductors with the nut applied two full turns, The split bolt hall be made
from hard drawn brass with an electro-tinned finish.
Earth Rod Driving Head
The driving head shall be of high strength steel, threaded to fit the Earth Rod Couplings.
The design shall ensure that there is direct driving head to rod contact when the rod driving
force is applied. The driving head shall be suitable for reuse.
Clamps and Connectors
A full range of clamps and connectors will be required with the earthing material. All
clamps and connectors shall be constructed in high strength copper alloy bodies and
screws. They shall be suitable for use with the earthing conductor sizes and with the earth
rods. The Supplier shall provide a catalogue showing the full range of clamps and
connectors on offer together with dimensions in each case.
Inspection And Testing
Type Tests
In addition to the tests as per the standards mentioned, the following tests shall be
conducted.
a) Jacket Adherence Test
A 450mm length of rod cut at one end to a 45 degree point shall be driven between two
steel clamping plates or the jaws of a vice set 1mm less than the diameter of the rod so as
to expose the bond between the jacket and the rod. Peeling of the jacket by the steel plates
or the jaws of the vice is acceptable, but there shall be no evidence of separation of the
jacket from the steel core.
b) Bend Test
There shall be no evidence of cracking of the jacket if at room temperature a length of rod
is rigidly held in a clamp or vice and the free end bent by applying a force normal to the
rod at a distance from the clamping device equal to 40 times the rod diameter. The
magnitude of the force and the direction of application shall be such that the rod is
permanent bent through a 30 degree angle. There should be no evidence of cracking or
splitting of the steel or the copper.

Annexure A -Guaranteed Technical Particulars

Bidder to submit hard copy duly filled & signed along with techno commercial offer.
Guaranteed Value
No GTP for Earthing Rods Unit
Required Offered
I
1 Length mm 3000
2 Diameter mm 15
3 Thickness of copper coating mm 0.33
Bonding process ( copper t
4
steel)
II Clamps
1 Thickness mm
2 Diameter mm
3 Material
III Split bolt connectors
1 Bolt Thread length mm
2 Slot width of the nut mm Min. 8.3
3 Slot depth the nut mm Min.

Signed __________________ Date ___________________

Company __________________ Position in Company ________________

Company Stamp
Earthing Conductor (Insulated)
Item Description Unit Required Offered
1. Conductor Classification

(a) Bare hard drawn stranded

Circular copper

wire/conductor BS7884 __________

(b) 1000v insulated soft

drawn stranded

copper wire BS 6004 __________

2. PVC Covering Yes __________

3. Colour of Covering Green/ Yellow __________

4. Overall diameter mm __________

5. Nominal area mm2 __________

6. Max. DC resistance @20oC ohm/km __________

7. No. and diameter of wires mm __________

8. Delivery length m __________

9. Max. gross drum weight kg

10. Maximum working tension KN __________

Signed __________________ Date __________________

Company __________________ Position in Company ________________

Company Stamp
Copper Conductor (Bare)
Item Description Unit Required Offered

1. Standard to which BS 7884 __________

manufactured
2. Nominal Cross
Sectional Area mm2 __________
3. Max. DC Resistance at 20oC (ohm/km) __________
4. Outside Diameter mm __________
5. Minimum Breaking Load N __________
6. Lay Ratio __________
7. Standard Drum Length m __________

Signed __________________ Date ___________________

Company __________________ Position in Company ________________

Company Stamp

Product 15 - Cable Warning Tape

The Cable Warning Tape shall comply with the latest editions of and amendments to, the
standards/specifications listed below:
• BS EN 50520 Cover plates and cover tapes for the protection and location warning
of buried cables.
The Cable Warning Tape shall conform to the following requirements:
1. The texture of the cable warning tape shall be of a polythene nature with a yellow
color.
2. The material used for the tape must be rot-proof, resistant to a wide variety of virgin
and tipped soil conditions, be able to withstand termite activities and shall be impervious
to water.

3. The width and thickness of the tape shall be 200 mm and 2.5 mm respectively and
the length of the tape per reel shall be 40 m.

4. The tape shall have the following words written on both the top and bottom part of
it and it shall be on one side of the tape only:

a) Top part of the tape – shall be written along the tape repeatedly twenty (20)
times on every one (1) meter of the tape. The size of the picture shall be 37 mm high and
6 mm thick.

b) Bottom part of the tape-“BURIED ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW” shall be written

along the tape repeatedly two (2) times on every 1 meter of the tape. The size and thickness
of each character shall be the same as above. However, the spacing between each word
shall be 13 mm.

The space between the Top and Bottom print shall be maintained as 55 mm.
5. The quality of the print shall be of an indelible nature and in black.

6. The cable warning tape shall function effectively for at least 40 years.

7. The offered warning tape shall conform to applicable codes and standards,

8. The Purchaser shall approve the written layout and words of the cable warning tape
markings.

9. Testing certification to confirm the tape adheres to all requirements of BS EN

50520 shall be provided by the supplier.

Technical Data Schedule – Guaranteed Characteristic

Item Description Unit Required Offered

1. Material Polythene
2. Color RED
3. Width of Tape mm 200
4. Thickness of Tape mm 2.5
5. Length of Tape m 40
Item Description Unit Required Offered

6 Tape Wording as specified

7. Conforming Standards BS EN 50520

Signed __________________ Date ___________________

Company __________________ Position in Company ________________

Company Stamp

Product 16 - Cable Ducts

All Cable Ducts shall comply with BS EN 61386-1:2008 and the following:

1) The legend ‘Electric Cable Duct’ shall be permanently and clearly marked on the
duct

2) Class 1 ducts for power cables shall be non-coilable/ semi-rigid in either twin
walled or smooth outer wall, manufactured in either UPVC or HDPE; each duct type shall
have a smooth inner surface.

3) Class 2 ducts for low voltage service cables and pilot/telephone cables shall be
uPVC or MDPE. Smoothed walled with a smooth inner surface.

4) The cross section of all ducts shall be circular.

5) End of ducts shall be cleanly cut square with the longitudinal axis of the duct.

6) Each duct length shall be supplied with a straight coupler incorporated in one end
and designed to be a close push fit onto a plain end of a duct with the same nominal
diameter. The duct ends shall be suitable for application without the use of adhesive
materials.

7) Ducts Bends manufactured in either HDPE, uPVC or MDPE shall have either a
smooth outer and inner surface, twin walled bend shall have corrugated outer and a smooth
inner surface. Each bend shall incorporate a coupler in one end and shall be suitable for
application without the use of adhesives.

8) Straight Couplings shall comply with the requirements of Purchaser.

9) Hockey Stick shall be manufactured from uPVC. The end of the hockey stick shall
be so designed to be a close push fit into the end of a duct or bend with the same nominal
diameter. After installation the long end of the hockey stick shall be exposed to the full
range of climatic conditions encountered in Ethiopia.

10) Adaptors shall be supplied for all straight couplings of ducts of varying sizes where
required. Adaptors shall be suitable for application without the use of adhesive materials.

11) Bends, joints or couplings, etc. shall not present any internal projections or
impedance to the installation or withdrawal of cables.

12) The cable duct wall thickness shall be tested to meet the following requirements:

• Class 1 – All ducts (UPVC& HDPE) intended for low voltage mains
distribution cables, for medium voltage power cables and for high voltage
power cables to give 450 N compression strength at 750C;

• Class 2 – All ducts (UPVC& MDPE) intended for low voltage service cables
and pilot/telephone cables to give 450 N compression strength at 500C.

As the design stress and the physical properties of uPVC, HDPE, and MDPE are different,
duct bore/wall thickness ratios shall be different.

All ducts that are to be buried shall retain their shape (less than 5% deformation) under
crushable pressure of 750 N/m for Class 1 and in excess of 450 N/m for Class 2.
 Technical Data Schedule – Guaranteed Characteristic

(TO BE COMPLETED FOR EACH DUCT CLASS AND SIZE)

Item Description Unit Required Offered

1. Duct Material UPVC, HDPE, MDPE

2. Colour Black
3. Duct Dimensions mm
4. Duct Bend Dimensions mm
5. Straight Coupling Dimensions mm
6. Hockey Stick Dimensions mm
7. Adaptor Dimensions mm
7. Conforming Standards BS EN 61386-1:2008

Signed ________________ Date ___________________

Company __________________ Position in Company ________________

Company Stamp

Product 17 - Cable Tiles

The Cable Tiles shall conform to the following requirements:

1) The Cable tile shall be manufactured from any thermoplastic material.

2) The material used for the tile must be rot-proof, resistant to a wide variety of virgin
and tipped soil conditions, be able to withstand termite activities and shall be impervious
to water.

3) The tile shall meet all requirements of BS EN 50520 - Cover plates and cover tapes
for the protection and location warning of buried cables.

4) The width, thickness and length of the tile shall be 300 mm, 12 mm, 1000 mm
respectively.

5) The tile ends shall be cleanly cut, square with longitudinal axis of the tile and shall
have no sharp edges, shall be drilled with a 12 mm hole with centre 150 mm and 25 mm
from the end with a suitable peg or cable tie provided to enable tiles to be connected
together.

6) The tile shall have the following words written on both the top and bottom part of
it and it shall be on one side of the tape only.

Top part of the tile –“CAUTION” shall be written along the tape repeatedly seven (7) times
on every one (1) meter of the tape. The size of the characters shall be 37 mm high and
6 mm thick. The spacing between each character shall also be kept at 2 mm. A maximum
space of 37 mm shall also be maintained between each “CAUTION” word.

Bottom part of the tile -“BURIED ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW” shall be written along
the tape repeatedly two (2) times on every 1 meter of the tape. The size and thickness of
each character shall be the same as above. However, the spacing between each word shall
be 13 mm.

The space between the Top and Bottom print shall be maintained as 55 mm.
7) The quality of the print shall be of an indelible nature and in black.

8) The cable warning tile shall function effectively for at least 40 years.

9) The Purchaser shall approve the written layout and words of the cable warning tile
markings.

10) Testing certification to confirm the tile adheres to the impact requirements of
BSEN50520 shall be provided by the Supplier.

Technical Data Schedule – Guaranteed Characteristic

Item Description Unit Required Offered

1. Material Polythene
2. Color Yellow
3. Width of Tile 300 mm
4. Thickness of Tile 12 mm
5. Length of Tile 1000 mm
Item Description Unit Required Offered

6. Tile Wording Caution

Buried Electric
Cable Below

7. Conforming Standards BS EN 50520

Signed __________________ Date __________________

Company __________________ Position in Company ________________

Company Stamp

Product 18– LV distribution Box with MCCB

SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply of Weather / Vermin
proof pole mounted distribution box with controllers, MCCB, MCB, Bus bars and space
for transformer meter. The distribution box shall be suitable for operation on 400 Volts, 3
Phase, 4 Line, 50HZ systems and required to be installed at the secondary terminals of
distribution transformer centres. The pole mounted distribution box shall have a space for
future implementation of three phase and single phase smart meters with the size LxWxD
(300mmx200mmx100mm) anywhere suitable inside the box.

The different requirements included in the standards have been introduced in order to fulfill
the End-User expectations:

a) Capability to operate the electrical installation,

b) Voltage stress withstand capability,

c) Current carrying capability,

d) Short-circuit withstand capability,

e) Electro-Magnetic Compatibility,

f) Protection against electric shock,

g) Maintenance and modifying capabilities,

h) Ability to be installed on site,

i) Protection against risk of fire,

j) Protection against environmental conditions

SYSTEM PARAMETERS & Service Conditions

Item Parameter
Altitude from Sea Level Any altitude up to 3000m
Annual Rainfall 1250mm
Period of exceptional Rains June to September
Ambient Air Temperatures:
 Average +300c
Minimum -50c
Maximum 550c
Relative Air Humidity 70%
Wind Velocity:
Maximum wind( height above
ground level) 0-30m 35m/s
30-50m 45m/s
Isoceraunic Level Upto100 thunderstorm days/year
Seismic Zone Level 3 & 4

REFERENCE Standards
The materials supplied shall conform to the latest edition of the appropriate IEC standards
and/or other recognized international standards. In particular:

Specification/Standard Title
Number
Degrees of protection of enclosures for low-voltage
IEC 60144
switchgear and control gear
IEC 60269-1 Low Voltage Fuses
IEC60408 Low voltage air‐break switches, air‐break disconnectors
and fuse‐combination units
IEC 61439 Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear
● IEC/TR 61439-1: General rules b
● IEC 61439-2: Power switchgear and control gear
assemblies b
● IEC 61439-3: Distribution boards intended to be operated
by ordinary persons (DBO)
● IEC 61439-4: Particular requirements for assemblies for
construction sites (ACS)
● IEC 61439-5: Assemblies for power distribution in public
networks
● IEC 61439-6: Busbar trunking systems (busways)
● IEC/TS 61439-7: Assemblies for specific applications
such as marinas, camping sites, market squares, electric vehicles
charging stations.
 DIN 43620 Low voltage high rupturing capacity fuses with blade
contacts
BS 5486-part 12 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies

BS 88 Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c. and

1500 V d.c.

Box DESIGN
General
The requirement is for a standard box design to accommodate

Types of circuits Pole mounted box for the

transformers from 50KVA up to
400KVA

Incoming circuits 3 phase – MCCB 1 (MCCB)

Outgoing 3 phase with 3x1ph MCCB 4

Street lighting – 1 phase – MCB 1

Bus bar rating (10*40mm) 1185A

Expansion bus bar for Transformer

meter (size LxWxD
(300mmx200mmx100mm)

The circuit breakers are connected between the bus bars in the Box and the outgoing cables
for distribution loads.

BUSBARS AND CONNECTIONS

Bus Bars & inter connecting links provided inside the distribution box shall be of anodized
Electrolytic grade copper as per relevant standard. All bus bars & links should be properly
drilled, de-burred preferably brazed to minimize tearing of joints and provided with durable
PVC insulating sleeves, standard colour code shall be used for different phases. In so far
as possible shrouding shall be provided to form an insulated barrier between operator and
the live bus bars.
The size of main bus bars for the phases shall be (10mmx40mm) and the bus bars shall be
designed for easy replacement of circuit breakers.

Neutral Bar
The neutral bar shall be rated at the full rating of the phase bus bars. It shall be insulated
from the frame of the distribution box but a bolted link shall be provided to connect it to
the frame.

Earth bar
A copper earth bar shall be fitted near the bottom of the Distribution box. A number of
copper lugs shall be provided bolted to the earth ready to accept outgoing cables. The earth
bar shall be insulated from the frame but connected to the neutral bar by a removable
strap/bar.

Distribution box Construction

General
The L.V. Distribution boxes shall be designed for installation on the D.P. structure of the
outdoor 15/0.4 KV or 33/0.4 KV Pole Mounted Distribution substation. These Distribution
Boxes shall be fabricated with 2 mm CR sheet steel.
The body of the boxes shall have sufficient reinforcement with suitable size of channels
keeping a provision for fixing these boxes on pole structure.
The roof of the box shall be slightly slanting both sides or to the back with an overhang of
50mm all around.
The Distribution Box should be preferably of IP-54 protective category
There shall be provision for fluorescent lighting inside the cabinet which shall be operated
with a dedicated switch.
Cable entries
Cable entries shall be designed for 1kV Power cables and ABC cables of sizes between 35,
50, 95, 120,150,185, 240 and 300mm2 XLPE.

The bottom of the box shall have a 3.15 mm thick steel plate for securing the
outgoing/incoming cables. The plate shall be provided with knockout holes suitable for
cable sizes indicated. The bottom plate shall be provided with two air vents with perforated
M.S. sheet of 1.25mm thick welded from inside. Suitable size of stainless steel cable glands
should be provided for these holes.
A complete set of screw type compression cable glands shall be provided with each box
suitable for outdoor use with those cables specified in the schedules. The glands shall not
be PVC or plastic. Each gland shall be capable of carrying the short circuit current rating
of its associated cable and be provided with such fittings necessary for fixing in tapped or
untapped entry hole.

Alternatively 70mm pipe with smoothed edges of suitable size shall be welded with each
hole where the cable can enter and then sealed with a suitable hardening compound to act
as a gland. The compound can be a flexible bitumastic setting compound.

Ventilation
Four sets of louvers shall be provided on the sides or doors to ensure that the temperature
inside the enclosure is not substantially different from that of the atmosphere. The louvers
shall be backed with perforated M.S. sheet of 1.25 mm welded from inside the LV
Distribution Box. The nuts, bolts, washers used in the box shall be galvanized to avoid
corrosion.

Finishing
All sheet metal works shall undergo the 7 tank chemical and mechanical cleaning process
before final paint. The entire box shall be duly acid treated.

Two coats of red oxide and two coats of final paints shall be applied. Colour of
outside/inside surface shall be mentioned in this specification. Electrostatic painting with
oven drying will also be acceptable.

M.S. parts such as Bolts& Nuts, washers etc. shall be electro galvanized for non-electrical
use.

Size of Box
The box shall be of standard design and size to take up to outgoing and incoming circuits
and also shall includes the transformer meter.

Earthing
The box shall have a solid earthing point and an earthing bar for the earthing of the
outgoing cables. Box earthing point shall be provided both on the inside and the outside of
the box, to allow earthing according to local requirements.

Doors and Hinges

The doors shall be provided on the front side. The Box shall have single/double door with
locking arrangement and a door handle. Padlocks shall be used for door locking.

Doors shall be earth bonded to the main structure.

The door hinges shall not be visible from outside. Minimum 3 Nos. Hinges per door made
of heavy duty MS Sheet of minimum length of 75 mm shall be provided from inside. The
hinges shall be of such design to prevent them from malfunctioning due to inadvertent
rusting

Miscellaneous
All joints for current carrying parts shall be made using non-magnetic stainless steel bolts
or brass, 2 nuts & spring washers. The nuts and bolts should be of hexagonal type with
groove for bolt.

Electrolytic grade copper bus bars are mounted on epoxy resin cast bus insulators fixed on
suitable fixing arrangement. The bus bars shall be conveniently placed so as to provide
adequate clearance from the body of the box conforming to the relevant standard.

The distribution boxes shall be duly wired with suitable size of PVC insulated copper flat.
Cable glands of sufficient size and cable cleats for support of the cables shall be provided.
The bus bars size will be 10X40mm and shall be fitted with lugs of suitable size for
receiving the incoming cables from the transformer. Proper arrangement shall be made for
connection between the bus bars and the MCCBs and outgoing cables. Sufficient space
shall be provided for bending and termination of the cables. Access shall be provided for
insertion of clip on meters for taking load readings on the feeders.

Instruction leaf let in Amharic should be provided as sticker in the LV Distribution

Box.door from inside.

The Danger marking with fluorescent paint shall be provided on one door and a danger
plate shall be riveted on another door, on front side.
Cable Terminations
Cable terminations shall be provided for the transformer incoming cables to the Busbars as
well as the outgoing circuits.

MCCBS
GENERAL
These MCCB’s shall be conforming to IEC61439 or any other relevant standard.

Rated current 63A,100A,125A,160A,200A,

300A,400A,630A and 800A

No. of poles per phase 1

Rated service short circuit breaking Min. 18kA

capacity(kA)

Sequence of operation O-t-CO-t-CO, and t=3 min.)

Test voltage, phase to phase Phase to phase 400V Phase to earth

230V
At 0.8 PF

Power factor for short circuit (Max.) 0.4 (lag)

TIME CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS

MCCB is to be provided with over load trip release with inverse time current characteristics
for overload protection and magnetic trip release for instantaneous tripping in the wake of
Short-Circuits. The characteristics shall be as follows:
 Multiple of rated current(Ir) Tripping time( T)

1.05 In Not tripping

1.3 In < 2 hrs

10 In < 100msec

The Distribution Box shall have 1 Nos. of 3 pole MCCBs per circuit to control and protect
outgoing circuits. The MCCBs shall be manually operated type and shall have quick make
quick break mechanism.
The Terminal Connector strips of the MCCB shall be projecting out of the MCCB for
minimum length of 40 mm on bus bar side and 60 mm on outgoing cable side connected
through lugs.
All nut bolts used for assembly and connections shall be of non-magnetic stainless steel
only.
The MCCB’s shall be marked with ‘Brand Name’ of manufacture and Ics in kA by
embossing only whereas other particulars may be marked as per the manufacturers standard
practice.
The contacts of MCCB should be self-wiping type so as to keep the contacts clean and
milli-volt drop low.
PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL SWITCH

REQUIREMENTS

Rated voltage 230 V

Rated current 10 A

Rated frequency 50Hz

Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 us)
6 kV
 Rated power frequency withstand voltage 2kV

Degree of Protection of Enclosure >=IP54

Light sensitiveness adjustment range 3 - 70 lux

Terminal shall be suitable for copper conductors. The switch shall be equipped with a
connecting cable. Connecting cable shall be made of multi-core stranded copper of at
least 1.5 mm2 cross section. Connecting cable must have black, weather-resistant sheath.
The length of the cable shall be at least 1.5m.

The light sensitiveness of the switch shall be adjustable. The switches shall be adjusted
to sensitiveness of 10 lux before dispatch from the manufacturer's works in case such
an adjustment is tedious to do in operation. The switch shall have a delay mechanism
against nuisance switching e.g. due to sudden darkness.

Preference shall be given to switches integrating the sensitive part and the switching
part.

All plastic parts shall be weather resistant.

Inspection and Testing

Type Tests

Type tests shall be carried out on Distribution boxes being offered, in accordance with the
relevant IEC/ BS standard.
ON COMPLETE LV DISTRIBUTION BOX

Temperature rise test:

High voltage test.
Short time withstand current test on distribution box.
Test for degree of protection (IP-54) on complete unit.
Time/current characteristics test
Type tests shall be carried out on Fuse Cut outs in accordance with BS 88.
Fuse Cut outs

Verification of Insulating Properties:

This test shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 8.2 of BS 88.The test voltage shall
be 2500V (rms) power frequency, applied
▪ between both terminals with the fuse link removed.
▪ between live parts and exposed conductive parts with the fuse link and
fuse carrier in place.
Verification of Rated Power (Heat) Acceptance,
This test shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 8.3 of BS 88,
Verification of Breaking Capacity,
Test No. 1 on Table 8(a) in Clause 8.5 of BS 88, Part 6 shall be carried out on complete
assembly of fuse link and fuse cut out,

Routine Tests

These tests shall be carried out per IEC at the manufacture’s works to ensure that the
product is in accordance with the design offered. The manufacturer shall supply a
certificate indicating the result of the entire test carried out on the equipment.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS

The Acceptance test procedure for any delivery of the equipment are as follows:
• Visual inspection
• Checking of the results of the routine and type tests
• Carrying out all or part of tests mentioned in the routine test
• Checking of conformity to specification
TESTING & MANUFACTURING FACILITIES:

The bidder must clearly indicate the testing facilities available in the works of the
manufacturer and whether the facilities are adequate to carry out all routine acceptance and
type tests.
• Power operated shearing machine
• Power operated press brake.
• Power operated power presses
 • Welding machines,
• Assembling tools.

Name plate Details

Each unit shall be provided with a rating plate of weatherproof material showing the
following items indelibly marked.
• Manufacturer's Name,
• Manufacturer's Code Number,
• Manufacturer's Serial Number,
• Year of Manufacture,
• Voltage Rating,
• Current Rating,
• Short Circuit Rating,
• Gross Weight.
• Property of EEU , logo
Packing and marking

Pole mounted distribution box shall be packed in sea-worthy solid wall wooden cases in a
manner to avoid damage during transport, handling and storage. They shall also be packed
in such a way that no corrosion occurs on the equipment due to salty moisture when stored
at the port of destination.
Each package shall be marked with the main details of the equipment contained therein,
the type designation or the catalogue number and with the manufacturer's name or
trademark.
Each wooden case shall be clearly marked with the address of EEU and the relevant contact
number and title. All markings shall be legible and durable.
Pole mounted distribution box and its wooden case shall be fitted with an easily readable
nameplate of weatherproof material giving the following details:
✓ Type of pole
✓ Manufacturer's Name
✓ Manufacturer's Serial Number
✓ Year of Manufacture
✓ Rated Frequency
✓ Rated operating voltage
 ✓ Gross Weight
✓ Purchase order number & date
✓ Property of EEU
QUALITY ASSURANCE

The manufacturer shall submit Manufacturing Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) for approval
& the same shall be followed during manufacture and testing.

The material for final inspection shall be offered by the Supplier only under packed
condition. The owner shall select samples at random from the packed lot for carrying out
acceptance tests.
 Guaranteed technical Schedules of Pole mounted distribution box

No. Item Unit Requirement Offered

Suitable for the following transformers KVA 50-400
1 Name of manufacturer
2 Country of manufacture
3 Type Designation Outdoor
4 Standard IEC61439 or equivalent.
I Distribution box
1 Thickness of MS sheet on all sides mm 2
2 Thickness of MS sheet on bottom plate mm 3.15
3 Ingress Protection IP54
4 Colour Gray
II Bus bars
1 Size of main bus bars H XW mm 10X40
2 Rating of bus bar A 1185
3 Size of dropper links mm
4 Outgoing circuit ways No 4
5 Size of neutral bus bars mm 3X30
6 Rating of bus bars A
III Incoming feeder electrical characteristics
1 Rated voltage KV 0.4
2 Rated insulation voltage V 690
3 Rated operational current of circuits A
1x(3p x 100A) for 50kVA,
1x (3px 160A) for 100kVA,
1x (3p x 315A) for 200kVA,
1x (3px 500A) for 315kVA,
1x (3px 630A) for 400kVA
4 Rated short time withstand current kA 10
5 Power frequency withstand voltage kV 3
6 Impulse withstand voltage kA 8
7 Ingress protection IP IP20
No. Item Unit Requirement Offered
8 Incoming terminal cross section mm2 Up to 300
9 Clearance between open contact mm As per IEC standard
10 Clearance between poles (centre to centre) mm As per IEC standard
11 Creepage distance mm As per IEC60947
12 Mechanical endurance kN 80
VI Outgoing feeder electrical characteristics
1 Rated voltage KV 0.4
2 Rated insulation voltage V 690
3 Rated operational current of circuits A
for 50kVA-
1x( 3p x 100A)
and
- for street light
3x(1phx50A),
for 100kVA,
- 1x(3px100A)
- 1x(3px80A) and
- for street light
3x(1px50A)
for 200kVA,
- 1x(3px250A)
- 1x(3px160A) and
- for street light
3x(1px50A)

for 315kVA,
- 2x(3px250A)
- 1x(3px125A) and
- for street light
3x(1px50A)
for 400kVA,
- 1x(3px315A)
- 1x(3px250A)
- 1x(3px125A) and
for street light 3x(1px50A)
4 Rated short time withstand current kA 10
5 Power frequency withstand voltage kV 3
6 Impulse withstand voltage kA 8
7 Protection class IP IP20
No. Item Unit Requirement Offered
8 Outgoing terminal cross section mm2 Up to95
9 Clearance between open contact mm As per IEC standard
10 Clearance between poles (centre to centre) mm As per IEC standard
11 Creepage distance mm As per IEC60947
12 Mechanical endurance kN 80

Signed: _______________________ Date: _____________

Company: ____________________ Position in Company: __________________

Company Stamp __________________

PRODUCT 19 – MV Auto-Recloser

The Pole Mounted Auto-Recloser for 15 kV and 33 kV Systems shall comply with the
latest editions of and amendments to, the standards/specifications listed below:

IEC 62271-100 High-voltage switchgear and control gear;

IEC 62271 High-voltage switchgear and control gear;

IEC 60137 Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1 000 V;

IEC 60296 Fluids for electro technical applications Unused mineral

insulating oils for transformers and switchgear;

IEC 60383 Insulators for Overhead Lines with a Nominal Voltage Above
1000 V;
IEC 60376 Specification of technical grade sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) for use
in electrical equipment;

IEC 60437 Radio Interference Test on High-Voltage Insulators;

IEEE C37-74 Standard Requirements for Subsurface, Vault, and Pad-

Mounted Load-Interrupter Switchgear and Fused Load-
Interrupter Switchgear for Alternating Current Systems Up to 38 kV;

BS EN ISO 2063 Thermal spraying. Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Zinc,
aluminium and their alloys;

BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip Galvanised Coatings on Iron and Steel Articles.

Design

Types of Automatic Recloser

This specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply, delivery and
performance characteristics of three-phase, pole mounted automatic recloser, both 15 kV
and 33 kV for use by the Ethiopia Electric Utility.

Performance Characteristics

Rated Continuous Current

• The rated continuous current shall be 200 A, 400 A and 630 A for the 15 kV
reclosers, as per specified requirements.

• The rated continuous current shall be 200 A, 400 A and 630 A for the 33 kV
recloser, as per specified requirements.

Maximum Current Interrupting and Making Rating

The short circuit levels given in 1.04 correspond to maximum system short circuit currents
i.e. 31.5 kA at 33 kV and 25 kA at 15 kV.

Mode of Operation of the Automatic Recloser

The recloser is required to operate with two instantaneous trips, followed by two variable
delayed trips.
The recloser shall be capable of performing a sequence of four trips prior to lockout even,
when the line fault is so close to the recloser that the line voltage at the recloser is essentially
zero at the instant of the trip.

If upon the first, second or third reclose normal conditions are restored on the line, the
recloser shall automatically reset after an adjustable time delay of 5, 10, 15 or 20 seconds.
The recloser will now be ready for a whole new sequence of operations.

Means shall be provided to lock out the recloser after one, two, three or four trip operations.
The selection of the reset time and the number of trip operations shall be done by devices
located in a control box.

Operating Current Limits

One overcurrent device shall be provided for fault detection in each phase. The overcurrent
device shall have adjustable minimum phase tripcurrent settings at the values of:

20%, 40%, 50%, 75% and 100% of nominal rated continuous current

For series coil reclosers the highest value of minimum trip current should be equal to 140%
of the continuous coil rating. These coils shall be protected by fuses.

As well as phase overcurrent an earth fault current trip facility shall be provided.

The earth fault tripping levels shall be: 5, 10, 20, 35, 70, 100, 140, 200, 280 and 400 Amps.

Trip to Reclose Delay (Reclosing Interval)

Provision shall be made to obtain an individually adjustable time interval between each
opening and reclosing operation.

The range of "Dead Times" shall include the following 0.6, 1, 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, 20, 30 and
60 seconds.

The selection of each "dead time" shall be independent and settable from devices located
in the control box.

Manual Operation
Means shall be provided to permit manual tripping, closing and lockout of the recloser
locally. These operations shall be done by hand or by operating rods. The automatic
recloser shall be locked out after manual tripping and shall reset after manual close.

Remote Communication (GPRS or compatible support operation mechanism)220v

chargeable battery , wireless module integrated with standard SCADA system

Operation Counter

A mechanical operating counter shall be installed on the recloser which can be read by a
person standing at ground level. The counter shall be protected against moisture ingress.

Radio Influence Voltage

The maximum radio influence voltage shall be 250 micro volts, measured as specified by
IEC 60437.

Tank Fabrication

The tank shall be made of steel of minimum thickness 3 mm and strong enough to support
dynamic short circuit forces and the vibration of the recloser.

The tank and its accessories shall be adequately protected against corrosion and the
Contractor shall include a statement of the method of protection proposed.

Hot dip galvanising is preferred, where this is not practical the tanks shall be shotblasted
and then immediately zinc sprayed to an average weight deposit of not less than 550 g/m2
followed by a zinc chromate based primary paint, and two coats of durable oil and weather
resisting paint. Finish colour shall be Admiralty grey.

The inside of tanks shall be coated with oil resisting varnish or paint so that the oil cannot
come into contact with the tank metal at any time.

The tank shall be perfectly sealed and dielectric fluid tight, with all fittings in place. The
head casting and the tank shall be weatherproof sealed under all operating conditions.

Indicators

A contact position indicator (OFFgreen, ONred) shall be provided as well as a "lockedout"

indicator. These indicators shall be clearly visible from ground level.
Pole Mounting Bracket

Pole mounted units shall be supplied with pole mounting bracket.

All steel work shall comply with the standards outlined in the specifications for "Product –
Galvanized Steel Cross arms " –in Technical Specification of Cross Arms in this document.

Single pole structures or double pole structure with 1.8 m pole centers is used for mounting
the auto-recloser. The maximum pole diameter at the mounting height will be 240 mm.

Detailed drawings of mounting arrangements shall be submitted with the tender.

Lifting Lugs

Lifting lugs shall be provided such that the recloser can be lifted with a single hook without
damage.

Grounding Terminal

All units shall be provided with a grounding terminal with a 10 mm hole.

Bushings and Terminals

Bushings

The terminations shall be brought out through bushings of antifog porcelain. The bushings
shall be rated to carry full line current and shall have spark gaps adjustable over the range
50100 mm.

Bushings shall be fitted with heavily tin- plated terminals and galvanised hardware to take
tin plated aluminium compression lugs.

Creepage Distance

The creepage distance of the bushings shall be 542.5 mm and 1116 mm for 15 kV and
33 kV respectively.

Bushing Labels

The bushings shall be clearly and unambiguously labelled. The labelling of the phases
shall be by raised lettering. Phase identification by adhesive stickers is not acceptable.

Interrupting Medium
The current interrupting medium shall be either vacuum or sulphur hexafluoride (SF6).
The SF6 type reclosers shall conform to IEC 60376.

Additionally all SF6 auto-reclosers shall be fitted with pressure relief vents and low
pressure lockout devices. The pressure relief vent is to avoid explosion by safely venting
any high pressure build-up within the equipment through the pressure relief arrangement.
The low pressure lockout device is to prevent equipment operation in the case of gas
leakage with subsequent loss of pressure.

Recloser Control

The recloser shall be fitted with a separate control box. This control box shall be suitable
for fitting on the pole at a lower level than the recloser. All fittings required for mounting
shall be supplied. All operating parameters of the recloser - minimum trip current, time
current trip characteristics, reclosing and reset times, operating sequences shall be
controlled from the control box. All settings shall be either positive stop selector switches
or plugin components. Ratings shall be clearly marked in relevant units of measure with no
interpretation multipliers or conversion being required.

Each unit shall be equipped with an electronic control capable of operating in the
environmental conditions specified above.

It shall be assumed that there is no available Low Voltage (AC) or DC supply.

Marking

Each recloser shall be fitted with an easily readable nameplate of weatherproof material
giving the following details:

• Type of recloser

• Manufacturer's Name

• Manufacturer's Serial Number

• Year of Manufacture

• Rated Frequency

• Rated Voltage
 • Rated Continuous Current

• Rated Minimum Tripping Currents

• Rated Symmetrical Interrupting Current

• Rated Symmetrical Making Current

• Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage

• Rated Control Voltage

• Gross Weight

Testing and Inspection

Type Tests

Type tests shall be carried out in accordance with the practices and tolerances of IEEE
C37.74.

The radio influence voltage test shall be carried out to IEC 60437.

Any item not meeting the type test requirement shall result in rejection of all units on order.

In case of rejection, the Purchaser shall not be liable for cost of type tests.

The Purchaser, at his discretion, may allow the contractor to carry out repeat type tests to
prove his design, but any such repeat tests shall be at the Contractor's expense.

Type/Design Tests may (at the Purchaser's discretion) be dispensed with if the Contractor
furnishes evidence to the Purchaser's satisfaction that the relevant tests have already been
performed on identical equipment. In this case the Supplier/Contractor shall provide
documentary proof in the form of Certified Test Certificates that the assembled equipment
and its component parts been successfully typetested by an independent testing authority
in accordance with the relevant clauses of referenced Standards. Test Certificates as
evidence of successful completion of type tests shall be submitted as part of the Bid.

Acceptable independent testing Authorities include the following: KEMA - Holland, CESI
- Italy, EDF - France and IREQ, - Quebec, Canada. Approval of type tests certificates
supplied by any other authority is subject to the written acceptance of EEU. .
Routine Tests

Routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with the practices and tolerances of IEEE
C37.74.

All routine tests will be free of charge to the Purchaser.

Any item not meeting the routine test requirements shall be rejected.

Inspection

The Purchaser reserves the right to witness the manufacturing process, any type tests
specifically performed on the equipment to be supplied to EEU and any routine tests
required in the manufacture and supply of such equipment. The Supplier shall provide free
access to the Purchaser to any site where such manufacturing process or tests, either type
or routine tests are taking place. The Supplier shall bear the in-plant costs of such
inspection. The Supplier shall provide the Purchaser of a schedule of manufacture and tests
at least two weeks before the events are to occur.

Technical Schedules

15 kV Auto-Recloser

No GTP For 15kV Autoreclosers Unit Required by Offered by

EEU Bidder
1 Nominal system Voltage kV 15
2 Maximum system Voltage kV 17.5
3 Maximum equipment Voltage kV 24
4 Basic Insulation Level kVp
4.1 Impulse withstand voltage kVp 125kV
(1.2/50 μs)
kV peak
4.2 Power frequency withstand voltage for one kV 50kV
minute
5 Time Current Curve Settings Contractor shall
specify details of curves and settings)
6 Variable Reclosing Time settings to include Sec. 1 to 60

7 Resetting Time Settings Sec. 5,10,15, & 20

8 Continuous Current Rating A 400, 630
 No GTP For 15kV Autoreclosers Unit Required by Offered by
EEU Bidder
9 Line Charging Current A 10
10 Cable charging current A 31.5
11 Minimum Trip Rating A 20 to 630
12 Minimum Ground Fault Setting in discrete A 10 to 630
steps of continuous variable
13 Interrupting Rating max. Symm. Value(rms) kA(rms 16
)
14 Interrupting Rating max. Asymm. kA(rms 40
Value(rms) )
15 Interrupting Rating Max. A
(peak)
16 Maximum Making Current kA 40
(peak)
17 Power frequency withstand Voltage kV 50
18 Impulse withstand Voltage kV 125
19 Switching performance
19.1 Mechanical Operation 10000
19.2 Operating cycles, rated current (CO-cyles) 10000
19.3 Operating cycles, rated-short circuit breaking
current (O-operations)
19.4 Closing time, not more than
19.5 Opening time, not more than
19.6 Rated operating sequence
20 Creepage Distance mm/kV 31
21 Spark Gap Setting Range mm 50-100
22 Current Interrupting Medium - Vacuum
23 Control Method - Electronic
24 Radio Influence Voltage µV 250
25 Remote control facility Yes
26 Creepage distance mm >525
27 Mode of remote control
28 Weight of the device kg
29 Dimension of the device mm
30 Control and monitoring Locally and
remotely
Signed: _______________________ Date: _____________

Company: ____________________ Position in Company:

__________________

__________________

Company Stamp

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 33KV AUTORECLOSERS

No GTP For 33kV Autoreclosers Unit Required by Offered by

EEU Bidder
1 Nominal system Voltage kV 33
2 Maximum system Voltage kV 36
3 Maximum equipment Voltage kV 45
4 Basic Insulation Level
4.1 Impulse withstand voltage kVp 250kV
(1.2/50 μs)
kV peak
4.2 Power frequency withstand voltage for one kV 95kV
minute
5 Time Current Curve Settings Contractor shall
specify details of curves and settings)
6 Variable Reclosing Time settings to include Sec. 1 to 60

7 Resetting Time Settings Sec. 5,10,15, & 20

8 Continuous Current Rating A 400, 630
9 Line Charging Current A 10
10 Cable charging current A 31.5
11 Minimum Trip Rating A 20 to 630
12 Minimum Ground Fault Setting in discrete A 10 to 630
steps of continuous variable
13 Interrupting Rating max. Symm. Value(rms) kA(rms 16
)
14 Interrupting Rating max. Asymm. kA(rms
Value(rms) )
 No GTP For 33kV Autoreclosers Unit Required by Offered by
EEU Bidder
15 Interrupting Rating Max. A
(peak)
16 Maximum Making Current kA 2.5 times of
(peak) breaking
current
17 Power frequency withstand Voltage kV 95
18 Impulse withstand Voltage kV 250
19 Switching performance
19.1 Mechanical operation 10000
19.2 Operating cycles, rated current (CO-cyles) 10000
19.3 Operating cycles, rated-short circuit breaking
current (O-operations)
19.4 Closing time, not more than
19.5 Opening time, not more than
19.6 Rated operating sequence
20 Creepage Distance mm/kV 31
21 Spark Gap Setting Range mm 50-100
22 Current Interrupting Medium - Vacuum
23 Control Method - Electronic
24 Radio Influence Voltage µV 250
25 Remote control facility Yes
26 Creepage distance mm >1080
27 Mode of remote control
28 Weight of the device kg
29 Dimension of the device mm
30 Control and monitoring Locally and
remotely

Recommended Spares, Special Tools, and Test Equipment –MV Auto-Reclosers,

(Information to be provided with Tender)

The Bidder is required to provide a list of recommended spares for a 5 year period. All
unit prices quoted shall be valid for any spare parts ordered by the Purchaser in this period.
Details of all special tools and test equipment (including prices where not included in main
offer) required should also be provided. All unit prices quoted shall be valid for tools and
test equipment ordered by the Purchaser during the Contract Period.

Main equipment type Part no/description Quantity Unit price

Signed __________________

Company __________________

Position in Company ________________

Date ___________________ _____________________

Company Stamp

Product 20 -Three Phase Pole Mounted Distribution

Transformers
SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, supply, delivery of three phase
pole mounted hermetically sealed with totally filled with oil outdoor ONAN distribution
transformers.

The transformers shall be suitable for Operation in outdoor exposed locations.

1.1. The specification covers the following ratings:

• 15/0.4kV:-25KVA, 50KVA, 100KVA, 200KVA, 315KVA, 400KVA

1.2. The transformer shall conform in all respects to the highest standards of
engineering, design, workmanship of this specification and the latest revisions of IEC
standards at the time of offer and the purchaser will have full right to reject any work or
materials which are not in full accordance therewith. The offered equipment shall be
complete with all components necessary for effective and trouble-free operation. Such
components shall be deemed to be within the scope of the bidder’s supply irrespective of
whether those are specifically mentioned or not.

1.3. This Specification may not include all the necessary provisions of the contract
SYSTEM PARAMETERS & SERVICE CONDITIONS
The transformers to be supplied shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation
under the following climatic conditions:

S. N Item Parameter

1 Altitude Altitude up to 3000m

2 Annual Rainfall 1250mm
3 Period of exceptional Rains June to September
4 Ambient Air Temperatures:
Yearly Average +300c
Yearly Minimum -50c
Yearly Maximum +500c
5 Relative Air Humidity 70%
6 Wind Velocity:
Maximum wind (height above ground
level) 0-30m 35m/s
30-50m 45m/s
7 Isokeraunic Level Up to 100 thunder storm
days/year
9 Seismic Zone Zone 4

The Equipment shall be used in installations at altitudes up to 3000 meters.

REFERENCE STANDARD
The transformer shall comply in all respects to relevant international standards with the
latest editions or amendments thereof. In the event that no reference to Standard is made
herein, all components and parts shall be fabricated, inspected, tested and preserved, so as
to ensure their fitness for designed use and purpose. The bid shall include typical
dimensional and sectional drawings of the transformers and accessories

Relevant
Standard identifications Title
IEC 60071 Insulation co-ordination
IEC 60076 Power Transformers
Relevant
Standard identifications Title
IEC60137 Insulating bushings for alternating voltages above
1000 V
IEC 60214 On-Load Tap Changers
IEC 60296 Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for
transformers and switchgear
IEC 60317-0-1-2013 Specifications for particular types of winding wires-
Part 0: General Requirements-Section 1: Enameled
round Copper wire
IEC 60354 Loading guide for oil-immersed power transformers
IEC 60542 Application guide for on Load tap Changers
IEC60551 Determination of Transformer and reactor sound
level
IEC 60554-3-1 Specification for cellulosic paper for electrical
purposes-Part 3: Specifications for individual
materials, sheet 1- General purpose electrical paper.
IEC 60567 Guide for sampling of gases and oil from oil filled
electrical equipment and analysis of free and
dissolved gases
IECITR 60616 Terminal and tapping markings for power
transformers
IEC 60722 Guide to the lightning impulse and switching impulse
testing of power transformers and reactors
IEC 60599 Interpretation of the analysis of gases in transformers
and other oil-filled electrical equipment in service

ASTM D202 Testing of Insulation Papers

BE standard 729 Specification for hot –dip galvanization of steels etc

ANSI/IEEE C 57. 12. 90 Test code for liquid immersed distribution, Power
and regulating Transformer
Electrical accessories shall comply with the relevant IEC standards even if not expressly
mentioned. In the event of direct conflict between various order documents, the precedence
of authority of documents shall be as follows –

I. Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP)

II. Specification including applicable codes & standards

III. Approved Vendor Drawings

IV. Other documents

 DESIGN OF TRANSFORMERS
General
The transformers shall be three phase units of the hermetically sealed tank type with oil
immersed copper windings and shall be naturally cooled (ONAN). They shall be suitable
for operation in outdoor exposed locations. All the active parts shall be completely
submerged in oil and a pressure relief valve and oil gauge mounted on the LV side of the
top cover without overextended pipe above the cover surface. The tank design shall allow
for oil expansions under normal and fault conditions as per service conditions.

The transformers shall be capable of operating continuously with rated power at 30 °C

average yearly temperature and at 50 °C maximum yearly temperature of the external
cooling medium, their specified temperature rise limits, i.e. the maximum permissible
temperature rise of the oil (top oil) shall not exceed 50° C, the average temperature rise of
the winding is to be limited to 55°C, and the winding hot spot temperature rise shall not
exceed 68°C as per IEC60076-2. It should also be noted that the oil temperature is not a
reliable measure for the winding temperature, since the time constant of the oil is 2 to 4
hours, while the time constant of the winding is 2 to 6 minutes. Therefore, the determination
of the permissible duration of the overloading must be done very carefully, since there is a
danger of the winding temperature exceeding the critical temperature, without being visible
by the oil temperature.

The transformers shall be capable of withstanding external short circuits for at least
3 seconds following application of loading conditions specified in IEC 60076-7. The
transformer shall have a minimum insulation life of 20.55 years and service life at least 25
years

The ability of the transformer to withstand the dynamic effects of short circuit shall be
demonstrated by tests and complete test reports (including oscillograms and records of the
condition of the transformer before and after the short-circuit test) shall be submitted with
the bid for tender evaluation.

The transformer and its component parts shall be able to carry loading beyond rated power
under permissible loading given in IEC 60076-7, Table and clause 4.3.2 for distribution
transformers.
Neutral points shall be brought out on a bushing to enable LV transformer earthling.

The transformer shall be designed to minimize the risk of accidental short-circuit caused
by animals, birds or vermin. The manufacturer shall consider the safety of operators and
maintenance staff in the design of the transformer in particular the following aspects as per
clause 9.1.2 of IEC 60076-1;2011

a) Accessibility to parts with high temperatures

b) Accessibility to live parts
c) Lifting and handling provisions
d) Access for maintenance
e) Working at a height
All specific schedules of guaranteed characteristics are stipulated in the technical schedule.
The transformers shall be designed and tendered in full compliance with all further
applicable sections, articles and drawings of the Specification. Furthermore, each
transformer shall comply with the stipulations mentioned hereunder.

All outdoor apparatus, including bushing insulators with their mountings, shall be designed
so as to avoid any accumulation of water.

The maximum noise levels shall be in accordance with BS EN 50464-1 and Table 5. The
sound level shall be measured and tested in accordance with IEC 60076-10 or NEMA TR-
1 and shall not exceed the guaranteed maximum level (without tolerance).

Drawings and documentation for each size of transformer offered shall be submitted with
tender. Clearly detailing importance dimensions, any special features of the offered design,
clearances, accessories, fittings and the features of the offered design that make it
impossible for vandals to siphon oil from the transformer even after forceful breaking of
accessory/fitting.
 Design drawings (by the manufacturer) complete with manufacturer’s guaranteed technical
particulars (GTP) shall be submitted to EEU for approval before manufacture. The design
drawings shall be detailed and shall include a minimum of the following:

i.Overall dimensions of the transformer and relevant electrical clearances. This shall include
all perspectives and respective

a) Weight of oil.

b) Weight of LV winding conductor

c) Weight of MV winding conductor

d) Core material

e) Copper winding material

f) Insulating materials

g) Steel tank/core clamp structure.

ii.Core/coil/insulation dimensions, clearances (internal and external) and stacking/coil

winding sequence detail.

iii.Drawing of nameplate to scale.

iv.Legend for all technical engineering drawings with manufacturer name, logo, model
number, revision/drawing number and key

v.Detailed drawing of arcing horns where applicable

The transformers of ratings 25kVA, 50kVA, 100kVA, 200kVA, 315kVA and 400KVA
shall be pole-mounted type.

Note: All design drawings must be stamped and signed by the manufacturer’s authorized
personnel
Sealing and cooling
The transformers shall be hermetically sealed oil transformers and shall be manufactured
with a sealed tank equipped with fins that allow the expansion at the temperature
variations. The tightness of the tank should be 0.5 Bar. The transformer should be designed
in such a way that oil does not come into contact with the air.
Leakage found shall be corrected by the supplier

Design of Cores
Core material
Only Prime and New core materials M3 Grade or better shall be used for the core
construction. The manufacturer shall provide all necessary proof and type test report. The
bidder should offer every batch of core lamination received from its sub vendors along with
Invoice of sub vendor, Mill test certificate, packaging list, Bill of lading, custom clearance
towards proof of prime core materials for verification by the purchaser without any cost to
the purchaser.

The design of the magnetic circuit shall be of non-ageing, Cold Rolled Grain Oriented
(CRGO) Silicon steel of minimum of M3 Grade (Nominal thickness of 0.23mm and
maximum total loss at 1.7T to be 0.85w/Kg or better as per IEC 60404-8-7) high
permeability without burrs and such as to avoid static discharges, development of short
circuit paths within itself or to the earthed clamping structure and production of flux
components at right angles to the plane of laminations which may cause local heating.

Each lamination shall be insulated with high quality insulation coating. The core and its
Clamping plates shall form a rigid unit structure, which shall maintain its form and position
under the severe stresses encountered during shipment, installation and short circuits

The flux density

The flux density at any point of the magnetic circuit when the transformer is connected on
tap No. 3 and operating at normal voltage and frequency shall be stated and shall not exceed
1.7 Tesla

Mechanical construction of cores

a) Care shall be exercised in the selection, treatment and handling of the core steel
to ensure that as far as possible laminations are flat and the finally assembled core is free
from distortion particular care shall be taken to secure even mechanical pressure over the
laminations, to prevent subsequent settling of the core and to reduce noise and vibration
during operation.

b) All parts of the cores shall be of robust design capable of withstanding any
shocks to which they may be subjected during lifting, transport installation and service.
c) All structural members of the assembled cores shall be of steel. All castings
shall be fitted and structural steel adequately cleaned and painted before being built into
the structure any non-magnetic or high resistance alloy used shall be subject to approval.

d) Adequate fitments shall be provided to enable the core and windings to be lifted
out of the transformer tank.

e) Adequate provision shall be made to prevent movement of the transformer

winding relative to the tank during transport and installation or while in service.

f) The supporting framework of the cores shall be designed so as to avoid the

presence of pockets which would prevent complete emptying of the tank through the drain
valve or cause trapping of air during filling.

g) The framework and core bolts shall be effectively insulated from the core so as
to reduce circulating currents to a minimum.
Windings
General
a) The HV and LV windings shall be made of continuous smooth high-grade
electrolytic copper as per IEC 60317. The characteristics of copper required shall be as per
IEC 60076-5. The Purchaser will inspect the quality of copper material used: size of
copper, number of turns, weight of copper and density…etc.

b) The three Medium voltage windings of the transformer shall be identical in

order to allow interchangeability.

c) Inter Layer insulation shall be Nomex /Epoxy dotted Kraft Paper.

d) Terminals of all windings shall be brought out of the tank through Bushings
for external connections.

e) The windings shall be uniformly insulated and the LV neutral points shall be
insulated for full voltage.

f) The completed core and coil assemble shall be dried in vacuum at not more
than 5mm of mercury absolute pressure and shall be immediately impregnated with oil
after the drying process to ensure the elimination of air and moisture within the insulation.
Vacuum may be applied in either vacuum over or in the transformer tank.

g) The windings shall be arranged so as to achieve, as far as possible, the

electromagnetic balance of the transformer at all voltage ratios but shall also be positioned
with due regard to the impulse voltages which may be impressed on the windings.

h) The insulation of windings and of all connections shall be of approved

materials which shall not deteriorate under the action of hot oil or from other causes when
the transformers are operated continuously at maximum permissible loads.

i) The stacks of windings shall receive adequate shrinkage treatment before final
assembly.

j) All leads or bars from the windings shall be brought out of the tank through
bushings for connection shall be rigidly supported. Stresses on coils and connections must
be avoided.
k) The coil clamping arrangement and the finished dimensions of any oil ducts
shall be such that they will not impede the free circulation of oil through the ducts.

Bracing of Windings
The windings and connections of all transformers shall be braced to withstand shocks
which may occur during transport or due to switching and other transient conditions during
service.

Any metal pieces in contact with end rings shall be so designed and secured that they do
not weaken the electrical or the mechanical properties of the rings.

If the transformer winding is built up of sections or disc coils separated by spacers the
clamping arrangements shall be such that equal pressure is applied to all columns of
spacers. All such spacers shall be securely located, shall be of suitable material and shall
receive adequate shrinkage treatment before assembly.
Technical data of the Medium Voltage windings (dimensions, number of turns, thickness
and type of wire, etc.) shall be supplied to Employer for purposes of windings repair, in
Purchaser's workshops.
The data shall be submitted together with the offer, or when submitting documents for
prototype approval.

Insulating Material
a) The HV and LV windings shall be separated so as to allow for cooling and ease
of repair. Insulating sleeves for the transformer tapping’s shall be in crepe paper and inter
layer insulation shall be in Grade K- Diamond dotted press paper.

There shall be double layer enamel insulation for the copper winding conductor. The
insulation shall be of class A with temperature class of 105oC as per IEC 60085.
b) Grade K- Diamond dotted Press Paper (thermopox): is a press paper with
qualities to improve the mechanical strength of oil immersed transformer windings without
reducing partial discharge levels in accordance with IEC standards 60641-2 and 60243-1

c) Crepe Paper: Crepe Papers shall be of type 3.2-130-100F or better in

accordance with IEC 60554-3-3. It shall have high elongation insulating properties useful
for joining and forming tapping leads of transformers. They shall have low dissipation
factor suitable for high voltage bushings of transformers, wire wrapping, and shielded rings
placed within end sections of Power transformer windings. Crepe papers shall be made
from high quality electrical grade Kraft base papers (100% sulphate wood pulp). The
technical characteristics of the paper according to IEC standards 60554-2 and 60243-1.
MV Bushings
General design

a) The Primary of transformers (HV side) will have three bushing in porcelain.

b) Bushings shall be outdoor type, easily replaceable and shall be located on the
top. Bushing Material Shall be Porcelain material. Cemented in type bushing shall not be
accepted. The Bushing Shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC
60137/DIN 42530/DIN 42532/DIN 42534/DIN42539 BSEN standard.

c) Tilted type of bushing is not acceptable.

d) MV bushings shall be rated to withstand the highest system voltage and the
maximum fault current of the windings when connected to the 15kV network and for the
same period of time.

e) Current carrying outer parts shall be made of tinned copper.

f) The bushings of the transformer shall be maintained after removing the

transformer lid. Each bushing shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer and type.
The marking shall be visible after assembly of the fittings.

The bushings shall be equipped with line clamps suitable for the connection of aluminium
(up to 240mm2) or copper (up to 150mm2) conductors of Medium voltage line.

Adjustable Arcing horns shall be provided on MV Bushings.

Minimum External Clearance: Phase to phase and Phase to Earth

Voltage Clearance Creepage Distance

Phase to Phase Phase to Earth and Phase to Neutral

15KV 280mm 280mm 525mm

33KV 480mm 480mm 1080mm

LV 80mm 80mm 70mm

Minimum external clearance values specified in the above table is for an altitude of 3000meter.
Creepage distance for MV bushings

The outer creepage distance for outdoor bushings shall not be less than 30mm/kV. The
insulation levels of the bushings shall conform to the given in the technical schedule.

System Porcelain Type Current Minimum Minimum Distance

Voltage (KV) (A) Creepage between phase to phase
Distance and line to ground (mm)
15kV DIN Standard 250 525 280

The Bidders shall submit to the Purchaser the Type tests reports of medium voltage
bushings with their bids. The type tests shall be performed according to the latest published
International Standard IEC 60137 and shall include the following type tests:
✓ Wet power-frequency voltage withstand test
✓ Dry lightning impulse voltage withstand test
✓ Temperature-rise test
✓ Verification of thermal short-time current withstand test
✓ Cantilever load withstand test
✓ Verification of dimensions

The MV Rod diameter shall be greater than or equal to M12.

LV Bushings
a) The position of each LV bushing shall be permanently and legibly marked on
the tank or lid with a label corresponding to the rating plate designation. The LV neutral
connection shall have a permanent, special marking, different from the phase connections.

b) LV bushings shall be sufficiently rigid to take the weight of up to 150mm2 UG

copper /aluminium cable connected between the LV bushing and the adjacent pole.
Alternatively, a support bracket may be provided that can be attached to the tank of the
transformer, to offer support to ensure no damage of the bushings because of movement of
the AB cable.
c) The LV bushings shall be equipped with line clamps suitable for connecting
aluminium and copper conductors as follows.LV bushings shall have phase clamp up to
185 mm2, neutral clamp 120 mm2.For ratings above 200KVA LV bushings shall have
2
clamps and/or a terminal pad to take phase conductors up to 300mm and neutral
conductors up to 150mm2 shall be provided. The clamps shall be complete with necessary
screws, washers and nuts.

The LV rod diameter shall be greater than or equal to M20 depending on the current rating.
Bushing Labels
The HV bushings shall be labeled - 1U, 1V, 1W and the LV bushing 2u, 2v, 2w, 2n. The
labeling of the phases shall be by permanent raised lettering on the transformer tank or
cover. Phase identification by adhesive stickers is not acceptable.

VIBRATION AND NOISE

The maximum noise level (A-weighted surface sound pressure level) shall not exceed the
values given in the following table and measured at a distance of one meter from the
transformer. The noise level test shall be performed according to Standard IEC 60076-10
using noise level meter periodically calibrated according to IEC 61672-3. Additionally, the
technical specification of the noise level meter shall state that noise level meter meets the
requirements of the IEC 61672. All relevant documents shall be presented to the Ethiopian
Electric Utility before performing noise level tests.
Rated Power, Sn (kVA) A-Weighted Surface Sound Pressure Level
(dB(A), 1m)

50 45
100 46
200 47
315 48
400 50

Every care shall be taken to ensure that the design and manufacture of all transformers and
auxiliary plant shall be such as to reduce noise and vibration to the level of that obtained
in good modern practice.
DUTY UNDER FAULT CONDITIONS
Any transformer may be directly connected to an underground or overhead distribution line
and switched into and out of service together with its associated distribution circuit.

The Transformer shall be capable of carrying its normal rating continuously at any tap
without undue stress and Overheating.

All transformers shall be capable of withstanding for three seconds without damage any
external short-circuit.

EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL WIRING

1 No riveted, screwed or soft-solder connections are to be used in the wiring and
cabling between the winding and the points of connection of the bushing or tap changer.

2 Any wiring liable to come in contact with oil shall have suitable oil resisting
insulation. The ends of stranded conductors shall be treated to prevent creepage of oil inside
the wire. There shall be no possibility of oil entering connection boxes for cables or wiring.

3 Unless otherwise approved high temperature, insulation shall be provided on

all wiring when this comes into contact with the transformer tank.

DRYING OUT BEFORE OIL FILLING

All transformers shall be dried out before filling them with oil, at the manufacturer’s works
and the transport and method of erection thereof so arranged that unless otherwise approved
they may be put into service without further drying out on site. The method of drying out
and the arrangement for transport and erection shall be subject to approval. Any subsequent
drying out which may be necessary after taking over will generally be carried out on site,
and the Supplier shall submit to the Engineer for his approval details of the method which
he recommends. These details should be incorporated in the Maintenance Instruction
Manual.

1. ELECTRICAL DATA
1.1. SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENTS
The transformers shall withstand the thermal and mechanical effects of any short-circuit
that can appear at the terminal of any winding. The short-time current (3sec (rms.) shall be
for the specified system fault levels.
1.2. INSULATION LEVEL
The complete transformer arranged for service shall comply fully with the requirements of
IEC 60076-3 including altitude correction factor

The transformers shall be designed for the following insulation levels.

For internal insulation (Winding):-

System Highest system Rated short Rated lightning

Voltage(kV) voltage Um kV duration power impulses
(rms.) frequency withstand voltage,
withstand voltage, kV (peak.)
kV(rms.)
15 17.5 38 95

For external insulation exposed to air (Bushing):-

System Highest system Rated short Rated lightning

Voltage(kV) voltage Um kV duration power impulses
(rms.) frequency withstand voltage,
withstand voltage, kV (peak.)
kV(rms.)
15 24 50 125

1.3. RATED POWER

The rated output at +50°C maximum ambient temperature shall be one of the preferred
ratings 25, 50, 100, 200, 315 and 400 rated Voltage
The transformers are required to operate from the 15kV network as follows:
 ((15/0.4 (Phase to Phase))kV
Three-phase 4 wire LV ((15/.22) (Phase to Neutral))kV

All secondary voltage ratings shall be at full load current at nominal tap.
1.4. VECTOR GROUP
The vector group of the three-phase transformers shall be Dyn5.

1.5. IMPEDANCE VOLTAGE

The Percentage impedance of transformer at 75oC shall be as stated in the following table
as per IEC 60076-5. The tolerance will be +10% at principal tapping and + 15% at any
other tapping of the pair

KVA Rating 25 50 100 200 315 400

% impedance for 15kV 4 4 4 4 4 4

2. OFF-LOAD TAP CHANGER

2.1 Tapping shall be carried out by means of an off-load tap changer. the tap
changer shall be designed, manufactured and tested as per iec 60214-1 and 60512.

2.2 the mv windings shall be provided with an off-load tap changer providing 5
positions and each step shall be 2.5%. the tap settings shall be 5%, +2.5%, 0%, -2.5%, -
5%, for three phase transformers.

2.3 the off-load tap changer shall be linear type and mounted on top cover. the tap
changer shall be operated after disconnection of power supply.

2.4 all transformers shall be capable of operation continuously without injurious

sheathing when operating on any tapping position and at 150% continuous loading and
over-voltage surges.

3. LOSSES
The bidders’ offers shall be accompanied with Type test reports (as per IEC60076 and
IEC60071) conducted at independent third-party testing Laboratories for the offered that
was conducted within five years from the date of the bid submission. Type tests shall be
conducted on the Transformers of identical design to prove that the offered transformers
satisfy all the design requirements set out in this specification.

In case of any doubts, Ethiopian Electric Utility (EEU) reserves the right to verify the
original type test reports of the independent third-party testing Laboratory or ask the
supplier to conduct the type tests at an independent third-party test laboratory which is
approved by EEU without ADDITIONAL COST to the employer (EEU)

The maximum Load losses and No-Load losses at rated load and conditions shall be as
given below:

Rating 15kV Distribution Transformer (As per

IEC60076-20-2017)
Rating (kVA) No-load loss (Watt) Load loss (Watt)

25 Three Phase 70 900

50 Three Phase 90 1,100

100 Three Phase 145 1750

200 Three Phase 280 2,700

315 Three Phase 360 3,900

400Three Phase 430 4,600

Rating 33KV Distribution Transformer

(As per IEC60076-20-2017)
Rating (kVA) No-load loss Load loss
25 Three Phase 80.5 990

50 Three Phase 103.5 1210

100 Three Phase 166.75 1925

200 Three Phase 287.5 3025

315 Three Phase 414 4290

 400Three Phase 494.5 5060

The above losses are the maximum allowable and there should not be any positive
tolerance.

Provided that the tested loss is below the required maximum load loss, if, on delivery, the
tested losses exceed the guaranteed losses, the excess of the guaranteed values will be
capitalized, and the amount deducted from the contract price as below:
✓ No Load Loss US$6000 per kilowatt.
✓ Load Loss US$3200 per kilowatt.
There will be no credit for losses less than the guaranteed value.

4. TRANSFORMER TANKS

4.1 TANK WITH ACCESSORIES

a) The tank shall be of Hermetically Sealed Construction. The transformer top cover
shall be bolted type and fitted with proper gasket suitable for temperatures as specified in
this specification.
b) The top cover of the tank shall be slightly sloping to drain rain water.
c) The tank shall be designed for natural cooling (ONAN) with corrugated walls.
d) The main tank body shall be pressure tested and a certificate issued/signed by
ISO/IEC 17025 Accredited Laboratory ascertaining the soundness of all welded joints in
accordance with relevant ISO standards. A copy of certificate shall be supplied. Tanks with
corrugations shall be tested for leakage test at a pressure of 0.25kg/cm² measured at the
bottom of the tank. Cooling fins shall be welded with round stiffening rods to prevent
vibration during operation of the transformers.
e) The tank design shall be such that the core coil assembly can be lifted freely.
f) Lifting lugs shall be available for lifting the core and coils out of the tank. The
hooks that will be used for anchoring the core shall be so located as not to foul with the
core coil assembly.
g) Gaskets used shall be oil resistant and made of such a material that no serious
deterioration occurs under service conditions. Rubber gaskets used for flange connections
of the various oil compartments shall be laid in grooves. Gaskets of neoprene and/or such
material which can be easily damaged by over-pressing (e.g. any kind of impregnated/
bonded cork) are not acceptable. Use of hemp as gasket material is also prohibited.
h) Lifting lugs: 4 Nos. Heavy duty suitable lifting lugs
i) Pulling lugs (Optional): 4 Nos. Heavy duty suitable horizontal pulling lugs.
j) All transformers shall be capable of giving their continuous rated output without
exceeding the specified temperature rise.
k) Galvanized fixing bolts, nuts and washers shall be supplied.
l) The tank width shall be maximum of 1400mm and minimum of 900mm.

4.2 TANK BOTTOM

Thickness of tank bottom shall not be less than 6 mm.
4.3 TANK COVER
Thickness of tank cover shall not be less than 5 mm.
4.4 TANK SIDES
Thickness of tank sides shall not be less than 3.15 mm.
4.5 CORROSION PROTECTION
The inner surfaces of the tank shall be coated by an oil resistant paint.

The smaller parts such as brackets, etc. shall be hot-dip galvanized. Fasteners mounted on
hot-dip galvanized or ready painted part shall be galvanized or made of stainless-steel ISO
class F1 or A2.

All steel surfaces shall be sand blasted in accordance with DIN 55928 Part 4 and shall then
be painted in the following sequences.

Coatings Kind Layer

thickness
One (1) primer two-component epoxy zinc phosphate 60µm
coat
One (1) Two-component epoxy micaceous 60µm
intermediate coat iron oxide
One top coat (1) Two-component polyurethane 40µm
Total coatings thickness (dry film) 160µm
The final coat of painting shall be of pore free and homogeneous quality and shall be of a
uniform shade of code RAL 7032(silica grey) paint for the outside surfaces. Manufactures
are free to select the inner transformer paint colour

If any hot dipped galvanized parts are provided the same painting method shall be applied,
however instead of two primer coats one adhesive coat and one base coat shall be applied.
In this case the mean thickness of galvanizing shall be 70 µm. Mechanical damage shall be
repaired at site with original paint as above.

4.6 FILLING VALVES

A filling stub with an inner diameter of at least 25-mm shall be placed at the top of the
cover.

4.7 OIL DRAIN VALVES

Transformers shall have a lockable25-mm BSP oil drain plug placed at the bottom of the
tank. The oil drain device shall conform to IEC 60076.

4.8 MONITORING DEVICES

All transformers shall be equipped with an oil level, Pressure relief valve and temperature
indicator

4.9 OIL LEVEL INDICATOR

All transformers shall be equipped with a magnetic oil level, mounted on the transformer.
The window of the oil level indicator shall be directed towards the low voltage of the
transformer.

4.10 OVERPRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE

The transformer shall be equipped with an overpressure relief device of a type approved
by the Ethiopian Electric Utility.

The overpressure relief device shall be covered with a suitable "cover" to protect persons
in the vicinity of the transformer against the spurting of hot oil in the event of an internal
fault of the transformer. The cover (window of the cover) shall be directed toward high
voltage side of the transformer.

The "cover" shall be of a type approved by the Ethiopian Electric Utility.

4.11 THERMOMETER POCKET
The transformer shall be equipped at the top with a cylinderic pocket for a thermometer to
measure the oil temperature.

5. TRANSFORMER OIL
a) The transformer shall be filled with oil up to maximum permissible level before
delivery. The complete first filling shall be of new oil free from inhibitors and additives up
to maximum permissible level for the supplied transformer. The oil shall contain at least
0.3% by weight oxidation inhibitor of type (DBPC) according to IEC 60296.The oil shall
be new and satisfied to contain less than 2 mg/Kg (not detectable) of PCB’s.

b) Each transformer shall be supplied with standard insulating oil conforming to

the requirements of IEC 60156 and the oil shall have a high dielectric strength (breakdown
voltage >70KV).

c) Mixing different products or products from different suppliers is not

permissible.

d) The type of insulating liquid, e.g. “Mineral oil-based insulating oil pursuant to
DIN VDE 0370”/relevant IEC is to be indicated on the rating plate of each transformer.

Certification of the absence of PCB is to be submitted for each transformer.

6. UNDERCARRIAGE
The following undercarriage shall be provided as specified in the technical schedules.

Under frame for Pole mounted transformers

Transformers shall be fitted with an under frame suitable for bolting the transformer to a
pole mounted platform in case of pole mounted transformers.

7. EARTHING TERMINAL
The material shall be copper or brass type earthing flag approximately 63 mm square and
a thickness not less than 6 mm with a center hole of 12 mm diameter shall be welded
externally to the tank, one on the tank cover and one on the base frame.
A grounding sign shall be put next to the grounding screw. The marking shall be stamped
and red color painted on tin plates which shall be fastened with transformer.

8. EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES

Each transformer shall be provided with the following.

a) Rating and diagram plates bearing the data specified in the appropriate
IEC recommendations.

Marking for the HV side 1U 1V 1W

Marking for the LV side 2u 2v 2w 2n from right to left of MV side.

b) Oil filling and drain valves. It shall only be possible to open these
valves with a special key/spanner to discourage tampering.

c) Tank earthing terminal. M12 size screws -2 Nos. one on the tank cover
and another on the base frame suitable for copper earthing wires.

d) Lifting fittings

e) Oil level indicator: This shall be readable by an operator standing at

ground level at distance of up to 5meter away from the transformer. It shall have maximum
and minimum oil level markings which shall fall within range.

f) Unit center lines marked clearly on the tank sides.

g) Spark gaps on the HV bushing

h) Top oil thermometer

i) Cable Clamps

j) Unit center lines marked clearly on the tank sides.

k) Locking device for the off-circuit tap changer

l) Arcing Horns

m) Pole mounting Supports

INSPECTION AND TESTING
The tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest published recommendations of
the IEC 60076 and this specification by and at the expense of the manufacturer.
For Medium Voltage Bushing tests, please refer clause 4.6
The pertinent professionals shall be given access to the Manufacturing Works (Factory) at
all reasonable times for the purpose of inspection of the manufacturing and testing facilities
available in addition to inspection of the equipment.
The tests will be divided into the following categories:

1. Type Tests,

2. Routine Tests and

3. Acceptance Tests.

Prior to the tests the supplier shall submit an outline of the procedures and tests in its plans,
to demonstrate fulfilment of the requirements specified in subsequent sections of the
detailed technical specification

Before regular manufacturing commences, samples of the equipment i.e. the transformers
shall be made available for testing to ensure compliance with the design.

The Buyer reserves the right to call for type tests on the equipment at the Supplier’s
expense, on samples selected at random at the Manufacturer's Works and witness these
tests at an approved independent third-party standard Laboratory. Failure to meet the
conditions of test could result in the rejection of a complete batch of equipment’s.

The Buyer will have the authority to delay delivery of any items of equipment, which have
not been tested and approved in accordance with the Contract.

The Supplier shall report on progress and will compare the Supplier’s production program
with actual progress and shall report in a timely manner to the Employer the reason for any
delays.

During the course of manufacturing/fabrication, Routine tests shall be conducted in

accordance with the relevant IEC 60076/BS/ISO standards.
The Supplier shall submit copies of the Routine test reports of the equipment/ material
along with the inspection offer.

The inspection and acceptance tests shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions
in the applicable standard, supplemented by the specific requirements indicated in the
technical specifications free of cost to the Employer.

At least 21days’ notice of the date, time and place of all tests shall be given to the Buyer
so that arrangements can be made to have the test witnessed.

In addition to the above requirements, the following requirements shall apply and take
precedence.

1. TYPE TESTS
In addition to the IEC requirements the following type tests shall be conducted on the
Transformers of identical design to prove that the offered transformers satisfy all the design
requirements set out in this specification.

1) Temperature Rise Test (IEC60076-2).

2) Dielectric tests (IEC60076-3).
3) Short-circuit withstand test (IEC 60076-5).
4) Determination of sound level (IEC 60076-10)
5) Measurement of No-load loss and current at 90% and 110% of rated
voltage.
And Measurement of Load loss test
The type test report shall be traceable, shall have the name of Manufacturer, the names
and signatures of those who performed the type tests, those who approved the type tests
reports and those who witnessed the tests. The type test report shall contain detailed
drawing of tested equipment, photos of the equipment prior to and after the tests.

The Type Test shall be performed in KEMA or equivalent internationally accredited

testing laboratories.
 2. ROUTINE TESTS
The transformer shall be subjected to all routine tests as stipulated in IEC 60076 and the
following Routine Tests at the manufacturer’s works. Routine tests shall be carried on the
whole transformers.

Checking of weights, dimensions, fittings, accessories, tank sheet thickness, oil quality,
material, finish and workmanship as per Guaranteed Technical Particulars and contract
drawings

1) Measurement of winding resistance (IEC60076-1, clause 11.2).

2) Measurement of Voltage Ratio and check of phase displacement
(IEC60076-1, clause 11.3).
3) Measurement of short circuit impedance and load loss (IEC60076-1,
clause 11.4)
4) Measurement of no load loss and current(IEC60076-1, clause 11.5)
5) Energy Efficiency value
6) Dielectric routine tests (IEC60076-3).
7) Tests on on-load tap-changers, where appropriate (IEC60076-1,clause
11.7).
8) Leak testing with pressure for liquid immersed transformers
(IEC60076-1,clause 11.8).
9) Tightness tests and pressure tests for tanks for gas filled transformers
(IEC60076-15).

3. AIR PRESSURE TEST

The finished transformer with all the fittings, including bushings in position shall be tested
for leakage at a pressure that is 10% below the pressure at the altitude specified under
system conditions for 10 minutes. There should be no leakage at any joint. This shall be
carried on all the 5% samples.

4. ACCEPTANCE TESTS
All acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant standards and as given below shall be
carried out by the supplier in the presence of the Employer’s/Buyer’s representative on
10% samples.

1)Visual Inspection
 2)Measurement of winding resistance and Megger test.

3)Voltage ratio measurement and check of polarity or vector group symbol at all tap
positions. Bushing positions shall have permanent markings at this stage of production.

4)Power frequency test.

5)Measurement of impedance voltages.

6)Measurement of load loss @ 75oC

7)Dielectric test.

8)Measurement of no-load loss and no-load current

9)Induced over voltage withstand test 30kV and 66kV for 60 seconds on the 15kV and 33kV
windings respectively.

10)Tap changer test.

11)Coordination test for LV circuit breaker and HV Fuse links, if applicable.

12)Insulation oil test

5. SPECIAL TESTS
Other type and routine tests shall also be carried out as per IEC60076-3 clause 7.3.3.2 with
the interest of the employer without additional price.

6. TESTS ON BUSHINGS (H.V.& L.V.)

The bidder should test the bushing as per IEC60137-2008 and should submit the test result
to EEU. Tests shall be conducted on the transformer bushings as detailed below:

1)Dry flash over voltage

2)Wet flash over voltage

3)Dry one minute withstand voltage

4)Wet one minute withstand voltage

5)Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50Micro seconds +ve wave)

6)Minimum oil immersed flashover voltage.

 MARKING
Each transformer shall be provided with a rating plate showing the information stated in
the IEC standards. The plate shall be in both Amharic and English. The words "Property
of Ethiopian Electric Utility", the EEU logo, the contract number and loan number and a
unique identification number (to be advised by the Employer) shall also be engraved on
the rating plate.

RATING, DIAGRAM AND PROPERTY PLATES

The following plates shall be fixed to the transformer tank at an average, readable height.

1)A rating plate bearing the data specified in IEC 76 or other approved standard. Indicating
tfollowing shall be fixed on the same side as LV bushings,

2)Name of manufacturer,

3)Manufacturer’s serial number,

4)Year of manufacture,

5)Rated power,

6)Rated frequency,

7)Rated voltages,

8)Rated currents,

9)Connection group symbol,

10)short-circuit impedance,

11)No load loss value

12)Load loss value @ 750C

13)Total mass,

14)Mass of insulating oil,

15)Temperature rise limit of oil and windings,

16)Insulation level,
17)Type of cooling,

18)Tapping range and no. of taps,

19)Each bushing shall be marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer,

20)A diagram plate showing the internal connections and also the voltage vector relationship
of the several windings. In addition, a plan view of the transformer giving the correct
physical relationship of the terminals shall be given. When links are provided for changing
the transformer group symbol and/or ratio, then means shall be provided for clearly
indicating in which mode the transformer is connected. The transformer ratio shall be
indicated for each tap,

21)A property plate engraved to the instructions of the Engineer,

The above plates shall be of stainless steel or of other material capable of withstanding
continuous outdoor service and shall all be suitably mounted to prevent vibration, rattling
or corrosion.

TRANSPORT

The equipment should be individually packed with plastic pallets in a way suitable for
transport. The packing should be suitable for introducing equipment into standard transport
industry containers. All additional elements of the equipment should be packed into a
single crate.

Transformers should be transported with their complete oil load and accessories in place.
The transformer should be completely secured in its packaging.

A visual inspection of the equipment will be carried out up on receiving it, checking for
possible damage occurred during transport and the ware housing process. In addition, if
there are complementary elements, they should be verified (clamps, grounding bolt, fuses,
etc.) at the store.

Packaging should be able to withstand the weight of transformer.

PACKAGING
Each Packaging shall be clearly marked in Print (Capital Letters) with the following data
in each transformer:

• Manufacturer/Supplier Name and Trademark

• Ethiopian Electric Utility

• Contract No.

• Serial No

• Transformer size and Weight

• Instructions for unloading with a mobile crane and with a fork-lift truck, checking
of the correctly balanced during the transportation.

• Lifting and Tying Points

QUALITY PLANS
The bidder shall draw up for each section of the work quality plans which shall be
submitted to the Purchaser for approval at least two weeks prior to the commencement of
work on the particular section. Each quality plan shall set out the activities in a logical
sequence and, unless advised otherwise, shall include the following:

✓ An outline of the proposed work and programmer sequence

✓ The structure of the Supplier's or manufacturer’s organization for the contract
✓ The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of work for the
contract
✓ Hold and notification points
✓ Submission of engineering documents required by the specification
✓ The inspection of materials and components on receipt
✓ Reference to the Supplier's work procedures appropriate to each activity
✓ Inspection during fabrication/construction
✓ Final inspection and test

Guaranteed Technical Schedules for 15/0.4kV, 315KVA Distribution Transformer

No Item Unit Requirement Bid Offer

I. General
1 Manufacturer’s Name

2 Country of manufacturer

3 Kind of installation Out-door

Pole mounted
4 Equipment Standard IEC 60076
5 No. of phases three-phase
6 Type of tank Hermetically
Sealed Bolted
Cover
7 No. of windings Two
8 Vector group symbol Dyn5
9 Tapping range ±% +5% (-5%,-
2.5%,
0,+2.5%,+5%)
10 Number of steps ± steps +2, -2
11 (maximum), height above sea level 3000
Meter
12 Cooling method ONAN
13 Specification of oil IEC 60296
II. Ratings
14 Rated power KVA 315
15 Nominal system voltage
15.1 primary UN1 kV 15
15.2 secondary UN2 kV 0.4
16 Frequency Hz 50
17 Principal tapping kV 15
18.1 Maximum Continuous System kV 17.5
withstand Voltage
18.2 Rated Voltage of the equipment kV 24

19 Impedance voltage at rated power % 4

20 HV Windings
No Item Unit Requirement Bid Offer

20.1 Material, wire or strip Copper

wire/strip
20.2 Insulation
20.3 Power frequency withstand voltage kV(rms) 50
20.4 Rated lightning, impulse withstand kV(peak) 125
voltage
21 LV Windings
21.1 Material, wire or strip Copper
wire/strip
21.2 Insulation
21.3 Power frequency withstand voltage kV(rms) 3

21.4 Rated lightning, impulse withstand kV(peak) 8

voltage
21.5 Magnetic flux density (at rated Tesla 1.7
voltage and frequency)
22 Core Material CRGO
22.1 Core Loss figure, Watt/kg Maximum 0.85
III. Operation Details
23 Ambient temperature (max.) °C 50
24 Ambient temperature (average) °C 30
25 Temperature rise limit (at 3000 m )
25.1 oil / top °C 50
25.2 windings / average °C 55
25.3 windings hot spot °C 68
26 No-load loss at rated voltage and W 360
frequency
27 Full load loss ,W W 3,900
28 Rated voltage at full load kV
(P.F=0.95)
29 Efficiency referred to 75oC at rated
voltage and frequency
29.1 100% rated output and P.F= 1 (%)
29.2 100% rated output and P.F= 0.95
(%)
30 No load current as percent of rated
current
30.1 at 90% voltage (%)
 No Item Unit Requirement Bid Offer

30.2 at 100% voltage (%)

IV. Bushings
31 Primary
31.1 Manufacturer
31.2 rated current A 250
31.2.1 Rod size M12
31.3 power frequency test kV 50
31.4 lightning impulse test kV 125
31.5 clearance across insulator (at mm 280
3000m)
31.6 adjustable arcing horns yes/no Yes
31.7 creep age distance mm >525

31.8 Specification of creepage distance IEC 60815-2/2008

32 Secondary
32.1 Manufacturer
32.2 Type (DIN type or eqvt.) Yes
32.3 Rated current A
32.4 power frequency test kV 3
32.5 lightning impulse test kV 8
32.6 clearance across insulator mm 80
32.7 Min. creep age distance mm 70
33 Noise level dB(A) <48
34 VI. Materials, Masses, Measures
and Drawings
34 Transformer tank, material Steel
34.1 Transformer total mass kg
34.2 Overall dimensions including
bushings:
34.3 Height mm
34.4 Depth mm
34.5 Width mm 900 to 1400mm
34.6 Thickness of tank plate
34.7 Top mm Minimum 5mm
34.8 Bottom mm Minimum 6mm
 No Item Unit Requirement Bid Offer

34.9 Sides mm Minimum

3.15mm
35 Colour of transformer Grey
36 Thickness of surface treatment µm 160
37 Drawing of dimensions No.
38 Pamphlet No.

Signed __________________ Date __________________

Company __________________ Position in Company ________________

Company Stamp
Guaranteed Technical Schedules for 33/0.4kV, 315KVA Distribution Transformer

No Item Unit Requirement Bid Offer

I. General
1 Manufacturer’s Name

2 Country of manufacturer

3 Kind of installation Out-door

Pole mounted
4 Equipment Standard IEC 60076
5 No. of phases three-phase
6 Type of tank Hermetically
Sealed Bolted
Cover
7 No. of windings Two
8 Vector group symbol Dyn5
9 Tapping range ±% +5% (-5%,-
2.5%,
0,+2.5%,+5%)
10 Number of steps ± steps +2, -2
No Item Unit Requirement Bid Offer

11 (maximum), height above sea level 3000

Meter
12 Cooling method ONAN
13 Specification of oil IEC 60296
II. Ratings
14 Rated power kVA 315
15 Nominal system voltage
15.1 primary UN1 kV 33
15.2 secondary UN2 kV 0.4
16 Frequency Hz 50
17 Principal tapping kV 33
18.1 Maximum Continuous System kV 36
withstand Voltage
18.2 Rated Voltage of the equipment kv 52

19 Impedance voltage at rated power % 4

20 HV Windings
20.1 Material, wire or strip Copper
wire/strip
20.2 Insulation
20.3 Power frequency withstand voltage kV(rms) 95
20.4 Rated lightning, impulse withstand kV(peak) 250
voltage
21 LV Windings
21.1 Material, wire or strip Copper
wire/strip
21.2 Insulation
21.3 Power frequency withstand voltage kV(rms) 3

21.4 Rated lightning, impulse withstand kV(peak) 8

voltage
21.5 Magnetic flux density (at rated Tesla 1.7
voltage and frequency)
22 Core Material CRGO
22.1 Core Loss figure, Watt/kg Maximum 0.85
III. Operation Details
23 Ambient temperature (max.) °C 50
 No Item Unit Requirement Bid Offer

24 Ambient temperature (average) °C 30

25 Temperature rise limit (at 3000 m )
25.1 oil / top °C 50
25.2 windings / average °C 55
25.3 windings hot spot °C 68
26 No-load loss at rated voltage and W 414.0
frequency
27 Full load loss ,W W 4,290
28 Rated voltage at full load kV
(P.F=0.95)
29 Efficiency referred to 75oC at rated
voltage and frequency
29.1 100% rated output and P.F= 1 (%)
29.2 100% rated output and P.F= 0.95
(%)
30 No load current as percent of rated
current
30.1 at 90% voltage (%)
30.2 at 100% voltage (%)
IV. Bushings
31 Primary
31.1 Manufacturer
31.2 rated current A 250
31.2.1 Rod size M12
31.3 power frequency test kV 95
31.4 lightning impulse test kV 250
31.5 clearance across insulator (at mm 480
3000m)
31.6 adjustable arcing horns yes/no Yes
31.7 creep age distance mm >1080

31.8 Specification of creepage distance IEC 60815-2/2008

32 Secondary
32.1 Manufacturer
32.2 Type (DIN type or eqvt.) Yes
32.3 Rated current A
 No Item Unit Requirement Bid Offer

32.4 power frequency test kV 3

32.5 lightning impulse test kV 8
32.6 clearance across insulator mm 80
32.7 Min. creep age distance mm 70
33 Noise level dB(A) <48
34 VI. Materials, Masses, Measures
and Drawings
34 Transformer tank, material Steel
34.1 Transformer total mass kg
34.2 Overall dimensions including
bushings:
34.3 Height mm
34.4 Depth mm
34.5 Width mm 900 to 1700mm
34.6 Thickness of tank plate
34.7 Top mm Minimum 5mm
34.8 Bottom mm Minimum 6mm
34.9 Sides mm Minimum
3.15mm
35 Colour of transformer Grey
36 Thickness of surface treatment µm 160
37 Drawing of dimensions No.
38 Pamphlet No.

Product 21 - OVERHEAD LOAD-BREAK SWITCHES

Scope of supply
Design, Manufacture, Testing at manufacturers works before dispatch, Packing, Delivery
of material and submission of documents to purchaser

Application: This specification specifies the performance and general requirements for
three phase pole mounted load break switch for outdoor dependent manual operation as
load break switch in 15kV and 33 kV network in given service conditions.

Codes & standards

 The equipment shall conform to this specification and latest revision of following codes
with all amendments –Codes & standards

No Title IEC standard

2.1 Dimension of ball and socket coupling of string insulator units, IEC 60120

2.2 Alternating current disconnector and earthing switches, IEC60129

2.3 High Voltage switches, IEC60265

Dimension of clevises and tongue couplings of string insulator
2.4 units, IEC60471

2.5 Insulators pins and conductor fittings for overhead power lines, BS3288
Service Condition
Item Parameter
Altitude Any altitude up to 3000m
Annual Rainfall 1250mm
Period of exceptional Rains June to September
Ambient Air Temperatures:
Average +300c
Minimum -50c
Maximum 500c
Relative Air Humidity 70%
Wind Velocity:
Maximum wind( height above ground level)
0-30m 35m/s
30-50m 45m/s
Isoceraunic Level Upto100 thunderstorm days/year
Seismic Level No records of any activity
Design
The load break switch shall fulfil the following minimum requirements according to
IEC265 and IEC129 under IEC standard conditions

All phase must open and close simultaneously.

The load break switch shall be suitable for mounting on single concrete/steel pole and shall
be ready for mounting and operation. It shall be complete with all necessary items such as:

• Operating rod and handle for manual control with necessary fixing accessories
and padlock
 • Cross arm where insulators strings with clevises can be fixed. Clevises are
according to IEC 60471 or BS 3288 for ball eye of standard coupling size 11
according IEC 60120 and BS 3288 with minimum failing load 70KN.
• Earthing connection for protective earthling conductor of cu 35mm2.
• Clamps for connecting all aluminium conductors of AAC 50 up to 240 mm2 both
for incoming and outgoing side.
• All accessories and structures needed to mount on a single concrete/steel pole
• The length of the load break switch cross arm shall be preferably 2000mm for 15kV
and 2500mm for 33kV. However, alternatives may be quoted. The switch
disconnected cross arm shall be suitable for installing tension insulator strings of
cap and pin type. The load break switch shall be supplied with complete accessories
and structure to mount on a single concrete/steel pole. The purchase should not use
additional material to mount the load break switch on a single pole.

Materials
The insulator material shall be porcelain or toughened or annealed glass or cast resin. The
terminal shall be compatible and ready connecting with aluminium conductor.

Markings
The load break switch shall be marked according to requirements of IEC 60265

Testing
Testing shall be in accordance with IEC 60265 and IEC 60129.

Installation
The load break switch shall be mounted at the top of a single pole. Operation and locking
to both open and closed positions with a padlock shall be possible from the ground level.
The switch shall be suitable for single pole mounting on pole of 11m or 12mt length with
the following top diameter:

Minimum top diameter 170 mm

Maximum top diameter 220 mm.

Guaranteed Technical Parameters
Guaranteed Technical Parameters of 33kV pole mounted load break switch
Bidder to submit hard copy duly filled & signed along with techno commercial offer.

GTP for 33 kV Pole Mounted Load Break Guaranteed value

No. Unit
Switch Required Offered
1 Name of manufacturer
2 Country of manufacture
Single concrete
3 Type / steel Pole
Mounted
4 Type tested yes/no Yes
5 Standards IEC/ VDE
6 Maximum Rated voltage kV 36
7 Maximum Equipment Rated voltage kV 48.3
Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs, dry)
8 kVpeak 250
phase to earth
Power frequency withstand voltage (1 min.,
9 kVrms 120
dry) phase to earth
Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs, dry)
10 kVpeak 275
across insulating distance
Power frequency withstand voltage (1 min.,
11 kVrms 132
dry) across insulating distance
12 Rated frequency Hz 50
13 Rated current A 400
14 Rated short circuit current kA 25
15 Rated inductive breaking capacity kVA
16 Rated capacitive breaking current A
 GTP for 33 kV Pole Mounted Load Break Guaranteed value
No. Unit
Switch Required Offered
17 Creepage distance mm >1080
18 Minimum failing loads of cross-arm
18.1 Perpendicularly to line direction(Fx)
18.2 Vertical load (Fy)
18.3 In the line direction (Fz)
19 Length of operating rod, m 8.5
20 Accessories included? Yes/No
21 Weight of complete disconnector kg
22 Rated mechanical terminal load N
23 Min. clearances in air between poles mm
Min. clearances in air over isolating
24 mm
distance
25 Incoming terminals cross-section mm2 50-240
26 Out coming terminals cross-section mm2 50-240
27 Material of terminals Copper
28 Material of coating Silver plated
29 Material of insulating parts Porcelain
30 Thickness of zinc coating of steel microns 85
As per IEC
31 Maximum operating force N
standard
32 Length of cross-arm mm 2500
33 Spacing between poles mm

Guaranteed Technical Parameters of 15kV pole mounted load break switch

GTP for 15kV Pole Mounted Load Break Guaranteed value
No. Unit
Switch Required Offered
1 Name of manufacturer
2 Country of origin
3 Type
4 Type tested Yes
5 Standards yes/no
6 Rated voltage kV 15
7 Highest Equipment Voltage kV 24
8 Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs, dry) kVp 150
phase to earth
9 Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs, dry) kVp 165
across isolating distance
 GTP for 15kV Pole Mounted Load Break Guaranteed value
No. Unit
Switch Required Offered
10 Power frequency withstand voltage (1 min., kV 70
wet) phase to earth
11 Power frequency withstand voltage (1 min., kV 77
wet) across isolating distance
12 Rated frequency Hz 50
13 Rated continous current carying capacity A 400
13a Rated Breaking Current A 400

14 Rated short circuit current kA 25

15 Rated capacitive breaking current A 10
16 Creepage distance mm >525
17 Minimum failing loads of cross-arm
17.1 Perpendicularly to line direction(Fx)
17.2 Vertical load (Fy)
17.3 In the line direction (Fz)
18 Length of operating rod, m 8.5
19 Accessories included? Yes/No
20 Weight of complete disconnector kg
21 Rated mechanical terminal load N
22 Min. clearances in air between poles mm
23 Min. clearances in air over isolating distance mm
24 Incoming terminals cross-section mm2 50-240
25 Out coming terminals cross-section mm2 50-240
26 Material of terminals Copper
27 Material of coating Silver plated
28 Material of insulating parts porcelain
29 Thickness of zinc coating of steel microns 85
30 Maximum operating force N
31 Length of cross-arm mm 2000
32 Spacing between poles mm

Product 22 - Non-communicable Fault passage Indicator

for 15 and 33kv Over
SCOPE
This specification defines the minimum technical requirements for design, engineering,
manufacturing, testing, inspection, supply and delivery of non-communicable Overhead
line Fault passage Indicator (FPI)/ Fault Sensing Indicator (FSI) intended to be used in
medium-voltage overhead line distribution network of Ethiopian Electric Utility.

REFERENCE STANDARDS
The Fault passage Indicator (FPI) including the operating devices, accessories and
auxiliary equipment forming integral part thereof, shall be designed, manufactured,
assembled and tested in accordance with the relevant standards, specification and codes
of practices, referred to herein and shall be the latest editions including all applicable
official amendments and revisions.
The design, manufacture and performance of the equipment shall comply with all
currently applicable statutes, regulations and safety codes.
Unless otherwise specified, the equipment offered shall conform to the latest applicable
Standards and in particular, to the following:-

Standard Number Title

IEC 60068 Environmental testing

IEC 61010 Standard for safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use

IEC 61000 Standards for Electromagnetic compatibility

IEC 60445:2021 Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and
identification - Identification of equipment terminals, conductor
terminations and conductors
IEC 60445:2021 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and
their accessories
EN 60-950 Product Safety testing standard for "Information Technology Equipment"
(known as ITE)

IEC 60529 Protection against accidental contact, foreign Objects and water

IEEE 495:2007 Guide for testing faulted circuit indicators

SYSTEM PARAMETERS & SERVICE CONDITIONS

Service condition

The Fault detection system shall be designed to operate in the following environmental
conditions.
Description Service Condition
Altitude Altitude 3000m
Annual Rainfall 1250mm
Period of exceptional Rains June to September
Ambient Air Temperatures:
Average +300c
Minimum -50c
Maximum +500c
Relative Air Humidity 70%
Wind Velocity:
Maximum wind (height above ground
level) 0-30m 35m/s
30-50m 45m/s
Isoceraunic Level Up to 100 thunderstorm days/year
Seismic Zone Zone 4
Pollution (IEC 60815) Very Heavy:- Class IV
System parameters

The Fault detection systems shall be designed to operate on a 15kVand 33kV overhead
line network with the following characteristics:

• Nominal Operation Voltage: - 15kV and 33kV

• Frequency: - 50Hz
• No. of phases: - 3
• System fault current: - 25KA / 3 sec
• Conductor diameter: - 5 to 35mm
• Purpose of Equipment

• The main functions of the equipment are:

• To detect phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault currents on the MV network at
15kV and 33kV, overhead line feeders.
• To provide a local light indication of fault.
Design Criteria

• The OHL fault indicator shall be designed to operate at ambient temperature from
-5oC up to +50oC
• It shall be suitable for mounting on OHL conductors from 5mm up to 35mm
overall diameter with rated operating voltage of 15kV and 33kV.
• The housing of OHL fault indicator shall be made of weather proof, robust, non-
metallic, fire retardant, UV stabilized material.
• The OHL fault indicators shall be suitable for outdoor installation with IP65
degree of protection or better
• The OHL fault indicators shall be suitable for installation and removal on live
overhead lines with the use of insulated hot-stick provided by the manufacturer.
• Hot-stick mounting adapter shall be supplied for every 100 units of OHL fault
indicators
• Clamping tightness of OHL fault indicators shall be able to withstand wind
pressure without slipping or falling out of the conductor.
• The OHL fault indicators shall be equipped with local indications. Local
indication by ultra-bright blinking LEDs (red color). Any additional local
indicating method may be proposed and shall be evaluated by EEU. Local
indications shall have a clear 360° visibility from a distance of 100m at daylight
and 500m at night-time.
• The OHL fault indicators shall be maintenance-free, fully self-contained without
external transformer or connections, and do not require additional source of
supply.
• The battery for driving the local indications shall be high-grade non-rechargeable
(lithium-ion) battery easily replaceable with or without using common hand tools
and shall have a minimum operating life of 10 years in the atmospheric
temperature conditions specified above.
• The total continuous flash indicating time of OHL fault indicator shall be 1500
hours or more.
• Flashing period for permanent faults shall be programmable.
• Soldered battery terminal connections are not acceptable.
• The OHL fault indicators shall be bi-directional and able to detect all line-to-line
and line-to-ground fault conditions with built-in restraints to prevent false
operation due to sudden variations in load current, proximity to other circuits,
inrush currents due to feeder switching or auto-recloser operation.
• The OHL fault indicators shall be equipped with the following selectable and
adjustable local reset options:
✓ Local Automatic Reset: 10 to 30 seconds after recovering the line voltage (re-
energized line) and return of minimum primary current of 3A.
✓ Local Time Reset: selectable to 2, 4, and 8 hours. Local manual reset shall
also be provided such as by using magnet mountable on standard insulated
hot-sticks, or proximity local, or any other method accessible from the ground
level. Magnet and its adapter to hot-sticks, and/or proximity local shall be
supplied for every 100 units of OHL fault indicators.
 • The OHL fault indicators shall be provided with manual pre-adjusted trip current
value of the load currents in steps of up to 500 amperes or better, and load
dependent self-adjusted value of trip current.
• The OHL fault indicators shall have a response time not lower than 80ms to
prevent false indication due to disturbances with tolerance of ±10ms.
• One single product shall be proposed to cover the whole range of above
characteristics:- Particularly, the same product should be installed on any network
for 15KV or 33 kV
Marking

Each OHL fault indicators shall have a clear and durable nameplate that will remain
visible throughout the lifetime of the device, and shall bear the following information: -
• Manufacturer Name and Model/type
• OHL Fault Indicator Ratings
• Conformance standard
• Serial Number
• Year of Manufacture
• Property of EEU
PACKING AND SHIPPING
Each OHL fault indicator shall be packed in a box as a complete unit and shall be
delivered ready for use. Accessories like hot-stick mounting adapters, manual reset
(magnet + hot-stick adapter and/or proximity local remote-control) should be supplied in
a separate box with printed marking relating to the box of the OHL fault indicator. A
minimum of one (1) of each accessory should be provided for every 100 units of smart
OHL fault indicator supplied.

Packing shall protect the OHL fault indicators against damage during shipment and site
handling. Suppliers should coordinate with EEU Warehousing Department for additional
packing, handling, and or shipping instructions, as applicable. Each box shall be printed
with the following information:
a. Purchase Order Number / Tender Number
b. OHL Fault Indicator Rating
c. Manufacturer’s Name and Model/Type
d. Year of Manufacture
e. EEU Item Code
Test Requirements

• The OHL fault indicator shall be inspected and tested in accordance of IEC or
Equivalent Standards.
• Copies of previous test/calibration reports issued by third party testing laboratory that
is accredited to ISO/IEC 17025:2005 or 17025:2017 confirming accuracy and
compliance of the overhead line fault indicator offered shall be submitted with the
offer for evaluation.
• Routine test shall include:-
✓ Visual and dimensional inspection
✓ Grip force and deflection
✓ Vibration resistance
✓ Torsion and tension of the adapter
✓ Drop resistance
✓ Shock resistance
✓ Climate dependence
✓ Degree of protection
✓ Durability of markings
✓ Functional tests on the indicator
• The following type test reports shall be submitted:-
✓ Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
✓ Impulse overvoltage tests on the equipment – clearances
✓ Dielectric voltage withstands tests on the equipment – controlled
overvoltage
• Functional tests shall include:-
✓ Clear indication
✓ Clear perceptibility of visual indication
✓ Frequency dependence
✓ Response time
✓ Power source dependability
✓ Check of testing element
✓ Non response to d.c voltage
• The following type test report for printed circuit board coating performance shall be
submitted:-
✓ Environmental, humidity and thermal conditioning tests
✓ Dielectric voltage withstand tests
✓ Protection against bridging for indoor/outdoor type
✓ Spark resistance
✓ Comparative tracking index
✓ Resistance to soldering heat test
✓ Flammability test
✓ Coating adhesion test
✓ Insulation resistance between conducting parts
✓
Training

The successful bidder shall give training about installation, Operation & Maintenance.
Training at different site to the personnel as deputed by the awarding authority. The
successful bidder shall submit the training schedule to the site authority for EEU. The
Training should be comprehensive to the satisfaction of the trainees. The Trainer should
cover both theoretical & practical aspects of the modules, operation & maintenance
requirements of the modules etc. The trainer shall also exhibit major components of the
modules separately for visual clarity of the trainees with better understanding. The
successful bidder shall bear every cost required for the Training.

Documentation

Each device shall be supplied with a user manual for installation, maintenance and
commissioning at site.

Quality Assurance
The Bidder shall supply documentary proof that the manufacturer possesses ISO 9001
and ISO 14001 Quality insurance certification, for the design, manufacture and testing of
Fault Indicators for medium voltage lines.
GUARANTED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS for NON
COMMUNICABLE OVERHEAD LINE FAULT PASSAGE
INDICATOR (FPI) / FAULT SENSING INDICATOR (FSI) (TO BE
FILLED UP BY BIDDERS)

To be filled and signed the Manufacture and submitted together with relevant copies of the
Manufacture’s catalogues, drawings, technical data, sales records for previous five years
four customer reference letters, details of suppliers’ capacity and experience; and copies of
complete type test certificates and test reports for tender evaluation, all in English
Language

EEU’s Requirement Offered by

S.No. DESCRIPTION 15KV Non- 33KV Non- the bidder
communicable communicable
1 Manufacturer’s name and
address

2 Country of Manufacture

3 Reference Manufacturing IEC/DIN/BS or

Standard Equivalent
3 Design Requirements
3.1 Ambient Operating -50c to +500c -50c to +500c
Temperature
3.2 Degree of production IP65 IP65
(minimum)
3.3 Maximum Conductor Diameter Ø35mm Ø35mm
3.4 Local Indicating Devices Ultra-Bright Ultra-Bright
Blinking LED Blinking LED
3.5 Visibility at daylight (distance) 100m 100m
3.6 Visibility at night (distance) 500m 500m
3.7 Local Resetting Options
3.7.1 Automatic(Seconds) 10 to 30 10 to 30
3.7.2 Minimum Primary Current 3A 3A
Reset
3.7.3 Time (hours) 2,4,8 2,4,8
3.7.4 Local Manual Reset Magnet Magnet
3.7.5 Provision for Line Testing Yes Yes
provided
 3.8 FPI nominal operating voltage 15kv 33kv

3.9 Minimum Flashing hours for

non-communicable FPIs/FSIs
3.10 Rated Operating Frequency 50HZ 50HZ
3.11 Non Rechargeable Battery
3.11.1 Type Lithium-ion Lithium-ion
3.11.2 Capacity(AH)
3.11.3 Minimum battery life 10 Years 10 Years
3.11.4 Minimum battery continuous 1500 indicating 1500 indicating
operational life hours hours
3.12 Tripping Current Up to 500A, in Up to 500A, in
steps steps
3.13 Response Time, milliseconds >80 >80
3.14 Inrush Current Restraint Required Required
3.14 Symmetrical Fault Current 25KA/3sec 25KA/3sec
4 Accessories
4.1 Hot stick Mounting Adapter Yes Yes
provided
4.2 Magnet +Hot stick Adapter Yes Yes
provided
4.3 Proximity Local control provide Yes Yes
5 Hot stick details
5.1 Insulating voltage of the hot >15kV >33kV
stick
5.2 Length of the hot stick 9m 9m

6 Conductor Diameter (mm) 5 to 35 5 to 35

7 High fault current threshold

range(Amp)
8 Warranty 1 year 1 year

Product 23 - 15KV SF6 RING MAIN UNITS

SCOPE
This Specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply, delivery and
performance requirements of 15kV Non Extensible Ring Main Units for feeder switching.
The RMUs should be controlled remotely. The type of RMUs to be supplied are listed
below.
 No. RMU Type Incoming Outgoing

1 RMU(2+4) 2LBS 4VCB

SYSTEM PARAMETERS & Service Conditions

Description Service Condition
Altitude Altitude up to 3000m
Annual Rainfall 1250mm
Period of exceptional Rains June to September
Ambient Air Temperatures:
Average +300c
Minimum -50c
Maximum +500c
Relative Air Humidity 70%
Wind Velocity:
Maximum wind( height above ground
level) 0-30m 35m/s
30-50m 45m/s
Isoceraunic Level Up to 100 thunderstorm days/year
Seismic Zone Zone 4
REFERENCE StandardS
The equipment supplied shall conform to the latest edition of the appropriate IEC standards
and/or other recognized international standards.
IEC 62271-200/ IEC 60298/ General requirement forMetal Enclosed Switchgear
IS12729: 1988
IEC 60265 MediumVoltage Switches
IEC 60129/IEC 62271-102/ IS9921 Alternating Current disconnector's(Load Break Isolators) and
earthing switch

IEC 62271-100/IEC 60056/ Specification foralternating current breakers

IS13118: 1991
IEC 60529 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosure
IEC 60255 Electrical relays
IEC 60059 Preferred current ratings of high voltage switchgear
IEC 60298 AC metal enclosed switchgear
IEC 62271-1/ IEC 60694 Panel design, SF6/ VacuumCircuit Breakers
IEC 60044-1/IEC 60185/IS Current Transformers
2705:1992
IEC 60265/IS9920: 1981 High voltage switches
IEC 376 Filling ofSF6gas in RMU
IEC 60273/IS: 2099 DimensionofIndoor&Outdoorpostinsulatorswith voltage > 1000V

IEC 60273/IS13947(Part 1) Degree ofprotectionprovided byenclosures forlow voltage

Switchgear and control gear.

Electrical Distribution System Data

3.1 Supply 3 phase AC
3.2 Voltage 15000 volt ±10%
3.3 Frequency 50 Hz ± 5% 50 Hz ± 5%
3.4 System neutral Earthed at upstream 15kv source

DESIGN
The medium voltage switchgear should be gas insulated and should consist of the following
components.
⮚ Load break switch insulated with SF 6and operated with motor/manual
for incoming lines.
⮚ Vacuum Circuit breakers operated with motor/manual for outgoing
feeder lines.
All individual switches should be lockable in open position with padlock.
The switchgear should be sealed for life. The Spring Mechanisms shall be of long-life
corrosion resistant material and dust proof. Degree of Protection of the housing should be
a minimum amount of IP54.
The Ring Main Units (RMU) are installed on MV feeders for feeder automation to detect
faults on MV lines, isolating the fault through feeder sectionalisation and restore power
supply to the healthy part of feeder, by extending alternate power supply. The RMU should
also facilitate load balancing on the feeders by shifting loads from one feeder to another
feeder.
The RMUs should accommodate Non Extensible RMUs.
Non-Extensible RMU Switch Board
These units shall comprise of a set of stand-alone units of vacuum circuit breakers to be
coupled together to form a switching station or switch board inSF6 insulation enclosure.
The RMU switch board facilitates the transmission of power from substation to load centre
through high capacity express feeders and distribute the power received at load centre to
flow capacity feeders emanating from load centre and feeding Distribution Transformers.
Power supply from 2 or more main MV express feeders emanating from same or different
substations may be accommodated, to extend alternate power supplying the event of outage
of any feeder, after isolating the faulty feeder. The units shall be outdoor ground mounted
type.
Performance Characteristics
I Overall Unit
a) Service Outdoor
b) Type Metal enclosed
c) Number of Phases 3
d) System Voltage 15kV
e) Rated Frequency 50 Hz (±5%)
d Maximum rated voltage 17.5kV
e Maximum equipment rating voltage 24kV
f Insulation SF6 and Vacuum
g SF6Monitoring system Pressure Gauge and Low
pressure alarm.
II Load Break and Fault making(LBFM)Switches
a No. of poles 3
b Switch Type SF6-Single Break, Load
breaking and fault making
switch
c Rated voltage 15 kV
f Rated current 630 Amps
g Load breaking current 630 Amps at 0.7PF
h Short Time Rating 25 kA for 3 Seconds.
i Making capacity 62.5 kA
j Impulse withstands voltage to earth 125kV
between poles.
k Power frequency withstand voltage to 50kV
earth and between poles
III Vacuum Circuit Breakers
a) Type Vacuum
 b) No. of poles 3
c) Rated Voltage 15kV
d) Rated Current 630A
e) Breaking current 25kA for 3 Seconds.
f) Making current 62.5kA
g) Impulse flashover withstand voltage 125kV peak
h) Power frequency withstand voltage 50kV
IV Bus bars
a) Material Copper
b) Rated Current 630 Amps
c) Breaking Current. 25 kA for 3 seconds
d) Insulation of bus bars EpoxyorPVC sleeved
insulation to be provided.
e) Bus bar connections Anti-oxide grease
f) Bus bar end Caps Yes
V Current Transformers
a) Three Nos. Cast-resin CTs around bushing on or split core type around
XLPE cables for.
b) Current Transformer ratio For incoming 800/1A and for
outgoing 300/1A. Resin cast
c) Over current factor To correspond to breaking
capacity circuit breaker
d) Class of accuracy 5P10
e) Rated burden, VA 90
Accuracy limit factor, ALF
f) Rated burden As designed to drive the
protective relays
g) Impulse flash over withstand voltage 125kV (peak)
h) Power frequency withstand voltage 50kV
VI Protection
a) Self powered IDMT Protection relays (Numeric/ Micro Processor
based) 2 Nos. over current 1 No. earth fault element shall be of IDMT
relay for feeder control with Display for operator ease for tripping and
closing.
b) It shall be provided with emergency OFF push button

Name Plate of the CTs should include the following:

▪ CT serial number with year of manufacture
▪ Rated insulation voltage
▪ Power frequency withstand voltage
▪ Impulse withstand voltage
▪ CT type
▪ Applicable CT standard
▪ Network current characteristic
▪ Ratio
▪ Terminals
▪ Burden
▪ Safety factor (SF)
▪ Accuracy limit factor (ALF)
▪ Accuracy class
▪ Manufacturer's name,
▪ Buyers name,
▪ Manufacturing Year,
General Requirements of the Board
Constructional Features
The technical features of the RMU are the following:
1. The overall RMU unit shall be compact, modular in construction and suitable
for outdoor installation without any further covers/protection,
2. All live parts except cable connections shall be insulated with SF6 enclosure.
The SF6 enclosure shall be made of stainless steel,
3. The Ring Main Unit shall be tropicalised, for outdoor application with single
bus bar, and in a 3mm thick (minimum)metal enclosure provided with a pressure relief
arrangement ,
4. Single line diagram indicating the operational status of the switchgear shall be
provided at the front of the cubicles, i.e. mimic diagram will be displayed on the front of
the Ring Main Unit.
5. The supply shall include all steel supports and necessary embedded parts and
anchor bolts for thoroughly fastening and securing the equipment.
6. The degree of protection is IP65 for MV compartment.
Load Break Switch
1. The technical features of load break switch are,
2. Each load break switch shall have SF6 gas as insulating medium and SF6
interrupting medium.
3. Each load break switch shall be triple pole and simultaneously operated,
4. The mechanism of the switch shall be quick-break and quick make type, the speed
of operation being independent of operation with mechanically operated indicator.
5. Each load break switch shall be fitted with a direct manually operated mechanism
having three positions, “ON”, “OFF” and “EARTH” provided with pad locking facility.
All operating handles shall be located on the front panel of the Ring Main Unit.
6. The operating mechanism shall be maintenance free without the need for any
lubrication during its life time.
7. The LBFM switches shall be motorised for remote closing and opening operation
from remote control centre.
8. The details of remote operation switches are dealt in clause 7.
Circuit Breaker
▪ The circuit breaking shall be in vacuum interrupter housed in SF6insulated
chamber,
▪ The circuit breaker shall be suitable for remote operation from town control
centre,
▪ Suitable spring, motor-charging mechanism shall be provided for closing the
circuit breaker,
▪ The spring will get automatically charged while tripping or following
tripping,
▪ Motor operation is provided for charging of springs,
▪ Tripping of circuit breaker is provided through two shunt trip coils tripping
activated by (feeder control) two over current and one earth fault relays for tripping and
closing. The VCB shall be provided with closing coil for remote control.
Interlocks
The following interlocking facility shall be provided.
1. Operation offload break switch/Disconnector cannot be performed when the cable
compartment is open or Load Break Switch/Disconnector is padlocked, or earthing switch
is in open position.
2. Operation of earthing switch cannot be performed when the Load break
switch/Disconnector is in closed position.
3. Suitable interlocks shall also be provided for cables test terminals and shall be only
in “earth” position.
4. Integral test bushings shall be provided for cable testing on the switches for
maximum operator safety, “to prevent operation from “ON” position to “Earth” position or
vice-versa in a single operation.
Mechanical Type Interlocks
Interlocks shall be provided to prevent access to the switchgear compartment unless the
following conditions are satisfied,
The switching device (load break switch circuit breaker or fuse switch, isolator etc.) is in
the open position.
The earthing switch is in the closed position.
Any conducting parts, which extend outside the compartment, are earthed.
Opening of door or cover shall not be possible unless the Earthing switch is closed.
a)However the Earthing switch may be opened once the door is opened for cable testing.
b)Internal faults in any compartment such as arcing to earth, unsuccessful breaking
operation, arcing across isolating distance shall be of no consequence for operators standing
in front of the switchgear assembly. All construction arrangements to avoid such risks shall
be taken.
(i)Switching shall not be possible to be performed when the cable compartment is
open.
Load breaks switch/circuit breaker is padlocked.
Padlocking
Provision shall be made for padlocking the load break switches/Circuit Breaker and the
Earthing switches in open or closed positions. The enclosure is weather proof, conforming
to IEC 60565.
Plug in Type Termination Kit :
The cable termination shall be suitable for PVC/XLPE Cables to conductor sizes of up to
500 Sq.mm of copper or aluminium conductors.
All necessary material for connection of conventional cable sealing ends shall be delivered
with each RMU.
The ring cable connections shall only be accessible when the load break switch is in
“EARTH” position.
As long as the cable connections are accessible, it shall not be possible to switch the load
break switch to on `ON’ position.
Voltage Indicators
Capacitive voltage indication facilities for connection to the cable terminations shall be
provided through sockets at the front of the modules. It shall be possible to test the voltage
indicators before use.
Protection
Suitable numerical protection relay with 1Amps rating, microprocessor based shall be
incorporated with each circuit breaker module. The protection of each module shall be IEC
integration of relays with control and act independently from the other modules.
The protective relay shall be driven by three CTs on the outgoing circuits.
The protection relays shall be self-powered necessary through the resin cast current
transformers and shall be equipped with suitable good quality batteries to ensure that
protection operation is according to international practices.
Protection setting range shall be as per standard protective relays for Over current and earth
fault.
Fault Passage Indicators
These shall facilitate quick detection of faulty section of a line. The fault indication may
be on the basis of monitoring earth fault current flow through the device. The unit should
be self-contained requiring no auxiliary power supply. The unit preferably is encapsulated
in resin moulding to provide a robust weather proof assembly for installation around the
15kV cable at RMU. The principle of operation of detector shall be indicated by supplier.
The response value of short circuit current, the no. of auxiliary contacts provided and its
operation shall be specified. Suitable inspection windows in the cable connection
compartment should be provided to observe the status of fault indicator. Fault passage
indicators shall be incorporated with isolator circuits or generally circuits not equipped
with overcurrent and earth fault protection.
CTs
Three Current transformers shall be incorporated with the circuit cable with suitable rating
to drive and provide operating power to the numerical protective relays. The CTs shall be
dual ratio as given in the technical schedules. The ratio generally shall be designed to
coordinate with the conductor sizes connected to it.
Automation for Remote Control and Indication
The switchboard shall be designed for remote control and monitoring by the Control centre
they are connected to.
System Automation – Remote Control
The distribution network shall be designed to operate in conjunction with a distribution
control centre for remote control and operation to provide system automation. System
automation envisages the installation of the following equipment on respective system
positions.
Remote operation of LBFM switches and vacuum circuit breaker to provide remote
indication and control from the control center,
Switching station or feeder RMU switch board providing remote control and indication of
circuit breakers and incoming/outgoing feeders from control center,
The remote control of the items above shall be achieved through a dedicated Remote
Terminal Unit (RTU) with communication for the required control and indication via the
control centre.
Twowaycommunication systems shall be accommodated between control centre and
RTUs,
The connecting cables shall be protected in either a metallic non rusting tube or a metallic
cover that can be fitted over the cable. The cable protection shall be securely fixed on the
pole and appropriate permanent fixings shall be provided. The fixings shall not be plastic
tie wraps. Stainless steel tie wraps are permitted.
RTUs
General
The RTUs shall be Microprocessor based intelligent control unit and shall facilitate self-
healing.
RTUs should be integrated within the main unit such as RMUs
The RTUs shall be factory wired and form part of the switchboard.
The RTUs shall receive a command from control centre, and execute the operations such
as open / close and it and also transmits data acquired from equipment back to control
centre. The basic functions are
a)Execute remote commands such as Open/Close through secure output
commands
b)Status indication such as ON/ OFF status of RMU switches, capacitor
switches, Fault passage indicators, and tap position of voltage regulators etc.
c)Analogue indication may include voltage, current, kW, kVAr etc., flowing
through RMU switches and Distribution Transformers.
The RTUs shall be designed to have the required number of inputs/outputs
and measurement inputs to suit the application.
The RTU shall be reconfigurable from control centre.
The RTUs shall be in general self powered from the protection CTs or VTs.
Alternatively they may be powered through AC auxiliary supplies if available.
RTUs shall have internal batteries to enable them to provide uninterrupted
operation and data storage.
Ground Mounted Equipment RTUs
For ground mounted switchgear such as RMUs or substations the RTUs should be
constructed as an integral design of the RMUs.
RTUs for extensible RMUs shall have I/O capacity for an additional 2 circuits.
RTU Communication
A communication link is required between the Control centre and RTU's. This
communication can be achieved:-
a)Through the mobile telephony system (GSM/ GPRS/ CDMA)if the services
provide a reliable system. OR
b)Through fiber optics/OPGRW
c)through radio communication
The Unit shall incorporate the necessary remote terminal interface equipment
to enable linkage between the RTU unit and the communication system.
The RMUs should support GSM/GPRS/CDMA/Fiber Optics/OPGRW/radio
communication.
Protocols for RTUs and Communications
Full details and rights to use protocols for communication and operation of the device as a
complete unit, shall be provided to the client/purchaser to enable the SCADA system to
interface with the unit.
The cost of the provision of any protocol look up tables etc., shall be included in the cost
of the device. Full details shall be included with the supply of the device to enable the Unit
to be integrated with the SCADA system.
The principle is that these units shall be possible to be integrated with any SCADA system
that may be installed at the control centre.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RMU’s
Earthing
The switchgear/switchboard shall have an earth bar. The earth bar shall be bolted to the
main frame and located so as to provide convenient facilities for earthing cable sheaths and
for use with earthing device. Means shall be provided for coupling earth bars of adjacent
units. The system earthing shall be such that at least one of the neutral points of a three
phase system is permanently earthed, either solidly or through a resistor or reactance of
low impedance. It shall not be possible to remove the earth bar during operation.
All metal parts of the switchgear which do not belong to main circuit and which can collect
electric charge causing dangerous effect shall be connected to the earthing conductor made
of copper having CS area of minimum 75 mm2.Each end of conductor shall be terminated
by M12/equivalent quality and type of terminal for connection to earth system installation.
Earth conductor location shall not obstruct access to cable terminations.
The following items are to be connected to the main earth conductor by rigid or flexible
copper conductors having a minimum cross section of 75mm² (a) earthing switches (b)
Cable sheath or screen (c) capacitors used in voltage control devices, if any.
Painting
All RMUS Structures shall be galvanized or epoxy painted in light Grey colour.
Tropicalisation
Due regard should be given to the climatic conditions under which the equipment is to
work. Ambient temperature normally vary between -5o C and 30o C, although direct sun
temperature may reach 50o C. The climate is very humid and rapid variations occur, relative
humilities between 90% and 100% being frequently recorded, but these values generally
correspond to the lower ambient temperatures. The equipment should also be designed to
 prevent ingress of vermin, accidental contact with live parts and to minimize the ingress of
dust and dirt. The use of materials which may be liable to attack by termites and other
insects should be avoided.
Information Labels
(i)The name plates of the RMU functions shall be fixed on the front of the Ring
Main Unit.
(ii) Specification plates of suitable size are to be screw fixed on the front of each
Ring Main Unit.
(iii)Removable lifting lugs are to be fitted on the top of each panel.
Bolts and nuts used shall conform to ISO Standards (metric) and shall be rust
protected. Nuts and bolts for pressure parts shall be of best quality steel.
Clearances
1. Clearance between phases & earth in the insulating medium shall be as
per latest electricity rules and standards.
2. Earthing switch shall be provided with independent manual operation.
Earthing switch must have a fault making capacity of minimum 62.5kA.
3. A voltage control device shall be installed on each ring cable to show if
the cable is energized or not.
4. The degree of safety of persons against hazardous approach to live parts
and moving parts shall be provided strictly as per latest safety standards.
5. Proper sealing for the safety against entrance of small animals/insects
into the compartment shall be provided.
Operating Handle
All operating handles for the switches/circuit breaker shall be located on the front panel of
the Ring Main Unit.
Control Mechanisms
Control mechanisms of switching devices shall be independent of manual operation or
motor operation.
List Of Drawings And Documents
The bidder shall furnish four sets of following drawings along with his offer.
a) General outline drawing showing plan, elevation and end view dimensions,
assembly and constructional drawings of the equipment.
b) Name plate & schematic drawings.
c) Operation manuals, leafless literature etc.
Specification of Protective devices
Scope :
The specification covers specification of feeder Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED’s) to
be fixed control and relay panel.
Standards :
The applicable standards of IED’s are specified here below:

IEC 60255-5 Impulse withstand : 5 KV

IEC 60255-22-4 Fast Transients, Class IV

IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic Radiation, Class III:

IEC 60529 Degree of Protection, IP 52 on front panel

IEC 60255-21-1, 2, 3 Vibration, Shocks, Earthquakes, class-II

EIA-364-65A The unit should have conformal coating for

operation in hazardous atmosphere
System Details :
The IED’s shall be suitable for outdoor and indoor installations with 3 Phase, 50 Hz, 15KV
system in which the neutral is effectively earthed and the same shall be suitable for service
fluctuations in supply voltage up to 10% and frequency variation of -3% and +2% (48.5
Hz to 51.0 Hz).
Power Supply Ratings :
The protection and control unit range shall be designed to accommodate all types of control
power supply voltages from 18V DC to 250V DC voltages or be self-powered as the
application requires.
Technical Parameters :
The relay should be microprocessor based relay,
Protection Requirements
The relay should have all the protection functions in a single box like
Instantaneous and Inverse time phase over current protection (50/51).
Instantaneous and Inverse time Earth fault protection (51, 51N)
Measurement Requirements
The relay should provide Measurement for all basic and advance parameters like:
Phase Currents peak and average
Neutral current
Voltage
Frequency
Active and reactive power
Power Factor
No. of operations
Cumulative breaking current seen
The measurement shall also be helpful for switchgear health analysis.
The relays should have programmable LCD or LED’s Outputs, Digital inputs for
customized requirements.
General
The relay should have big alpha numerical display for showing measurement / settings etc.,
It should be possible to withdraw the unit without prior current circuit short-circuiting.
The relay should have single button for resetting of the protection output and protection
function.
The relay should have remote and local selection provision.
Setting ranges over current (Overload) time delayed
PS 1% to 240% of In or better

TMS 0.002 to 2.00

Time delay at 10 I/Is: 0.05 to 300 S

Timer Hold Curve 0.05 to 300 S

DT:

Timer Hold curve 0.5 to 20 S

IDMT
Setting ranges of Phase short Circuit Protection (50)
PS 10 % to 2400 % of In or better

Time delay 50 ms to 20 S
Setting ranges of Earth Fault time delayed (51 N)
PS 1% to 100% of In or better
 TMS 0.002 to 2.00

Time delay at 10 I/Is: 0.05 to 300 S

Timer Hold Curve 0.05 to 300 S

DT:

Timer Hold curve 0.5 to 20 S

IDMT
Setting ranges of Earth Fault time delayed (50 N)
PS 10 % to 1500% of In or better

Time delay 50 ms to 300 S

Other facilities
The Relay should have WATCH DOG feature for continuous checking of internal health
of the relay and should have dedicated output for alarm and tripping for the same.
The relay output should have enough capacity for energizing the direct tripping and closing
of the breaker.
The relay shall support and the user shall have a choice of curve types.
Protection tripping shall be indicated on the front of the device by a LED and text indicating
the cause of the fault.
The relay should interface with the RTU for communication
Guarantee
The relays shall be guaranteed for five years from the date of commissioning.
The manufacturer shall demonstrate the availability of spares for all the above relays.
Quality Assurance Plan
▪ The manufacturer shall possess ISO 9001: 2000 Quality Assurance
Certification for the design, manufacture and testing of RMU. In the event the RMU is
manufactured in a plant under the licence of the manufacturer, the manufacturing plant
shall possess ISO 9001: 2000 Quality Assurance Certificate for manufacturing and
testing of CTs.
▪ The Bidder shall furnish a copy of the ISO Certificate certified as true copy of
the original from the manufacturers, along with the offer.
Packing, Marking And Shipping
▪ Any items liable to be damaged in transit shall be effectively protected and
securely fixed in their cases. All lifts of over 2 tones shall be marked to show where
slings should be placed. All cases shall be clearly identified giving particulars of the
manufacturer’s name and type of equipment.
▪ All identification marks on the outside of cases shall be waterproof and
permanent. All delicate electrical equipment shall be adequately sealed and desiccating
agents used where necessary to prevent damage from condensation. All Materials and
Equipment shall be adequately and suitably packed and protected, bearing in mind that it
will be shipped to a tropical zone, that covered storage may not always be obtainable, and
that a considerable time period may elapse between its arrival at the warehouse and final
installation.
▪ All materials used in packing shall comply with the relevant local regulations.
Adequate protection and precautions are to be taken to exclude termites and other vermin,
noxious insects, larvae or fungus from the packing materials or plant. All packaging and
containers shall be clearly marked with the contents for easy identification against the
packing list.
▪ The Supplier shall protect all steelwork before shipment, to prevent corrosion
and / or damage by oxidation. Bundles of steel sections shall be securely tied together by
an approved method and care shall be taken to ensure that they are robust and that they
can be handled easily during shipment.
▪ Packing cases shall be strongly constructed and in no case shall timber less
than 20 mm in thickness be used. Timber used in packing cases shall be durable and
suitable for outdoor storage in a tropical climate for not less than 1 year. The contents of
packing cases shall be securely bolted or fastened in position with struts or cross battens.
Cross battens supporting weight in any direction shall not rely for their support on nails
or screws driven lengthways into the grain of the wood, but shall be supported by cleats
secured from the inside.
▪ All machined parts shall be thoroughly protected against corrosion. Where
practicable, items such as electric motors, switch and control gear, instruments and
panels, machine components, etc., shall be cocooned or covered and the enclosure
provided internally with an approved desiccators.
Marking
Each RMUs shall be fitted with an easily readable nameplate of weatherproof material
giving the following details:
▪ Type of RMU
▪ Manufacturer's Name
▪ Manufacturer's Serial Number
▪ Year of Manufacture
▪ Rated Frequency
▪ Rated Voltage
▪ Rated operating voltage
▪ “Property of EEU”
▪ Rated Continuous Current (Max.)
▪ Rated Minimum Tripping Currents
▪ Rated Symmetrical Interrupting Current
▪ Rated Symmetrical Making Current
▪ Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage
▪ Rated Control Voltage
▪ Gross Weight
▪ Purchase order number & date
Three copies of each packing list shall be sent to the Employer prior to dispatch.
Inspection and Testing
All the type test, routine test, acceptance test shall be done as per relevant IEC standard
only.
Type Tests
The following type tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant IEC standard
including CB/ CT/ VT and the bidder should submit Type test certificate from international
accredited testing laboratory along with the bid,
171082620.171082736.171082784.171082832.171082880. Short time current test on
main circuits,
171082620.171082736.171082784.171082832.171082881. Short time
current test on earthing circuit,
171082620.171082736.171082784.171082832.171082882. Partial
discharge test,
171082620.171082736.171082784.171082832.171082883. No load
operation and mechanical endurance test,
171082620.171082736.171082784.171082832.171082884. Impulse
withstand test,
171082620.171082736.171082784.171082832.171082885. Power
frequency voltage withstand dry & wet test.
Routine Tests And Acceptance Tests
Routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC 60265, 60298, 60420.
171082620.171082736.171082784.171082832.171082886. Power frequency voltage
dry tests of the main circuit,
171082620.171082736.171082784.171082832.171082887. Partial
discharge test,
171082620.171082736.171082784.171082832.171082888. Resistance
test for the circuits,
171082620.171082736.171082784.171082832.171082889. Mechanical
operating tests.
Tests During Manufacture
The Bidder shall furnish details of tests carried out during the process of manufacture and
end inspection by the bidder to ensure the desired quality of the equipment to be supplied.
Additional Tests
The client reserves the right of having at bidder expense any other tests(s) of reasonable
nature carried out at Bidders premises, at site, or in any other place in addition to the
aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests, to satisfy himself that the equipment complies
with the specification.
In case of failure in any type test, the Bidder is required to modify the design of the
equipment and type tested again for the modified design, without any extra cost to the
client. No delivery extension shall be given for this additional testing.
Test Facilities
The Bidder shall indicate the details of the equipment available with him for carrying out
the various tests as per relevant IEC Standards.
Tests as per IEC standards should be carried out in respect of porcelain bushings,
galvanization, relays and meters.
▪
 Company Name: Document No.
ETHIOPIAN ELECTRIC UTILITY EEU/EQRD/04-230

Title:
Issue No. Page 315 of
Technical Specifications for 15KV and 33KV Surge Arrestors. 1
433

Appendix A: guaranteed technical particulars for 15kv Ring Main Units

Prepared by Sign Checked by Sign Approved by Sign Rev.No. Date Page

Abebaw Belay Elias Azene Chala Aman No.
EQRD0 Mar 20,2020 315
1
guaranteed technical particulars for 15kv Ring Main Units
S.No Description Unit Required by EEU Offere
I RATINGS & ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

1 General Details
2 Manufacturer’s name
3 Switchgear model No
4 Type SF6 gas insulated and
Vacuum
II APPLICABLE STANDARDS

1 Enclosure IEC 62271-200

2 Circuit Breaker IEC 62271-100
III GENERALPERFORMANCE DETAILS

1 Rated voltage kV 15
2 Highest system voltage kV 17.5
3 Highest equipment voltage rating kV 24
4 Rated frequency Hz 50
5 One minute power frequency kV 50
withstand voltage
6 Lightning Impulse withstand voltage kV(pea 125
k)
7 Rated short time current kA 25
8 Rated duration of short circuit Sec 3
9 Rated making current kA 62.5
10 Operating cycle 0-0.3S -CO-3 Min-CO
11 Minimum SF6 gas pressure at 20°C kg/cm² 1.35
IV ENCLOSURE
1 Material (Main Tank) Galvanized steel sheet
2 Thickness of enclosure, partition and mm Not less than 2.5mm
doors
3 Thickness of enclosure base mm not less than 4mm
S.No Description Unit Required by EEU Offere
4 Separate compartments for each of Yes
VCB Disconnector Switch, Bus bar
provided
5 Normal SF6 gas operating pressure kg/cm² 1.35
6 Type of pressure relief device &
location
V VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1 Rated normal current A 630
2 Rated short circuit breaking current KA 25
3 Rated short circuit making current KA 62.5
4 Rated Impulse withstand voltage KV 125
5 Rated power frequency recovery KV 50
voltage
6 Small inductive breaking current: A
7 Rated cable charging breaking A 50
current
8 Rated out of phase breaking current A
9 On supply side of circuit breaker kV
(peak)
10 On load side of circuit breaker kV
(peak)
11 Opening Time ms 35
12 Maximum Arching Time ms 6
13 Rated maximum total break time ms 31
14 Maximum Closing time ms 150
15 Length of Each Break Mm
16 Minimum number of operations at ● Mechanical
rated current(as per IEC 62271-100) Endurance-class M2(10,000
operating sequences)
● Electrical
Endurance – E2
VI Load Break and Fault making (LBFM) Switches
S.No Description Unit Required by EEU Offere
1 No. of poles 3
2 Switch Type SF6-Single Break, Load
breaking and fault making
switch
3 Rated voltage kV 15
4 Rated current 630 Amps
5 Load breaking current 630 Amps at 0.7PF
6 Short time Rating 25 kA
7 Fault making capacity (kA peak/
62.5 kA
min.)
8 Impulse withstand voltage to earth
kV 125
between poles.
9 Power frequency withstand voltage to
kV 50
earth and between poles
10 Operating mechanism Motorized LBS Each motor
for close / open shall be provided with
separate MCB and Local-
Remote switch.
11 Manual operation Possible without removal of
motor
12 Addition / removal of Without overhaul of
motor operating mechanism

13 Motor rated voltage 24V DC

14 Battery type & size 1. SMF lead acid battery
2.Battery provided in
enclosure shall be rated for
10
close & 10 open operations
of LBS / FCB + 2 hrs
Back up for SCADA FRTU
load (10watt). ®
S.No Description Unit Required by EEU Offere
15 Battery charger rating Two chargers of rating 10A
each
16 Battery charger With auto changeover
configuration between two chargers using
10Amp
17 Minimum number of operations at ● Mechanical
rated current(as per IEC 62271-100) Endurance- class M2(10000
Operating sequences)
● Electrical
Endurance – E2
VII CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
1 Type Cast resin
2 Primary Current 630A
Secondary Current 5A
3 Over current factor to correspond to breaking
capacity of circuit breaker

4 Class of accuracy
(i) Protection core 5P10
(ii) Metering core CT for measurement
purpose shall be provided
5 Rated burden by EEU. Free space shall be
6 Impulse flash over withstand voltage KVp available inside the RMU
for installation of
7 Power frequency withstand voltage KV measurement CTs

VIII VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

1 Type of PT Single pole Indoor Type
2 Standards IEC 60044-2
3 Rated Voltage, kV kV 15
4 System highest voltage, kV kV 17.5
5 One minute power frequency kV 50
withstand voltage, kV
 S.No Description Unit Required by EEU Offere
6 Lightening Impulse (1.2/50 μs) kV 125
withstand voltage,
7 Rated primary voltage variation, kV kV 15±10%
8 Rated secondary voltage, V V 100
9 Rated frequency, Hz Hz 50±5%
10 Rated Burden VA 30
11 Thermal rating burden, VA 400
12 Accuracy class
12.1 Core 1
12.1.1 Purpose Protection
12.1.2 Rated Output 30VA
12.1.3 Class of accuracy 3P
12.2 Core 2 VT for measurement
purpose shall be provided
12.2.1 Purpose by EEU. Free space shall be
12.2.2 Rated Output available inside the RMU
for installation of
measurement VTs

12.2.3 Class of accuracy

IX Secondary limiting thermal burden current, A
1 Rated over voltage factor
2 class of Insulation E
X BUSBARS & CONNECTORS
1 Main Bus bar Rating KA 25
2 Primary Bus bar Insulation KV 52
3 Bus bar Material Copper
4 Bus bar Insulation medium SF6
Temperature Rise of Bus bars at Rated
5 °C
Current
XI PROTECTION
 S.No Description Unit Required by EEU Offere
1 Self-powered IDMT Protection relays
2 Nos. over current 1 No. earth fault
elements
2 Over Load relay settings
3 Short circuit Protection settings O/C
4 Short circuit Protection settings E/F
XII RTU
Make
Model
XIII COMMUNICATION Optical and GSM
Type
Make
Model
Power
XIV CUBICLE
1 Degree of Protection:
2 HV compartment IP65
3 LV compartment IP42
4 Whether Space Heater is provided YES
Interlocks provided for ELECTRICAL&
MECHANICAL
XV EARTHING
1 Earthing of Circuits Yes
2 Earthing of Busbar Yes
3 Method of Circuit Earthing Throughout RMU
XVI SERVICE LIFE
1 Operating design life (Rated Current) Times 10000
2 Contact Life at Rated Interrupting Year 30
Capacity
3 Type of Power Closing Devices Motor spring charged
 S.No Description Unit Required by EEU Offere
4 Method of Opening Devices
5 Control voltage 24VD.C
XVII RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
1 Recommended Life Expectancy Yes
2 Operating mechanism Yes
3 Contacts & Interrupting Mechanisms Yes
4 Control & Ancillary Gear Yes
XVIII OPERATION
1 Whether Closing Spring can be
Charged with the circuit breaker in
closed position
2 Whether Circuit Breaker can be
Closed whilst the closing spring is
being charged
3 Whether Locking Facilities are
provided for the manual tripping of
the circuit breaker
4 Whether the following Position
Indicators are provided for circuit
breaker
4(i) Spring Charged Spring Free Yes
4(ii) “ON” “OFF” Yes
4(iii) Earth “ON” Yes
4(iv) Earth “OFF” Yes
XIX NUMBER OF UNITS MAKING UP THE RMU
1 Number and Types RMU(2+4):2LBS&4 VCBs
2 Standard RMU
3 RMU with Extensions
XX DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT/TOTAL
1 Width mm
2 Depth mm
3 Height mm
Product 24 - pole mounted 15 kv line sectionalizers
SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, supply, delivery and performance requirements of
Pole mounted 3-phase 15kV Automatic Line Sectionalisers for outdoor installation for detection of
fault, isolation of the faulty branch line and restoration of power supply to healthy section, in the
event of fault, to improve reliability.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS & Service Conditions
See Specification TS-GN-01 – EEU System and Environmental data.
The Equipment shall be used in installations up to an altitude of 3000M.
REFERENCE StandardS
The materials supplied shall conform to the latest edition of the appropriate IEC standards and/or
other recognized international standards. In particular:
Specification / Title
Standard Number
IEC 60694 Common specification for high voltage switchgear
and control gear standards.
IEC 60265-1 Switches for rated voltages above 1kV and less than
52kV.
IEC 62271-200 High Voltage switchgear and control gear –Part-
200.A.C metal enclosed Switchgear and control gear
for rated voltages above 1kV and up to and including
52kV.
CONFLICT
See Specification TS-GN-02.
Inspection and Testing
See spec TS- GN-02.
Type Tests
Tests
to verify the insulation level, including withstand tests at power-frequency voltage
on auxiliary equipment,
Tests to prove that the temperature rise of any part does not exceed the specified
values,
Making and breaking tests,
Tests to prove the capability of the switch to carry the rated short-time current,
Tests to prove satisfactory operation and mechanical/electrical endurance,
Tests to provide satisfactory operation under ice conditions.
Routine Tests
Power-frequency voltage tests,
Voltage tests for auxiliary circuits,
Measurement of the resistance of the main circuits,
Tests to prove satisfactory operations.
design characteristics
RATED VOLTAGE
The rated voltage for the line sectionalizer shall be 17.5KV. This represents the highest system
voltage corresponding to the nominal system voltage of 15KV for all solid insulation, oil,
vacuum, gas insulated equipment. For bushing the highest equipment voltage level shall be 24kV.
RATED CURRENT
The standard rated normal current shall be 400 A.
RATED BREAKING CAPACITY
Mainly active load breaking capacity 400A
Transformer off-load breaking capacity 10A
Line-charging breaking capacity 10A
Cable-charging breaking capacity 10A
RATED SHORT TIME CURRENT
The rated short-time symmetrical current for one second shall be 10 kA.
RATED MAKING CURRENT
The rated making current shall be 25 kA.
RATED BASIC IMPULSE LEVEL
To earth and between poles 125 kV
Across the terminals of open switch 150 kV
RATED ONE MINUTE POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND VOLTAGE
To earth and between poles 50 kV
Across the terminals of open switch 60 kV
Control circuit to earth 2 kV

CONTROL SUPPLY
The line sectionalizers are provided with a Voltage transformer on one side or either
side as the case may be to sense the powered supply and provide Control supply for
operation of sectionalisers.
FAULT BREAKING CAPACITY
The sectionalisers shall have no rated fault breaking capacity and will sectionalise the faulty section
(which it is to control) only when the power supply to the line is interrupted by the controlling circuit
breaker/auto recloser at the main substation.
OPERATION
Purpose of sectionalizers
The sectionalizers are deployed in Distribution system to improve the reliability of power supply.
The sectionaliser is load breaking and fault making switch with Voltage sensing and timing control
mechanism. The sectionaliser has no fault current interrupting capability and therefore always work
in association with a circuit breaker having auto reclosing facility.
Functions of Sectionalisers
The function of a sectionaliser is to isolate the faulty section and restore power supply to healthy part
of feeder when a permanent fault occurs on the feeder. If the fault is transient in nature, then supply
is restored after momentary interruption on reclosing of feeder circuit breaker
Components of Sectionalisers
The sectionaliser consists of 3 parts
Load breaking and fault making SF6/ Vacuum switch called DM switch
Fault detecting and control relay box called TSR
Voltage Transformer on either side of sectionaliser on loop feeder and on incoming side only for
radial feeder.
Operation of sectionaliser
The principle of operations how the Sectionaliser operates in case of transient fault
and permanent fault on radial feeder and Loop feeder is explained in Appendix A
Advantages of Sectionalisers
The advantages of Sectionaliser are
Any number of Sectionalisers can be deployed on line in series, improving reliability
index to desired level.
The number of interruptions to any customer for any permanent fault is only
two irrespective of location
The sectionalisers facilitates automatic power supply restoration from loop feeder in
case of fault providing supply to all healthy sections other than faulty section.
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL ENDURANCE
The voltage sensing sectionaliser shall be capable of performing not less than 20,000 mechanical
operations and 20,000 electrical operations at rated current without getting damaged.
FAULTY SECTION INDICATOR
An indicator to indicate the faulty section shall be provided on the controlling breaker in the main
sub-station. The indicator shall indicate the particular sectionaliser which has locked out on
permanent fault. The indicator will work on the basis of discrimination of time elapsed between the
first reclosing of the circuit breaker and its next tripping due to permanent fault in a particular
section.
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
The sectionalisers shall be of either vacuum of SF6 type.
The equipment shall be of outdoor type and suitable for mounting on single or double-pole
structures.
Tank
The switching contacts are housed in a steel tank of thickness 3mm. Thickness below the minimum
value will be considered only in exceptional cases where protective finishes are used. The contractor
shall provide full information where any such special finish is used and also provide field experience,
if any.
Each tank shall be provided with an explosion vent on the side (only for SF6 type) which shall safely
release any over pressures developed by excessive internal arcing. A mechanical low gas pressure
interlock which prevents operation of the sectionaliser if the gas pressure falls below certain safe
pressure shall be provided. There shall be a visible indication of low gas pressure through a window
in the tank and also through a flag which could be seen from the ground.
The sectionalisers shall be provided with a mechanically operated contact position indicator. The
provision shall also be made for manual opening and closing of the sectionaliser from ground level
using a hook stick.
A manual lock-out ring which when pulled by the hook-stick prevent operation of the sectionaliser
to take up maintenance work in the downstream of the sectionaliser.
Indicators
Two nos. ON/OFF indicators shall be provided, one on the side of the tank by the operating lever
and one underneath the tank visible to the operator from below.
Sectionaliser bushing terminals shall be designed so as to directly receive AAAC conductor up to 200
mm² size by using bolted clamps so as not to require the use of lugs. The terminal arrangement shall
be such as to avoid bimetallic corrosion.
SF6 Lockout
If the unit is SF6 insulated then a lockout on low pressure should operate and prevent the unit from
closing.
A visual alarm shall be incorporated in case of low gas pressure.
COORDINATION WITH THE SUB-STATION BREAKER
As the sectionalisers installed on a feeder work in coordination with the circuit breaker or an auto-re-
closer at the main sub-station controlling the feeder, this aspect requires proper attention. In the case
of manually operated circuit breaker, the normal interval between the first and subsequent trials is
two minutes or so. In such cases only voltage sensing sectionalisers can be used. However, in the
case of an auto-re-closer, it is possible to use both Voltage and Current Sensing Sectionalisers.
Remote control Operation
Sectionaliser Control
The Sectionaliser shall be fitted with a separate control box.
Protection and timer relays shall be installed in this control box. This control box shall be suitable for
fitting on the pole at a low level than the Sectionaliser to provide inspection maintenance and setting
access to utility personnel. All fittings required for mounting shall be supplied. All operating
parameters of the Sectionaliser shall be controlled from the control box.
All settings shall be either a) through a suitable interface pad/keyboard designed for the harsh
operating environment of the Sectionaliser, b) positive step selector switches or c) plugin
components.
Ratings shall be clearly marked in relevant units of measure with no interpretation multipliers or
conversion being required.
Each unit shall be equipped with an electronic control armoured capable of operating in the
environmental conditions specified in spec. No. TS-GN-01. The cable shall be protected in either a
metallic non rusting tube or a metallic cover that can be fitted over the cable. The cable protection
shall be securely fixed on the pole and appropriate permanent fixings shall be provided. The fixings
shall not be plastic tie wraps. Stainless steel tie wraps are permitted.
Communication System
Remote Terminal Unit / Remote control shall be provided for the Sectionaliser if so specified in the
technical schedule. The remote control shall be achieved through a communication link between
control centre and the Sectionalisers and necessary provision shall be incorporated in the control
box.
GSM/GPRS/ CDMA service is available in 7 towns and is proposed to be deployed for
communication between Control Centre and this device. Alternatively communication may be
provided through a radio link with the Control room.
The Unit shall incorporate the necessary remote terminal interface equipment to enable linkage
between the unit control and the communication system.
The Unit shall incorporate an energy storage system to enable the equipment to operate within one
month of being disconnected/ powered-off from the network.
Full details and rights to use protocols for communication and operation of the device shall be
provided to the client/purchaser to enable the SCADA system to interface with the unit. The cost of
the provision of any protocol look up tables etc. shall be included in the cost of the device. Full
details shall be included with the supply of the device to enable the Unit to be integrated with the
SCADA system.
Remote terminal unit (RTU) and modem is included in the standard equipment for the automated
switch.
Information on load break switch and sectionaliser states and fault values shall be transmitted to the
SCADA system
Data to be TRANSMITTED to SCADA
The following data shall be transmitted / enable interface with the SCADA system
Status information of sectionaliser
Lockout status of sectionaliser.
Voltage
Remote lockout reset.
No of operation of the unit.
Low SF6 if SF6 insulted
MARKING
The sectionalisers shall be provided with a name plate legibly and indelibly marked with the
following:-
Name of the manufacturer,
Type, designation and serial number,
Rated voltage and current,
Rated frequency,
Number of poles,
Rated normal current,
Rated breaking capacity,
Rated short-time current,
Rated making current.
Schedule for pole mounted 15kv line sectionalisers
No Item Unit
Requirement Bid Offer
1 Nominal system voltage kV 15
2 Highest Equipment Voltage for gas kV 17.5
insulateded equipment
3 Highest Equipment Voltage for air kV 24
insulateded equipment such as
bushings
4 Rated acive load breaking capacity A 400
5 Transformer off-load breaking A 10
capacity
6 Line charging breaking capacity A 10
7 Rated short time symmetrical current kA 10
8 Rated making current kA 20
9 Rated basic impulse level kV 125
10 Rated one minute power frequency kV 50
withstand voltage between phases
11 Rated one minute power frequency kV 2
withstand voltage between control
circuit to earth
12 Voltage sensing relay Yes/No Yes
13 TSR timer settings sec 0-10 sec
14 Lockout timer settings sec 0-10 sec
No Item Unit
Requirement Bid Offer
15 Directional facility of voltage sensing Yes/No Yes
- load source
16 Interruption medium Vacuum or SF6 Vacuum
17 SF6 low pressure lock-out of SF6 Yes
insulated
18 Electrical endurance operations 3000
19 Mechanical endurance operations 3000
20 No. of ON/OFF indicators provided Nos. 2Nos.each
21 Radio interference voltage µV 250

22 Remote control facility Yes

23 Mode of remote control Radio

2.11 Overhead Distribution System Design

Lines in General
The following section describes the basic characteristics of the overhead distribution system design
of 33kV and 15kV networks.

All material to be used shall be in conformance to the Employer’s Technical Specifications.

Overhead Medium Voltage (MV) power distribution lines shall be routed along the roads and
straight as far as possible.

Clearance/approval from other relevant service authorities such as Municipality,

Telecommunication Authority, Water & sewerage and Road Authority etc. shall be obtained for
the proposed line routes by Ethiopian Electricity Utility.

Private land and/or vegetation should be avoided as far as possible in construction of MV lines.

Poles and stays shall be positioned so as to cause least obstruction to the general public.

Ensure that poles and stays are not at high risk of being damaged by vehicles.
Overhead power lines shall be routed to avoid crossing of other power and telecommunication
lines as far as is practicable.

MV line pole positions shall be located so as to accommodate future construction of LV lines on

existing poles. Mixed MV and LV lines shall be generally designed with not less than 12m poles.

The following points shall also be considered when locating the pole positions along the lines.

• Access for construction and future maintenance work.

• Environment and aesthetic considerations.
• Availability and suitability of land to erect poles.
• Line clearances with Buildings
• Future developments
The following shall be avoided as far as possible when locating pole positions.

• Heavy angles and deviations of lines.

• Drainage ducts, water pipes, side drains, culverts, marshy land etc.
• Crossing of prospective building sites, playgrounds, road widening routes, places with
valuable vegetation etc.
• Construction of MV and LV lines in parallel with existing telephone lines on the same side
of the road.
Standard conductor clearances to the ground, permanent structures and trees shall be maintained as
specified in the general drawings for line construction is given in this specification.

The maximum span for MV lines shall be maintained as close as possible to basic spans. If the
actual planned span significantly exceeds the basic span, the calculation of loads applied to pole
shall be done for specific span, conductor and pole and on pole clearance must be checked for mid-
span clashing.

• Close proximity of overhead power lines to trees shall be avoided too.

• Ensure public safety.
• Minimize the risk of fires caused by contact between trees and overhead lines.
• Reduce the power outages and improve the reliability of supply.
• Protect plant and equipment from damage.
 • Minimize the loss of energy through tree conductivity to earth.

Using the covered conductors or insulated cable in areas with difficult vegetation control might be
the right solution provided that the designer has the assurance that the area does not suffer from
bush fire.

The areas prone to common bushfire shall be constructed on steel or concrete poles, bare conductors
and porcelain or glass insulators to avoid unnecessary destruction and costly replacement.

Supports
The medium voltage lines shall be normally designed as single circuit, three phase three-wire on
concrete (earthed) with steel cross arms.

General standardization
Concrete poles for medium voltage lines are standardized in the following load classes:

Class 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Fmax (kN) 20.0 16.5 13.4 10.7 8.5 6.7 5.3
Concrete poles for medium voltage lines are standardized in the following lengths:

8m, 9m,10m, 11m, 12m, 13m and 14m

For medium voltage lines the lengths 11m to 14m shall be used as standard.

Foundations
General
This chapter applies for foundations for concrete or tubular steel poles.

Foundations shall be designed, for any type of soil to be found, both in dry and fully submerged
conditions and for rock.

Foundations shall normally be of the simple earth type employing bearing plates with foundation
baulks and kicking blocks as necessary.

The poles shall be placed in the ground to the planting depths dictated by foundation design but not
less than the following:

Planting depth = Total length of support / 6

OR

Planting depth = 60cm +Total length of support / 10

All foundations shall be designed to withstand uplift, settlement, overturning and sliding when
subjected to the specified conditions of loading. Allowance shall be made in foundation design for
hydrostatic pressure effects of seasonal rain drying out cyclic loading and wind induced vibration.
Foundation and stay and anchor baulks shall be of reinforced concrete or steel fabrication,
compatible with the material of the pole.

Foundations on places where the loads are high (dead end, heavy angle, transformer on pole etc.)
or the soil conditions are poor shall be of reinforced or mass concrete type.

All concrete types of foundation shall be designed with two different heights above ground.

The normal type shall have a height of 5 to 15 cm above ground.

In flood prone areas, the height of foundations for above ground shall be about 50 cm to ensure
protection against aggressive water.

At pole or tower positions where occasional flooding may cause damage to towers or foundations,
protective embankments shall be erected or alternative measures shall be proposed by the
Contractor.

For the final foundation design the Contractor has to perform the required soil investigation, and
has to base his choice of appropriate foundation design on the detailed information obtained therein.

Soil Types and their Parameters

The following table shows typical soil types and their basic parameters:
Depth to Density Cone Angle Soil bearing Sub grade
Description water Table of Uplift capacity reaction
[m] [ kg/m3] [°] [kg/cm²] [ kg/cm3]
Homogenous >2.5 >2000 30° >7.5 >3300
rock
Fractured rock >2.5 >1800 25° >4 3300
Stiff clay , >2.5 >1600 20° >2.5 2000
dense sand
Firm clay or >2.5 >1500 15° >1.5 960
medium dense
sand
Firm clay or
medium dense ≤2.5 >1000 10° >1.0 670
sand
Soft clay, silt,
>2.5 >1400 10° >0.5 280
loose sand
Soft clay, silt, ≤2.5
>960 0° >0.5 <160
loose sand
Design of Foundations
The Contractor shall stake out the pole locations and submit to Employer the foundation conditions,
including permissible bearing pressures expected at each pole/tower, together with the type of
foundation proposed. The Employer engineer may require the Contractor to make additional
investigations at Concerete pole sites to verify the foundation conditions. According to the results
of the site investigation the numbers of foundations to be supplied shall be changed as to the actual
conditions. The bearing pressure on soil shall not exceed the limits laid down for each type of
foundation during the soil investigations.

The Contractor shall perform a comprehensive soil investigation to ascertain the soil conditions
and characteristics using approved methods to determine the type of foundation applicable. The
soil investigation shall provide the Employer engineer with sufficient information on the subsoil
conditions. Soil investigations are to be performed in accordance with relevant BS or DIN Standard.

The possible deterioration of the consistency of cohesive soils and the resulting reduction there
from of the bearing capacity shall be considered. If ground water exists, the corresponding decrease
of weight of soil due to uplift conditions shall be considered in the calculations.

Pole foundations shall be assessed for two main parameters:

• Overturning moment
• Bearing pressure

Stays
General
Stays shall normally consist of stranded galvanized steel stay wires complying with the
requirements of BS or other approved standard. The attachment of the stays to the supports and
foundation shall consist of a factory-formed helical termination clamp with shackle to match the
pole face landing plate at one end and a similar termination to match the stirrup of the stay rod.
Stay rods, stirrups and stay foundations shall be of approved dimensions and types. Stay assembly
shall be fabricated in steel and galvanized to the requirements of ISO 1461 or other approved
standards. The stay rod shall be locked into the stay plate or stay log to prevent rotation of the rod.
Each stay assembly shall be equipped by stay insulator of an approved design. Approved devices
shall be provided in each stay wire for adjusting the tension in the stay wires after erection and
during maintenance.

Load to Stay
Load to stay/stays is actually the difference between transversal and longitudinal loads imposed to
the pole and the maximum working load of pole.

Other Stay Requirements and Methods

If more than one stay is used then load to each stay must be recalculated accordingly to angle
between stays.

Final contribution of all stays in vertical plane must be considered and checked during the pole
foundation design.

It is advisable not to use more than 2 stays per pole.

Soil conditions assessment of stay is not necessary as the distance from pole foundation (where the
soil investigation report exists) is short.

When assessing the stay slope and stay depth the maximum length of available stay rod must be
considered.

Medium voltage line stays and bare conductor low voltage line stays shall be equipped by stay
insulator which shall be mounted not less than 3 from pole top for MV lines and 1m from pole top
for bare conductor LV lines. Tubular steel poles shall not use the stay insulator.

Line Conductor System

Covered Conductor System
Covered conductor is the conductor surrounded by a covering made of insulating material to protect
it against accidental contact between other covered conductors and with earthed parts. Due to the
lack of a metal screen, covered conductors are held as not sufficiently insulated to be touch proof.
(e.g. SAX conductors, non-screened MV ABC catenaries systems).

Three main types of covered conductors are used:

Cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) covered single conductor – for urban and clashing fault prone
areas; length is not limited but use of overvoltage relief devices (surge arresters, spark gaps…) is
necessary

Cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) covered aerial bundled catenaries cable – for urban areas and
narrow corridor environment.

Overhead Insulated Cable System

Overhead insulated cable system is the system where each conductor is surrounded by a covering
made of insulating material, which fully protects against all leakage either currents phase to phase
or to the earthed parts. In the majority of cases (MV only), each phase conductor will have a core
metallic screen. (e.g. screened MV ABC catenaries systems, “Universal” cable systems).

Medium voltage overhead cable system is relatively expensive and its use shall be limited.

Conductor “Sag and Tension” Basics and Calculation

Loading cases and definitions

Load Case EDT HW ERR MT

Temperature [°C] 25.0 40.0 10.0 85.0

Additional load [N/m] 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Wind load [N/m²] 0.0 539.0 (*) 0.0 0.0

Maximum tension %UTS <20.0 40.0 40.0 N.A

EDT፡ everyday tension; it is actually the ideal steady state of the conductor for design basic

calculations only; unlikely to happen in normal situation; maximum tension 20% of UTS of the
conductor is to be read as the ceiling, not the optimum

HW፡ high wind; usual case of part loaded conductor; used as case for calculation of maximum

tension of the conductor and its effects on poles etc.

(*) Nominal wind pressure (766N/m2) corrected to altitude

ERR፡ erection; normal case applicable during the stringing; actually only temporary initial case for

conductor before creep will transfer that case into EDT

MT፡ maximum temperature; steady state of the conductor used for maximum sag calculation and

clearance check.

Other Definitions
Wind Span

Wind Span is the maximum possible half span lengths (total) on either side of the pole, which can
withstand the design wind speed.

Wind Span = Half of the sum of lengths of adjacent spans.

Basic Span (Equivalent Span)

The Basic Span of a line section between two tension points can be calculated by using following
formula.

Sag(s) =WL2 / 8Tmax where W=Weight of conductor

L=Span Length

T=Max. Strength of conductors

Weight span

The Weight Span is the representation of dead weight load of the conductors on pole expressed in
length of the specific conductor and its unit weight.
Recommendation:
As the tension of the conductor depends on conductor temperature and the formula calculating
these effects is cubic; even after simplifying, it is advisable to use professional software for
calculation of the sag and tension of the conductor.

MV fittings
Tension clamps

Conductor attachment to the insulator string at tension and dead end towers shall be of the
preformed dead end tie or bolted type tension clamp.

Suspension clamps

Conductor attachment to the suspended insulator string (on towers) shall be of the trunnion bolted
suspension clamp.

Preformed ties

Performed ties shall be made of aluminium coated steel or aluminium alloy wire and will be
furnished with neoprene protective sleeve for conductor.

Wrap-lock attachment of the conductor by prefabricated side ties or top ties shall be used for line
post insulators.

The conductors shall, except at angle positions, be bound into the top groove of pin insulators by
means of a pre-formed helical binding (top-tie): at small angle positions and where double insulator
arrangement is required (crossings) they shall be bound into the side groove so that the insulator is
inside the angle included by the conductor.

As a replacement of preformed ties the preformed stirrup together with aluminium tape and
aluminium binding wire can be used.

Where the PVC covered conductor is used the conductor shall be covered by semi conductive
polyvinyl tape in between ±20cm from the ends of bind.

Joints
Joints for line conductors shall be of approved pre-formed helical or compression types and shall
comply with the requirements of IEC 61284. The electrical conductivity and current carrying
capacity of each joint shall not be less than those of the line conductor.

Non-tension joints and tap off connectors shall be preferably compression type or approved type
of parallel clamp and shall not permit any slip or damage of the connection at a load of 25 per cent
of the ultimate strength of the conductor, and shall be designed so that no loosening of the
connections can occur in service.

Where the PVC covered conductor is used the joint or tap off joint shall be covered by petrolatum
whether proofing tape in between ±5cm from the ends of joint.

FITTINGS, INSULATORS AND ARC PROTECTING DEVICES FOR XLPE COVERED

CONDUCTORS (LONG DISTANCE) SHALL BE RECOMMENDED AS A SYSTEM BY THE
MANUFACTURER OF THE CONDUCTOR.

Joints

Joints for line conductors shall be of compression types and shall comply with the requirements of
IEC 61284. The electrical conductivity and current carrying capacity of each joint under the test
conditions shall not be less than those of the line conductor. The joints shall be equipped with black,
weather resistant polyethylene sleeve insulation with high resistance to solar radiation.

Earthing
Metal poles and poles having installed equipment such as surge arresters, cable sealing ends,
autorecloser, load break switch or transformer as well as line ends shall have installed a protection
earthing. All metal poles/towers must have protection earthing.

The pole ground lead shall extend above the top of the pole and shall be bonded to the surge
arresters, plate bolts, tension insulator bolts, and in general all metallic supports installed on the
structure according to that specification.

Type of Terrain Resistivity

(Ohm-meters)
Freshwater lakes, unpolluted 1000
Sea water, away from river estuaries 0.22
Agricultural plains, streams, richest loam soil 30
Pastoral, low hills, fertile soil 80
Flat, marshy, densely wooded in places 130
Pastoral, medium hills with forestation 270
Pastoral, heavy clay soils, hills 250
Rocky soil, steep forested hills, streams 500
Rocky, sandy, some rainfall, some vegetation 500
Low-rise city suburbs, built-up areas, parks 1000
High-rise city centre, industrial areas 3000
Sand deserts, arid, no vegetation >20,000
Note: An ohm-meter is the resistance between opposite faces of a 1-meter cube of material. The
above values are averages taken over large distances.
Effective earthing system cost mostly depends on terrain type and consequent earth improvement
measures necessary to get the reliable earthing system at reasonable costs. Considering the
prevailing terrain type the effective earthing arrangement shall not have the resistance higher than
10 Ω.

Earthing and Bonding Material

Earthing wires for the earthing of pole mounted electrical apparatus shall be copper of a minimum
cross-sectional area of 35 mm2 and shall be fixed to the pole at intervals not more than 600 mm
and finally connected to earthing terminal. Bonding of pole equipment shall be by means of
galvanized steel tape of a minimum cross sectional area of 70mm 2.

Earthing and Bonding Arrangements

Steel cross arms and other pole steelwork, if any, shall be bonded together at every pole.
Every pole with earthing shall be equipped by earthing terminal made of bronze or stainless steel.
The bolt/nut size on terminal shall not be less than size M12.
Pole mounted switchgear and fuse gear with permanent operating rods or the like, and operated by
a handle accessible from ground level, shall be earthed in an approved manner. The operating
handle shall be connected to an earth mat, situated so as to include within its area the whole of the
ground on which the operator could normally stand.
At poles where surge arresters are installed, a separate stranded earth conductor of minimum cross-
sectional area of 35 mm2 shall be connected to the earth terminal of the surge arrester and run to a
separate earth electrode.
High voltage cables - All metal sheaths and armour of high voltage cables fixed to the pole shall
be earthed to the supporting steelwork which shall be connected to an earth electrode.
Earth electrodes shall be fully bonded copper-clad steel with a minimum diameter of 16 mm and
in lengths of 1.5 m, capable of being extended. Where necessary the rods shall be extended and
driven to a greater depth.

MV Sectionalizing Equipment and Surge Arresters

Load-break Switches
Load-break switches will operate in the distribution network for sectionalising the network or
disconnecting feeders. They shall be installed on a pole above or below conductor position. They
shall be operated manually from the ground using a rod linkage and equipped with an insulated
control handle. The handle shall be able to lock in both end positions with a padlock. All three
poles shall be operated simultaneously.

Auto-reclosers
Auto-reclosers shall be designed for three-pole operation and outdoor installation.
The auto-recloser shall be supplied with brackets for pole mounting. All three poles shall be able
to operate simultaneously from ground level. The position of the auto-recloser shall be clearly
marked on the operating device. The autorecloser shall be equipped by surge arresters built-in or
attached to bushing cover.

General Drop-out (Cut-out) Fuses

It is generally recommended to design and install the cut-out fuses on every MV overhead line tee-
off cross arm.

The MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Set can be installed on common cross-arms or on two pole
on top of Overhead mounted transformer .
Dropout Fuse Sets shall be hand-operated from ground level using a glass fibre pole (Operating rod
provided as tool), which shall also be designed to facilitate replacement of the fuse links. Dropout
Fuse Sets shall be of single-phase type.

Contacts of the fuse cut-out shall be suitable to terminate the line conductors.

MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Sets shall consist of:

1. Cross-arm mounting bracket

2. Fuse holder
3. Fuse link
The MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Sets shall be of the outdoor type and completely assembled
and tested.

The equipment in the MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Sets shall be installed with necessary
clearances, easy access to the fuses for testing, maintenance, removal and normal operation and to
provide safety measures against all possible hazards.

The MV Dropout Fuse Sets shall be of the type equipped with fuse holder latches and designed to
prevent falling out of fuse holder.

The single-vent distribution MV Dropout Fuse shall be open type dropout, single insulator with
attachment hooks for load break tool.

The MV Dropout Fuse Sets shall be designed “Bird Proof".

The terminals of the MV Dropout Fuse Sets shall be plated clamp type connector.

The MV Dropout Fuse Sets shall have built in feature for delayed release so that dropout takes
place at or after the fault duration. The time delay should be approximately about 0.1 sec.

The fuse holder insulators shall be made of the composite type or porcelain type.

After operation, the fuse shall be capable of withstanding the power frequency, recovery voltage
across its terminal.
Fuse links shall be of robust construction to ensure that no damage results from normal handling
and operation of the associated equipment. Fuse link material shall effectively resists deterioration
under the prevailing climatic conditions.

The fuse holder shall have a provision for earthing. All metal parts not meant to carry current shall
be connected to a double earthing system and suitable earthing terminals shall be provided with all
equipment.

Earthing terminals shall have clamping bolts of at least 12 mm diameter.

The MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Set shall be capable of withstanding the electrical and
mechanical stresses as specified in the relevant IEC/IEEE/ANSI Standards.

Where fuses are used for disconnecting and protection of transformers they shall be co-ordinated
with the rating of the related distribution transformer.

MV Surge Arresters
The surge arresters shall be designed and erected on every distribution transformer as well as on
any T-off or dead end connection, where the overhead line is connected to underground cable.

The surge arresters shall be of the hermetically sealed plug-in type (metal encapsulated) with metal
oxide material having non-linear resistance. The enclosure shall be silicone copolymer. The surge
arrester shall be preferably equipped with a disconnector.

The surge arresters shall be maintenance free and shall have a pressure relief device for failure
protection in case of overloading .The surge arrester shall be preferably the “bracket type”
(insulated bracket).

Connection to the grounding system shall be by stranded copper wires of adequate cross-section
(min.35sqmm).

Applicable standard is IEC 60099-4.

Typical and Standard Solutions

15/33kV Feeder on Space Constraint Route
Where a new distribution single circuit from primary substation to the existing network mesh is to
be designed in partially congested area , a modified single circuit pole line strung with XLPE
covered AAAC conductor 1 size higher than actually requires shall be used. Short cross arm
suspended by 60cm from normal position and pole top standoff cross arm shall be used to form the
triangular narrow configuration. Poles used for angle positions shall be as strong as possible, see
pole classes above, to reduce or eliminate the need of stays.

15/33kV Feeder Added to Existing Network Mesh, Space Constraint Route with Houses Too Close
to Route or Partially Blocking the Route
Where a new distribution single circuit from primary substation to the existing network mesh is to
be designed in fully congested area where the horizontal clearance to existing houses is not
achievable, an armless single pole line shall be designed. Line shall be strung with catenary
suspended XLPE fully insulated MV aerial bundled cable shall be used. In places where the route
is blocked by houses the adjacent wall of the house, landlord consent required, can be used for
cantilever support installation in straight line. Walls cannot be in any case used as a support if the
line deviation exceeds 2°.

Basic span on lines with MV aerial bundled cable shall be reduced by at least 40% and the poles
shall be designed as effectively and fully earthed system.

15kV or 33kV Single Long Overloaded Feeder in Existing 33/15kV Network Mesh; Capacity
Needs Massive Improvement

Transformation using existing poles and conductors of the line shall be arranged in the following
manner:

Support poles - suspension of the 15kV/33kV cross arm by 60cm from normal position and pole
top standoff cross arm shall be used to form the triangular configuration suitable for 33kV
clearances. Pin/post insulators shall be changed to ones suitable for 33kV.

Tension poles – for both used configuration (vertical single pole and horizontal H pole) new double
sided cross arm suitable for 33kV shall be used. Tension strings for 33kV shall be used, conductors
adequately shortened using preformed dead end ties and stays shall be repositioned.
Line shall be than checked and all attached transformers shall be replaced by 33/0,4kV type. Than
the feeder shall be reconnected to 33kV side of the primary substation

Overall costs of that transformation are approximately 15% of the price of the new feeder
improving the capacity by 200% and reducing the losses by 400%.

2.12 Erection of MV Overhead Lines

General
This specification is intended to give general rules for NEW MV line erection. The rules for
erection of additional equipment (transformers, load break switches etc.) will be given accordingly
to installed equipment and other consequences.

Basics
The Contractor is responsible for the true and proper setting out of the erection work in relation to
the survey lines and reference benchmarks and for the correctness of the position, levels, dimension
and alignment of all parts of the lines.

All erection work shall be done under the supervision of the Employer. All erection drawings,
setting diagrams and other relevant information shall be approved. Erection work shall not
commence before all such drawings, etc., are approved by the Employer. Five copies of such
drawings shall be given to the Employer for use by his supervisors in the field. The Contractor shall
also provide, when required, reasonable use of his facilities and equipment to enable inspection,
measurement and testing of erection work by the Employer.

The Contractor shall keep damage within the right-of-way to a minimum consistent with the
successful execution of the erection work. The Contractor shall exercise all precautions to avoid
damage to crops and other property. Damage repair works shall be borne by the Contractor only
when the damages are due to negligence on their part.

Provision of Site Access

The Contractor shall provide and maintain all access from the main highways to the distribution
line routes during erection as required by the Employer and convenient to him.
The Contractor shall comply with all national and local regulations regarding barricades, detour
arrangements and warning signs. Damage repair works shall be borne by the Contractor only when
the damages are due to negligence on their part.

No continuous track for maintenance within the right of way, along the entire line route is foreseen
for MV lines.

No separate payment other than foreseen in the price sheets shall be made to the Contractor on
account of building or repairing access roads and tracks.

Soil Investigations
The Contractor shall be responsible at his own cost for ascertaining that the foundations to be
employed are suitable for the sub-surface conditions encountered at each pole/tower site. For this
purpose he will be responsible for classifying these conditions at each pole/tower site at an early
stage of the Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for any subsidence or failure due, in the
opinion of the Employer, to insufficient care having been taken in his examination of ground
conditions or in installation of the foundations. Prior to construction the Contractor shall submit
for approval his proposals for correlating the results of the soil tests with the parameters employed
for the foundation design. These proposals shall also consider visual and manual checks and tests
to be made after excavation and will be to the Employer’s approval.

The Contractor shall prepare a Schedule for construction purposes which clearly indicates the class
of foundation to be installed at each site and records the soil investigation data on which the choice
has been made. The Schedule will be subject to approval of the Employer prior to commencement
of foundation construction.

When required by the Employer the Contractor will be required to make arrangements for a
comprehensive soils investigation to be carried out at any specified pole/tower site, including deep
borings and laboratory analysis of undisturbed soil samples and for a report and recommendation
to be submitted.
Pole Locations
General route sketch shall be provided by the Employer to the Contractor in the SW form (GIS,
DWF or KMZ).

The Contractor shall be prepared to amend the route, according to detailed requirements of the
authorities, until final approval is obtained. No additional costs will be considered for such minor
work. Amendments required after receipt of route approval by the authorities shall be remunerated
as per the relevant Contractual rate for survey works.

The initial survey profile for the MV line may be provided by the Employer.

The Contractor shall perform detailed full scale survey for MV line, determine the pole/tower
locations in the map and longitudinal profiles and prepare pole/tower lists with main data for each
pole/tower including wind span and weight span.

The topographical line survey shall be carried out along the approved line route.

The theodolites used and measuring techniques applied shall have the ability of digital recording
technique. The survey shall be carried out to a minimum accuracy of 1 in 2.000 for distance- and 1
minute for angular measurements.

The Contractor shall prepare longitudinal profile drawings of the distribution line, in scales of:

1 : 2.500 for the horizontal

1 : 500 for the vertical axis

They shall display the bottom conductor catenaries, at maximum temperature, together with the
ground- or special clearance curves, as well as the minimum temperature catenaries. Pole/tower
Nos., pole/tower types, weight spans, wind spans, equivalent spans, section length, continuous
chain age, elevations, level differences, UTM co-ordinates (for angles and dead ends), etc. shall be
shown. Along the bottom of the profile plan, a strip plan of the line route, extending 20 m beyond
the corridor limits, to either side of the centre line, shall be shown. The strip plan shall detail all
relevant information regarding obstructions, services, vegetation, terrain type, land use, etc...
Horizontal and vertical co-ordinates of all features affecting the line construction shall be indicated
on the profile plan. Crossings of existing overhead lines shall be documented with measured
elevations and locations of their top and bottom conductors, at centre line and side profile limits,
together with the air temperature at the time of measurement. All qualified crossings and
approximations shall be covered by individual clearance calculations, to be shown on the profile
plan. Pole/tower centre co-ordinates of angle pole/towers and end pole/towers shall be reduced to
UTM, WGS84 datum, and indicated on the profile plans.

The Contractor shall locate and indicate benchmarks and reference points already existing in the
project area. Where these do not exist, the Contractor shall provide such reference points in
consultation with e.g. the Town Planning Department, Public Works Department, etc.

Marking of the line route and pegging of pole/tower positions shall be as per Contractor's Method
Statement.

To facilitate approval of profile plans, the Contractor shall provide the Employer either with two
licensed copies of software inclusive of all relevant survey- and other data in digital form, or with
two complete sets of transparent sag templates in Perspex or similar material, 4 to 5 mm thick,
based on the range of equivalent spans required, staggered at 50 m, and for the conductor types and
scales to be used. The templates shall be cut precisely along the conductor catenaries in still air, at
maximum temperature (hot curve). The sag curve in still air, at minimum temperature (cold curve),
the span grid, the ground clearance line, and all relevant details like design loading conditions,
particulars of conductors, equivalent span applicable, scales, etc. shall be engraved.

The Contractor shall consider any condition of uplift on poles/towers as result of conductor loading
and shall provide the appropriate measures in his design and supply to handle the effect thereof.

At pole locations with additional loading due to span lengths exceeding the stipulated maximum
spans for conductor weight loading and in case of uplift which cannot be handled by tangent pole,
tension pole shall be used.

The Contractor shall investigate and prove that the type of tension pole/towers proposed for such
locations can withstand such increased loading.

According to technical data of the utilized conductor, the maximum and minimum temperature and
the possible spans, the Contractor will prepare a sag template for the distribution of poles/towers.
The curve will be plotted using the Contractor's computer program and subsequently cut in durable
material.

Clearing of Right-of-Way
The Contractor shall clear the right-of-way, fell any vegetation and dispose of waste material along
the entire length of a distribution line.

The distribution line right-of-way is 10 meters wide for the 15/33 kV lines on poles symmetrical
about the centre line.

All trees, snags, stumps, shrubbery, ant hills and undergrowth exceeding 2 meters in height as
measured on the downhill site shall be cut to a maximum stump of 20 cm along the right-of-way.

All trees adjacent to the right-of-way which could fall across the conductors or against the
pole/towers shall be cut, this criterion shall apply with the conductors displaced 53° from the
vertical in either direction.

In addition to the clearing required on the right-of-way all trees, bush stumps and snags to each
pole/tower location shall be cut, regardless of height and clearance to conductor to a maximum
stump of 25 cm, in an area of 8 by 8 meters around a pole/tower.

The Employer will make the necessary arrangements with landowners so as to permit the
Contractor the cutting or trimming of trees located both inside and outside the right-of-way where
such cutting or trimming is necessary. The Contractor shall notify the Employer 14 days in advance
of commencement of any proposed clearing operation. No clearing shall be undertaken until the
Employer has made the arrangements with the landowner and/or unless in the presence of the
Employer. The removal of some huts and cottages, which are situated along the right-of-way, is
the responsibility of the Employer.

The Contractor shall remove and dispose of any felled trees and waste material such as useless
packaging material to the satisfaction of the Employer.

Preparation of List of Material

The list of material is a document that collects in one file all the necessary elements for the supply
and erection of the distribution line. This summary contains information on each pole as well as on
the total of the line and includes the following data:
• Number of each pole and altitude.
• Horizontal span between the Concrete poles, wind span, weight span, line angle, hillside
extensions.
• Type of pole.
• Type of cross arms.
• Type of insulator /insulator string.
• Type of tie (top or side tie) on tangent poles.
• Type of foundation and earthing.

Design of Foundations
The Contractor shall stake out the pole locations and submit to the Employer the foundation
conditions, including permissible bearing pressures expected at each pole/tower, together with the
type of foundation proposed. The Employer may require the Contractor to make additional
investigations at pole sites to verify the foundation conditions.

In excavating foundations for supports with foundation baulks and for stay and anchor baulks where
used, the holes shall be undercut so that the baulks have above them solid and undisturbed earth on
their principal bearing surface wherever possible.

Blinding concrete shall be provided under all concrete foundations at the base of the excavation for
a thickness of at least 75 mm and shall be deemed to be included in the price of the foundations.

Foundations on places where the loads are high (Tensions, dead end, angle, heavy angle,
transformer on pole etc.) or the soil conditions are poor shall be of concrete type and reinforcement
bar shall also be used as required.

For the final foundation design the Contractor has to perform the required soil investigation, and
has to base his choice of appropriate foundation design on the detailed information obtained therein.

Distribution and Erection of Poles

Distribution of poles has to be carried out by the Contractor.

The distribution of poles will be carried out according to the following constraints and rules:

• Compliance with maximum spans of the different types of poles.

• Respect of minimum clearances between conductors and ground taking into account
cultivated areas, plantations, etc.
• Respect of minimum clearances between conductors and traffic ways, roads, railway lines,
etc.
• Horizontal distance between conductors of the line and of other crossed lines.
• Respect of clearances between conductors of the line and buildings, taking into account the
maximum inclination of conductors under wind conditions.
Each pole shall be located and centered within 15 cm of the centre line transversely and within a ±
1% deviation of its back span length longitudinally of its specified position on the plan and profiles.
In mountainous steep terrain longitudinal deviations cannot be accepted. Relocation of a pole
exceeding the longitudinal deviation limit will be allowed only if approved by the Employer and
for purposes of improving soil conditions for foundation work. Such relocation shall in any case
not exceed more than 10 meters in either direction and will be allowed provided ground clearance
is not impaired and specific loading of the particular pole is not exceeded.

Poles in tangent positions shall be oriented with the transverse faces at right angles to the
distribution line centre line, and poles in angle positions shall be oriented with the transverse face
or right angles to the bisector of the deviation angle.

Poles shall be assembled in accordance with the approved Contractor's drawings and erected by
any suitable method which will not overstrain structural members or their foundations. The method
of erection shall not interfere with adjacent as intersecting line and/or other improvements. Tension
structures (except those used in straight line for anchoring purposes only) shall have the appropriate
deflection towards the load applied by conductors and equipment. It should be noted that permanent
maximum negative pole deflection of 5° (towards the resulting load) is acceptable. Any positive
pole deflection (in direction of resulting load) is not acceptable and shall be rectified.

If the stays are to be used, the stay wires should be engaged before stringing giving the pole
appropriate “backload”.

Installation of Conductors and Accessories

The Contractor shall join string and sag the conductors in accordance with the final sag and tension
tables approved by the Employer.
During the stringing operation and before sagging is completed the Contractor shall ascertain that
all clearances would conform to drawings and that the limiting requirements for clearances between
the lowest conductor and various features at maximum sag would be met.

If the above requirements are not found possible in particular cases, the Contractor shall bring the
attention of the Employer to the conditions and propose means to improve the condition.

Stringing
The Contractor shall submit in writing for approval a complete and detailed description of the
stringing equipment, stringing and sagging procedure intended for use.

The Contractor shall supply all necessary tools and stringing equipment which shall be subject to
the approval of the Employer. Under no circumstances shall the conductors be allowed to contact
the ground or any other obstacle.

The stringing equipment and operation shall be such as to avoid overstressing pole structures or
foundations. Any damage to Concrete poles or foundations occurring in such an operation shall be
made good at the expense of the Contractor. Non-metallic lagging shall be used to protect any part
of any structure which may be subject to abrasion by the pulling line or which may damage
conductors passing over it.

Conductors shall be strung carefully to avoid kinking, loosening of strands, scraping, nicks or other
damage. Bends of less than the minimum-bending radius of 18 times the cable diameter will not be
permitted. Jumper loops shall be made up between terminal fittings and formed into such a shape
as will afford the minimum clearance specified on the pole outline drawings and so that the jumper
insulator string, if any supplied, is not deflected from plumb alignment. Any damage to conductors
shall be reported immediately to the Employer who will decide whether or not the conductor is
damaged enough to warrant repair or replacement at the Contractor's expense.

Appropriate stringing sheaves or travelers shall be used which will not damage the conductor. The
stringing sheaves shall be of low friction design. They shall be carefully cleaned and oiled so as to
remain free running and any sheaves that in the opinion of the Employer are not suitable shall be
removed from the line and replaced. Stringing sheaves shall have a minimum diameter measured
at the bottom of the groove of 18 conductor diameters.
Stringing sheaves for horizontal arrangement cross arms on poles shall be fitted upright on the
cross arm and designed to properly distribute loads to the cross arm. They shall be installed at such
a height as to support the conductor at its permanent elevation when clipped-in.

Stringing sheaves for the suspended cable system (i.e. tower, MV ABC cable or LV ABC cable)
shall be suspended from the cross arm/pole attachment bolt.

Sheaf surfaces in contact with the conductor shall be lined with neoprene or rubber. Sheaves for a
conductor shall be so designed and so used that the pulling line does not damage or deposit foreign
matter in the neoprene or rubber lining, which might cause damage to the conductor. Splices shall
not travel through the sheaves.

If it becomes necessary to leave the conductor in the sheaves during the stringing operation due to
inclement weather or equipment breakdowns, the conductor shall be left at a minimum of twice the
normal sag. Conductors which have been in the sheaves for more than 60 hours or during
exceedingly windy weather shall be inspected for damage. The Contractor shall repair or replace
any damaged conductor.

The stringing operation shall be executed with due regard to the safety of erection personnel and
the public. While conductors are being run out, and when being tensioned and finally clipped-in,
all conductors shall be earthed by the Contractor at points approved by the Employer. The
Contractor shall record the position of each earth connection and before he reports that a line may
be energized, he shall deliver to the Employer a written statement certifying that all earth
connections placed by the Contractor on conductors have been removed and that every member of
the Contractor's staff has been informed that he shall not work on the line again unless in possession
of a written authorization by the Employer.

The Contractor shall supply and install all guard structures required for crossings over electric
supply and communication lines, railroads, roads, highways, obstructions and for the protection of
the conductor. All guard structures shall be of adequate strength to withstand the stresses to which
they may be subjected. Stringing sheaves shall be used on guard structures. Immediately after
completing sagging of a section of lines, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of all guard
structures.
The Contractor shall use a portable and/or mobile short-wave radio communication system to
control the stringing operation. The Contractor shall obtain the necessary licences for this system
from the concerned authorities.

Sagging
The Contractor shall sag the conductors in accordance with the initial sag and tension tables to be
prepared by him based on the final sag and tension tables approved by the Employer.

The length of the conductors sagged in one operation shall be limited to the length that can be
sagged satisfactorily.

The tension prescribed in the sag and tension tables shall not be exceeded by more than 10% at any
time during stringing and sagging operations.

An accurate thermometer shall check conductor temperature at the moment of sagging.

The tension/sag shall be measured by digital dynamometer allowing to download and print the final
values. Subject to the approval of the Employer, the Contractor may employ other methods of
checking sag.

As soon as possible after completion of clipping-in the Contractor shall re-check the sags for
correctness and shall then turn over his initial and check sagging results to the Employer.

Final approval of the sagging of an entire section between permanent or temporary dead-ends will
be given when the completed sagging has been checked and found to be within the specified
tolerances. All clearance shall conform to the drawings.

Splices
Full tension splices shall be compression joints.

Full tension splices for covered conductor shall be covered by weather resistant heat shrink
insulation sleeve.

Splices for MV ABC cable are not supposed to be on tension and in reality are similar to MV
underground cable joints. The utmost care shall be taken to ensure that during jointing the sleeve
remains well centred on the conductor core after compression.
A maximum of one splice per conductor cable will be allowed in any phase in any span. No splices
shall be located in any span crossing main roads, major rivers, major communication or power
lines.

No joints shall be applied at less than 10 meters from attachment point at pole or tower.

The finished splices shall be straight, free from cracks, and shall not deviate from straightness more
than 0.5 % of its length. Straightening of a bent splice by means of sledgehammer blows or a similar
manner will not be permitted. Unsatisfactory joints shall be cut out and replaced at the Contractor's
expense.

The making of compression joints and any application of repair sleeves shall be done only in the
presence of the Employer and shall be stamped with an approved stamp. Records of all splicing
and application of repair sleeves shall be kept and handed-over to the Employer.

When damage to a bare conductor does not exceed three aluminium strands, either broken or nicked
deeper than one-third of their diameter a repair splice or sleeve shall be installed and where this
limit is exceeded the damaged section of the conductor shall be cut out and spliced with the above-
mentioned preformed line splice or compression joint.

Installation of Insulator and Line Hardware

Insulators shall be clean when hung. Steel wool and clean rags shall be used to remove mud, grease,
dirt and other foreign matter. Disc surface shall be wiped to a bright finish and metal surfaces shall
be free from any noticeable contamination.

Insulator strings shall be handled so as to avoid bent pins or chipped glaze. Chipped, cracked or
score insulators of the Contractor's supply shall not be installed.

Hardware and accessories shall be handled to prevent contact with the ground. All items shall be
clean and inspected for missing parts or visual defects before installation. All connections shall be
made in accordance with the drawings or as recommended by the manufacture, bolts firmly
tightened, split pins inserted where required, all in a good workman-like manner according to the
best practice of distribution line construction.
All split pins in each insulator string shall be carefully checked to ensure that they are properly
seated to avoid accidental uncoupling of insulator units. All split pins shall be faced toward the
stepped leg of the pole to facilitate inspection.

The Contractor shall supply all necessary accessories, i.e. special tools, compressors, draw benches,
etc. required for making dead-ends for conductors.

All pins used in clevises and other line hardware shall be installed in such a manner that the head
of the pin is in the highest position so that the pin will not drop out if the split pin is lost.

All sockets shall be turned so that the open side faces the ground on all insulator assemblies which
are to be installed in a substantially horizontal position in order to facilitate drainage of water.

Imperfectly or poorly galvanized hardware as determined by the Employer shall not be used. Such
pieces shall be replaced with new hardware.

Properly tight dead-end tie assemblies made of aluminium coated steel or aluminium alloy wire
shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Wrap-lock attachment of the conductor by prefabricated side ties or top ties shall be used for line
post or pin insulators.

The conductors shall, except at angle positions, be bound into the top groove of insulators by means
of a pre-formed helical binding (top-tie): at small angle positions and where double insulator
arrangement is required (crossings) they shall be bound into the side groove so that the insulator is
inside the angle included by the conductor.

Medium voltage lines with bare conductors and horizontal construction should have the centre
phase post/pin insulator mounted in zig-zag positions to keep the phase to phase clearance equal in
horizontal plane.

Subject to approval of the Employer it is possible to use the bolted or compression dead end clamps
for conductor termination.

Subject to approval of the Employer it is possible to use the preformed alloy stirrups, aluminium
tape and aluminium binding wire for binding the conductor to the side groove of the post/pin
insulator. For top groove binding the double bow tie lock without the stirrup shall be used.
Jumpers and other leads connected to line conductors shall have sufficient slack to allow free
movement of the conductors. Where slack is not shown on the construction drawings it will be
provided by at least two bends in a vertical plane, or one in a horizontal plane, or the equivalent.

Line Accessories
Danger Plates and Number Plates
A danger plate shall normally be on the transverse face of a the poles with the exception of those
poles located not further than 40 meters from roads in which case the signs shall be affixed facing
the road. The mounting height shall be about 2.5 meters above ground level.

Number plates of approved design and material shall be attached to each pole and positioned under
the danger plate.

The mounting shall be made with inox or galvanized bolts, nuts and galvanized washers.

LV Surge Arresters
Surge arresters are foreseen to protect the low voltage networks and shall be of the metal-oxide or
valve type.

For pole mounted transformers the surge arrester shall be connected to ABC cable in between
transformer LV bushing and fuse switch (or inside the multiway distribution box on incoming bus
bars). Arresters connected to ABC overhead lines shall be stud mounted and with insulated
connecting cable on the other side (to be used with piercing connector).

For ground mounted transformers the surge arrester shall be connected inside the multiway
distribution box on incoming bus bars.

Connections
All weather exposed connections (including earth) shall be protected with adequate penetrox grease
and denso tape in not less than 2 layers.

MV/LV Pole Mounted Substations and Transformers

Three phase pole mounted transformers shall be hermetically sealed type with the ratings as
follows:
25kVA, 50kVA, 100kVA, 200kVA, 315KVA, 400kVA and 500kVA

MV/LV Substations Construction

The standard MV/LV transformer stations shall be of the following type:

• In-line transformers - shall be mounted on H pole construction

• Dead-end transformers- shall be mounted on single pole/H pole
Each station shall be identified by a danger plate and transformer station designation plate giving
the name of the transformer station and the main technical data.

The MV/LV substation shall consist of, but is not limited to, the following facilities:

• Pole (H construction or dead end construction)

• Cross arms
• Civil works including concrete work foundation
• MV wiring and connections
• MV surge arresters
• MV drop out fuses including fuse holder
• Pole mounted transformer
• LV Distribution box
• Earthing system
Mounting Positions
Transformer on pole - H pole construction

Maximum height : top of MV bushing level 80cm below MV fuses cross arm

Minimum height : top of tank 5.7m above ground level

Transformer on pole – Dead End pole construction

Maximum height : top of MV bushing level 100cm below MV cross arm

Minimum height : top of tank 5.7m above ground level

MV Surge Arresters
These must be used on all three-phase transformers. The arrester shall be fitted as near as possible
to the equipment being protected i.e. use the facility for fitting the lightning arresters directly to the
tank.

Jumpers from cut-out fuses shall pass the arrester on its way to MV bushing.

Drop-out (Cut-out) Fuses

The MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Set specified ratings shall be considered as the normal
continuous operating ratings at 50 °C. If the proposed ratings are given at lower temperatures,
these ratings shall be increased, according to the manufacturer standards, to satisfy the requirement
at 50 °C. The MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Set can be installed on common cross-arms.

Drop out fuse ratings for transformer stations shall be following:

Transformer Rating KVA 200 315 400 500

15kV Rated Fused Current A 16 20 25 32

33kV Rated Fused Current A 6 10 16 20

MV Wiring and Connections

MV jumpers directly to the eyebolts on the cut out fuse shall be made by the same conductor as the
MV line is. Jumpers from cut-out fuse to transformer terminals shall be preferably made by solid
copper conductor not less than 16 sqmm. Petrolatum (Denso) tape shall be applied over all
terminals.

Ensure the maximum length of unsupported jumpers is 1500mm and obtain a minimum spacing of
700mm between phases, phase/earth, and phase/pole for all jumpers.

LV Distribution Boxes
The boxes shall be of a weather-proof design made of robust sheet satisfying protection class IP549
as minimum. The boxes shall be of epoxy type glass fibre reinforced, resistant to UV radiation,
fabricated according to DIN. Their last coat of paint shall be of RAL 7035, light grey. Bolts and
nuts exposed to the atmosphere shall be of the anticorrosive type (stainless steel).
 • In the LV side / secondary side of the transformer, connection should be done by 2x240+1
x 120 mm2 CU conductor.
It shall accommodate the items specified with all relevant auxiliary components including cable
gland plates, terminal blocks.

2.13 Underground Distribution Cable Design and Construction

Typical Network Cables and Operating Parameters
The following cable sizes which shall be used on the Ethiopian Network:

MV Cable data
Type Construction Ampacity (A)
Al240mm2 AL 403
Al400mm2 AL 518
Al500mm2 AL 585
Cu95mm2 3xCU 290
Cu120mm2 3xCU 330
Cu185mm2 3xCU 417
Cu240mm2 CU 505
Cu400mm2 CU 630
Cu500mm2 CU 689
LV Cable data
Type Construction Ampacity (A)
LV25mm2 4xCu 143
LV35mm2 4xCu 173
LV50mm2 4xCu 205
LV70mm2 4xCu 265
LV95mm2 4xCu 303
LV120mm2 4xCu 346
 LV185mm2 4xCu 457
LV240mm2 4xCu 527
LV300mm2 4xCu 590

Design Parameter for Underground Feeders

The design criteria for underground primary circuits are primarily related to thermal performance
of the cables, and the required depth of burial. Standard parameters are as follows:

• Minimum burial depth (m) 1.0/0.8

• Maximum Allowable Conductor Temperature (°C) 90
• Assumed Soil Temperature (°C) 20
• Assumed Soil Resistivity (°C.m/W 1.2
1.11. Distribution Cable Components
Conductor
Copper and aluminium are exclusively used as conductor materials for MV cables.

Copper is exclusively used as conductor materials for LV cables.

Insulation, Armour and Sheath

Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) is the standard insulating system of materials for MV cables.
PVC or HDPE is the standard insulating system of materials for LV cables.
Metallic Sheath, armour and Jacket
Copper wire sheath, armour bedding, steel/aluminium wire armour and PVC or HDPE jacket is the
standard system of materials for MV cables.

No metal sheath, no armour and jacket made of PVC or HDPE is the standard system of materials
for LV cables.

Cable Formation
MV single core cables shall be laid in triplex formation as standard.

MV single core cables may be factory assembled in a triplex formation for ease of installation in
the field. Factory assembled cables commonly employ a length of lay within a range of 25 and 60
times the cable diameter of the largest cable in the bundle.
MV three core cables and LV cables shall be laid in single formation as standard.

Sheath Bonding of MV Cables

Earthing method Sheath voltage limiters Typical application

required
Both-end bonding No Substation short connections, for MV and
LV cables for longer feeders
Single-end bonding Yes Only for circuit lengths up to 1 km.
To protect the sheath insulation against transient voltages arising from lightning or switching
transients it is therefore necessary to fit sheath voltage limiters (SVLs) at all joint and sealing end
positions where the sheath is insulated from earth.

2.14 Cable System Installation Design & Methods

Cable Route
Cable routes shall be as short as practicable, bearing in mind the requirement to maintain long
straight lengths with as few bends as possible. Sharper corners in cables installation shall be
prevented and the minimum bending radii recommended by cables manufacturers shall be
observed.

Conflicts with obstructions such as building foundations, electrical circuits, telephone circuits, and
water and sewerage mains shall be avoided wherever possible.

Detailed survey of the streets or other areas in which it is proposed to make an underground
installation shall be performed to obtain accurate data on the location of existing services e.g. gutter
drains, manholes for sewers and other utilities, fire hydrants, shut off values for water and gas lines,
utility poles, trees and any other obstructions which may be visible on the surface. This data shall
be supplemented by other information as available from municipal and public utility records on
construction and routing, depth, size and description of all underground installations.

Detailed route design shall be prepared for each proposed cable route showing trench cross-section
and location of utility lines if known. This design shall be submitted for approval prior to the
commencement of any works.
It is then often necessary to dig trial holes to establish the trench route in detail. The trial holes will
indicate the position of other services so that smooth bends can be provided to reduce the pulling
loads when long lengths of cable are being installed.

The trial holes also provide information on the nature of the ground for excavating and timbering
purposes and on whether there is any chemical activity which would necessitate a special
anticorrosion finish for the cable. Any unusual soil characteristic which might affect the thermal
resistivity, and hence cable rating, would also be noted. Reference is made later to special
precautions necessary if possible ground subsidence is suspected.

Cable Installation Methods

In general cables are laid directly in trenches (Direct Buried), except at railway, road crossings,
under drains and outgoing feeders from substation where the cables are installed in ducts (Buried
Conduits or).

Direct Buried Method

This type of construction is generally employed in residential or light industrial areas.

Cables are usually laid in trefoil formation. At regular intervals adequate non-corrodible clad or
rope is wrapped around the cables to keep the trefoil formation during the backfilling of the trench.
Another type of installation generally used within or on entry to substations is with the cable buried
in concrete trough (unfilled or filled). In such installations the cables are generally placed with a
relatively small separation between the phases in concrete troughs which have reinforced and
sometimes interlocked lids for mechanical protection.
Direct Buried Conduits
In a direct buried conduits or duct manhole system, instead of installing the cables directly in a
trench, conduits (ducts) are installed in the trench, through which the cables can be pulled and
installed at a later date, as required. Sufficient spare ducts are installed for future use. Conduits
made of many different materials, in different diameters and wall thicknesses are available for use
for different applications. Plastic ducts made of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with 100 mm or 125 mm
diameter are most commonly employed. The ducts can be either directly buried in ground or
encased in concrete. The ducts begin and terminate in underground chambers, known as manholes.
The exact installation location and distance between the manholes is selected to allow convenient
pulling and splicing of the cables.

Duct standard sizes - external diameter are

• 100 mm
• 125mm
• 190 mm
• 250 mm
• 300 mm

Road and Railway Conflicts

Where road or railway crossings are required, the cable(s) shall be installed in a continuous duct(s)
of an approved standard, and of appropriate dimensions, under the road or railway. The crossing
route shall be as short as practicable with ducts laid at approximately 90° to the road/rail route.

The ducts may be installed by either direct trench excavation or horizontal thrust boring under the
route. Where direct trenching is used, ducts shall be installed in a concrete duct bank of approved
dimensions. Where horizontal thrust boring is employed the bore hole shall be lined with a tight
fitting continuous steel pipe sleeve(s) into which the required PVC/PE duct(s) is inserted.

The duct internal diameter shall be at least 1.5 times the maximum cable outer diameter, where one
cable is installed per duct. Where more than one cable is installed per duct (e.g. 3 X single core
cables) the duct internal diameter shall be at least 2 times the maximum diameter of a circle
circumscribing the cables.

Ducts under roads or railways shall be installed at a minimum depth of 1m and shall extend beyond
the extremities of the road carriageway or railway bed by a minimum distance of 1m. Where it is
necessary for a cable route to parallel a railway line, the cable trench shall be excavated at such a
distance from the railway edge as to avoid any possible structural or mechanical damage to the
railway. However, under no circumstances shall the near edge of the cable trench be within 1m of
the railway bed. The railway authorities shall be contacted with the approved designs for clearance
before the start of any construction activities on the cable to be laid.

At least one spare duct shall be installed at each ducting location. All conditions and restrictions
stipulated by the responsible authorities shall be complied with.
Service and Utility Conflict’s
Where conflict with other services is unavoidable, paralleling with existing installations shall be
avoided wherever possible. It must further be ensured that the minimum clearances tabulated below
are attained in all situations and that any cable ratings are not decreased by paralleling.

EXISTING CABLE/SERVICE
NEW
33KV 15KV LV TELEPHONE WATER or
CABLE
SEWERAGE

33KV 600mm 400mm 400mm 600mm 600mm

15KV 400mm 260mm 260mm 300mm 230mm

LV 400mm 260mm 150mm 200mm 230mm

Where, due to congestion of underground services, it is difficult to attain the required clearances,
the minimum clearances may be reduced subject to the following conditions;

Employer and all utilities (stakeholders) concerned are contacted and their written approval
received.

The critical length is minimized.

The cable to be installed is adequately protected by a duct of approved type over the critical length.

Multiple (Twin) Cable Circuits

Any 33/15kV cable twin (double) circuits shall be installed not less than 450mm apart. Both circuits
shall be installed in one trench and bedded in a uniform sand bed across the trench width. The
derating effect of proximity shall be allowed for in evaluating the circuit rating.

Cable Installation Depth

Trenches shall be excavated to such dimensions as may be required to achieve the standard cable
installation depth wherever possible. The standard installation depths can be reduced to the
minimum figures indicated below where it is not possible to achieve the standard installation
depths. This must be subject to the approval of the Employer.
 INSTALLATION DEPTH INSTALLATION
DEPTH
VOLTAGE
LEVEL
STANDARD MINIMUM
33KV 1000mm 700mm
15KV 800mm 700mm

Installation of cables at depths greater than standard shall only be permitted at road and railway
crossings or at conflict locations, subject to the general approval of the Employer. Necessary steps
shall be taken to ensure that under such situations the current rating of the cable is not seriously
affected by variation in installation depth.

Cable Accessories
It is essential to select the design of accessory to be compatible with the particular cable type and
the particular service application. Compatibility should be validated.

Accessory Types
Joints: A joint is the insulated and fully protected connection between two or sometimes more
cables. It is also termed “splice”. The following types exist for distribution cables:

• Straight joint,
• Transition joint
• T branch joint.
Terminations: A termination is the connection between a cable and other electrical equipment.
It is also termed pothead. The following types exist for distribution cables:

• transformer termination,
• Outdoor termination,
• Indoor termination

Cable Installation
Preliminary Power Cable Installation Requirements
Before any civil works are undertaken, due notice in writing shall be given to all utilities whose
services may be in conflict with the proposed cable route, e.g. telephone, water, sewage, road and
railway, etc. It may be advisable to contact the Engineering Coordinating Committee located at the
offices of the Urban Roads for assistance. Where cables are to be installed in roads, footpaths or
streets, it is advisable to liaise closely with the roads authority and police to ensure that all necessary
measures are taken to minimize the hazards and disruptive effects of installation works.

Transportation and Handling of Cable

Cable drums, reels, lagging battens, and end caps shall be thoroughly checked for any damage
before transporting cable to the work site. If a reel is found damaged or cable ends not properly
sealed, the cable condition shall be checked. If water has penetrated into the conductors, the cable
shall be rejected.

Drums shall be handled carefully during loading and unloading. Adequate lifting and handling
facilities shall be provided to avoid damage to the cable drum or cable during lifting operations.
Good lifting practices shall be employed during all drum handling activities.

Drums shall not be dropped on the ground. Drums shall be unloaded as near as possible to the
location where they will be supported during cable pulling. Drum rolling distances shall be kept
to a minimum. Drums shall only be rolled in the direction of the arrows inscribed on the drum
flange.

During cable pulling the drum shall be so arranged as to reel the cable from top of the drum
wherever possible.

Excavation of Trenches
Trenches shall be kept as straight as possible and shall be excavated to approved formations and
dimensions. Trenches shall have vertical sides and shall be timbered and sheered where necessary
to prevent subsidence when they are excavated below 1.2m.

At bends in the cable route, the trench shall be dug with a radius not less than the minimum bending
radius for the cable. However, it is recommended that the trench be dug with a lower radius if the
cable is to be laid by pulling over rollers in the trench.
Asphalt, concrete or other surfacing materials shall be cut by motor driven saws. Manual digging
shall be used where existing underground facilities are encountered. Existing facilities uncovered
during excavation shall be protected, shored, braced, and supported, as necessary. All protective
coverings, warning tapes, position markers, etc., pertaining to existing underground facilities shall
be preserved during excavation and restored during backfilling.

At intersections with other utility lines, the trench may be sloped on both sides of the crossing point
to maintain required clearance. However, minimum burial depths for the cable must be maintained.
The slope of the trench shall not exceed 1:10 to avoid sharp bends in the cable.

All excavations exceeding 1.2 meter depths shall be properly sheered and braced. Excavations
shall not be extended below the elevation of adjacent existing foundations unless the foundations
are properly underpinned and shored. The trench bottom shall be smooth and free from stones and
rubble. The trench shall be dewatered before laying the cable.

Cable jointing pits shall be excavated to such dimensions as may be required to provide adequate
room for cable jointing to be completed without excessively stressing the cable, its components or
inhibiting ease of operation by jointers.

Spoil Handling
Excavated surface materials (including base foundations for roadways) should be stacked
separately from sub soils so that correct compaction and reinstatement can be obtained when
backfilling. All excavated materials shall be cleared from the edge of the trench so that rolling back
into the trench does not occur and to avoid the possibility of trench collapse. In general, excavated
materials may not be stacked within a distance equivalent to the trench depth of the trench edge.
Where excavated materials are deemed to represent a hazard, to the public or the operatives, it shall
be removed to an appropriate storage location for future use.

Trench Preparation
Before any cables are laid, the bottom of the trench shall be lined with unwashed river sand, of
favorable grain distribution, and well compacted to a minimum depth of 100mm. Ducts shall be
cleaned and fitted with a bell mouth at entry points and at exit points. Where the end of a duct is
level with the trench bed, a depression shall be made immediately before the duct entry to prevent
stones or coarse soil from entering the duct during cable pulling.
Adequate number of cable rollers and skids shall be provided to ensure that the cable is adequately
supported, does not touch the trench surface and does not exceed its minimum bending radius
during pulling. Cable rollers shall not be installed more than 2 meters apart under any
circumstances. All cable rollers shall be smooth surfaced and free rolling. All cable skids shall be
smooth surfaced. Defective cable rollers or skids shall not be used.

Cable Installation
Cable shall be installed in maximum possible lengths and straight through jointing between shorter
lengths will not be permitted without the prior written authority of the Design Engineer.

Cables shall be installed in a single, continuous, smooth, non-jerky movement by an approved

pulling technique such as bond pulling, cable stocking pulling or other acceptable techniques.

Care must be taken to ensure that the cable is not abraded by the trench surface, duct end, cable
rollers or cable skids during installation.

Under no circumstances shall the cable be subjected to a pulling tension in excess of the
manufacturer's maximum permitted cable pulling tension. Cable lubricants may be employed
where pulling is difficult at bends or ducts. Cable lubricants shall be applied in accordance with
cable manufacturer recommendation.

In general, a suitable lubricant should be used when pulling cable into ducts. Underground power
cables have an extruded serving of PVC or polyethylene to which a graphite coating is normally
applied in the factory. A cream of powdered graphite and water, if liberally applied is an ideal
lubricant for these cables. In addition, powdered graphite can be blown through the duct or drawn
through in a bag. Alternatively soap powder has been successfully used as a lubricant.

The cable shall be removed from the cable rollers and placed on the trench bed in such a way as to
form a slightly wavy line in order that its length is approximately 1% greater than the true route
length. This length is necessary to avoid longitudinal stress due to soil settlement and thermal
cycling.
Following completion of each cable pull, the section of cable damaged by the cable pulling
mechanisms shall be cut from the cable and scrapped. The damaged section shall be deemed to
extend beyond the actual pulling mechanism bearing area and shall be at least 1.5m long.

Where cable joints or splices are to be made, the ends of the cables shall be overlapped by 1.5m to
2m to provide adequate slack for jointing.

Where equipment terminations are to be made a 1.5 to 2 meter loop of spare cable shall be provided
for terminating purposes.

Wherever a cable is cut, the ends shall be sealed from moisture entry with an approved cable end
cap unless a joint or termination is to be undertaken immediately.

Cable ends shall remain properly sealed until splices or terminations are to be made.

Inspection and As-built Record

Following completion of each cable pull, the cable shall be inspected over its entire length, for
evidence of mechanical damage, before removal from the cable rollers. Damage to the cable sheath
shall be repaired immediately with an approved repair sleeve.

The required minimum clearances from other underground facilities shall be maintained at all
conflict situations.

The cable route shall be inspected by a representative of Employer and the route length of the cable
shall be measured and recorded (to be nearest 0.5m) for payment and recording purposes. Details
regarding the number and type of joints and repairs, their location and the name of the jointer shall
be recorded and marked on a copy of the construction drawings. These drawings shall be certified
by a representative of Employer.

Sand Cover and Protection

Following completion of data recording and inspection any loose stones or sharp objects that may
have fallen into the trench during installation and inspection shall be removed.

The cables shall be covered by a layer of unwashed river sand, of favourable grain distribution,
compacted manually to a depth of 100mm. The sand shall be applied by hand tools, spreading the
sand along the length of the cable route to avoid dislodging the cable(s).
Cable tile covers for LV and HV Cables shall be installed. The tile shall be made in such a way to
give a clear visual warning to contractors and utilities of the presence of underground cables or
ducts during excavation.

The tile shall be manufactured from reconstituted low or medium density polythene or a similar
material which shall be rot-proof and resistant to a wide variety of virgin and tipped soil conditions.
The ends of the tile shall be cleanly cut, square with its longitudinal axis and shall have not sharp
edges. The tiles shall be laminated with suitable marker tape identification complying with
Employer specifications.

Backfilling
After all cables and protective covers have been laid, the trench shall be refilled in 150mm layers
of well-compacted material.

Backfilling shall generally be in the reverse order from excavation, i.e. subsoils first followed by
top soils. However, where the backfill material is not of suitable composition, e.g. gravel, wet clay,
etc., a suitable volume of appropriate material shall be imported as necessary to provide adequate
backfill.

Warning Tape
Cable warning tape of an approved type shall be laid above the cable in the backfill material.
Reinstatement
Roads and pathways shall be reinstated or be provided with temporary reinstatement in compliance
with the stipulation of the relevant authority. In any event during temporary or permanent
reinstatement of roads, it shall be ensured that:

Water from any source shall be drained from the excavated site.

While reinstating, longitudinal and transversal slopes of the street shall be taken into consideration.

Road markings which are obliterated as a result of the removal of the surface shall be restored in
the same manner as they were marked before excavation.
The newly reinstated portion should match very well with the old surface. The level of the new
surface after compaction should not deviate from that of the old surface by more than 10mm or as
required by the concerned authority.

Material and layer compaction testing shall be carried out in accordance with the specification of
the concerned authority.

Reinstatement of grass areas shall be completed to provide a profile matching the existing surface
following consolidation. The surface shall be of soil quality similar to that of the surrounding area.
Uprooted shrubs, trees etc. shall be replanted.

Splices and Terminations

Cable joints shall be of such construction as to maintain the electrical structure of the cable. Cable
core screens shall be isolated from steel wire armour which shall, in turn, be adequately sheathed
and protected from the surrounding soil.

Only joints, splices and terminations of an approved nature may be used.

Splices and terminations shall be made in accordance with the instructions provided by the
manufacturer. These instructions shall be included with each splice and termination kit.

Terminations shall be so constructed as to provide a complete moisture seal, including the crotch
area of multi-core cables and complete re-jacketing of the individual cores.

LV. Cable terminations shall be so constructed as to provide adequate loops of cable to ensure the
necessary flexibility at joint and to prevent moisture ingress to the cable cores. Each joint shall be
moisture sealed by tape or other approved method.

Care shall be taken in every step from start to finish keeping the cable splice or termination free
from moisture, dirt, particles of metal and air pockets. To accomplish this, hands, tools, containers
and supplies shall be kept clean, dry and free from foreign matter at all times. After the cable
insulation has been exposed by removal of any section of the outer covering, operations shall be
continued without interruption until the cable termination or splice is completed.
Care must be taken that no sharp bends or twists are made in the cable or cores, even temporarily,
while installing a splice or termination. Bending of cable at a short radius may permanently damage
the insulation, shielding or jacket.

Bonding and Earthing

Cable core screens and steel wire armour shall be bonded together and solidly earthed at each cable
termination position. Bonding and earthing techniques shall comply with those recommended by
the respective termination manufacturers and shall be in compliance with the Employer’s current
practice.

Cable end Pole Construction

Where cables are terminated on line structures, the cable shall be protected for a distance of at least
2.5m above ground level, by a rigid pipe, firmly fixed to one of the structure support members.
The pipe shall be continued below ground level for a distance of at least 300mm.

The cable termination shall be rigidly held.

The section of cable between the protective pipe and the termination shall be so fixed as to restrict
free movement. The minimum bending radius of the cable shall in no case be exceeded.

Cable terminations shall be mounted at a minimum height of 4m above ground level.

and 15kV/33kV lines, cable terminations shall be protected by surge arresters, mounted between
them and the overhead line.

The cable(s) shall not be allowed to bend sharply or kink where it emerges from the protective pipe.

The cable protective pipe shall be of such material as to be non-injurious to the cable and shall
provide a preformed bend in the ground and a bell mouth at the pole where the cable(s) emerges.

Terminating to Equipment
Only terminations of an approved nature may be used. Terminations shall be made to substations
equipment in accordance with the instructions provided by the manufacturer. These instructions
shall be included in each termination kit.

Cable Testing
Required tests to prove the electrical integrity of the installed cables shall be carried out.
All cables to be tested shall be dressed and terminated and prepared for final connection to overhead
network or other plant as appropriate.

It shall be ensured that access to the cable ends or test area is not inhibited by the provision of
barricades, bollards, warning tapes, signs etc.

The following minimum tests shall be implemented where applicable: -

• Conductor Continuity Test

• Sheath Continuity Test (where required)

• Armour Continuity Test

• Phase Identification

• Phase to Phase Insulation Resistance

• Phase to Earth Insulation Resistance

• Over sheath Insulation Resistance (Armour to Earth)

The above tests shall be conducted using an approved insulation resistance measuring device.

All new cables shall be subject to high voltage AC test after installation. This technical information
applies to XLPE insulated cables with voltage ratings from 1.9/3.3 kV to 19/33 kV.

After installation AC test levels shall be in accordance with the cable manufacturer’s
recommendations. The DC testing of the primary insulation is not recommended due to resulting
high electrical stresses.

Test recommendation in general

• For new cables, the suggested maximum VLF test voltage is between 2.7 and 3.0 times the
cable operating voltage (Uo - Phase Voltage), for a minimum of 15 minutes. Where possible, a 30
minute testing time is now recommended as international research has shown this to give a higher
confidence.
• For existing or aged cables being re-commissioned after repair or alterations, the VLF Test
Voltage should be a maximum of 2.3 times the cable operating voltage (Uo), for 15 minutes.
Note: The VLF test set must be of adequate power to test the measured cable capacitance at the
frequency chosen.

All tests shall be recorded and certified. Test results shall be tabulated in an approved format and
submitted with the commissioning documents on the handover completion.

Cable Inspection and Commissioning

Inspections shall be carried out on an ongoing basis throughout the construction phase of the
cabling works. The inspection checks supplement the commissioning checks and the following
check list shall be used to measure and evaluate the works undertaken by the Contractor throughout
the Construction and Commissioning phases of the Contract.

Employer shall identify to the Contractor at the commencement of the Construction works all
“Hold” activities where specification issues or specific requirements need addressing to ensure
compliance and acceptability prior to activity or work starting or an inspection is required prior to
the item or process being completed.

Witness testing of specific items of completed work or sections of work shall also be identified by
Employer.

Removal and Dismantling of Existing Facilities

• When necessary and instructed by the Employer, the Contractor shall remove existing
facilities as follows:

• Before Dismantling safety caution should be done by proper procedure of line discontinued
from substation and grounded on both sides.

• The poles may be very poor and old, therefore cranes are recommended for line men for
removing the pole top items and conductor.

• If required temporary power supply options should be provided for the community partially
disconnected or affected due to LV disconnection during transformer dismantling.

1. Poles: Poles shall be removed from the foundation and all hardware dismounted and packed
separately. Contractor shall prepare a list of all material and send it to the warehouse of EEU. After
dismantling Pole pits should be backfilled to avoid accidents.
2. Transformers: Distribution transformers shall be dismounted and lay to ground. All
equipment like surge arresters, cut-outs, insulators shall be carefully dismounted. Contractor shall
prepare a list of all material and send it to the warehouse of EEU

3. Conductors: Conductors shall be removed and brought to ground and measured. Then it
shall be coiled with indication of length removed. Contractor shall prepare a list of all material and
send it to the warehouse of EEU.

4. Pole line equipment’s – Shall be dismantled with care to avoid damage due to aging.
Section X - Contract Forms 377

3 Route Drawings

4 Environmental and Social (ES) requirements

[Minimum Standards to be considered in Contract Bid Documents]
The Contractor is required to establish or to have Environment and Social ,health and safety
experts with experience and maintain same throughout the project implementation period.

The Contractor must provide and maintain, a practicable working environment for its
employees and members of the public. The Contractor must itself, and must ensure that any
subcontractors of the Contractor, at all times identify and take all necessary
precautions/measures/ for the health and safety of all project staff and the community as well
who may be affected by the execution of the project activities.

The Contractor shall, throughout the design, execution, and completion of the Works and
Services, take all reasonable precautions to preserve the condition of the environment, consider
public and occupational safety and addressing any non-compliance to resolving of any defects
therein.

The contractor shall periodically report the project environment, social ,health and safety
performance report to the client. The above ES requirements are general ,the detailed in
presented in number 10 below under the title of ESHS requiremnts.
Section X - Contract Forms 378

1. Engagement of Staff and Labor

✓ Except as otherwise stated in the Specification, the Contractor shall make
arrangements for the engagement of all staff and labor, local or otherwise, and
for their payment, housing, feeding and transport.
✓ The Contractor shall provide and employ on the Site in the installation of the
facilities such skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labor as is necessary for the
proper and timely execution of the Contract. The Contractor is encouraged to
use local labor that has the necessary skills.
✓ The Contractor shall comply with all the relevant labor Laws applicable to the
Contractor’s Personnel, including Laws relating to their employment, health,
safety, welfare, immigration and emigration, and shall allow them all their legal
rights.
✓ The Contractor shall at all times during the progress of the Contract use its best
endeavors to prevent any unlawful, riotous or disorderly conduct or behavior by
or amongst its employees and the labor of its Subcontractors.
✓ The Contractor shall, in all dealings with its labor and the labor of its
Subcontractors currently employed on or connected with the Contract, pay due
regard to all recognized festivals, official holidays, religious or other customs and
all local laws and regulations pertaining to the employment of labor.
2. Facilities for Staff and Labor
▪ Except as otherwise stated in the Specification, the Contractor shall provide and
maintain all necessary accommodation and welfare facilities such as hygiene and sanitation
facility (toilet ,water for washing and drinking) for the contracot’s personnel. for the
Contractor’s Personnel. The Contractor shall also provide locker to keep PPE and dressing ,
first aid kit and standby vehicle for the personnel. These include lodging, medical assistance,
alimentation and sanitary installations for the employees living in the contractor’s base camps
to comply with the Social, Sanitary and Health Conditions of Labor requirements. Specific
quantities of facilities such as drinking water supplies, toilet facilities, waste disposal bins, etc.
should be estimated as much as possible.
▪ The Contractor shall not permit any of the Contractor’s Personnel to maintain any
temporary or permanent living quarters within the structures forming part of the Permanent
Works.
Section X - Contract Forms 379

3. Supply of Foodstuffs and Water

▪ The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of a sufficient supply of suitable food as
may be stated in the Specification at reasonable prices for the Contractor’s Personnel for the
purposes of or in connection with the Contract.
▪ The Contractor shall, having regard to local conditions, provide on the Site an adequate
supply of drinking and other water for the use of the Contractor’s Personnel.
4. Measures against Insect and Pest Nuisance
▪ The Contractor shall at all times take the necessary precautions to protect the
Contractor’s Personnel employed on the Site from insect and pest nuisance, and to reduce their
danger to health. The Contractor shall comply with all the regulations of the local health
authorities, including use of appropriate insecticide.
5. Alcoholic Liquor or Drugs
▪ The Contractor shall not, otherwise than in accordance with the Laws of the Country,
import, sell, give barter or otherwise dispose of any alcoholic liquor or drugs, or permit or
allow importation, sale, gift barter or disposal by Contractor's Personnel.
▪ The Contractor shall pay particular attention to combat Gender Based Violence-GBV
(with zero tolerance), Violence Against Children (VAC), alcoholism, and drug abuse. The
Contractor shall develop workers’ Codes of Conduct to mitigate such social risks at project
execution sites. The purpose of these Codes of Conduct and Action Plan for Implementing
ESHS and OHS Standards, and Preventing Gender Based Violence (GBV) and Violence
Against Children (VAC) is to clearly define obligations on all project staff (including sub-
contractors and day workers) with regard to implementing the project’s environmental, social,
health and safety (ESHS) and occupational health and safety (OHS) requirements, and; help
prevent, report and address GBV and VAC within the work site and in its immediate
surrounding communities.
These Codes of Conduct are to be adopted by those working on the project and are meant to:

⮚ Create awareness of the ESHS and OHS expectations on the project;

⮚ Create common awareness about GBV and VAC and:
(a) Ensure a shared understanding that they have no place in the project; and,
(b) Create a clear system for identifying, responding to, and sanctioning GBV and VAC
incidents.
6. Prohibition of all Forms of Forced or Compulsory Labor
Section X - Contract Forms 380

✓ The Contractor shall not employ “forced or compulsory labor” in any form.
“Forced or compulsory labor” consists of all work or service, not voluntarily
performed, that is extracted from an individual under threat of force or penalty.
7. Prohibition of Harmful Child Labor
✓ The Contractor shall not employ any child to perform any work that is
economically exploitative, or is likely to be hazardous to, or to interfere with, the
child's education, or to be harmful to the child's health or physical, mental,
spiritual, moral, or social development.
8. Health and Safety
✓ The Contractor shall at all times take all reasonable precautions to maintain the health
and safety of the Contractor’s Personnel. In collaboration with local health authorities,
the Contractor shall ensure that medical staff, first aid facilities, sick bay and ambulance
service are available at all times at the Site and at any accommodation for Contractor’s
and Employer’s Personnel, and that suitable arrangements are made for all necessary
welfare and hygiene requirements and for the prevention of epidemics.
✓ The Contractor shall contract or make an agreement with the nearby hospital for cases
requiring further treatment.
✓ The Contractor shall provide such first aid facilities and ensure that his staffs abide by
such first aid procedures as shall be required by the Public Body
✓ The Contractor shall appoint an accident prevention officer at the Site, responsible for
maintaining safety and protection against accidents. This person shall be qualified for
this responsibility, and shall have the authority to issue instructions and take protective
measures to prevent accidents. Throughout the performance of the Contract, the
Contractor shall provide whatever is required by this person to exercise this
responsibility and authority.
✓ The Contractor shall ensure the safety on sites during the whole period of execution
and shall be responsible for taking the necessary steps, in the interests of his employees,
agents of the Public Body and third parties, to prevent any loss or accident which may
result from carrying out the works.
✓ The Contractor shall take all essential steps, on his own responsibility and at his
expense, to ensure that existing structures and installations are protected, preserved,
and maintained. He shall be responsible for providing and maintaining at his expense
Section X - Contract Forms 381

all lighting, protection, fencing, and security equipment which proves necessary for the
proper implementation of the tasks or which may reasonably be required by the
Engineer.
✓ If, during the implementation of the tasks, urgent measures are necessary to obviate
any risk of accident or damage or to ensure security following any accident or damage,
the Engineer shall give formal notice to the Contractor to do what is necessary. If the
Contractor is unwilling or unable to undertake the necessary measures, the Engineer
may carry out the work at the expense of the Contractor to the extent that the Contractor
is liable.
✓ While carrying out the Works, the Contractor shall comply, and shall ensure that its
employees comply with, the requirements of relevant Health and Safety and other
relevant legislation,
✓ The Contractor shall ensure the co-operation of its personnel in all prevention measures
designed against fire, or any other hazards, and shall notify the Public Body of any
change in the Contractor's working practices or other occurrences likely to increase
such risks or to cause new hazards.
✓ The Contractor shall conduct regular awareness for the public and passerby on safety
precautions and management
✓ Information, Education, Consultation and Communication
✓ The Contractor shall throughout the contract, conduct information sharing and
continuous stakeholder/public consultations in and around work sites, concerning the
risks and impacts, and appropriate mitigation measures and safety precautions with
respect to the contract works and services.
✓ The Contractor shall throughout the contract (including the Defects Notification
Period): (i) conduct Information, Education and Consultation Communication (IEC)
campaigns, at least every other month, addressed to all the Site staff and labor
(including all the Contractor's employees, all Sub-Contractors and Employer’s and
Project Manager’s' employees, and all truck drivers and crew making deliveries to Site
for construction activities) and to the immediate local communities, concerning the
risks, dangers and impact, and appropriate avoidance behavior with respect to of
Sexually Transmitted Diseases (STD)—or Sexually Transmitted Infections (STI) in
general and HIV/AIDS in particular; (ii) provide male or female condoms for all Site
Section X - Contract Forms 382

staff and labor as appropriate; and (iii) provide for STI and HIV/AIDS screening,
diagnosis, counseling and referral to a dedicated national STI and HIV/AIDS program,
(unless otherwise agreed) of all Site staff and labor.
✓ The Contractor shall include in the program to be submitted for the execution of the
required facilities, an alleviation program for Site staff and labor and their families in
respect of Sexually Transmitted Infections (STI) and Sexually Transmitted Diseases
(STD) including HIV/AIDS. The STI, STD and HIV/AIDS alleviation program shall
indicate when, how and at what cost the Contractor plans to satisfy the requirements of
this Sub-Clause and the related specification. For each component, the program shall
detail the resources to be provided or utilized and any related sub-contracting proposed.
The program shall also include provision of a detailed cost estimate with supporting
documentation. Payment to the Contractor for preparation and implementation this
program shall not exceed the Provisional Sum dedicated for this purpose.
9. ESHS Requirements
The following Environment, Social, Health and Safety requirements shall be considered by the
Contractor and his subcontractor, if available:

Prohibitions
The following activities are prohibited on or near the project site:
✓ Cutting of trees for any reason outside the approved construction area.
✓ Hunting, fishing, wildlife capture, or plant collection.
✓ Use of unapproved toxic materials, including lead-based paints, asbestos, etc.
✓ Disturbance to anything with architectural or historical value.
✓ Building of fires;
✓ Use of firearms (except authorized security guards).
✓ Use of alcohol by workers.
✓ No unauthorized or indiscriminate felling of trees shall be permitted;
✓ No open or uncontrolled fires shall be permitted;
✓ No pollutants shall be allowed to enter any watercourse.
✓ The Contractor shall not cause areas of stagnant water to form, on the surface or
in open containers;
✓ The contractor shall collect, segregate and dispose or cause to be collected,
recycled or disposed of hazardous waste by authorized body;
Section X - Contract Forms 383

✓ Dispose in authorized areas all of garbage, metals, used oils, and excess material
generated during construction, incorporating recycling systems and the
separation of materials.
✓ No trench shall be left open for more than 7 days, unless duly authorized by the
supervisor upon Contractor’s request. Trenches and other excavation works shall
be established, demarcated/fenced and/or signposted sufficient to prevent
accident or injury to workers or the public, including during hours of darkness.

Pollution, Noise & Dust Control

✓ The Contractor shall avoid dust, noise and any other nuisance to the workers, staffs,
community residing nearby and any passerby and conduct regular monitoring as stated
in the Site management plan and ESMP to comply the national and international
standards, including World Bank policies and standards
✓ All spoil or waste materials remaining after the works must be neatly disposed of in
approved dump sites; any dump sites shall be reinstate accordingly, during closure of
the site;
✓ In sensitive areas (including residential neighborhoods, hospitals, etc.) more strict
measures may need to be implemented to prevent undesirable noise levels.
✓ Spray water as needed on dirt roads, cut areas and soil stockpiles or fill material.
✓ Apply proper measures to minimize disruptions from vibration or noise coming from
construction activities.
✓ The Contractor shall ensure that the Works, including the action of individual workers,
do not result in any littering and haphazardly disposal of wastes. Where such littering
and unmanaged waste disposal does occur the Contractor shall be responsible for the
collection, segregation, transportation, temporary storage and proper final disposal of
the litter;
✓ Excavations, finished works are to be protected from adverse weather and any work
damaged by adverse weather is to be repaired by the Contractor.
✓ The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to protect the environment (both on and
off the Site) and to limit damage and nuisance to people and property resulting from
pollution, noise and other results of his operations.
Section X - Contract Forms 384

✓ The Contractor shall prepare and implement Site Management plan (Contractor
Environmental and Social Management Plan) comprises of all sub plans to address each
environmental, social and safety matter; These include: safety management plan, Waste
management plan (both hazardous and non-hazardous), emergency preparedness plan,
Quarry restoration plan, spoil disposal management plan, Physical cultural resource
plan with chance find procedures; Camp site management plan, spontaneous settlement
management plan, labor influx management plan, dust management plan, etc.;
✓ The Contractor shall assign qualified environmental, social and safety management
experts for regular implementation, follow up and reporting of Environmental, Social,
Health and Safety activities as identified in the management plan.
✓ Specific Protection Measures: Quarries and Borrow Areas and deposit sites
✓ The Contractor shall obtain appropriate licenses/permits from relevant authorities to
operate quarries or borrow areas prior to their first use. The location of quarries and
borrow areas shall be subject to review and approval by relevant local and national
authorities.
✓ New sites:
✓ Shall be located 1km or more from settlement areas, archaeological areas, and cultural
sites -including churches and cemeteries, wetlands or any other valued ecosystem
component, or on high or steep ground.
✓ Shall not be located in water bodies, or adjacent to them, as well as to springs, wells,
well fields
✓ Shall not be located in or near forest reserves, natural habitats or national parks.
✓ Shall be designed and operated in the perspective of an easy and effective rehabilitation.
Areas with minimal vegetation cover such as flat and bare ground, or areas covered
with grass only or covered with shrubs less than 1.5m in height, are preferred.
✓ Shall have clearly demarcated and marked boundaries to minimize vegetation clearing
and safety hazards for third parties.
✓ Shall be operated in accordance with the General Environmental Protection
Requirements, the Construction ESMP for the project and in accordance with any
consent / permit conditions.
Section X - Contract Forms 385

✓ Maintenance:
✓ Identify and demarcate equipment maintenance areas (>15m from rivers, streams, lakes
or wetlands).
✓ Ensure that all equipment maintenance activities, including oil changes, are conducted
within demarcated maintenance areas; never dispose spent oils on the ground, in water
courses, drainage canals or in sewer systems.
✓ Identify, demarcate and enforce the use of within site access routes to limit impact to
site vegetation.
✓ Install and maintain an adequate drainage system to prevent erosion on the site during
and after construction.
Specific Protection Measures: Electrical Installation ,Commissioning, Maintenance and
Operation
• All site activities should be implemented as per procedures and proper safety measures
as indicated in :
• EEU Safety and Procedure Manual for Distribution System (O&M)
• EEU Safety and Procedure Manual for Transmission System
• Furthermore implementing recommended international practices for safety of electrical
operation and maintenance works.

Community Relations
✓ To enhance adequate community relations the Contractor should:
✓ Following the WB & country ES safeguard requirements, inform the population about
construction and work schedules, interruption of services, traffic detour routes as
appropriate.
✓ Limit construction activities at night. When necessary, ensure that night work is
carefully scheduled and the community is properly informed so they can take necessary
measures.
✓ At least five days in advance of any service interruption (including water, electricity,
telephone, and transportation routes) the community must be advised through postings
at the project site, at bus stops, and in affected homes/businesses.

10. Records of Contractor’s Personnel

Section X - Contract Forms 386

✓ The Contractor shall keep accurate records of the Contractor’s personnel, including the
number of each class of Contractor’s Personnel on the Site and the names, ages,
genders, hours worked and wages paid to all workers. These records shall be
summarized on a monthly basis in a form approved by the Project Manager and shall
be available for inspection by the Project Manager until the Contractor has completed
all work.

11. Reporting and communication

✓ The contractor and the sub-contractor shall take full responsibility of the public
and workers safety and shall take all reasonable steps to protect the environment
(both on and off the Site) and to limit damage and nuisance to people and property
resulting from pollution, noise and other results of his operations. The Contractor
shall prepare Method statements during construction, including Environmental
management
✓ The Contractor is required to establish Environment and Social Risk
Management unit staffed with qualified environmental, social and safety
management experts and maintain same throughout the project implementation
period. At least one qualified HSE coordinator shall be on-site at all times during
the drilling campaign, including the initial and final mobilization activities; to
liaise with the Engineer on all Health and Safety matters. The Contractor shall
also prepare a safety management plan, consists of an early notification and
reporting procedures and make available to all staffs.
✓ The Contractor’s staff shall follow a system of accident notification and
recording in accordance with the Contractor’s own accident notification and
reporting procedures. All noticeable accidents shall immediately be brought to
the attention of the Engineer.
✓ The Contractor shall send to the Project Manager, details of any accident as soon
as practicable after its occurrence as per the specified reporting form and report
timing requirement. The Contractor shall maintain records and make reports
concerning health, safety and welfare of persons, and damage to property, as the
Engineer may reasonably require.
Section X - Contract Forms 387

✓ The Contractor shall prepare and implement Site Management plan (Contractor
Environmental and Social Management Plan) comprises of all sub plans to
address each environmental, social and safety matter; These include: safety
management plan, Waste management plan , Quarry restoration plan, spoil
disposal management plan, chance find procedures; Camp site management plan,
labor influx management plan, dust management plan, etc.

The following is a non-exhaustive list of Sub-Clauses of the Conditions of Contract that make
reference to ES matters stated in the Specification.

GCC Sub-Clause/Clause Remarks

9.10 Training of Contractor’s The Contractor shall provide sufficient training to his own
Personnel personnel to ensure that they are all aware of the relevant aspects
of these general conditions, any project ESMP, and his own HSE-
MP, and are able to fulfill their expected roles and functions.
Specific training will be provided to those Employees that have
particular responsibilities associated with the implementation of
the HSE-MP. Training activities will be documented for potential
review by the Client.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient training to his own
personnel on health and safety matters, Sexual Exploitation and
Abuse (SEA), and Sexual Harassment (SH).

20 Design and Engineering The contractor will design, construct, operate, and decommission
the structural elements of the project in accordance with national
legal requirements, the EHSGs and other Good International
Industry Practice (GIIP), taking into consideration safety risks to
third parties and affected communities.
The contractor assign competent professionals to design the
structural elements of a project and the structural design will take
in to account climate change considerations.
Where the project includes new buildings and structures that will
be accessed by members of the public, the Borrower will consider
the incremental risks of the public’s potential exposure to
operational accidents or natural hazards, including extreme
weather events. Where technically and financially feasible, the
Borrower will also apply the concept of universal access (The
concept of universal access means unimpeded access for people
of all ages and abilities in different situations and under various
Section X - Contract Forms 388

GCC Sub-Clause/Clause Remarks

circumstances, as set out in GIIP) to the design and construction
of such new buildings and structures.

When structural elements or components of a project are situated

in high-risk locations, including those with risk of extreme
weather or slow onset events, and their failure or malfunction
may threaten the safety of communities, the Borrower will
engage one or more independent experts with relevant and
recognized experience in similar projects, separate from those
responsible for the design and construction, to conduct a review
as early as possible in project development and throughout the
stages of project design, construction, operation, and
decommissioning.

22.2.4 Rates of wages and “The Contractor shall inform the Contractor’s Personnel about
conditions of labor their liability to pay personal income taxes in the Country in
respect of such of their salaries, wages, allowances and any
benefits as are subject to tax under the Laws of the Country for
the time being in force, and the Contractor shall perform such
duties in regard to such deductions thereof as may be imposed on
him by such Laws.

22.2.6 Facilities for Staff and Indicate if access to or provision of services that accommodate
Labor physical, social and cultural needs of Contractor’s Personnel is
required.

22.8 Security of the Site Thecontractorit will assess risks posed by these security
arrangements to those within and outside the project site. In
making such arrangements, the Borrower will be guided by the
principles of proportionality and GIIP, and by applicable law, in
relation to hiring, rules of conduct, training, equipping, and
monitoring of such security workers.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the Site,
and:

(a) for keeping unauthorized persons off the Site;

(b) authorized persons shall be limited to the
Contractor’s Personnel, the Employer’s Personnel, and to
any other personnel identified as authorized personnel
(including the Employer’s other contractors on the Site), by
a Notice from the Employer or the Engineer to the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s No-objection a
security management plan that sets out the security arrangements
for the Site.
The Contractor shall (i) conduct appropriate background checks
on any personnel retained to provide security; (ii) train the
security personnel adequately (or determine that they are
properly trained) in the use of force (and where applicable,
Section X - Contract Forms 389

GCC Sub-Clause/Clause Remarks

firearms), and appropriate conduct towards Contractor’s
Personnel, Employer’s Personnel and affected communities; and
(iii) require the security personnel to act within the applicable
Laws and any requirements set out in the Specification.

Review all allegations of unlawful or abusive acts of security

personnel, take action (or urge appropriate parties to take action)
to prevent recurrence and, where necessary, report unlawful and
abusive acts to the relevant authorities.

The Contractor shall not permit any use of force by security

personnel in providing security except when used for
preventive and defensive purposes in proportion to the
nature and extent of the threat.
In making security arrangements, the Contractor shall also
comply with any additional requirements stated in the
Specification.”

22.9 Protection of the Contractor’s operations and/ or activities.

Environment
The Contractor shall ensure that emissions, surface
discharges, effluent and any other pollutants from the
Contractor’s activities shall exceed neither the values
indicated in the
Specification, nor those prescribed by applicable Laws.
In the event of damage to the environment, property and/or
nuisance to people, on or off Site as a result of the
Contractor’s operations, the Contractor shall agree with the
Engineer the appropriate actions and time scale to remedy,
as practicable, the damaged environment to its former
condition.
The Contractor shall implement such remedies at its cost to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.”

22.11 Cultural Heritage The Contractor will avoid impacts on cultural heritage.
Findings When avoidance of impacts is not possible, the contractor
will identify and implement measures to address impacts
on cultural heritage.
The contractor follow the following mitigation measures:-
relocating or modifying the physical footprint of the
project; conservation and rehabilitation in situ; relocation
of cultural heritage; documentation;
Strengthening the capacity of national and sub national
institutions responsible for managing cultural heritage
Section X - Contract Forms 390

GCC Sub-Clause/Clause Remarks

affected by the project; establishment of a monitoring
system to track the progress and efficacy of these activities;
establishment of an implementation schedule and required
budget for the identified mitigation measures; and
cataloguing of finds..Where appropriate, the Borrower will
develop a Cultural Heritage Management Plan.
The contractor strictly follows WB ESS 8 related to
Cultural Heritage.
The Contractor is responsible for familiarizing themselves
with the following “Chance Finds Procedures”, in case
culturally valuable materials are uncovered during
excavation, including:
• Stop work immediately following the discovery of any
materials with possible archaeological, historical,
paleontological, or other cultural value, announce findings
to project manager and notify relevant authorities;

• Protect artefacts as well as possible using plastic covers,

and implement measures to stabilize the area, if necessary,
to properly protect artefacts
• Prevent and penalize any unauthorized access to the
artefacts
• Restart construction works only upon the authorization of
the relevant authorities.
Additionally implement ESS8 related to Stakeholder
consultation and identification of cultural heritage,
Confidentiality, Stakeholders’ access, Legally protected
cultural heritage areas, Provisions for specific types of
cultural heritage., archaeological sites and material Built
heritage Movable cultural heritage, and Commercial use of
cultural heritage.
Section X - Contract Forms 391

5 Contractor’s Representative and Key Personnel

Contractor’s Representative and Key Personnel
Item Position/specializati Relevant academic Minimum years of relevant work
No. on qualifications experience
1 Contractor’s BSc degree in Electrical A minimum of 15 years’ experience in
Representative Engineering from a Power system infrastructure
recognized university construction, design, and project
(Contractor’s Project
implementation and construction
Manager)
supervision. Must have Project
Manager experience at least in one
Distribution network construction
project in developing countries and
Bank financed Projects
2. Construction BSc degree in A minimum of 10 years’ experience in
Manager Electrical/Civil Power system infrastructure
Engineering from a construction, design, and project
recognized university implementation and construction
supervision. Must have Construction
Manager experience at least in one
Distribution network construction
project in developing countries
1. Distribution System BSc degree in Electrical 8 years’ experience in Electrical
Supervision Engineering or Civil Distribution network design,
Engineers Engineering from a supervision and commissioning of
recognized university works. Must have good working
knowledge of the English Language
2. Electrical Design BSc degree in 12 years’ experience in Electrical
Engineer Electrical/Civil Distribution network design and must
Engineering from a be specialized in Electrical Design and
recognized university Certificate shall be provided
3. Civil Design BSc degree in Civil 12 years’ experience in Civil design
Engineer Engineering from a related Distribution network and must
recognized university be specialized in Design and
Certificate shall be provided
Section X - Contract Forms 392

4. Distribution BSc degree in Electrical 6 years’ experience in Electrical

Equipment’s Engineering from a Distribution network design and
specialist recognized university planning works. Must have been
specialized in electrical distribution
equipment’s and Certificate shall be
provided
5. Protection BSc degree in Electrical 6 years’ experience in Electrical
Coordination Engineering from a Distribution network design and
engineer recognized university planning works. Must have been
specialized in protection coordination
and Certificate shall be provided
6. Health and safety Bachelor’s degree in Having 6 or more years of relevance
environmental science, experience including conducting
environmental Safety and hazardous audits and report
engineering, OHS, or preparation
related disciplines from a
recognized university
9 Environmentalist Bachelor’s degree in Having 6 or more years of relevance
environmental science, experience including conducting of
environmental environmental audits and report
engineering, or related preparation
disciplines from a
recognized university.
10 Social Bachelor’s degree, Having 6 or more years of relevance
Sociology, or related experience including conducting
disciplines from a social audits and report preparation
recognized university.
11 Sexual Exploitation, Bachelor’s degree in 5 years of monitoring and managing
Abuse and Sociology, Law or related risks related to gender-based violence,
Harassment Expert disciplines from a out of which 3 years of relevant
recognized university. experience in addressing issues related
to sexual exploitation, sexual abuse
and sexual harassment

6 Forms and Procedures

Form of Completion Certificate
Date:
Section X - Contract Forms 393

Loan/Credit No:
RFB No:

To: _________________________________

Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen,

Pursuant to GCC Clause 24 (Completion of the Facilities) of the General Conditions of the
Contract entered into between yourselves and the Employer dated _____________, relating to the
____________________, we hereby notify you that the following part(s) of the Facilities was

(were) complete on the date specified below, and that, in accordance with the terms of the
Contract, the Employer hereby takes over the said part(s) of the Facilities, together with the
responsibility for care and custody and the risk of loss thereof on the date mentioned below.

1. Description of the Facilities or part thereof: ______________________________

2. Date of Completion: __________________
However, you are required to complete the outstanding items listed in the attachment hereto as
soon as practicable.

This letter does not relieve you of your obligation to complete the execution of the Facilities
in accordance with the Contract nor of your obligations during the Defect Liability Period.

Very truly yours,

Title
(Project Manager)
Section X - Contract Forms 394

Form of Operational Acceptance Certificate

Date:
Loan/Credit No:
RFB No:

To: ________________________________________

Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen,

Pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 25.3 (Operational Acceptance) of the General Conditions of the
Contract entered into between yourselves and the Employer dated _______________, relating to
the ___________________________________, we hereby notify you that the Functional Guarantees
of the following part(s) of the Facilities were satisfactorily attained on the date specified below.

1. Description of the Facilities or part thereof: _______________________________

2. Date of Operational Acceptance: _______________________

This letter does not relieve you of your obligation to complete the execution of the Facilities
in accordance with the Contract nor of your obligations during the Defect Liability Period.

Very truly yours,

Title
(Project Manager)
Section X - Contract Forms 395

Change Order Procedure and Forms

Date:
Loan/Credit No:
RFB No:

CONTENTS
1. General
2. Change Order Log
3. References for Changes

ANNEXES

Annex 1 Request for Change Proposal

Annex 2 Estimates for Change Proposal
Annex 3 Acceptance of Estimate
Annex 4 Change Proposal
Annex 5 Change Order
Annex 6 Pending Agreement Change Order
Annex 7 Applications for Change Proposal
Section X - Contract Forms 396

Change Order Procedure

1. General
This section provides samples of procedures and forms for implementing changes in the
Facilities during the performance of the Contract in accordance with GCC Clause 39 (Change
in the Facilities) of the General Conditions.
2. Change Order Log
The Contractor shall keep an up-to-date Change Order Log to show the current status of
Requests for Change and Changes authorized or pending, as Annex 8. Entries of the Changes
in the Change Order Log shall be made to ensure that the log is up-to-date. The Contractor
shall attach a copy of the current Change Order Log in the monthly progress report to be
submitted to the Employer.
3. References for Changes
(1) Request for Change as referred to in GCC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CR-X-
nnn.
(2) Estimate for Change Proposal as referred to in GCC Clause 39 shall be serially
numbered CN-X-nnn.
(3) Acceptance of Estimate as referred to in GCC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered
CA-X-nnn.
(4) Change Proposal as referred to in GCC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CP-X-
nnn.
(5) Change Order as referred to in GCC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CO-X-nnn.
Note: (a) Requests for Change issued from the Employer’s Home Office and the
Site representatives of the Employer shall have the following respective references:
Home Office CR-H-nnn
Site CR-S-nnn
(b) The above number “nnn” is the same for Request for Change, Estimate for Change
Proposal, Acceptance of Estimate, Change Proposal and Change Order.
Section X - Contract Forms 397

Annex 1. Request for Change Proposal

(Employer’s Letterhead)

To: ____________________________________ Date:

Attention: ______________________________________

Contract Name: _________________________________

Contract Number: _______________________________

Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen:

With reference to the captioned Contract, you are requested to prepare and submit a Change
Proposal for the Change noted below in accordance with the following instructions within
_______________ days of the date of this letter____________________.

1. Title of Change: ________________________

2. Change Request No. __________________
3. Originator of Change: Employer: _______________________________
Contractor (by Application for Change Proposal No. _______1:
4. Brief Description of Change: _________________________________________________
5. Facilities and/or Item No. of equipment related to the requested Change: _____________
6. Reference drawings and/or technical documents for the request of Change:
Drawing No./Document No. Description

7. Detailed conditions or special requirements on the requested Change: ________________

8. General Terms and Conditions:
(a) Please submit your estimate to us showing what effect the requested Change will have
on the Contract Price.

12 Specify where necessary.

Section X - Contract Forms 398

(b) Your estimate shall include your claim for the additional time, if any, for completion
of the requested Change.

(c) If you have any opinion negative to the adoption of the requested Change in connection
with the conformability to the other provisions of the Contract or the safety of the Plant or
Facilities, please inform us of your opinion in your proposal of revised provisions.

(d) Any increase or decrease in the work of the Contractor relating to the services of its
personnel shall be calculated.

(e) You shall not proceed with the execution of the work for the requested Change until
we have accepted and confirmed the amount and nature in writing.

(Employer’s Name)

(Signature)

(Name of signatory)

(Title of signatory)
Section X - Contract Forms 399

Annex 2. Estimate for Change Proposal

(Contractor’s Letterhead)

To: ______________________________ Date:

Attention: _______________________________

Contract Name: _______________________________

Contract Number: _____________________________

Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen:

With reference to your Request for Change Proposal, we are pleased to notify you of the
approximate cost of preparing the below-referenced Change Proposal in accordance with GCC
Sub-Clause 39.2.1 of the General Conditions. We acknowledge that your agreement to the
cost of preparing the Change Proposal, in accordance with GCC Sub-Clause 39.2.2, is required
before estimating the cost for change work.

1. Title of Change: ________________________

2. Change Request No./Rev.: ____________________________
3. Brief Description of Change: __________________________
4. Scheduled Impact of Change: ___________________________
5. Cost for Preparation of Change Proposal: _______________2
(a) Engineering (Amount)

(i) Engineer hrs x rate/hr =

(ii) Draftsperson hrs x rate/hr =

Sub-total hrs
Total Engineering Cost
(b) Other Cost

2
Section X - Contract Forms 400

Total Cost (a) + (b)

(Contractor’s Name)

(Signature)

(Name of signatory)

(Title of signatory)
Section X - Contract Forms 401

Annex 3. Acceptance of Estimate

(Employer’s Letterhead)

To: ______________________________ Date:

Attention: ________________________________

Contract Name: _____________________________

Contract Number: ___________________________

Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen:

We hereby accept your Estimate for Change Proposal and agree that you should proceed with
the preparation of the Change Proposal.

1. Title of Change: ___________________________

2. Change Request No./Rev.: _______________________________

3. Estimate for Change Proposal No./Rev.: _______________________________

4. Acceptance of Estimate No./Rev.: _______________________________

5. Brief Description of Change: _______________________________

6. Other Terms and Conditions: In the event that we decide not to order the Change
accepted, you shall be entitled to compensation for the cost of preparation of Change Proposal
described in your Estimate for Change Proposal mentioned in para. 3 above in accordance with
GCC Clause 39 of the General Conditions.

(Employer’s Name)
Section X - Contract Forms 402

(Signature)

(Name and Title of signatory)

Section X - Contract Forms 403

Annex 4. Change Proposal

(Contractor’s Letterhead)

To: _______________________________ Date:

Attention: _______________________________

Contract Name: _______________________________

Contract Number: _______________________________

Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen:

In response to your Request for Change Proposal No. _______________________________, we

hereby submit our proposal as follows:

1. Title of Change: _______________________________

2. Change Proposal No./Rev.: _______________________________
3. Originator of Change: Employer: [_______________________________
Contractor: _______________________________
4. Brief Description of Change: _______________________________
5. Reasons for Change: _______________________________

6. Facilities and/or Item No. of Equipment related to the requested Change:

_______________________________

7. Reference drawings and/or technical documents for the requested Change:

Drawing/Document No. Description

8. Estimate of increase/decrease to the Contract Price resulting from Change Proposal: 3

(Amount)

3
Section X - Contract Forms 404

(a) Direct material

(b) Major construction

equipment
(c) Direct field labor (Total hrs)

(d) Subcontracts

(e) Indirect material and labor

(f) Site supervision

(g) Head office technical staff

salaries
Process engineer hrs @ rate/hr
Project engineer hrs @ rate/hr
Equipment engineer hrs @ rate/hr
Procurement hrs @ rate/hr

Draftsperson hrs @ rate/hr

Total hrs

(h) Extraordinary costs

(computer, travel, etc.)
(i) Fee for general administration, %
of Items
(j) Taxes and customs duties

Total lump sum cost of Change Proposal

(Sum of items (a) to (j))

Cost to prepare Estimate for Change Proposal

(Amount payable if Change is not accepted)

9. Additional time for Completion required due to Change Proposal

Section X - Contract Forms 405

10. Effect on the Functional Guarantees

11. Effect on the other terms and conditions of the Contract

12. Validity of this Proposal: within [Number] days after receipt of this Proposal by the
Employer
13. Other terms and conditions of this Change Proposal:

(a) You are requested to notify us of your acceptance, comments or rejection of this
detailed Change Proposal within ______________ days from your receipt of this Proposal.
(b) The amount of any increase and/or decrease shall be taken into account in the
adjustment of the Contract Price.
(c) Contractor’s cost for preparation of this Change Proposal:42

(Contractor’s Name)

(Signature)

(Name of signatory)

(Title of signatory)

4
Section X - Contract Forms 406

Annex 5. Change Order

(Employer’s Letterhead)

To: _______________________________ Date:

Attention: _______________________________

Contract Name: _______________________________

Contract Number: _______________________________

Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen:

We approve the Change Order for the work specified in the Change Proposal (No. _______),
and agree to adjust the Contract Price, Time for Completion and/or other conditions of the
Contract in accordance with GCC Clause 39 of the General Conditions.
1. Title of Change: _______________________________
2. Change Request No./Rev.: _______________________________
3. Change Order No./Rev.: _______________________________
4. Originator of Change: Employer: _______________________________
Contractor: _______________________________
5. Authorized Price:
Ref. No.: _______________________________ Date: __________________________
Foreign currency portion __________plus Local currency portion __________
6. Adjustment of Time for Completion
None Increase _________ days Decrease _________ days
7. Other effects, if any

Authorized by: Date:

(Employer)
Accepted by: Date:
(Contractor)
Section X - Contract Forms 407

Annex 6. Pending Agreement Change Order

(Employer’s Letterhead)
To: _______________________________ Date:

Attention: _______________________________

Contract Name: _______________________________

Contract Number: _______________________________

Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen:

We instruct you to carry out the work in the Change Order detailed below in accordance with
GCC Clause 39 of the General Conditions.

1. Title of Change: _______________________________

2. Employer’s Request for Change Proposal No./Rev.:
_______________________________dated: __________
3. Contractor’s Change Proposal No./Rev.: _________________dated: __________
4. Brief Description of Change: _______________________________
5. Facilities and/or Item No. of equipment related to the requested Change:
_______________________________
6. Reference Drawings and/or technical documents for the requested Change:
Drawing/Document No. Description
7. Adjustment of Time for Completion:
8. Other change in the Contract terms:
9. Other terms and conditions:

(Employer’s Name)

(Signature)

(Name of signatory)

(Title of signatory)

Annex 7. Application for Change Proposal

Section X - Contract Forms 408

(Contractor’s Letterhead)

To: _______________________________ Date:

Attention: _______________________________
Contract Name: _______________________________
Contract Number: _______________________________
Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen:
We hereby propose that the below-mentioned work be treated as a Change in the Facilities.
1. Title of Change: _______________________________
2. Application
for Change Proposal No./Rev.:______________dated: _______________
3. Brief Description of Change: _______________________________
4. Reasons for Change:
5. Order of Magnitude Estimation (in the currencies of the Contract):
6. Scheduled Impact of Change:
7. Effect on Functional Guarantees, if any:
8. Appendix:

(Contractor’s Name)

(Signature)

(Name of signatory)

(Title of signatory)

Annex 8 - Technical Schedules Accessories

Section X - Contract Forms 409

(To be completed for each product type/size)

Item Description Unit Employer's Contractors

Requirements Offer

1. Standard to which the product

was manufactured
_____
2. Voltage for product kV _____
connectors is suitable
3. Material of product -- _____
4. No. of years the product is
exported ______
5. Is detailed information
brochure attached?
…….. etc. Yes/No Yes _\

Signed: __________________

Date: ___________________

Company: __________________

Position in Company: ________________

tools

Company Stamp
Appendix A Towns Information 410

APPENDIX A :- TOWNS INFORMATION

1. Holeta Town– Geography & Socio-Economic Background of the Project Area

Location and Accessibility

Figure Holetatown location

Holeta City is located strategically in Oromia Regional State in the western direction of the
capital, Addis Ababa, at 29 km away on the lifeline road of Addis Ababa-Wallaga. The city is
categorized as first grade urban centers within the region based on Oromia urban grading
system and put under the secondary city category based on the national urban size classification
of the country. Holeta is one of the important urban centers both in the country and in the region
as it has been experiencing a very rapid development dynamics and emerging as key center of
conference, tourism, resort, investment and recreation, which is believed to continue in the
future and be comparative advantage of the city.
The natural endowments, its strategic location on the Addis Ababa-Wallaga international trade
route and its proximity to the country’s political and economic capital, Addis Ababa, have
offered wide range of opportunities for further growth and development of Holeta City which,
of course, demands careful and planned management of its development. Documented data
show that the City Administration covers nearly 6,185 hectares of land based on the 2010
Revised Structure Plan of the City prepared by Oromia Urban Planning institute. There are
varying figures concerning the population size of the city. According to the 2007 Population
projection of Central Statistics Agency (CSA), Holeta city has a total population of 34,701 and
as per Ethiopian urban studies of 2018; the population of the city is 63,788 and The population
average growth rate of 5.5%. .
Appendix A Towns Information 411

Holeta is a vibrant city in which many socio-economic activities are taking place that make it
play major roles in the development of the country. As the center of attraction, the city is
growing fast physically, in economic importance and population size which poses many
challenges that put the city administration under pressure. The other critical issue is the
environmental problem of the lakes themselves which is becoming very sensitive and crucial
issue. These growing challenges need appropriate and timely planning and management
response to exploit the opportunities and curb the undesirable effects of the ongoing
developments on the area. On the other hand, the institutional capacity and absence of
necessary regulation are the critical issues to be addressed in protecting the lakes and their
environs from current and potential damages.
Asset management is a term used to describe a way of managing assets across their entire life
cycle cost and provide for the replacement of the assets at the appropriate point in time. It is a
specific approach to the management of physical assets; be it infrastructure networks, buildings
or moveable assets which bring together good technical management practice with sound
financial principles. It also provides an integrative approach that links project based capital
investment planning with long term operation and maintenance needs to provide sustainable
management system. In general, Asset Management Update is expected to provide a much
more effective system for Holeta City Administration to plan its future budget with an informed
decision.
The City administration lacks the necessary information about their own capital assets for
detailed costing of individual assets and for improvement planning due to absence of strategic
approach to asset management techniques. Hence, the intended Asset Management Plan
supposed to enable the city administration to build knowledge and database of its infrastructure
asset base.
The Geospatial of Holeta City
Astronomically, Holeta is located with geographic coordinates of 90300Latitude and 380
300Longitude. The average Temperature of the city is max. 17.5 oc and min. 12.6oc average
14.6oc .which is the most favorable weather condition throughout the Year.

2. Fiche Town - Geography & Socio-Economic Background of the Project Area

Location and Accessibility
Appendix A Towns Information 412

Figure 2 Fiche town location

Location

North Shewa Zone is one of among The Zones found in Oromia National Regional State
and it is located in the northern portion of Oromia National Regional state. The zone
comprises 14 districts including Fitche Town Administration and its total area is
accounted for 8989k2.Fitche town is the administrative center of the zone and it is found
112 km away north of Finfinne. The zone has a total population projected for 1, 594, and
720 in 2010 E.C as of population census of 2007 G.C.

Administratively Fiche town is part of Oromia National Regional State and seat of Girar
Jarso District zone. It is located at a distance of 112-kilo meters from Regional and
National capital_ Finfinne/Addis Ababa towards the north direction.

The topography of Fiche town is characterized by undulating landscape that is

surrounded by ridges in the north and northwest. The ridges extend from northeast to
southwest directions. The ridges have densely vegetated broad-leafed coffee shades and
form the natural boundary for the town in the north and west directions. They are
sources of flood and responsible for the creation of marshy areas along the banks of
streams and low lying corridors of uplands.

The structure plan of Fiche town was prepared in 2004. The rationales for the revision of
the structure plan for the town include the completion of the ten years’ planning period
and the fast growth of the town that requires new expansion areas for different urban
land use functions.
Appendix A Towns Information 413

The highway that runs to the northern parts of the country crosses the town. The peasant
associations of Addisge in the north, Torban Ashe in the southwest, Dire Doyyo and
Koticha Gobola (Sefane) and Wertu Silase in the East, surround it. Astronomically, Fiche
town has a grid coordinate that extends from 1077026 to 1084623 Northing and from
467848 to 476274 Easting on Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) of the Universal
Transverse Mercator (UTM) Projection (refer to the location map of the town).

Topography

The structural plan of the town describes the topography of landform of Fiche town and
its environ comprising vast plain areas, swampy and water bodies, soft, rounded hips and
hilly mountains, steep and rounded hills and associated undulating dissected areas. The
southern portion of the town is largely associated and characterized by undulating and
rugged terrains whereas the Northern is to a large extent plain area. The northern and
northwestern part of the town has attractive ridges and includes Torban Ashe up and
pockets of uplands in the southwest all of which have attractive viewpoints. The town has
flat topography in the southwest which is an important place for traditional horse race
(hurufa fardaa). This traditional horse race, which is a common cultural practice in north
Shewa, and this can enhance the tourism potential of the town and its hinterland

Soil types

According to FAO classification, the soil of the project area is classified into two
categories; Vertisols sand Luvisols as shown in the figure 4.7. Mostly this classification is
used for agricultural purpose. For engineering purpose the classification gives some hint
about the properties of the soil in the study area.

Climate

As per the Ethiopian customary climate classification, the town is classified as “Woina-
Dega”; the average annual temperature and rainfall of the town are 19.320C and 860mm
respectively. The presence of Fiche town at the rim of the Abay drainage basin makes the
town to have cool climate related to the scorching heat of the lowlands located towards
the east of the town within the Abay drainage basin. The highway crossing the town to
the northern parts of the country can be turned to an important commercial corridor by
Appendix A Towns Information 414

proposing land uses that can serve both the nearby residents and the passengers crossing
the town.

The monthly mean maximum temperature ranges from 24.190C (August) to 29.40C
(May). The monthly mean minimum temperature ranges from 90C (December) to 13.90C
(August). Whereas, the minimum and maximum annual temperature ranges from
11.960C to 26.860C that make an average of 19.320C

May and December are the warmest and coldest months; March and April are also
warmer months next to May, where the highest maximum mean temperatures are
observed during these three months. On the other hand, the lowest minimum mean
temperatures mostly occur from November to February each year.

Rainfall

The town has five rainy months; from March to April and from June to September that
make two rainy seasons of spring and summer respectively. Summer rain accounts for 50
to 90% of the annual rainfall in the area and is relatively stable when compared with
other rainfall season. Winter is a dry season in Fiche town. The mean annual rainfall
recorded over the ten years (1998-2007) has shown that the month of July is the highest
rainy month with a mean annual rainfall of 244.5mm and in November lNorth (4.5mm)
recorded as per the master plan report. The mean annual rainfall is about 860.6mm.

Drainage

Fiche town is drained by perennial and seasonal streams like Zerefet, Mentera and Lege
Werabessa. All of the streams flow either from northwest direction to southeast or east
directions. This implies that the altitude of the town declines from northwest to southeast
or

south direction.

There are different streams flowing within the boundary of Fiche town. This includes
Lege

Werabessa, Zerefet and Mentera. The volume of these seasonal streams increases during
the rainy season due to an increase for rainfall. Because of this, most of the seasonal
Appendix A Towns Information 415

streams have flood risks especially adjacent to their middle courses and in areas that are
encroached by settlement and cultivation of eucalyptus trees by the sides of the streams

Therefore, there should be a plan of appropriate diversion channels in flood hazard areas
of the town. Besides, those areas of the town encroached by residents should be intervened
by proposing a 30 meter buffer zone after which it is possible to practice urban
agriculture that Includes the cultivation of vegetables and related activities.

Water surface

The surrounding of the study area has the potential of surface water. The surface water
which passes crossing the town was starts from the within and in periphery of the project
area. The project area has rivers or streams potential flowing through the town. These
streams and rivers have low discharge during dry season. In the dry season the discharge
of these streams/rivers become decrease while in the rainy season the discharge increase.

From ground surveyed surface water (figure 4.4) and surface watershed (figure 4.5)
generated from DEM by GIS software, there were potential of surface water in the study
area. But, most of the streams dry in the dry season. Due to this the area has low surface
water catchments and potential for the reason of urban expansion and deforestation in
the study area and in upper catchments. Even if there is surface water, there were
problem in how to use and how to manage effectively the resource in the town.

3. Legetafo Town - Service Conditions and Environmental Data

Location and Accessbility

Appendix A Towns Information 416

Figure Legetafo town location

Lege Tafo Lega Dadi town Administration is located in the Oromia National Regional state
within the Zone of Oromia special Zone surrounding Finfinne (OSZSF). The social and
economic development of a society is closely related to the availability and dissemination
of adequate information .Today information could now be considered as the basic
infrastructure facility to bring about social change and sustainable economic development.
Being aware of this fact, the Municipality office for collecting, analyzing, storing and
disseminating town development information on natural resource and socio-economic
conditions that are the bases for enable the information of development planning and related
activities.

The objective of preparing this profile is to create scientifically organized physical and socio-
economic data base of Lege Tafo-Lege Dadi Town Administration that reflects the existing
situation, development problems and potentials of the town to be used by the government,
donors and given attention for the major problems of the town. The data used to organize this
document was collected from the Office Sectors and census result report and other related
document available in our office.

4. Weliso Town - Service Conditions and Environmental Data Project Area

Appendix A Towns Information 417

Location and Accessibility

Figure WelisoTown location

Waliso is a town in Southwest Shewa Zone of the Oromia Region in Ethiopia, 114 km
southwest of Addis Ababa, it has a latitude and longitude of 8°32′N 37°58′E with an elevation
of 2063 meters above sea level. Waliso is the administrative center of this Zone.

Waliso town has seven administrative Kebeles. Dej. Geresu Duki Comprehensive Secondary
School, Oromia Institute of Water Technology, Ambo University – Faculty of Social Science
(Waliso Campus) and other private institutes and colleges are located in Woliso. In Waliso,
there is a natural hot-spring, which makes the town one of the leading tourism heritages in
Ethiopia.

The town allows a round view of 360 degrees from Meja hill – a volcanic mountain (Tulluu
Majaa in Afaan Oromoo), situated in the middle of the town. There is also a natural hot-spring,
which makes the town a tourism heritage in Ethiopia. In addition, Wonchi volcano (Wancii in
Afaan Oromoo), the highest volcano Ethiopias, is 32 kilometers away from Waliso. This
volcano contains a crater lake which became a tourist destination

in 1955 a 40 kW hydro-electric power station was built; by 1965 the installed electrical capacity
was 32 kVA and the annual production 64,500 kWh. In 1958, Waliso was one of 27 places in
Ethiopia ranked as First Class Township. The Multipurpose Community Telecentre was
opened in February 2000, with assistance from the British Council. It was the first of its kind
in Ethiopia, and the next one was opened in Debre Berhan almost two years later. That same
year, construction of a 200-bed hospital was completed, the Wolisso Hospital (officially the
St. Luke Catholic Hospital), which was then opened on 27 April 2001. Construction was
launched in 1997 by an Italian organization (CUAMM Doctors with Africa), equipment
included surgical, X-ray and laboratory equipment, at a cost of 72 million Birr.[1]
Appendix A Towns Information 418

The second largest flower farm in Ethiopia, owned by the Indian company Surya Blossoms,
had its official opening in Woliso on 22 June 2009. Present at the opening was Trade and
Industry Minister Girma Biru, Indian Ambassador to Ethiopia, Gurjit Sing, Oromia Regional
president Abadula Gemeda, and Chairman of Karuturi Global Limited, the parent corporation
of Surya Blossoms, Surya Rao

Demography

The 2009 national census reported a total population for Waliso of 59,685, of whom 18,880
were men and 18,998 were women. The majority of the inhabitants said they practised
Ethiopian Orthodox Christianity, with 23.29% of the population reporting they observed this
belief, while 59.06% of the population were Protestant, and 16.36% were Muslim.The 1994
national census reported this town had a total population of 25,491 of whom 11,899 were males
and 13,592 were females. It is the largest town in Waliso and Goro woreda.

climate

Waliso, the wet season is comfortable and mostly cloudy and the dry season is warm and partly
cloudy. Over the course of the year, the temperature typically varies from 50°F to 81°F and is
rarely below 44°F or above 86°F.

5. shambu Town - Service Conditions and Environmental Data Project Area

Location and Accessibility

Appendix A Towns Information 419

Figure 5 Shaamboo Town location

Shaamboo is a town and separate woreda in western Ethiopia. Located in the Horo Guduru
Welega Zone of Oromia Region west of Lake Fincha'a, this town has an elevation of 2,503
metres above sea level. It was previously the administrative centre of Horro woreda. Latitude
9.56647° or 9° 33' 59" north Longitude 37.10036° or 37° 6' 1" east

Shamboo climate

Coldest months of Shambu October and September are the coldest months with temperature at
around 13°c. Which months receive most rainfall in Shambu? September and August receive
most rainfall with precipitation count of 1061.86mm.

Schools

In the 1930s a schooling system was introduced to Shambu and the surrounding residents, an
area where 99.9% of the population lives in a rural-agriculture area and most youths walked to
Naqamte for schooling. Primary schools in Shambu include:

Shambu Junior and Elementary School (Est. 1938),Shambu Model Primary and Secondary
School (Est. 1977),Sombo Dedde Primary School (Est. 1989),Shambu Bikiltu Primary School
:Shambu Catholic Primary School,Mati Boru Primary School (private),Abishe Garba primary
School (private),Harbu Lisha primary school,Laga Warqe primary school,Shambu Catholic
kindergarten School Secondary schools

Shambu Preparatory and senior Secondary School establishe The operational Technical and
Vocational Education (TVET) colleges are:

The operational Technical and Vocational Education (TVET) colleges are:

Appendix A Towns Information 420

Shambu TVET,Shambu College of Teachers Education,Fincha Valley College,Odaa Bulluq

college,Shambu TVET & Shambu college of Teachers Educationd in 1969

Health facilities: Shaamboo Hospital,Amen Medium Clinic,Shaamboo Higher Clinic,Dr

Jabessa Speciality clinic

6, Agaro Town - Service Conditions and Environmental Data

Location Accessibility

Figure 6 Agaro town location

Agaro (also spelled AGARO) is a town and separate woreda in south-western Ethiopia.
Located in the Agaro zone of the Oromia Region, it sits at an elevation of 1,560 meters above
sea level. 45km from jimma city.Geographical location atitude: 7.85, Longitude: 36.5833 7°
51′ 0″ North, 36° 34′ 60″ East

Agaro Climate Summary

Located at an elevation of None meters (0 feet) above sea level, Agaro has a Tropical wet and
dry or savanna climate (Classification: Aw). The district’s yearly temperature is 14.91ºC
(58.84ºF) and it is -7.32% lower than Ethiopia’s averages. Agaro typically receives about 89.51
millimeters (3.52 inches) of precipitation and has 190.26 rainy days (52.13% of the time)
Appendix A Towns Information 421

annually Annual high temperature 18.61ºC (65.5ºF), Annual low temperature 8.64ºC (47.55ºF)
Warmest month February (20.37ºC / 68.67ºF), Coldest Month December (6.97ºC / 44.55ºF)
Wettest Month April (191.44mm / 7.54in), Driest Month December (18.5mm / 0.73in)

Historical Significance: Agaro was once the capital of the former Kingdom of Gomma until
it was conquered by Dejazmach Besha Abuye in 1886. The settlement gained prominence and
was ranked as a First Class Township in Ethiopia by 19581.

Coffee Trading Hub: Agaro plays a vital role as one of the most important trading centers for
coffee in Ethiopia. The aroma of freshly roasted coffee beans fills the air, making it a hub for
coffee enthusiasts and traders alike.

Educational Institutions: The town hosts several educational institutions, including

elementary, senior, secondary, and preparatory schools. Notably, Agaro Secondary and
Preparatory School stands as one of the oldest in the area.

Population and Beliefs: As of the 2007 national census, Agaro had a total population of
25,458. The majority of inhabitants follow the Muslim faith (60.7%), while others practice
Ethiopian Orthodox Christianity (33.76%) and Protestantism (5.04%)

7. Melka Werer Towns - Geography & Socio-Economic Background of the Project

Area

Location and Accessibility

Figure Melka werer location

Melka Werer (Melka Werer) is a populated place (class P - Populated Place) in Afar Regional
State ((ET07)), Ethiopia (Africa) with the region font code of Africa/Middle East. It is located
at an elevation of 811 meters above sea level.
Appendix A Towns Information 422

Its coordinates are 9°33'0" N and 40°24'0" E in DMS (Degrees Minutes Seconds) or 9.55 and
40.4 (in decimal degrees). Its UTM position is FL55 and its Joint Operation Graphics reference
is NC37-11.

8. Melka Sedi Towns - Geography & Socio-Economic Background of the Project

Area

Figure Melka Sedi location

Melka Sede This place is situated in Afar_Three, Afar, Ethiopia, its geographical coordinates
are 9° 21' 0" North, 40° 18' 0" East and its original name (with diacritics) is Melka Sede. See
Melka Sede photos and images from satellite below,

9. Hart Sheik Towns - Geography & Socio-Economic Background of the Project

Area

Location and Accessibility

Figure Hart Sheik location

Appendix A Towns Information 423

Location

Harta shek town is located at a distance of about 75 km from the regional capital Jigjiga and
25 km from the capital of woreda, Kebribayah city town. The map of the roads to the project
town form the regional capital is as indicated in the figure here below.

The geographical boundary of Hartashek Town with the current land use and settlement pattern
is as indicated in the map here below.

Climate

Hartashek town is geographically situated in UTM/Adandan/Zone 38 between

317581_320295E and 1012627_1012137.14N with maximum and minimum elevation of 1624
and 1586 masl. Respectively. The mean maximum temperature of the town is 30°C and mean
minimum temperature is 24°C. There are two distinct rainy periods /seasons / Belg and keremt
/, which bring rain fall. Most of the parts of town get summer / keremt / rainfall that caused by
the equatorial westerly's / Guinea monsoon and south easterly winds. The months of rainy
seasons are June, July, August which is summer season. Precipitation: 0% Humidity: 46%
Wind: 37 km/h

Land Scape and Topography

Its landscape includes Gamo Zone is elevated between 500 – 4207 meter above sea level
amazing landforms of mountians, valleys, cliff, undulated, rugged and some parts of the area
are flat topography. The highest elevation is located in Daramaloworeda which is known as
Gughe Mountain with peak point of 4207 m above sea level. Mount Gughe is also the highest
peak point of the region. The physiographic division of the country, Gamo Zone belongs to
south western highlands. Some of the rugged highlands such as Mt. Sura /3233m/ of chencha,
Mt. Gina /3000m/ of Dita, Mt. Adigore /3280m/ of Bonke and Mt. Bola Hera /2900m/ in Mirab
Abaya woreda are major mountain peaks of the Zone. This highlands and mountains belong to
the Gamo - konso mountain massif system of the south western highland division of the
country. Mt.Gughe is the highest mountain Peak point of the south west highlands of Ethiopia.
The lowest elevation is located in Gerese woreda-Adowoshebaye with altitude of about less
than 500m above sea level. Hartashek is located in tectonically destructive region of South
Western margin of the East African Rift system (EAR). The geomorphology of the Hartashek
Appendix A Towns Information 424

is highly variable and it is generally the result of repeated volcanic and tectonic events and it
has an overall tilted towards east direction.

Soil Type

The major soil types in Hartashek Residual soil commonly observed on the aphanitic basalt
formation due to high degree of weathering variations. The residual soils are formed by the
mechanical disintegration and chemical decomposition of the underlying rock units of
Rhyolite, the rock unit has a fresh and weathered color of reddish and dark respectively.

More over geographically limited area coverage of colluviums soils are preserved on the foot
of Gurba Mountain. These formations are unconsolidated, randomly oriented and loose
accumulation of different sizes of rock fragments and soil debris. These are occupied the foot
of Gurba Mountain due to down ward movement of debris by gravitational forces.

10. Kebri Beyah Towns - Geography & Socio-Economic Background of the

Project Area

Figure Kebri Beyah location

KebriBeyah town is found in Somali Regional State of Fafen Zone, KebriBeyah district located
at a distance of 50 km Jigjiga town capital of the region. The town is situated in the Eastern
part of Ethiopia and covers about 554.31hectares and got legal entity as a town in 2008 E.C.
The town consists of for kebele and rapidly expand in all direction as the land is plain suitable
for construction. The city’s geographical/astronomical/ location is 42039to43038East
Appendix A Towns Information 425

longitude and 8045to9030 North latitude. It is found in Somalia Region, Fafen zone of
Kebribeya Woreda.The city 678 km far from Addis Ababa and also 50km far from jigjig the
capital city Somalia. The kebribeya is bordered on the south by the Degehabur zone, on the
southwest by the fiq zone, on the northwest by gursum, on the north by jijiga and awbare, on
the northeast by Somaliland, and on the east by Harshin, the city administrative center is
kebribeyah town.

11. Shinile Towns - Geography & Socio-Economic Background of the

Project Area

Figure 11 Shinile location

The town located in the Somali region of eastern part of Ethiopia ,approximately 9km the north
east of city of Dire Dawa .Shinile is situated at coordinates 9.688060N 41.844720E at elevation
of 1028 meters (3,373 feet) above sea level. The town is a part of the shinile woreda (district)
in site zone of the Somali region; it is bordered by Dire Dawa to the south, erer to the west,
Ayesha to the east, and dembel and jijiga zone to the south east. The Addis Ababa – Djibouti
railways and the Ethio- Djibouti railways both have stations in shinilie, making it an important
transportation hub in the region.

Climate & Topography

According to the climate data shinile town has an average minimum temperature of 15.1
0
C(59.20F)and an average maximum temperature of 35.00C(95.00F),with annual rain fall of
557mm(29.9in),The town of dwale has an average minimum temperature of 15.9 0C(60.60F)
Appendix A Towns Information 426

and an average maximum temperature of 36.90C(98.40F),with annual rain fall of 208mm

(8.2in).

So in summary, shinile has a very hot semi-arid climate, with average annual temperatures
around 27.60C (81.7 0F) and extremes highs reaching over 350C(95 0F), specially during the
warmest month of the year.

Temperature and precipitation

The average annual temperature in shinile town, located in somail region Ethiopia, is 27.620C
(81,720F) which is 5.39%higher than Ethiopia’s averages. The warmest months march with an
average high of 33.95. The coldest moth is January with an average low of 19.670C. (67.410F).

Rainfall

The rainfall of shinile town receives an average of 557mm (21.7inches) of rainfall per year.
The wettest month are august (113mm/4.4 in).and April (90mm/3.5in). the driest month are
January (18mm /0.7in) and December (5mm/0.2in ).the region experiences a long rain season
called the Gu from February to May and short rain season called the Deyr from October to
November . Most of the Somali region including shinile, lies below 1000m in elevation and is
comprised of semi-arid pastoral land with dense shrub land, bush, grass land and bare hills. So
in summary, shinile has avery hot, dry climate with bimodal rain fall pattern and vegetation
typical of semi-arid regions. The town experiences some of the warmest temperature in
Ethiopia.

12. TogochaleTowns - Geography & Socio-Economic Background of the Project Area

Figure 12 Togochale location

Appendix A Towns Information 427

Previously Togo-Wajale was found under Awberre woreda as part of Keble but now, one
among the newly established city council under Fafen Zone of Somali regional state. The town
lays the border between Ethiopia and Somaliland. The council is located 250Km from the port
of Barbara and 70Km from the capital city of Somali regional state. The council is totally
composed of thirteen Kebeles. Of which, six are main Kebeles and the rest seven are rural
Keble. The council is bounded with different neighbouring wheredas. In the Northern part
bordering with Somaliland, in the Eastern, southern, and western part bordering with Awberre.
The council has three main roads one connected with asphalt road to Jigjiga which is
constructed by Federal Government for the purpose of dry port; the other is road to Somaliland
on northern part which is connected with Barbara port and road to Awberre which is junction
from Jigjiga road. In addition, the latitudinal and longitudinal GPS coordinate location of Togo-
Wajale town is 1061504 North and 316816.6 East with an elevation of 1563m a.m.s.l.

The Togo-Wajale characterized by a rolling topography of gentle hills and broad valleys along
which small cultivation is carried out. A chain of east-west aligned hills are prominent in this
area.The plain area is known by flat topography up to 1372m altitude and the mountain rises
dramatically to the chercher massif extension.

The catchment has an elevation that ranges from 1,870 meters in the northern Somali plateau
near Dire Dawa, falling to about 1372 meters above sea level along the southern limits towards
Somaliland border and receiving annual rainfall of 583mm on the upper catchment526mm on
the middle catchment and at the outlet 383mm.Typical average annual rainfall of the Ogaden
basin is 350 mm and less.

Land use, Drainage System and Land Cover

The main land use in Togo-Wajale city council is settlement, farming and mixed farming.
Previously the major types of land cover in the study area were shrub land but now clearing of
shrub land replacing with farm land, open bare land and grass land.Particularly the investigated
Togo-Wajale catchment (Part of Ogaden Basin) is characterized by small variation in
landscape. Considering the surrounding area as a whole, the Basin Slopes and Plain is dipping
less than 0.324%.
Appendix A Towns Information 428

13. Aleta wendo - Geography & Socio-Economic Background of the Project Area

Figure 13 Aleta Wendo location

Aleta Wendo (also known as Wendo) Aleta wondo which is part of the newly founded Sidama
Region is located in South Central Plateau at the approximate distance of 340 km for Capital
Addis Ababa city is a town in southern Ethiopia. Located in a fertile and forested area near
Lake Abaya in the upper Gidabo River basin, not far from the sources of the Ganale Dorya and
Dawa Rivers in the Aleta Wendo Zone of the Sidama Regional State, this town has a longitude
and latitude of 6°36′N 38°25′E with an elevation of 2037 meters above sea level. It is the
administrative center of Aleta Wendo woreda.

Climate

Aleta Wondo is characterized by highl,and weather condition with elevation rages from 1700-
2500masl The climate of the town is classified as a mid-land climate. It has a mean Annual
Temperature of 18ºC; Mean Annual Rainfall of 1201-1670mm. January and February are the
hottest months while July and August are the coldest months, Wendo, the wet season is
comfortable and overcast and the dry season is warm and partly cloudy. Over the course of the
year, the temperature typically varies from 52°F to 84°F and is rarely below 48°F or above
88°F.Based on the tourism score, the best time of year to visit Wendo for warm-weather
activities is from early November to early March.

14. Yirgalem - Geography & Socio-Economic Background of the Project Area

Appendix A Towns Information 429

Figure 14 Yirgalem location

Yirgalem (Amharic: ይርጋለም, Yïrgaläm) locally known as Diko Dalle [1] alternate names

include Yirgalem, Abosto, Dalle) is a town in southern Ethiopia. Surrounded by Lakes Woyima
and Gidawo, it is located 260 kilometers south of Addis Ababa and 40 kilometers south of
Awasa in the Sidama Zone of the Sidama Region. The town has a latitude and longitude of
6°45′N 38°25′E and an elevation of 1776 meters. It is the largest settlement in Dale woreda.

Climate

In Yirga ‘Alem, the wet season is overcast, the dry season is partly cloudy, and it is warm year
round. Over the course of the year, the temperature typically varies from 54°F to 86°F and is
rarely below 49°F or above 91°F.

15. Sawula Geography & Socio-Economic Background of the Project Area

Appendix A Towns Information 430

Figure 15 Sawula `location

Location

Sawula towns are found 525km from Addis Ababa. Astronomically, the town Administration
is located at 6° 17' 59" N and 36° 52' 48" E longitudes. Relative geographical location:- The
new Sawla Town plan boundary is fully included the former Sawla town and partially Gurade,
Suka, Turga,Yalla,Sezega,Tsila-Tsimba kebeles. Generally, Sawla town is administrative
centre of Gofa Zone and also serve as a centre for Demba_Gofa wereda and its relative position
makes it an important administrative, commercial and transportation and educational centre for
the Gofa zone wereda and there are four major entrance and out let namely Dema-Gofa, Geze-
Gofa, Zala wereda,Oyida wereda.

Climate

From topographical point of views, the general elevation of the Sawula town Administration
is ranges between 1250m, above sea level. In the south east 1570m above sea level in the North
West the average elevation is about 1410m, above sea level. When we see the landform of the
City Administration it is surrounded by mountain ranges in the North West and steep slope and
plain surface in the south and south east. The steepness of the land severely exposes the land
to be affected by flood. Climatically, the City Administration is classified in to kola/tropical
zone. As a result the annual temperature of the City Administration lies between 23.5c° and
15.4c° whereas the mean annual rainfall is 1309 mm which is orthographic in its type.
Appendix A Towns Information 431

Temperature

The Meteorological data of the past ten years indicate that the mean annual maximum
temperature is 37oc and the mean annual minimum temperature is 25oc. The mean annual
temperature of Sawula Town for the last ten years it has 30. oc. The city located at relatively
lower elevation which surrounded by mountain.As a result, the town enjoys Kolla type of
climate. The temperatures are generally high in little variations among seasons. The climate
of the town has Kolla type of climate in order to make conducive environment for living and
work area by the plan sufficient area for greenery and parks has to be allocate by the plan.

Land Scope and Topography

The Sawula Town is found between 600 – 3489 meter above sea level amazing landforms of
mountains, valleys, cliff, undulated, rugged and some parts of the area are flat topography. The
1000 m altitude above sea level is mostly taken as the boundary between highland and
lowlands. The geomorphology of the area is highly variable and it is generally the result of
repeated volcanic and tectonic events and it has an overall tilted towards east direction.

Soil Type

Soil or geomorphologic map for the overall catchment area lying within 0-50 km stretch (Lot
I) produced from 1,000,000 scaled Geomorphologic map of Ethiopia using GIS software
(Arcview).Dysntric Cambisols and Orthicacrisols are the major soil types covering the
catchment area under hydrologic soil grouping.

16. Bonga Geography & Socio-Economic Background of the Project Area

Appendix A Towns Information 432

Figure Bnga`location

Bonga is a town, woreda and one of the multicapital of the South West Ethiopia Peoples'
Region in Ethiopia. Located in the Keffa Zone upon a hill in the upper Barta valley, it has a
latitude and longitude of 7°16′N 36°14′E with an elevation of 1,714 meters above sea level.
Not confused with another town named "Bonga", near Gambela Region.

Climate

Bonga has a tropical monsoon climate (Köppen Am) with a short dry season in December and
January and a lengthy though not intense wet season covering the remainder of the year.
Although afternoons are very warm to hot throughout the year, mornings are cool enough to
be close to a subtropical highland climate (Cwb).

17. Tepi Geography & Socio-Economic Background of the Project Area

Appendix A Towns Information 433

Figure Tepi `location

Tepi (also transliterated Teppi and Tippi) is a town in southern Ethiopia. The vowels in the
name are pronounced as in the English words tape and pea. Located in the Sheka Zone of the
South West Ethiopia Region, this town has a latitude and longitude of 7°12′N 35°27′E with a
mean elevation of 1,097 meters above sea level. The town is said to be named after a Majangir
man who once had a bee hive in the large tree that stood in the marketplace

Tepi Climate Summary

Located at an elevation of 1206.91 meters (3959.68 feet) above sea level, Tepi has a Tropical
wet and dry or savanna climate (Classification: Aw). The district's yearly temperature is
21.49ºC (70.68ºF) and it is -0.74% lower than Ethiopia's averages.

Max Temperature 29.1°C (84.38°F) 26.16°C (79.09°F),19.07°C (66.33°F)

Avg Temperature 25.09°C (77.16°F) 22.21°C (71.98°F) 18.06°C (64.51°F)

Min Temperature 18.06°C (64.51°F) 16.79°C (62.22°F) 16.06°C (60.91°F)

Dew Point Max Average Min

Dew Point 17.06°C (62.71°F) 14.79°C (58.62°F) 10.04°C (50.07°F)